JP2017119162A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having a characteristic in display.SOLUTION: A game machine has operation means and display means. The display means can perform second and third display for allowing a player to expect a big winning and first display for prompting to discharge a game ball. The second display displayed in the state in which the first display is displayed is overlapped with the first display and the third display displayed in the state in which the first display is displayed is not overlapped with the first display. It is easier for a big winning pattern mode to be determined and displayed finally in a pattern variation display in which the second display is performed than in a pattern variation display in which the third display is performed and the second display is not performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 228

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, there has been a game table that performs various displays (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising operating means and display means, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and the operating means is provided at a position where the player can operate. The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays for which a big hit is expected, and the display means is a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). .) Can be displayed, and the display means can display one of the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). , Means for displaying one of the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”), and the second display starts after the operation of the operation means is performed. In a state where the first display is displayed. The second display shown is configured to overlap the first display, and the third display displayed in a state where the first display is displayed is the first display. It is configured not to overlap one display, and the symbol variation display in which the second display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third display is performed and the second display is not performed. This is a gaming machine characterized in that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easily displayed in a definite manner.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. FIG. 3A is an external perspective view of a firing handle 134. FIG. (B) It is a side view which shows the state which the player operates the launching handle 134. FIG. (C) is an exploded perspective view of the firing handle 134. FIG. It is the block diagram which showed an example of the board | substrate structure of a pachinko machine. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a launch control board 174. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 174. FIG. It is a time chart of various signals including a launch control signal. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of normal launch and turbo launch. (B) It is a front view of the launching handle 134 when the operation amount is the minimum operation amount. (C) It is a front view of the launching handle 134 when the operation amount is the maximum operation amount. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not pressing down the turbo button 804g and the launching handle 134 is in an initial position. (B) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not pressing down the turbo button 804g and rotating the launching handle 134 clockwise from the initial position. (A) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when not rotating the turbo button 804g and rotating the launching handle 134 clockwise by the maximum operation amount and rotating it to the fully open position. (B) It is the front view which showed the mode of the pachinko machine 100 when the launching handle 134 was rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g was pressed down. (A) It is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pushed down and the firing handle 134 is in the initial position. (B) It is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pushed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise to the fully opened position by the maximum amount of operation. (C) A rear view of the firing handle 134 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g is pressed. It is a modification of the time chart of various signals including a launch control signal. It is a modification of the graph which showed the characteristic of normal launch and turbo launch. FIG. 10 is a front view of a game machine provided with a launch handle 860 according to Modification 1; FIG. 10 shows an example of notification by a firing handle 860. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the launching handle 870 which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (B) An exploded perspective view of a firing handle 870. FIG. (A)-(c) It is the figure which showed an example of operation of the launching handle 870. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 1, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 2, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 3, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 4, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (A) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch which concerns on the modification 5, and the turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. (B) It is the graph which showed the characteristic of the normal launch and turbo launch which concern on the modification 6, and is a graph corresponding to the said FIG. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 890 according to a modification, and is a circuit diagram corresponding to FIG. 9 described above. (A)-(c) It is a rear view of the launching handle 900 provided with two or more turbo buttons. (D) It is a side view from the side of the state of (a). (A) It is a rear view of the launching handle 910 provided with two turbo buttons with different shapes. (B) It is a rear view of the launching handle 920 in which two turbo buttons are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a launch control board 930, which corresponds to FIG. 12 is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch, weak turbo launch, and strong turbo launch, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. It is a front view of a game stand provided with a plurality of turbo buttons. (A) It is the block diagram which showed an example of the connection between control boards. (B) (c) It is the block diagram which showed the other example of the connection between control boards. It is the block diagram which showed the other example of the connection between control boards. (A) The main terminals provided in the payout control microcomputer 770 are illustrated. (B) It is the figure (partially extracted) which showed the connection of the payout control microcomputer 770 and an external device (IC). It is the figure which showed an example of the main command. It is the figure which showed the example of a connection of a main board | substrate, a payout board | substrate, an external terminal board, and an external device (hall computer). (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a main board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a payout board | substrate. (A) It is the connection example which reversed arrangement | positioning of the main board | substrate and the payout board | substrate with respect to the connection example shown in the said FIG. (B) A connection example in which both the main board and the payout board are directly connected to the external terminal board. It is a schematic diagram explaining the command processing which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a block diagram explaining the communication process of a main control part and a payout control part. (B) It is a block diagram explaining a serial communication circuit. (C) It is a block diagram explaining the flow of the serial communication of the main control part and the payout control part. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part accompanying the interruption | blocking of a power supply, and the timing of supply. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize reception process. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a structure of the number-of-balls storage area | region 308a-308d provided for every winning opening and starting opening. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command analysis process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command transmission process. (B) An example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize ball command setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the number of prize balls of (a)-(c) prize ball number storage area 308a-308d. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball command table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. (B) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the signal state storage area provided in RAM308. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the mask process of the external output signal information in step S306. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the external output signal setting process. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the external output signal setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of terminal arrangement | positioning of the payout control microcomputer. (A) It is the figure which showed the data structure of the output port 1 register for outputting the data of parallel output port POP1. (B) It is the figure which showed the output pattern in the case of outputting via a 7SEG decoder. (C) It is the figure which showed the correspondence of each segment of output terminal POP10-POP16 and LED. It is the figure which showed the relationship between an error name, LED display (LED lighting pattern), the state of error display LED, and the state of payout display LED. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the timer which the payout control microcomputer 770 uses. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of RAM storage area of payout control microcomputer 770. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected with the payout control microcomputer 770. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the combination of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error which are the generation | occurrence | production conditions of a door open error. It is the figure which showed an example of the payout control command. It is the figure (b-e) which showed an example (a) of transmission command output request information used when performing transmission command processing, and the data structure of a part of payout control command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an area to be initialized in a RAM and its timing. It is a flowchart of the main process which a payout control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of a received command process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a received command process. It is a flowchart explaining command analysis processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a starting process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of prize ball command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout management process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a signal output process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command output request information setting process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st type command output request information setting process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd type command output request information setting process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a port output process. (A) It is the time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control part 600 to the main control part 300 in case a discharge intensity changeover switch signal is ON. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control part 600 to the main control part 300 in case a launch intensity changeover switch signal is OFF. 4 is a time chart illustrating an example of transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the variable in the timing chart of the example 1 of communication of the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600, and predetermined timing. (A) It is an enlarged view of the time chart at the time of prize ball command transmission. (B) It is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown to t3 of FIG. (A) It is an example of the time chart at the time of detecting the some winning of a start opening or a winning opening in one main control part timer interruption process. (B) It is a time chart which shows the modification of the communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the output example 1 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 2 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 3 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 4 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 5 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 6 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 7 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 8 of an external terminal board signal. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of power supply among a power board 182, a payout board 170, and a main board 156 according to the third embodiment. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of power supply in a main board 156. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of power supply in a power supply board 182 and a main board 156. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of power supply in a main board 156. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. It is a figure which shows an example of a reception command buffer area. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of storage area used in a received command process, a received command acquisition process, and a received command analysis process. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of a received command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a reception command process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command acquisition process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of a received command analysis process. (A) It shows an example of a low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 1). (B) An example of the high probability state table (special figure 1) for special figure success / failure determination. (C) shows an example of the low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 2). (D) shows an example of a high probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (special figure 2). (A) shows an example of a low probability state table for determining whether or not a normal figure is appropriate. (B) An example of a high probability state table for determining whether or not to determine a normal figure is shown. (C) It is an example of the hit action table which defined the hit action of a usual figure. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the big hit operation | movement corresponding to each of the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the big hit operation | movement corresponding to each of the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command reception interruption process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 10 ms timer interruption process. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a DMA interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of production control main loop processing. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of storage area of RAM408. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the electric long opening effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting concerning Example 1-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting concerning Example 1-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-7 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-8 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 1-9 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 2-6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 3-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 4-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 5-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 5-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the turbo button alerting | reporting which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a received command process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of prize ball command reception in a command analysis process (step S806). It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a transmission command process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a transmission command process. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining display control of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the display regarding how to hit. It is the figure which showed the right-handed alert | report in time series in the big hit game. (A) It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during electric support. (B) It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during non-electric support. It is the figure which showed an example of the launch related signal input into the 1st sub control board 160, and the input signal used as the basis of the said launch related signal. It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting in time series when the pressing operation of a turbo button was performed during the magnetic error detection. It is a figure for demonstrating the application example of the turbo button 804g. It is a figure for demonstrating the power interruption and power recovery during turbo button alerting | reporting. It is the figure which showed an example of the execution timing of various displays. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (B) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (C) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (D) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) The variable prize opening performance is shown. (B) Special figure performance is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a figure which shows the 1st variable winning opening in Embodiment 2, (a) It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable winning opening 234 attached to the decoration member 250, and the door member 234a being closed. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning opening 234 in the state attached to the decoration member 250 and the door member 234a being open | released. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative member 250 and a first variable winning opening 234. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the variable winning a prize mouth unit 260 from front diagonally upward. (B) It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the variable winning a prize mouth unit 260 from front diagonally upper left. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the variable prize opening unit 260 seen from the slightly lower side than FIG. 171 (a). (B) It is a sectional side view of the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272. It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit 260. FIG. FIG. 174 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 173. (A)-(f) It is the top view, front view, left view, right view, bottom view, and back view of the door member 243a. (G) It is a perspective view of the door member 243a. (A), (b) It is the figure which showed the other example of the protrusion part formed in the front of a door member. (C) It is the figure which looked at the conventional door member in an open position from the right side. (D) It is the figure which looked at the door member 243a which concerns on this embodiment in an open position from the right side surface. It is the figure which showed an example of the rolling route | root of a game ball. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 1st route | root R1. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 2nd route | root R2. It is the figure which showed the mode of the game ball which passes 3rd route | root R3. It is the figure which showed the other mode of the game ball which passes 3rd route | root R3. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the variable winning opening 600 which concerns on the modification 1. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed typically the variable prize opening 620 which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which formed in the lower surface of a variable winning opening and the back surface of a door member the route which is easy to over-win and the route which is hard to over-win with the central axis of a ball sensor as a boundary. (B) On the lower surface of the variable winning opening and the back surface of the door member, a route that is easy to over-win and a route that is difficult to over-win is formed on the center axis of the ball sensor, and the ball sensors are provided on both routes. It is the figure which showed the example. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which showed an example of the shutter-type variable winning opening 650. FIG. (B) It is a side sectional view showing a section of a part of variable prize winning opening 650. It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit. FIG. 187 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 186. (A) It is a top view which permeate | transmits and shows a part of variable prize opening unit 260. FIG. (B) It is a sectional side view which follows the AA line in the figure (a). (C) It is a sectional side view which follows the BB line in the figure (a). (D) It is a sectional side view which follows the CC line in the figure (a). (E) It is a sectional side view which follows the DD line in the figure (a). It is a sectional side view which follows the AA line in FIG. 188 (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (A) It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a side view of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit in Embodiment 3, (a) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a permeation | transmission front view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(f) It is a top view which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(F) It is a front permeation | transmission figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit in Embodiment 4, (a) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a permeation | transmission front view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (A)-(e) It is a top view which shows a mode that a game ball rolls in the inside of a variable winning opening unit. (A)-(F) It is a front permeation | transmission figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls the inside of a variable prize opening unit. It is a top view of the variable winning a prize mouth unit concerning the modification 1. It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening in Embodiment 5, (a) It is an external appearance perspective view of a variable prize opening unit. (B) It is a top view of a variable prize opening unit. (C) It is sectional drawing which follows the AA line in (b). (D) It is a front view of a variable prize opening unit. (E) It is sectional drawing which follows the BB line in (d). It is an upper surface penetration figure of a variable prize opening unit. It is a figure which shows the variable winning a prize mouth unit which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. It is a top view which shows the variable winning a prize mouth unit which concerns on Embodiment 2-4. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special figure starting port which concerns on the modification 3, (a) It is the external appearance perspective view seen from the front upper right. (B) It is a front view. (A) is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front right upper part. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back upper left. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, the example of the display aspect of a hold icon, and the example of the stop display aspect of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, and the example of a structure of the determination button 136a and selection button 136b, 136c. It is a figure which shows the example of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the effect movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, operation | movement of the shielding apparatus 246, and operation | movement of an effect movable body. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the transparent plate member 118 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention, and the audio | voice output from the speaker 120. FIG. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding means capable of shielding the first display and the second display It is a figure which shows the example of these relationships. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st display and the 2nd display which are displayed on the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 5 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 6 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 7 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of 7th Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814 from the player side. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table explaining the alerting notification that can be displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a display of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-2 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-3 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-4 of production. Various notifications in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed It is a figure showing Example 3-5 of production. In the pachinko machine 100 by 8th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure explaining the example from which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes. In the pachinko machine 100 by 8th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure explaining the example from which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes.

  << Embodiment 1 >>

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 844, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, a turbo state notification lamp 151, and the like are attached to the front side. .

  Here, the turbo state notification lamp 151 is a lamp (LED) for suggesting that the firing intensity of the launch handle 134 is in a turbo state, which will be described later. In case (in normal state).

  The game area 124 is defined by a rear surface of the front frame door 106 and a front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 844. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by the operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 844 by the player's operation. 200 launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of the various production devices 206 by the player's operation, and a channel for causing the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. And a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launcher 844 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launcher 146 that rotates when the launcher handle 134 is operated by the player, a launcher 148 that strikes a game ball at the tip of the launcher 146, and Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of the game table>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge control that constitutes a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 with 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball. A launch control board case 176 that houses the board 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns on / off the power by the operation of a game store clerk are operated when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are arranged. Has been established.

Hereinafter, the main board 156 constituting the main controller 300 may be referred to as the main control board 156, and the first sub board 160 constituting the first sub controller 400 may be referred to as the first sub controller board 160. The second sub board 164 constituting the second sub controller 500 may be referred to as a second sub controller board 164, and the payout board 170 constituting the payout controller 600 may be referred to as a payout control board 170.
<Game board>

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display are provided at the lower right of the game area 124. Device 214, normal symbol hold lamp 216, first special symbol hold lamp 218, second special symbol hold lamp 220, gaming status display lamp 222, round lamp 223, status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, the special figure 1 and 4 symbol display area 208e displays the result of the special figure 1 variable game to be described later, and the special figure 2 and 4 symbol display area 208f displays the success and failure result of the special figure 2 variable game to be described later. For example, when a special figure variable game (during special figure change) is flashed, “-” is displayed blinking. “○” or “△” is displayed, and “x” is displayed when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is appropriate is not met.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  The round lamp 223 is a lamp for informing the number of rounds of the big hit game. The status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224 is a lamp for informing the player of a right-handed stroke, which will be described later.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228 a, 228 b, a first special view start port 230, and a second special view start port 232 around the effect device 206. In addition, a first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged at the lower left of the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general winning holes) 226), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The general-purpose start openings 228a and 228b (hereinafter referred to as the general-purpose start openings 228a and 228b may be referred to as the general-purpose start openings 228) are called a gate or a through-chucker in a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, one universal start port 228b is provided at the center on the right side of the game board 200, and the general start port 228a is provided at the center on the left side. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game) by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game) by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200, and the second The variable winning opening 235 is disposed on the upper right of the first variable winning opening 234 (on the lower right of the game board 200). In the present specification, the first variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as a “first attacker” and the second variable winning opening 2345 may be referred to as a “second attacker”.

  The first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 have the same structure, and are provided with door members 234a and 235a that can be opened and closed, respectively, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device is won and the special figure display device stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have predetermined intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (details will be described later). Note that the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may have different structures.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 200, the second variable can be obtained by causing the ball to flow down toward the right route of the game area 124 (so-called right-handed). Although winning (pick-up) is possible at the winning opening 235, it is not possible to enter the second variable winning opening 235 by making it flow down aiming at the route on the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed) (or (It is difficult to enter the ball). On the other hand, since the first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center portion of the game board 200, the first variable winning opening 234 can be inserted into the first variable winning opening 234 regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. . That is, the winning probability (winning rate) to the second variable winning opening 235 is higher when the player hits the right than the winning rate when the player hits left (0% in this embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, a ball that has not entered the second variable prize opening 235 (for example, a ball played by the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235) when the ball is hit to the right is the first variable. Although it is arranged so that it is possible to enter the winning opening 234, for example, the first variable winning opening 234 is arranged at the lower left of the game board 200, and the first variable winning opening 234 can be entered only when left-handed. On the other hand, the second variable winning opening 235 may be configured so as to be able to enter the ball only when it is hit right. That is, the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 may be arranged on different routes in the game area 124, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable game is won. In this case, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number of balls are placed on the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. Discharge. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch solenoid with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 134 of the player, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course. The effect movable body 224 includes a motor (not shown), and moves up and down by the motor, for example.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit 300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), the first sub control unit 400 that mainly controls the production and the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on it, a payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in accordance with a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of game balls A control unit 630 and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of a lamp 222, a round lamp 223, a status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224, etc.), a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special-purpose start port 232, A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that opens and closes the door member 234a and the like of the variable prize opening 234 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (details will be described later).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31A).
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  An external terminal board 609 is connected to the payout control section 600, and the payout control section 600 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the external terminal board 609. On the other hand, various information included in the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is output (details will be described later). Here, an example in which the external terminal board 609 is separated from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 has been shown, but it may be incorporated in the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, or other configurations May be adopted.

  The launch control unit 630 is based on the launch permission signal output from the payout control unit 600 that permits or prohibits the launch of the sphere, and the control signals output from various sensors provided in the launch handle 134. Control of the launching device 844 that drives the basket 148 and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 844 are performed.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In the same figure (a), 7 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure G” are displayed as the stop symbol forms in the special figure 1 stop display of special figure 1, and the symbol fluctuation stop of special figure 2 is also shown. Four types of special drawings from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” are shown as stop symbols in the display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure a" are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, "Special Figure B" and "Special Figure b" are 7R special jackpot symbols, "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure B" "C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  Moreover, after the game of 15R special big hit, 7R special big hit, and 7R big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special figure A” and “Special figure a”, which are 15R special jackpot symbols, are in a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and “Special figure B” and “Special figure b”, which are 7R special jackpot symbols, “Special figure C” and “Special figure c”, which are special figure high probability normal figure high probability states and 7R jackpot symbols, are special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability states. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol of a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol of a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state. “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and after the game for the small hit, the gaming state when the small hit is displayed is continued. When the special figure F is displayed in the game in the usual high probability state, the usual high probability state may or may not be maintained during the small hit game. During the big hit game, it will usually shift to a low probability state. Further, “special drawing G” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit. In this embodiment, by setting only hits (Special Figure D to Special Figure F) for which the profit amount is relatively smaller than 15R big hit or 7R big hit (Special Figure D to Special Figure F), Special Figure 2 than Special Figure 1 Floating Game. The floating game is a relatively advantageous floating game.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When notifying the 15R special big hit or the 15R big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). Further, when notifying 15R special big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” in which the same three odd-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Also, when notifying the hidden probability change or small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying suddenly, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped. In the case of displaying and notifying the deviation, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes for the normal symbol, “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol, “general symbol B” which is a critical symbol, and “normal symbol C” which is an outlier symbol. Based on the detection sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all the seven segments and the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped. indicate. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

In addition, in the gaming machine in the embodiment described in the present specification, the content that the gaming state changes depending only on the above-mentioned design is described as an example, and the content of the invention is not limited to these. No. For example, when a specific special figure is displayed, the attacker opens, and based on the fact that the game ball has detected the area provided in the attacker, the gaming state is shifted to the special figure high probability state, Small hits may be promoted to big hits. (The contents described in this case may be applied to so-called type 1 and type 2 gaming machines and attack round system type gaming machines.) Also, when a special figure that is a big hit is displayed, the special figure is displayed. The configuration may be such that the start of the big hit is generated when the passing of the game ball is detected without the start of the big hit based on being automatically performed.
<Launching handle>

Next, the firing handle 134 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is an external perspective view of the firing handle 134, and FIG. 6B is a side view showing a state in which the player is operating the firing handle 134. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a firing handle 134.
<Launch handle structure>

As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 3C, the firing handle 134 is accommodated in a cylindrical handle base 802 fixed to the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 and an inner space of the handle base 802. Handle detection unit 804, dial 806 disposed in the opening of handle base 802 and slidable relative to handle base 802, and disposed on the opposite side of handle base 802 across the dial 806 And a handle illuminating unit 808 used in the above.
<Launch handle / Handle base>

  The handle base 802 includes a small diameter portion 810 and a large diameter portion 812 formed continuously on one end side of the small diameter portion 810. On the outer edge of the opening of the large-diameter portion 812, a dial guide groove 812a into which the dial 806 can be fitted and slid is formed over the entire circumference. In addition, a first shaft portion 812b, a second shaft portion 812c, and a third shaft portion 812d for fixing and supporting the handle lighting board mounting base 808a of the handle lighting portion 808 stand in the inner space of the large diameter portion 812. It is installed.

The first shaft portion 812b engages with the first guide groove 806a of the dial 806 to function as a member that restricts the rotation range (minimum rotation amount) of the dial 806 while guiding the dial 806 in a predetermined direction. The second shaft portion 812c is engaged with the second guide groove 806b of the dial 806, thereby guiding the dial 806 in a predetermined direction and limiting the rotation range (maximum rotation amount) of the dial 806. Also works.
<Launching handle / Handle detection unit>

  The handle detection unit 804 includes a firing spring 804a for urging the dial 806 in the direction of the initial position, a firing volume 804b fixed to the dial 806, a firing volume bracket 804c that holds the firing volume 804b, and this firing A touch switch 804d disposed on the volume bracket 804c, a firing stop lever 804e rotatably supported by the firing volume bracket 804c, and a firing stop switch 804f capable of detecting the state of the firing stop lever 804e; A turbo button 804g for changing the firing strength of the sphere, a turbo switch 804h capable of detecting the state of the turbo button 804g, and a washer 804i serving as a base of the dial 806. Yes.

  The firing volume 804b has a rotation shaft 804b1 fixed to the dial 806, and is configured by a potentiometer (variable resistor) capable of detecting the rotation angle of the dial 806. It can be output externally as a launch intensity adjustment signal. The firing volume 804b is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 through a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit 630 can detect the rotation angle of the dial 806 based on the firing intensity adjustment signal.

  The touch switch 804d includes a touch sensor that can detect whether or not the dial 806 is gripped by the player (whether or not the player is touching the dial 806). When the player 806 is gripped by the player (the player touches the dial 806), a low-level touch switch signal is output to the outside, and the dial 806 is not gripped by the player (the player is If the dial 806 is not touched), a high-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. The touch switch 804d is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 through a harness (not shown). In the firing control unit 630, whether or not the dial 806 is grasped by the player based on the touch switch signal (the player determines Whether or not the dial 806 is touched can be determined. When the wiring from the touch switch 804d is disconnected, a high level touch switch signal is output to the outside. When the wiring from the touch switch 804d is short-circuited, the low level touch switch signal is output to the outside. May be output.

  The firing stop switch 804f is configured by a sensor that can detect whether or not the firing stop lever 804e is pressed. In this example, the launch stop lever 804e is not pressed by the player. The low-level firing stop switch signal is output to the outside, and when the firing stop lever 804e is pressed by the player, the high-level launch stop switch signal is output to the outside. The firing stop switch 804f is electrically connected to the firing control unit 630 by a harness (not shown), and the firing control unit 630 determines whether or not the firing stop lever 804e is pressed by a firing stop switch signal. Is possible.

The turbo switch 804h can detect whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed down. In this example, when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down by the player, the low-level firing intensity is detected. A changeover switch signal (turbo switch signal) is output to the outside, and when the turbo button 804g is pressed by the player, a high-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is output to the outside. The turbo switch 804h is electrically connected to the launch control unit 630 through a harness (not shown), and the launch control unit 630 determines whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed by a launch intensity changeover switch signal. Is possible. When the wiring from the turbo switch 804h is disconnected, a low-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. When the wiring from the turbo switch 804h is short-circuited, the high-level touch switch signal is output to the outside. May be output.
<Launching handle / Dial>

  The dial 806 includes a first guide portion 806a engaged with the first shaft portion 812b of the handle base 802, a second guide portion 806b engaged with the second shaft portion 812c of the handle base 802, and a firing volume 804b. A cylindrical central shaft portion 806c fitted and fixed to the rotation shaft 804b1 and an operation portion (convex portion) 806d for the player to operate the dial 806 are configured.

The operation unit 806d of the present example includes a first operation unit 806d1 and a second operation unit 806d2 that are formed to protrude outside the dial 806. The first operation unit 806d1 is made of a triangular member when viewed from the front, and has a shape that allows the player to hook a finger (eg, thumb) by forming an inclination on the left side surface when viewed from the front. Further, the second operation unit 806d2 is made of a triangular member when viewed from the front, and by forming an inclination on the left side surface when viewed from the front, the player can use his / her finger (for example, index finger) as shown in FIG. The shape can be hooked.
<Launch handle / Handle illumination unit>

  The handle illumination unit 808 covers a handle illumination board attachment base 808a fixed to the handle base 802, a handle illumination board 808b attached to the handle illumination board attachment base 808a, and a surface on one side of the handle illumination board 808b. The handle illumination board cover 808c, and the handle illumination board mounting base 808a, the handle illumination board 808b, and the hemispherical handle cover 808d for covering the entire handle illumination board cover 808c. .

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the handle illumination board 808b, and light emitted from these LEDs is delivered to the outside through the handle cover 808d. The handle illumination board 808b is electrically connected to the launch control unit 630 by a harness (not shown), and the launch control unit 630 can control the lighting of the LEDs mounted on the handle illumination board 808b.

The handle cover 808d according to this embodiment is configured to rotate in conjunction with the dial 806 when the player rotates the dial 806, but only the dial 806 is configured to rotate. (For example, refer to FIG. 19). In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the handle illumination board 808b are used for production in this example. When the turbo button 804g is operated, the LED emits light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode used for the production. Thus, similar to the turbo state notification lamp 151 provided on the front surface of the front frame door 106, it may function as a notification unit capable of reporting whether or not the turbo state is present. Further, the handle cover 808d may be provided with a display function, and by the display function, a display for notifying that the turbo button 804g is being operated or a display for notifying that the turbo button 804g should be pressed may be displayed. . Further, the handle cover 808d may be provided with a function of a lending button or a return button.
<Function of firing handle>

  When the player operates the operation unit 806d of the dial 806 and the dial 806 at the initial position is rotated clockwise (when the dial 806 is rotated), the firing volume 804b fixed to the dial 806 is adjusted. The rotation shaft 804b1 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the dial 806. Although details will be described later, the launch control unit 630 controls the launch intensity of the game ball based on the launch intensity adjustment signal input from the launch volume 804b.

  Further, the launch control unit 630 determines whether or not to launch the game ball based on information on the touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d (information on whether or not the player is touching the dial 806). I do. If it is determined that the player is not touching the dial 806 as a result of the determination, the firing operation is not performed even if the dial 806 is rotated.

Also, the launch control unit 630 launches the game ball based on the information on the launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f (information on whether or not the launch stop lever 804e is pressed). Judgment is made. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the firing stop lever 804e is pressed, the firing operation is not performed even if the dial 806 is rotated. In addition, the launch control unit 630 controls the launch intensity of the sphere based on the information of the launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the turbo switch 804h.
<Various substrates>

Next, various substrates constituting the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of the substrate configuration. In addition, about the structure demonstrated using the said FIG.2 and FIG.4, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted.
<Various boards / game board side>

  In the game board 200 of this example, a main control board 156, a first sub control board 160, a second sub control board 164, a liquid crystal control board 820, and a board surface board 822 are mainly mounted. In the game board 200, the main control board 156 includes a first sub control board 160, a board surface board 822, a symbol display board 823 (for example, the special figure display devices 212 and 214, the universal map display device 210 shown in FIG. The display unit 328 and the like), the special figure 1 start port sensor 838, and the special figure 2 start port sensor 840 and the inner frame relay substrate 824 mounted on the main body 104. Yes.

  The first sub control board 160 is connected to the liquid crystal control board 820 and the second sub control board 164 in the game board 200. The liquid crystal control board 820 is connected to the main liquid crystal 826 (for example, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 4) and the sub liquid crystal 828 (for example, a liquid crystal display device separate from the decorative design display device 208). The second sub control board 164 includes a sub liquid crystal movable portion 830 for driving the sub liquid crystal 828, a panel surface side movable accessory 832 (for example, the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 4), and a panel surface side illumination substrate 834 (for example, , The game board lamp driving device 530 and the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. The board substrate 822 connected to the main control board 156 is further connected to various sensors 320 and various solenoids 332 via a board relay board 836.

The first sub-control board 160 has a button (chance button) 136, a button illumination (chance button lamp) 138, and a door-side movable accessory (movable in the button) via a panel frame relay board 847 on the main body 104 side. 246, a door side illumination board (various lamps) 418, and a speaker 120, and also connected to a power supply board 182 via an inner frame peripheral board 846 on the main body 104 side.
<Various substrates / Body side>

  In the main body 104 of this example, a payout control board 170, a launch control board 174, a power supply board 182 and a glass frame relay board 842 are mainly mounted. The payout control board 170 is connected to the main control board 156 on the game board 200 side via the inner frame relay board 824 and also connected to the launch control board 174 and the like in the main body 104. The firing control board 174 is connected to the launching device 844 (for example, the firing motor 632 and the ball feeding device 634 shown in FIG. 4) and the glass frame relay board 842. In this example, a rotary solenoid (launch solenoid) is used as a drive source of the launch device 844, but a solenoid, a motor, or the like may be used as a drive source.

  The power supply board 182 supplies power to the main control board 156 on the game board 200 side and the boards and components connected to the main control board 156 via the inner frame relay board 824 on the main body 104 side. The power supply board 182 supplies power to the first sub control board 160 on the game board 200 side and the boards and components connected to the first sub control board 160 via the inner frame peripheral board 846 on the main body 104 side. To do. The power supply board 182 supplies power to the payout control board 170 and the firing control board 174 on the main body 104 side, and the boards and components connected to these boards.

The glass frame relay board 842 is connected to the above-described launch stop switch 804f, touch switch 804d, launch volume 804b, and turbo switch 804h via a handle relay board 848 mounted in the launch handle 134, and a turbo button. It is connected to a turbo press lamp 850 for informing the presence / absence of an 804g press operation.
<Launch control board>

  Next, the internal configuration of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the launch control board 174, and FIG. 9 is a circuit diagram of the launch control board 174. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the firing control unit 174 has an input condition setting unit 174a that sets various conditions for firing a sphere, and a clock that supplies a clock signal to the input condition setting unit 174a and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d. A generator 174b, a launch counter 174c for measuring the launch timing of the sphere based on the clock signal input from the clock generator 174b, a launch characteristic setting unit 174d for controlling the launch characteristic of the sphere, and the launch intensity of the sphere And a constant current control unit 174f for driving the firing motor 632 of the launching device 844.
<Launch control board / input condition setting unit>

  Next, the input condition setting unit 174a of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The input condition setting unit 174a illustrated in FIG. 8 is a circuit that controls an output signal output to the firing counter unit 174c based on one or a plurality of input signals. In this example, based on three input signals of a launch permission signal input from the payout control board 170, a touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d of the launch handle 134, and a launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f. Then, a signal for permitting or prohibiting the count is output to the launch counter unit 174c.

  The input condition setting unit 174a is mainly described with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 9. The input condition setting unit 174a mainly includes a filter unit 174a1, a signal inversion unit 174a2 (IC5), a signal latch unit 174a3 (IC3), and a signal comparison unit 174a4 ( IC1).

  The filter unit 174a1 is a circuit for rectifying the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal input from the connector CN2 and the firing permission signal input from the connector CN1, and in this example, two filters are used for each signal. It consists of resistors and capacitors.

  The signal inverting unit 174a2 is a circuit for inverting the logic of the input signal and outputting it. In this example, an inverter IC is used. The touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal that have passed through the filter unit 174a1 are input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3 after passing through the signal inverting unit 174a2 twice. On the other hand, the emission permission signal that has passed through the filter unit 174a1 bypasses the signal inversion unit 174a2 without passing through the signal inversion unit 174a2, and is input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3.

  The signal latch unit 174a3 latches (temporarily stores) the input signal input to the input terminals 1D to 8D when it detects a rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock from the clock generation unit 174b described later. It is a circuit for. In this example, the rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock is detected for the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal input from the signal inverting unit 174a2 and the firing permission signal that bypasses the signal inverting unit 174a2. Latch at the specified timing. Note that the latch timing in the signal latch unit 174a3 is not limited to the rising edge of the input clock signal, and may be the timing at which the falling edge of the input clock is detected or other timing.

  The signal comparison unit 174a4 is a circuit for generating one output signal based on a plurality of input signals. In this example, a three-input AND circuit having three inverters is used, and when all three input signals are low level signals, a high level signal is output to the firing counter unit 174c, and three inputs are output. When any of the signals is not a low level signal, the low level signal is output to the firing counter unit 174c.

That is, in this example, the input condition setting unit 174a is configured so that the dial 806 is grasped by the player only when the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low level signals. Only when the launch stop lever 804e is not pressed by the player and the launch permission signal input from the payout control board 170 indicates the launch permitted state. It is configured to output a level signal.
<Launch control board / clock generator>

  Next, the clock generation unit 174b of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. The clock generation unit 174b shown in FIG. 8 is a circuit that supplies a clock signal to the input condition setting unit 174a, the firing counter unit 174c, and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d. In this example, the generated clock signal having a predetermined frequency (predetermined period) is output to the input condition setting unit 174a, the firing counter unit 174c, and the firing characteristic setting unit 174d.

Describing in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 9, the clock generator 174b is mainly composed of an oscillator 174b1 (X1), a first divider 174b2 (IC6), and a second divider 174b3 (IC4). It is configured. In the clock generator 174b of this example, the clock signal output from the oscillator 174b1 is divided twice by the first divider 174b2 and the second divider 174b3, so that the clock signal having a frequency of 20 kHz and a period of 50 ms is obtained. Is generated. Then, this clock signal is supplied to the clock input terminal of the count unit 174c1 of the firing counter unit 174c via the clock input terminal Clock of the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a and the signal inversion unit 174a2 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Output to CLK.
<Launch Control Board / Launch Counter Unit>

  Next, the firing counter unit 174c of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail. The launch counter 174c shown in FIG. 8 is a circuit that measures the launch timing of a sphere based on the clock signal input from the clock generator 174b. In this example, a clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generator 174b is counted 12 times to measure 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times), and the launch of a sphere is permitted at a period of once every 600 ms. The firing control signal to be prohibited is output toward the constant current control unit 174f.

  The firing counter unit 174c is mainly configured by a counter unit 174c1 (IC2), a 3-input NOR circuit 174c2, and a 3-input AND circuit 174c3 having three inverters. Yes.

  The counter unit 174c1 outputs a high level signal from the RC0 terminal in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal when a predetermined number of times (in this example, 12 times) the clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CLK. Is possible. In this example, since the clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal CLK, the rising edge of the clock signal with a period of once every 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times). In synchronization with this, a high level signal can be output from the RC0 terminal.

  The counter unit 174c1 has a function of permitting an output signal from the RC0 terminal only when a high-level signal is input to both the ENT input terminal and the ENT input terminal. In this example, since the DC5v voltage is always input to the ENT input terminal, the input signal input to the ENT input terminal, that is, the signal is output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Only when the output signal is high level (only when the touch switch signal, firing stop switch signal, and firing permission signal are all low level signals), the high level is output from the RC0 pin in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal. A level firing control signal is output.

  The firing control signal output from the RC0 terminal of the counter unit 174c1 is inverted in logic by the 3-input NOR circuit 174c2, and then the / LOAD input of the counter unit 174c1 (the symbol “/” indicates that the corresponding signal is low active). And is output to the 3-input AND circuit 174c3. The counter unit 174c1 is configured to initialize an internal counter when a low level signal is input to the / LOAD input. In this example, a high level firing control signal is output from the RC0 terminal. If this happens, the internal counter is initialized, and 12 counts are started anew. Note that the number of times exceeding 12 times (for example, 15 times) may be performed only for the first time.

The signal output from the 3-input NOR circuit 174c2 is input to the two input terminals of the 3-input AND circuit 174c3 after the logic is inverted again by the inverter. Further, an output signal output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a is input to the remaining one input terminal of the 3-input AND circuit 174c3. Therefore, also in the 3-input AND circuit 174c3, only when the output signal output from the signal comparison unit 174a4 of the input condition setting unit 174a is high level (the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low). High-level output signals can be output only in the case of level signals.
<Launch control board / Launch intensity setting section>

  Next, the firing intensity setting unit 174e of the firing control board 174 will be described in detail. The launch intensity setting unit 174e shown in FIG. 8 is a circuit that controls the launch intensity of the sphere. In this example, based on the firing intensity adjustment signal input from the firing volume 804d of the firing handle 134, the current (voltage) output to the subsequent constant current control unit 174f is controlled.

  Describing in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 9, the emission intensity setting unit 174e mainly includes a buffer circuit 174e1, an amplification unit 174e2, a gain adjustment unit 174d2 and a bias adjustment unit 174d3 of the emission characteristic setting unit 174d described later. , And an adder 174e3.

  The buffer circuit 174e1 is a circuit for reducing noise in the firing intensity adjustment signal input from the connector CN2, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op amp) is used. The amplifying unit 174e2 is a circuit for amplifying the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the buffer circuit 174e1, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op-amp) is used. The output voltage Vo1 of the amplifying unit 174e2 is calculated by Vi1 (1+ (r1 / r2)) when the input voltage is defined as Vi, the resistance value of the resistor R28 is defined as r1, and the resistance value of the resistor R22 is defined as r2. Can do.

  The adder 174e3 is a circuit for adding a plurality of voltages based on the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the amplifier 174e2, and in this example, an operational amplifier (op amp) is used. The output voltage Vo2 of the adder 174e3 is the input voltage Vi2, the resistance value of the resistor R24 is r1, the resistance value of the resistor R19 is r2, the resistance value of the resistor R17 is r3, the resistance value of the resistor R18, the resistor R16, and the variable resistor VR1. When the combined resistance value is defined as r4, the voltage at the point of the resistor R24 is v1, the voltage at the point of the resistor R19 is defined as v2, and the voltage at the point of the resistor R17 is defined as v3,-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2 ) V2- (r4 / r3) v3.

In this example, a diode D1 for flowing a current in the first direction is connected in series to the resistor R17 of the adder 174e3, and the first direction is connected to the resistor R19 of the adder 174e3. Is connected in series with a diode D2 for flowing current in the opposite second direction. With such a configuration, the output power Vo2 of the adder 174e3 depends on the magnitude of the input voltage Vi2 (= the voltage of the emission intensity adjustment signal after passing through the amplifier 174e2).
(1)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2) v2- (r4 / r3) v3

  (2)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r3) v3 (* when no current flows through r2)

(3)-(r4 / r1) v1- (r4 / r2) v2 (* when no current flows through r3)
It will change to three stages.
<Launch control board / Launch characteristic setting section>

  Next, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. A launch characteristic setting unit 174d shown in FIG. 8 is a circuit that controls the launch characteristic of a sphere. In this example, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d sets the launch characteristic of the launch handle 134 to the first launch characteristic (hereinafter, “normal launch”) based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the turbo switch 804h of the launch handle 134. Control to switch from one of the second launch characteristics (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “turbo launch”) to the other.

  Describing in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 9, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d mainly includes a signal inversion unit 174a2 and a signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a, a switching unit 174d1, a gain adjustment unit 174d2, The bias adjusting unit 174d3 is configured.

  The firing intensity changeover switch signal input from the connector CN2 is input to the input terminal of the signal latch unit 174a3 after passing through the signal inversion unit 174a2, and is latched at the timing of the rising edge of the clock signal input from the clock generation unit 174b. .

  The switching unit 174d1 is a circuit that turns on or off the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3, and in this example, an FET circuit is used. In this example, the function of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 is turned on when the FET circuit is turned on when the firing intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is a high level signal. The launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). Details of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is a low level signal, the FET circuit is turned off, so that the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 are turned off. The launch characteristic is the first launch characteristic (normal launch). Details of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) will be described later.

  The gain adjusting unit 174d2 changes the output voltage of the adding unit 174e3 by setting the resistor R33 connected in parallel to the resistor R24 of the adding unit 174e3 of the above-described launch intensity setting unit 174e to a connected state or an unconnected state. Circuit. The bias adjustment unit 174d3 biases the firing intensity setting unit 174e and the constant current control unit 174f by setting the resistor R34 connected in parallel to the resistor R27 included in the above-described firing strength setting unit 174e to a connected state or an unconnected state. It is a circuit for changing the voltage.

Further, the firing intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 turns on / off the FET circuit (Q4) in synchronization with the on / off of the firing intensity changeover switch signal. As a result, the FET circuit (Q4) outputs a signal indicating the on / off state of the firing intensity changeover switch signal (launch intensity state signal) to the dispensing control board 170 via the connector CN4. The payout control board 170 lights the turbo state notification lamp 151 when the launch intensity state signal is a signal indicating the on state, and the turbo state notification lamp 151 when the launch intensity state signal is a signal that indicates the off state. Control to turn off.
<Launch control board / constant current controller>

  Next, the constant current control unit 174f of the launch control board 174 will be described in detail. A constant current control unit 174f shown in FIG. 8 is a circuit for driving a rotary solenoid (firing solenoid) of the firing device 844. In this example, the rotary solenoid is driven by controlling the current (launch solenoid signal) supplied to the rotary solenoid based on the voltage output from the firing intensity setting unit 174e.

  Describing in detail with reference to the circuit diagram of FIG. 9, the constant current control unit 174f is mainly configured by a voltage comparison unit 174f1 and a current adjustment unit 174f2. The voltage comparison unit 174f1 compares the target voltage input from the launch intensity setting unit 174e in the previous stage with the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid of the launching device 844, and the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid is lower than the target voltage In this case, by turning on the FET circuits Q1 and Q2 of the current adjustment unit 174f2 at the subsequent stage, a current (launch solenoid signal) is supplied to the rotary solenoid. On the other hand, when the voltage fed back from the rotary solenoid exceeds the target voltage, the current supply to the rotary solenoid is stopped by turning off the FET circuits Q1 and Q2 of the current adjustment unit 174f2 at the subsequent stage.

By such on / off control of the FET circuit, the rotary solenoid is driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 134 by the player, and the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 launch a ball.
<Launch control signal>

  Next, the firing control signal output from the counter unit 174c1 of the above-described firing counter unit 174c will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart of various signals including the launch control signal.

  Here, the waveform shown as the “fire timer clock” shows the waveform of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CLK of the counter unit 174c1 of the fire counter unit 174c, and the waveform shown as “fire state” is The waveform of the launch control signal output from the RC0 terminal of the counter unit 174c1 of the launch counter unit 174c is shown.

  Further, the waveform shown as “turbo button” is a waveform of a firing intensity changeover switch signal inputted from the launch handle 134 to the launch control board 174 (ON when the turbo button is pressed, OFF when not pressed), The waveform shown as “turbo effective state” is a waveform showing the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3, and the waveform shown as “turbo latch clock” is the signal latch unit of the input condition setting unit 174a. The waveform of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal Clock 174a3 is shown.

  As described above, the clock signal having a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the counter unit 174c1 of the firing counter unit 174c after the logic is inverted through the inversion unit 174a2. . When the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal are all low-level signals, the counter unit 174c1 generates a clock signal (launched at a cycle of once every 600 ms (= 50 ms × 12 times). In synchronization with the rising edge of the timer clock), a high level launch control signal is output from the RC0 terminal.

  On the other hand, a clock signal with a period of 50 ms input from the clock generation unit 174b is input to the clock input terminal Clock of the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a without passing through the inversion unit 174a2. Then, the signal latch unit 174a3 latches the firing intensity changeover switch signal internally in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock signal (turbo latch clock) once every 50 ms.

As described above, the launch characteristic setting unit 174d determines whether the first launch characteristic (normal launch) or the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3. Control to switch to the other is performed. For this reason, at the timings T1 and T2 shown in FIG. 10, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 shows a high level, the ball is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). At the timings T3 and T4 shown in the figure, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a low level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch). The In this example, the ball is fired with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 25 ms from the timing of T2, and the ball is fired with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 25 ms from the timing 25ms after T2. Fired. For this reason, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T2 is compared with the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T1 (when the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 50 ms). The firing intensity may be small or the same. In this example, the ball is fired with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 25 ms from the timing of T4, and the ball is fired with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 25 ms from the timing 25ms after T4. Fired. For this reason, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T4 is compared with the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T3 (when the sphere is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 50 ms). The firing intensity may be large or the same. In addition, when the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is at a high level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch), and the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 is A sphere may be launched with a second launch characteristic (turbo launch) when at a low level.
<Launch characteristics of launcher>

  Next, the firing characteristics of the launching device 844 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch.

  Here, the horizontal axis of the firing characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 11A indicates the amount of operation of the firing handle 134 (of the dial 806), in other words, the amount of rotation of the firing volume 804d. In this example, the degree of the operation amount of the launch handle 134 is indicated by the hiragana characters (a) to (sa), where the symbol (a) indicates the minimum operation amount, and the code (sa) indicates the maximum operation amount. Show. Note that the operation range of the launch handle 134 from reference (A) to reference (I) is the range in which the launch stop switch 804f is mechanically pressed, so that the game ball is not launched, but the launch volume 804d Since the rotation amount is larger than 0, even the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) provides a predetermined amount of launch intensity.

  FIG. 11B is a front view of the firing handle 134 when the operation amount is the minimum operation amount, and FIG. 11C is a front view of the firing handle 134 when the operation amount is the maximum operation amount. For example, the state shown in FIG. 5B is a firing handle when the dial 806 is biased to the initial position by the firing spring 804a and the operation amount is 0 (minimum). Further, the state shown in FIG. 5C is a firing handle when the dial 806 in the initial position is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) and the operation amount is maximum.

  Note that, in order to change from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (e) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (o), for example, the dial 806 needs to be rotated 5 degrees clockwise, and the operation amount indicated by the symbol (o) In order to change the amount of operation to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (k), for example, the dial 806 needs to be rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise.

In addition, the vertical axis of the firing characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 11A indicates the launch intensity (current value of the launch solenoid) of the sphere corresponding to the operation amount on the horizontal axis. In this example, the degree of launch intensity of the sphere is indicated by the symbols (a) to (su) of Katakana, where the sign (a) indicates the minimum launch intensity and the sign (su) indicates the maximum launch intensity. Yes. It should be noted that the launch intensity on the vertical axis of the launch characteristic diagram shown in FIG. 11A is not related to the output content of the signal that the input condition setting unit 174a permits or prohibits the launch counter unit 174c from counting.
<Launch characteristics of launcher / First launch characteristics (normal launch)>

  A graph indicated by reference numeral NL in FIG. 11A shows an example of the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

  In the first launch characteristic (normal launch), the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 of the launch characteristic setting unit 174d are off, and the output voltage Vo2 of the addition unit 174e3 of the launch intensity setting unit 174e is launched. Corresponding to the change in three levels according to the magnitude of the voltage of the intensity adjustment signal, the three levels of launch characteristics are generally shown: launch characteristics NL1, launch characteristics NL2, and launch characteristics NL3.

  The firing characteristic NL1 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic NL1 is substantially equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the sign (c) and the launch intensity indicated by the sign (f), and is the most inclined among the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Is getting bigger.

  The firing characteristic NL2 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K). The inclination of the launch intensity in this launch characteristic NL2 is approximately equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (f) and the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (e), and is the most inclined among the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Is getting smaller.

  The firing characteristic NL3 is a firing characteristic in a case where the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in a range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ko) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (sa). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic NL3 is substantially equal to the slope of the straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the reference sign (c) and the launch intensity indicated by the reference sign (f), and is smaller than the slope of the launch characteristic NL1, and the launch characteristic NL2 It is larger than the slope.

  That is, in the first launch characteristic (normal launch), the launch intensity in the range of the first manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (O)) has the largest inclination. The firing intensity changes in accordance with NL1 and continues in the range of the second manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (O) to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (K)), and changes according to the launch characteristic NL2 having the smallest inclination, and continues. The firing intensity NL3 is smaller than the slope of the launch characteristic NL1 and larger than the slope of the launch characteristic NL2 in the third manipulated variable range (the manipulated quantity indicated by the reference sign (sa) to the manipulated quantity indicated by the reference sign (sa)). It changes according to.

In this specification, the state in which the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 is controlled based on the first launch characteristic (normal launch) is referred to as “normal time”, “non-turbo time”, and “non-turbo state”. Or “first state”.
<Launch characteristics of launcher / Second launch characteristics (turbo launch)>

  A graph indicated by reference sign TL in FIG. 11B shows an example of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch).

  As described above, the output voltage Vo2 of the addition unit 174e3 of the launch intensity setting unit 174e changes in three stages according to the magnitude of the launch intensity adjustment signal, but the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is the launch characteristic. Since the functions of the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 of the setting unit 174d are on, the two-step launch characteristics of the launch characteristic TL1 and the launch characteristic TL2 are generally shown.

  The firing characteristic TL1 is a firing characteristic when the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (KI). The inclination of the launch intensity in the launch characteristic TL1 is substantially equal to the slope of a straight line connecting the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (A) and the maximum launch intensity indicated by the reference (S), and is 3 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch). The inclination is larger than any of the two launch characteristics NL1 to NL3. Note that the dial 806 is changed within the range of the operation amount corresponding to the launch characteristic TL1 (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. 11A and the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K)). The dial 806 needs to be rotated approximately 5 to 10 degrees clockwise.

  The firing characteristic TL2 is a firing characteristic in a case where the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is in a range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (ki) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (sa). The launch intensity in the launch characteristic TL2 is a constant value with the maximum launch intensity indicated by the symbol (su).

  That is, in the second launch characteristic (turbo launch), the launch intensity in the range of the fourth manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by the sign (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by the sign (K)) is the first launch characteristic ( It changes in accordance with the launch characteristic TL1 having a larger slope than any of the three launch characteristics NL1 to NL3 (normal launch), and the range of the fifth manipulated variable (shown from the manipulated quantity shown in the sign (ki)) to the sign (sa) The launch intensity at the manipulated variable is a launch intensity (a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (s)) that is stronger than the maximum launch intensity (a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (si)) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

In this specification, the state in which the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 is controlled based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is referred to as “non-normal time”, “turbo time”, and “turbo state”. , Sometimes referred to as “second state”. Further, the launch characteristic NL1 is when current flows through R24 and R17 shown in FIG. 9, the launch characteristic NL2 is when current flows through R24 shown in FIG. 9, and the launch characteristic NL3 appears at R24 and R19 shown in FIG. This is the case where current flows. The launch characteristic TL is when current flows through R24 and R33 shown in FIG. When the launch characteristic TL has a plurality of inclinations like the launch characteristic NL, current may flow to R17 when the operation amount of the launch handle is small, and to R19 when the operation amount of the launch handle is large. A current may flow.
<Launch strength and sphere arrival position>

  Next, the relationship between the firing intensity of the firing handle 134 and the arrival position of the sphere will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The balls launched by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 of the launcher 844 pass through the ball path surrounded by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and reach the upper part of the game area 124, but the launcher 844 launches. The reaching position in the game area 124 differs depending on the strength (current value of the firing solenoid).

  For example, the sphere launched at the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (f) in FIG. 11A moves along the locus indicated by the symbol P1 in FIG. 12, and slightly passes the end of the inner rail 204. Fall down. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) is suitable for left-handed strikes (when the game ball is caused to flow down aiming at the route on the left side of the game area 124).

  Although not shown, the firing intensity is weaker than the firing intensity indicated by symbol (f) (denoted by symbols (a), (b), (c), (e), and (e) in FIG. The ball fired at the firing strength) cannot get over the inner rail 204 and is discharged to the lower plate 128 or falls over the inner rail 204 and falls to the left side of the game area 124.

  In addition, the sphere launched at the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 11A moves along the locus indicated by the symbol P2 in FIG. 12 and falls downward at the approximate center of the game area 124. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (c) is a firing strength suitable for flowing down the game ball aiming at the center of the game area 124.

  Although not shown in the drawing, a sphere launched with a launch strength indicated by a symbol (K) falls downwardly slightly to the left of the game area 124 than a sphere launched with a launch strength indicated by a symbol (K).

  In addition, the sphere launched at the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 11A moves along a locus indicated by the symbol P3 in FIG. 12, and is disposed on the right side of the game area 124. After colliding with a ball stopper rubber 203 made of a repulsive member, the ball stopper rubber 203 falls downward. Therefore, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (U) is a firing strength suitable for a right-handed strike (when the game ball is caused to flow down aiming at the route on the right side of the game area 124).

Although not shown in the drawing, a sphere launched with a launch intensity higher than the launch intensity indicated by the reference sign (co) (the launch intensity indicated by the signs (sa), (si), and (su) in FIG. 11A). Is common in the point that it falls toward the bottom of the ball stopper rubber 203 after colliding with the ball stopper rubber 203, but the ball is launched with a launch intensity stronger than the launch intensity indicated by the symbol The time from when the ball is launched until it reaches the ball stopper rubber 203 is determined by the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (k), the launch strength indicated by the symbol (sa), the launch strength indicated by the symbol (si), and the symbol (su). It becomes early in the order of the firing intensity shown. As a result, the time from when the ball is fired until it reaches the winning opening or starting port on the right side of the game area 124 is also accelerated in the same order.
<Use of turbo button and firing strength>

  Next, the relationship between the presence / absence of use of the turbo button 804g and the firing intensity will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 13A is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed and the launch handle 134 is in the initial position, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the 804g is not depressed and the firing handle 134 is in the initial position.

  At this initial position, since the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (A) in FIG. 11A, that is, 0, the firing intensity is represented by the symbol (A) in FIG. ), Ie, zero. Therefore, in the initial position, the ball is not launched into the game area 124, and the player is only holding the firing handle 134.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, in this initial position, the turbo button 804g is located higher than the firing stop lever 804e, and the left side of the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 in the rear view. Is located. When the player holds the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is positioned between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2, and therefore, at this initial position, the turbo button 804g is pressed using the index finger. It is difficult to operate.

  FIG. 13B is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down and the launch handle 134 is rotated clockwise from the initial position.

  In this state, the operation amount of the launching handle 134 is, for example, the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (（) in FIG. 11 (a), and the firing intensity corresponds to the symbol (c) in FIG. 11 (a). The firing strength to be. As described above, the ball launched with the firing strength indicated by the reference sign (K) falls downward in the approximate center of the game area 124. When the player grips the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the finger position is adjusted by the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the dial 806 compared to the initial position shown in FIG. 806 will be displaced in the direction of rotation.

  FIG. 14 (a) shows the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down and the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by the maximum operation amount and rotated to the fully open position. FIG. 15B is a front view of the launching handle 134 when the turbo button 804g is not pressed down and the launching handle 134 is rotated clockwise by the maximum operating amount and rotated to the fully open position. FIG.

  In this fully open position, the operation amount of the firing handle 134 is, for example, an operation amount corresponding to the symbol (s) in FIG. 11A, and the firing intensity is the symbol (S) in FIG. 11A. Corresponding launch intensity. As described above, the ball launched at the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) collides with the ball stopper rubber 203 disposed on the right side of the game area 124 and then falls almost directly below the ball stopper rubber 203. To do. As described above, when the player makes a right stroke with a normal grip, the wrist needs to be greatly rotated (twisted) in the rotation direction of the dial 806 (see FIG. 14 (a)). In a right-handed game, the player may feel wrist fatigue.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), in this fully opened position, the turbo button 804g is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and the second operation unit than the first operation unit 806d1. It is located near 806d2. When the player grasps the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and close to the second operation unit 806d2. Then, if the index finger is moved, it is easy to press the turbo button 804g using the index finger. However, the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 806d1 away from the turbo button 804g, and thus the thumb. It is difficult to press down the turbo button 804g using.

  FIG. 14B is a front view showing the state of the pachinko machine 100 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount of operation and the turbo button 804g is pressed down. (C) is a rear view of the firing handle 134 when the firing handle 134 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the turbo button 804g is pressed.

  In this state, the operation amount of the launching handle 134 is, for example, the operation amount corresponding to the symbol (（) in FIG. 11A, and the firing intensity corresponds to the symbol (S) in FIG. The firing strength to be. As described above, a ball fired at a firing strength corresponding to the symbol (s) collides with the ball stopper rubber 203 disposed on the right side of the game area 124 and then falls downward below the ball stopper rubber 203. To do. Moreover, since the firing intensity corresponding to the symbol (su) is stronger than the firing intensity corresponding to the symbol (f) described with reference to FIG. 14 (a), the time from when the ball is launched until the ball stopper rubber 203 is reached. The time from the time the ball is fired to the time when the game area 124 is reached on the right side of the game area 124 or the starting port is faster than the firing intensity corresponding to the symbol (S) described in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15C, at this position, the turbo button 804g is between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and is more second than the first operation unit 806d1. Located near to. When the player grasps the firing handle 134 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 806d1 and the second operation unit 806d2 and close to the second operation unit 806d2. It is easy to depress the turbo button 804g using the index finger, and the most easily depressing operation of the turbo button 804g, but the thumb is located on the side surface of the first operation unit 806d1 away from the turbo button 804g. Therefore, it is difficult to press the turbo button 804g using the thumb.

  Furthermore, compared with the case where the turbo button 804g in FIG. 14A is not used, the wrist rotation angle is small when making a right strike, which may be suitable for a long-time right strike game. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the dial 806 is designed so that a left-handed game can be comfortably performed in a normal way of gripping, so that the turbo button 804 may be operated while performing a comfortable operation. is there.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes the operating means (for example, the firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player and the firing means (for example, that can at least launch the game ball). , A launching device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states. One is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic). (Control state by (turbo launch)), and at least in the first case, the launching means plays the game ball with the first launch strength (for example, the launch strength indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 11A). To fire, said At least in the second case, the shooting means is for launching a game ball with a second launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 11A). Is a case where a first operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by reference numeral (<b>) in FIG. 11A) is performed on the operation means in the second state. Yes, in the second case, a second operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by reference numeral (a) in FIG. 11A) is performed on the operation means in the second state. The first operation is an operation different from the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It is a characteristic game stand.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the operation means is changed unintentionally due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content is prevented. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of the launching means.

  The “first case”, “second case”, “third case”, “fourth case”, “fifth case”, and “sixth case” according to the present invention are: This includes one or a plurality of cases where the firing permission signal is on, the firing stop switch is off, the touch switch is on, and no abnormality (error) occurs (the same applies hereinafter).

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes an operation unit (for example, a launching handle 134) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) that can at least launch a game ball. ), Wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The launching means launches a game ball at a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 11A) at least in the first case. Yes, the firing means is small In at least the second case, the game ball is fired at a second firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 11A), and the launching means includes at least a third launch strength. In this case, the game ball is fired at a third firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 11A), and the launching means is a fourth The game ball is fired at a launch strength of (for example, the launch strength indicated by the symbol (K) in FIG. 11 (a)). In the first case, the operating means is This is a case where one operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (<b>) in FIG. 11A) is performed. The second case is the second case. In this state, the operation means is indicated by a second operation (for example, indicated by the reference numeral in FIG. The third case is a case where the first operation is performed on the operation means in the first state. The fourth case is a case where the fourth operation is performed on the operation means in the first state, and the first operation is the second operation. The third operation is the same operation as the first operation, the fourth operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the third launch intensity is The gaming machine has a strength different from the fourth launch strength, and the first launch strength is the same as the second launch strength.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the operation means is changed unintentionally due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content is prevented. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of the launching means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example includes an operation unit (for example, a launching handle 134) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) that can at least launch a game ball. ), Wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) And the launching means launches a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 11A) in at least the first case. Yes, the firing means is small In at least the second case, the game ball is fired at the second launch strength (for example, the launch strength indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 11 (a)). In the first state, the operation means is performing a first operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by reference sign (u) in FIG. 11A), In the second case, in the second state, the operation means is subjected to a second operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (u) in FIG. 11A). The first operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even if the state of the launching means has changed, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player. May be able to provide.

  In addition, according to the game stand (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example, the operation means (for example, the launch handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player and the launch means (for example, launch) that can at least launch the game ball. Device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states being , A first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo) Control state), and at least in the first case, the launching means launches a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 11A). Said launching means In at least the second case, the game ball is fired with a second firing strength (for example, a firing strength indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 11A), and the launching means includes at least a third launch strength. In this case, the game ball is fired at a third firing strength (for example, the firing strength indicated by the symbol (f) in FIG. 11A), and the launching means has a fourth launch strength at least in the fourth case. The game ball is fired at a launch intensity (for example, the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (ki) in FIG. 11A). In the first case, the operating means is This is a case where one operation (for example, the operation of rotating the firing handle 134 with the operation amount indicated by the symbol (o) in FIG. 11A) is performed. The second case is the second case. In this state, the operation means is subjected to a second operation (e.g. In the first state, the third operation is being performed on the operation means in the first state. The fourth case is a case where the fourth operation is performed on the operation means in the first state, and the first operation is the second operation. The third operation is the same operation as the first operation, the fourth operation is the same operation as the second operation, and the first firing intensity Is an intensity different from the second launch intensity, the third launch intensity is an intensity different from the fourth launch intensity, and the difference between the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity Is greater than the difference between the third launch intensity and the fourth launch intensity. This is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there is a case where the firing strength can be made stronger in the second state than in the first state even though the operation is the same, and the gaming machine characterized by the launching means is provided. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a first operating means (for example, a turbo button 804g) that can be operated at least by a player and a launching means (for example, that can at least emit a game ball). A launching device 844), wherein the launching means can be in any one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states Is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a second launch characteristic ( The first operating means can be in any one of a plurality of operating states, and at least one of the plurality of operating states. The first operating state And at least one of the plurality of operation states is a second operation state, and the first operation state is a state in which the first operation means is not operated (for example, the turbo button 804g In a state where the pressing operation is not performed), and the firing means can be in the second state during a period in which the first operating means is in the second operating state. The launching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first operation means can be in the second state during a period in which the first operation means is in the first operation state.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the operation content that the player performs on the second operation means unintentionally changes due to fatigue or sweat, the player's disadvantage due to the change of the operation content Can be prevented. In other words, even if the finger is unintentionally separated from the turbo button, the game ball can be launched in a turbo state, which may prevent the player from being disadvantaged. You may be able to provide a pedestal.

  In addition, the launching means launches a game ball with a third launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 11A) in at least the third case. At least in the fourth case, the game ball is fired with a fourth launch strength (for example, the launch strength indicated by the reference sign (s) in FIG. 11A). In the second state, it is a case where a third operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (O) in FIG. 11A) is performed on the operation means. In the fourth case, in the second state, a fourth operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (ka) in FIG. 11A) is performed on the operation means. The third operation is different from the fourth operation. A work, the third radiation strength may be different intensity and the fourth radiation strength.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity even during turbo.

  The launching means includes at least launching execution means (for example, launching means 844), and the launching means includes at least launch control means (for example, launch control board 174). The launch execution means is controlled by the launch control means, and the launch control means can be in any one of the plurality of states. Also good.

  Also, the display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display is provided, and the launching unit in the first state is capable of firing at least a game ball in the first region. The launching means in the second state is capable of launching at least a game ball in the first area, and the launching means in the second state places a game ball in the second area. The first region is a region on the right side of the display means (for example, a region on the right side of the game region 124), and the second region is It may be an area on the left side of the display means (for example, an area on the left side of the game area 124).

  With such a configuration, there are cases in which game balls can be struck separately on the left and right sides of the game area even during turbo.

  The operation means is capable of changing at least an operation amount in accordance with a player's operation. The operation amount of the first operation is a first operation amount. The manipulated variable is a third manipulated variable (for example, an manipulated variable indicated by a symbol (O) in FIG. 11A), and the third manipulated variable is the first manipulated variable (eg, FIG. 11). (The operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in (a)) may be smaller.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity in a range where the operation amount is small during turbo.

  Further, the operation means is capable of changing at least the operation amount within a first range (for example, a range of operation amounts indicated by reference sign (A) to operation amount indicated by reference sign (A) in FIG. 11A). And

  The operation means is capable of changing at least the operation amount within a second range (for example, a range of operation amount indicated by reference sign (a) to an operation amount indicated by reference sign (b) in FIG. 11A). ,

  The first range is a range in which the firing intensity of the launching unit changes in accordance with a change in the operation amount in the second state, and the second range is in the second state, A range in which the firing intensity of the launching unit does not change according to a change in an operation amount, and the size of the second range may be larger than the size of the first range.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to adjust the launch intensity with a small change in operation during turbo.

  The launching means in the first state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a first launch characteristic (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is in the second state. The certain launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball with a second launch characteristic, and the second launch characteristic (for example, the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is the first launch characteristic. It may be different.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to launch a game ball with different launch characteristics.
<About the circuit diagram of the launch control board of FIG. 9>

  The following configuration may be adopted for matters related to the circuit diagram described with reference to FIG. That is, the firing control means may include at least a constant current control unit that controls a current for driving the launching device. Moreover, the launch control means may include at least an intensity setting unit that sets the launch intensity of the launching device. Further, the launch control means may include at least an input condition setting unit that sets the launchable condition of the launching device. Further, the launch control means may include at least a launch characteristic setting unit that sets a launch characteristic of the launch device.

  In addition, the strength setting unit is composed of at least a plurality of components, one of the plurality of components being a first component (IC9 in FIG. 9), and the first component being at least a plurality of components. One of the plurality of terminals is a first terminal (terminal 2 of the IC 9 in FIG. 9), and one of the plurality of terminals is a second terminal (see FIG. 9). 9 is a terminal 3) of the IC9, and the launch characteristic setting unit is capable of changing at least the value of the current input to the first terminal when the change condition is satisfied. The characteristic setting unit may be capable of changing at least the value of the current input to the second terminal when the change condition is satisfied.

  The change condition may include at least that a signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed is latched. One of the plurality of parts is a second part (R24 in FIG. 9), and one of the plurality of parts is a third part (R27 in FIG. 9). One of the parts is a fourth part (R33 in FIG. 9), one of the plurality of parts is a fifth part (R34 in FIG. 9), and the first terminal is The second terminal is connected to at least the second component through the wiring, the second terminal is connected to at least the third component through the wiring, and the first terminal is connected to the wiring through the wiring. When the second part is connected to at least the fourth part, the second terminal is connected to at least the fifth part via the wiring, and the launch characteristic setting unit has a change condition established In addition, the second component and the fourth component can be connected in parallel. If there is, the third component and the fifth component may be one that can be connected in parallel.

  One of the plurality of parts is a sixth part (PHC1 in FIG. 9), and one of the plurality of parts is a seventh part (OPHC2 in FIG. 9). The first part has a first light emitting part, the sixth part has a first light receiving part, the seventh part has a second light emitting part, The seventh part has a second light receiving unit, and the firing specific setting unit causes the first light receiving unit to emit light when the change condition is satisfied, and the first light receiving unit receives light. Thus, the second component and the fourth component can be connected in parallel, and when the change condition is satisfied, the launch specifying setting unit emits the second light emitting unit to emit light The third light receiving unit may receive the light and the third component and the fifth component may be connected in parallel.

  One of the plurality of parts is an eighth part (R19 in FIG. 9), and one of the plurality of parts is a ninth part (D2 in FIG. 9). The terminal may be at least connected to the eighth component via the wiring, and the eighth component may be connected in series to the ninth component.

  One of the plurality of parts is a tenth part (R17 in FIG. 9), one of the plurality of parts is an eleventh part (D1 in FIG. 9), The one terminal may be at least connected to the tenth component via wiring, and the tenth component may be connected in series to the eleventh component.

  The first component may be an operational amplifier, the second component may be a resistor, the third component may be a resistor, and the fourth component is a resistor. Alternatively, the fifth component may be a resistor, the eighth component may be a resistor, and the tenth component may be a resistor.

  The ninth component may be a diode, the eleventh component may be a diode, and the fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the second component. The fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the eighth component, the fourth component may have a lower resistance value than the tenth component, and the tenth component. The part may be lower in resistance than the second part, the tenth part may be lower in resistance than the eighth part, and the eighth part is The resistance value may be lower than that of the second component, and the fifth component may have a resistance value higher than that of the third component.

  The third component may have a higher resistance value than the second component, the sixth component may be a photo MOS relay, and the sixth component is a photocoupler. Alternatively, the seventh component may be a photo MOS relay, and the seventh component may be a photocoupler.

Further, the turbo state may be held by the mechanism, the turbo state may be held by the circuit, or the turbo state may be held by the control. The turbo state may be maintained by at least one of the above. Further, as an example of the turbo state holding method in the control, for example, the circuit or mechanism does not hold the turbo state, and the turbo state is held when the dispensing control unit inputs the turbo signal ON for a predetermined period ( That is, even if the turbo signal is turned off, the turbo state is maintained), and when the turbo signal is turned off, the turbo signal is turned on / off for a short time.
<About the time chart of FIG. 10>

  The following configuration may be adopted for matters related to the time chart described with reference to FIG. That is, the launch control means is in the first state when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is that the operation means (turbo button) is in the first operation state (not pressed). ), And the second condition may be satisfied during a period in which the operating means (turbo button) is in the second operation state (pressed).

  Further, the firing control means may drive the launching device when the firing timer clock is counted N times (for example, 12 times for a period of 50 ms). Further, the cycle of the firing timer clock may be a cycle different from 50 ms. The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle different from 50 ms.

  The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be different from the cycle of the firing timer clock, the cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle smaller than the cycle of the firing timer clock, The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be greater than the cycle of the firing timer clock.

  The cycle of the turbo latch clock may be a cycle smaller than 600 ms, and the cycle of the firing timer clock may be a cycle smaller than 600 ms. The launch control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the turbo button is pressed.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the turbo button has been pressed may be the same as one cycle of the turbo latch clock, or may be smaller or larger. Further, the launch control means may be capable of executing (or necessarily executing) counting of the launch timer clock when the launchable condition is satisfied. Further, the firing control means may be capable of interrupting (or necessarily interrupting) the counting of the firing timer clock when the firing possible condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the firing control means is capable of restarting (or necessarily restarting) the firing timer clock when the firing possible condition is satisfied during the period when the firing timer clock is suspended. May be. The launching means can launch a game ball at the first launch interval (600 ms) in the first state (non-turbo state), and the first launch in the second state (turbo state). The game ball can be launched at an interval (600 ms), and the first launch interval may be the same as the second launch interval.

  FIG. 16 is a modified example of the time chart of various signals including the firing control signal, and corresponds to FIG. In this example, the input condition signal is changed from the low level to the high level during the launch of the sphere, so that the period in which the launch state is launched is shortened from the 50 ms described with reference to FIG. 10 to 25 ms. It is an example.

  Here, the waveform shown as the “input condition signal” in the figure is a waveform indicating any one of the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3. The input condition signal is a signal generated based on all of the touch switch signal, the firing stop switch signal, and the firing permission signal (for example, a signal output from the signal latch unit 174a3 toward the firing counter unit 174c). It may be.

  In addition, the waveform shown as the “fireable state” is a waveform indicating a signal for permitting or prohibiting counting (firing), which is output from the input condition setting unit 174a to the firing counter unit 174c. The level is a signal that allows (enables) firing, and the high level is a signal that prohibits (disables) firing.

  At the timing of T5 in this example, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a high level, the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch), as shown in FIG. At the timing of T6, since the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 indicates a low level, the ball is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch). Further, at the timing of T5 ′ in this example, since the launchable state indicates a low level, the launch with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is stopped, and at the timing of T6 ′ shown in FIG. Since the launchable state indicates a low level, the launch with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) is stopped.

In addition, when the input condition signal becomes a low level at the first timing in the firing state period (for example, the period from T5 to T5 ′, or the period from T6 to T6 ′), The timing at which the firing is stopped may be the same or different when the input condition signal becomes low level at a second timing different from the first timing. The earlier the timing when the condition signal becomes low level, the earlier the timing when the firing is stopped may be earlier or later. The launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T5 is the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T1 in FIG. 10 (when the sphere is launched with the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) for 50 ms). Compared with, launch intensity may be small. The launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T6 is the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T3 in FIG. 10 (when the sphere is launched with the first launch characteristic (normal launch) for 50 ms). Compared with, launch intensity may be small. Further, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T5 may be smaller than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T2 in FIG. Further, the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T6 may be smaller than the launch intensity of the sphere launched from the timing of T4 in FIG.
<About the launch characteristics of FIG. 11>

  The following configuration may be adopted for matters related to the launch characteristics described with reference to FIG. That is, in the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the amount of operation indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 11A) may be larger than that in the first state. In this case, even if the launching device is unable to exhibit its original performance due to deterioration or damage over time and cannot launch the game ball to the right side of the game area in the first state, the game ball to the right side of the game area in the second state May be able to fire.

  Further, in the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 5A) may be the same as in the first state, or the second state Compared with the first state, the firing intensity at the time of the maximum operation of the handle (the amount of operation of (sa)) may be small. Further, the second state may have the same launch intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (u) in FIG. In the second state, the firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle (the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. 5A) may be smaller than that in the first state. In this case, in the second state, a game ball that cannot reach the game area in the first state may be quickly returned to the ball tray.

  In addition, the second state may have the same firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle (the amount of operation (A)) compared to the first state, and the second state is the same as the first state. In comparison, the firing intensity at the time of the minimum operation of the handle ((a) operation amount) may be large. Also, in the second state, compared to the first state, the game ball is placed on the right side of the game region from the launch strength (launch strength of the symbol (f) in FIG. The operation amount of the handle up to the firing intensity to be fired (the launching intensity indicated by the symbol (e) in FIG. 10A) may be small, and the second state is compared with the first state in FIG. The difference between the launch intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by () and the launch intensity at the manipulated quantity indicated by () in FIG.

  Further, in the second state, the firing intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (（) in FIG. 10A may be the same as the emitted intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. Also, in the second state, the game ball fired with the operation amount indicated by (a) in the figure (a) and the arrival position in the game area of the game ball emitted with the operation quantity indicated by the symbol (a) in the figure (a). The arrival position of the game ball in the game area may be the same. Further, in the first state, the firing intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (c) in FIG. 11A may be different from the emitted intensity at the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. In the first state, the game ball fired with the operation amount indicated by (a) in FIG. 6A and the reaching position in the game area of the game ball launched by the operation amount indicated by (c) in FIG. The arrival position of the game ball in the game area may be different.

  Further, in the second state, even if the handle is turned from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the slope of the line of the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the line of the firing characteristic diagram may be a straight line from the manipulated variable indicated by the reference sign (a) in FIG. 9A to the manipulated variable indicated by the reference sign (a) in FIG. The second state is such that the firing intensity changes uniformly when the handle is turned from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 6 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. Also good.

  Further, in the second state, even if the slope of the line of the launch characteristic diagram is one from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. Good. Further, in the second state, the line of the firing characteristic diagram may be a single straight line from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (A) in FIG. 9A to the operation amount indicated by the reference symbol (A) in FIG. . Further, in the second state, the inclination of the line of the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. 10A to the manipulated variable indicated by the symbol (a) in FIG. May be.

  In the second state, there are two straight lines or three or more lines in the firing characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 10 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. It may be a straight line. In the second state, there are two slopes of the line of the emission characteristic diagram from the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. 10 to the manipulated variable (a) in FIG. To (sa) may have a slope of 0). In the second state, there are three or four or more slopes of the line of the firing characteristic graph from the manipulated variable of (a) in FIG. 5 to the manipulated variable of (a) in FIG. It may be.

  Further, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may include the same inclination angle as the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the first state, and the same inclination angle may be zero. Further, the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 10A may be determined by the voltage value input to the firing intensity setting unit, and the line of the launch characteristic diagram in the second state May include a curve. Moreover, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be continuous. Moreover, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be discontinuous.

  Further, the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may include the same inclination angle as the line of the firing characteristic diagram in the first state, and the same inclination angle may be zero. Further, the firing intensity indicated by the symbol (s) in FIG. 10A may be determined by the voltage value input to the firing intensity setting unit, and the line of the launch characteristic diagram in the second state May include a curve. The lines of the firing characteristic diagram in the second state may be continuous. The line of the second state firing characteristic diagram may be discontinuous.

  FIG. 17 is a modification of the graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch, and corresponds to FIG. 11 described above. In FIG. 17 (a), the launch characteristic TL1 of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) has a launch characteristic in the range from the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (O). TL1a and a launch characteristic TL1b in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K). The slope of the firing characteristic TL1a in the first half is made larger than the slope of the firing characteristic TL1b in the second half.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 17B, the launch characteristic TL1 of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is in the range from the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (A) to the manipulated variable indicated by symbol (O). The firing characteristic TL1c and the firing characteristic TL1d in the range from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) to the operation amount indicated by the symbol (K) are configured. The slope of the launch characteristic TL1d in the second half is made larger than the slope of the launch characteristic TL1c in the first half.

In addition, in this example, the example in which both the first launch characteristic and the second launch characteristic change the slope from the operation amount indicated by the symbol (O) is shown. However, the second launch characteristic is more than the first launch characteristic. Alternatively, the inclination may be changed with a small operation amount, or the inclination may be changed with an operation amount in which the second launch characteristic is greater than the first launch characteristic. In addition, in this example, the second firing characteristic shows an example in which the firing intensity does not change when the operation amount is larger than the operation amount of (ki), but it is fired from the operation amount of (ki) to the operation amount of (sa). The intensity may be changed (for example, greater than the firing intensity of (su)), the slope may be the same from the (o) manipulated variable to the (sa) manipulated variable, and the (o) manipulated variable and ( The inclination may be changed by the operation amount of (a), or the inclination may be changed one or more times from the operation amount of (o) to the operation amount of (sa). In this example, an example in which the slope of the first launch characteristic is 3 or more is shown, but the slope of the first launch characteristic may be one or two.
<About the launching means and firing control means according to the present invention>

  The launching means according to the present invention may include a launching apparatus, may include only the launching apparatus, may include a launching apparatus and launching control means, and may include a launching apparatus and launching means. It may include only the control means, may include the firing device, the firing control means, and the firing handle, may include only the firing device, the firing control means, and the firing handle, It may include a device, a firing control means, and a payout control means, or may include only a launching device, a fire control means, and a payout control means. May be included, or only the firing device, the firing control means, the firing handle, and the dispensing control means may be included.

  Further, the payout control means and the firing control means may be provided on the same substrate, or the payout control means may generate the firing timer clock. The launching device may be a rotary solenoid, the launching device may be a solenoid, and the launching device may be a motor.

  Further, the launch control means according to the present invention can launch a game ball when the launchable condition is established, and the launchable condition may include at least that the launch permission signal is ON, The firing condition may include at least that the firing stop switch is OFF, the firing condition may include at least that the touch switch is ON, and the firing condition may be that the handle is operated. The firing possible condition may include not detecting an abnormality (for example, disconnection detection is OFF).

  The launch control means may change the state of the signal indicating that the launch permission signal is ON for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the launch permission signal is ON. Further, the clock generator that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the emission permission signal is ON.

  The clock generation unit that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF. The clock generation unit that generates the turbo latch clock may generate a clock for latching a signal indicating that the touch switch is ON.

  Also, the turbo latch clock, the clock for latching the signal indicating that the launch permission signal is ON, the clock for latching the signal indicating that the launch stop switch is OFF, and the touch switch are ON The clocks for latching the signals indicating the above may be generated by separate clock generation units, or at least a plurality of clocks may be generated by the same clock generation unit.

  Further, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the emission permission signal is ON may be the same as, shorter or longer than one cycle of the turbo latch clock. The firing control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the firing stop switch is OFF.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the firing stop switch is OFF may be the same as or shorter than one cycle of the turbo latch clock.

The firing control means may change the state of a signal indicating that the touch switch is ON for a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) when the touch switch is ON.

  In addition, the time for changing the state of the signal indicating that the touch switch is ON may be the same as, or smaller than, one cycle of the turbo latch clock.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present example is capable of firing at least first operating means (for example, the turbo button 804g) provided at a position where the player can operate and at least a gaming ball. A game machine comprising a launching means (e.g., launching device 844), wherein the launching means in a first launch control state (e.g., a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is a game The launching means is capable of firing at least a ball and is in a second launch control state (for example, a control state according to a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is capable of firing a game ball at least. The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is in the first launch control state at least in the first period. The first period is a period during which the first operating means is at least operated (for example, a period during which the turbo button 804g is pressed), and the firing means is at least second In the period, the second firing control state is set, and the second period is a period in which the first operating means is not operated at least (for example, a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed). It is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state can be quickly performed, and there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in launch can be provided. . For example, when switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state every time the turbo button is operated, at least 2 until the first launch control state is returned to the first launch control state again. The first operation means needs to be operated once, but according to the present invention, switching between the first launch control state and the second launch control state is performed depending on whether or not the first operation means is pressed. In some cases, the first firing control state and the second firing control state can be quickly switched (by the same operation as the firing stop lever 804e).

  The launching means includes second operating means (for example, a dial 806) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the first period is the second operation. The period during which the first operating means is operated while the means is being operated, and the second period is the first period when the second operating means is being operated. It may be a period during which the operating means is not operated.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the first launch control state and the second launch control state can be switched in relation to the presence or absence of operation of the first operating means.

  In addition, a detection unit (for example, a touch switch 804d) capable of at least detecting that the second operation unit is operated is provided, and the first period is a state in which the detection unit is detecting. It may be a period during which the first operating means is operated.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the firing intensity can be changed only when launching is possible. Further, even when the turbo button is used, there are cases where the player can reliably perform the steering operation as before.

  The first operation means includes a detection means capable of at least detecting that the second operation means is operated, and the first period means that the first operation means is in a state in which the detection means is detecting. The second period is a period in which the first operating unit is not operated in a state in which the detection unit is detecting, and the first period is the first period. The period is a period excluding the period during which the detection means is not detected even when the second operation means is being operated, and the second period is the first period. Even in a state where the second operating means is being operated, it may be a period excluding a period during which the detection means is not detecting.

  Further, the second operation means is movable at least between a first position (for example, an initial position) and a second position, and the detection means is configured such that a player touches the detection means. "A period excluding a period during which the detection means is not detected even when the second operation means is operated" refers to the second When the operation means is in a position other than the first position and is not detected by the detection means (for example, when the dial operation amount is not 0, the detection means is simply broken, the player handles It may be a case where a coin or the like is held between the handle and the player does not touch the handle (touch sensor).

  With such a configuration, the firing strength can be changed only when the player is firmly touching the handle, and it may be possible to prevent the game ball from being inadvertently fired. Moreover, when the hand is released with the handle fixed, the launch can be suppressed.

  Further, the launching means in the first launch control state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by reference sign (s) in FIG. 11A). The launching means in the second launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (ki) in FIG. 11A), The second launch intensity is a launch intensity that corresponds at least to the operation amount of the second operation means, and the first launch intensity is equal to the operation intensity of the second operation means. In the same state (for example, the operation amount indicated by the reference sign (ki) in FIG. 11A), the firing intensity may be at least stronger than the second firing intensity.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily switch the strength of the firing intensity.

  Further, the first firing intensity may be a firing intensity at least according to an operation amount of the second operation means.

  The launching means includes a third operating means (for example, a firing stop lever 804e) provided at least at a position operable by the player. The first period is the third period. It may be a period during which the operating means is not operated.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the feasibility of firing depending on whether or not the firing stop lever (stop button) is operated. Never get lost.

  The third operating means may be in an operated state even if the player does not operate the third operating means when the second operating means is not operated. Good.

  With such a configuration, the firing intensity can be changed only by operating the turbo button in a state where the handle is rotated, so that the conventional operation + the operation of the turbo button is performed. That is, it may be possible to prevent the game operation from becoming complicated for the player.

  Further, the second operation means is capable of moving at least between a first position (for example, an initial position) and a second position, and “when the first operation means is not operated, a game `` Those that are operated even if the user does not operate the third operating means '' means that the second operating means is at least located at the first position. Also good.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the operation of the firing stop lever (stop button) can be a firing condition.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect display, and the launching means in the first launch control state is the display means. A game ball can be emitted at least in a region (right region of the game region 124) on the right side of the front view, and the launching unit in the second launch control state operates the second operation unit. According to the amount, at least a game ball can be fired in a region on the right side of the front view of the display means, and the launch means in the second launch control state has an operation amount of the second operation means. Accordingly, at least a game ball may be fired in a region (a region on the left side of the game region 124) on the left side of the display unit when viewed from the front.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the wrist burden can be reduced (the right-handed operation without using the conventional first operation means has a large amount of rotation operation of the second operation means, and the operation is performed. May be difficult). In some cases, the second operating means may be re-gripped to reduce the burden on the wrist, and the operability may be improved by operating the turbo button.

  Further, the launching means in the second launch control state launches at least a game ball in an area on the left side of the display means when the operation amount of the second operation means is smaller than the first operation amount. The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of playing a game in an area on the left side of the display means when the operation amount of the second operation means is smaller than the second operation amount. The ball can be fired at least, and the second operation amount may be an operation amount smaller than the first operation amount.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can arbitrarily select the use of the first operation means.

  Moreover, you may provide the alerting | reporting means (for example, turbo state alerting lamp 151) which can alert | report at least that it is a said 1st discharge control state. Note that the notification means may be able to notify during a period in which right-handed turbo is performed, and may not be notified even if it is right-handed when the turbo button is not used. Further, even when the turbo button is used, it is not necessary to notify when the ball is not being fired.

  The launching means may not launch a game ball unless the player performs a launch operation.

  Further, the adoption of the turbo button may be in two stages. For example, it is possible to set whether or not to allow the turbo function by a switch provided that the player cannot operate, and the switch is in an allowed state and The configuration may be a turbo when the conditions of the present invention are satisfied. Further, the turbo button may be weakened as a whole, or may be weakened in a range corresponding to at least a part of the handle operation amount.

  In addition, the turbo button has the same push button format as the stop switch, but another one such as a touch sensor may be employed as appropriate, may be a push button type and may have the same tactile sensation as the stop switch, Different tactile sensations may be used. Further, for example, the handle unit may be movable, and the turbo may function when the movable state becomes a predetermined state (for example, the turbo switch is turned on in a predetermined operation state). May be)

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a plurality of operating means provided at positions where the player can operate and a launching means (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball. And at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a firing stop lever 804e), and at least one of the plurality of operation means. One is a second operation means (for example, turbo button 804g), at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means (for example, dial 806), and the firing means is When the first operation means is operated, at least the game ball is not fired, and the launcher is in a first firing control state (for example, a control state by the first launch characteristic (normal launch)). Is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launching means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) can launch at least a game ball. The second firing control state is at least different from the first firing control state, and the firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period. The first period is a period in which the third operating means is at least operated, and the firing means is in the second firing control state in at least the second period. And the second period is a period in which the second operating means and the third operating means are at least operated, and the first operating means has a first position (for example, FIG. The second operation means is at least at a second position (for example, the upper position in the rear view shown in FIG. 15A). The gaming table is provided, wherein the second position is a position at least above the first position.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, there are cases where the second operating means can be easily operated while operating the first operating means (handle), and it is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by launching.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include at least a handle unit (for example, a launch handle), and the first operation means is provided at least to the handle unit, and the second operation means The operation means may be provided at least in the handle unit, and the third operation means may be provided at least in the handle unit.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the firing intensity can be easily changed by the second operating means while operating the first operating means (handle).

  Further, the third operating means includes at least a first convex portion (for example, a first operating portion 806d1), and the first convex portion is in accordance with an operation of the third operating means. The second position is movable at least between the first position and the second position, and the second position is the first position in a range where the third operating means can be operated. The first operating means is located at least in the first direction when viewed from the second position, and the second operating means is viewed from the second position. The second direction may be a direction opposite to the first direction with the first convex portion sandwiched between the first direction and the second direction.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the operation of the second operation means can be operated with a finger (for example, an index finger) different from the finger (for example, the thumb) for operating the first operation means.

  The first position is a position of the first convex portion when the third operating means is not operated, and the first operating means is a first position when viewed from the first position. The second operation means may be located at least in the second direction when viewed from the first position.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the third operating means (launching stop lever) from being inadvertently operated in the firing state.

  Further, the second operation means is capable of at least rotating operation between the first position and the second position, and the first convex portion is the second position. The first direction in the state may be a direction in which the first convex portion is directed from the second position toward the first position in response to the rotation operation.

  Further, the third operation means includes at least a second convex portion (for example, a second operation portion 806d2), and the second convex portion corresponds to an operation of the third operation means. At least between the third position and the fourth position, and the second protrusion is at least a third position in a state where the first protrusion is the first position. The second convex portion is at least a fourth position in a state where the first convex portion is the second position, and the second operating means is the Even if the second operating means is located at least in the first direction when viewed from the fourth position, the second operating means is positioned at least in the second direction when viewed from the third position. Good.

With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operating means (turbo button) can be easily operated while grasping the handle with a finger placed between the first convex portion and the second convex portion. . In some cases, it is easy to confirm the position of the second operation means (turbo button) in the initial state.

  In addition, the game table is a pachinko machine, and includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect display, and the launch means in the first launch control state is the third launch control state. When the operation amount of the operation means is the first operation amount (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), at least a game ball can be launched into the area on the left side of the display means. The first convex portion is at least a fifth position in the first case, and the second convex portion is at least a sixth position in the second case, The second operating means is at least positioned in the second direction as viewed from the fifth position, and the second operating means is at least in the first direction as viewed from the sixth position. It may be located.

  With such a configuration, the turbo button is positioned between the first convex portion and the second convex portion in the left-handed state, which may be easy to operate.

  In addition, the third operation means includes at least a substantially hemispherical main body, and the first operation means has a first distance from the top of the main body, In the second operation means, the distance from the top of the main body may be a second distance, and the second distance may be a distance that is at least longer than the first distance.

  With such a configuration, when the first operating means (handle) is operated with the right hand, the thumb is generally brought into contact with the left side of the first convex portion (the index finger may also be infrequent). That is, when the third operating means (launching stop lever) is operated with the thumb (or index finger), the second operating means (turbo button) is likely to be operated with the index finger (or middle finger). The distance from the top of the spherical shape of one operation means (handle) is adjusted to the length of the finger, and the operability of the second operation means (turbo button) may be improved.

  In addition, the third operation means includes a plurality of convex portions, and at least one of the plurality of convex portions is the first convex portion, and among the plurality of convex portions. At least one of the second protrusions, the first protrusion is a protrusion at least adjacent to the second protrusion, and the first protrusion is the third protrusion. In a state where the operating means is not operated, the convex portion may be at least closest to the first operating means.

  Further, the pressing direction of the turbo button may be different from the pressing direction of the firing stop lever. In this case, the function of increasing the firing intensity and the function of stopping the firing are almost the opposite functions, and there are cases where it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation by changing not only the operation feel and outline shape but also the operation direction.

Moreover, about the said convex part, 3 or more multiple may be sufficient. Further, the light emitting means in the handle of this example may be used for notifying that the turbo function is operating, or may be notified by another light emitting means or the like. Moreover, you may use a turbo button as an effect button.
<Modification of launch handle>

Next, a modified example of the above-described firing handle 134 will be described. The gaming table according to the present invention may be provided with a launching handle described below instead of the above-described launching handle 134.
<Variation of launch handle / Variation 1>

  FIG. 18 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a firing handle 860 according to Modification 1, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of notification by the firing handle 860.

  The handle cover 862 of the firing handle 860 is provided with a symbol or a figure, and is configured to perform notification (handle notification) indicating the position of the turbo button 864 based on the symbol. In this example, a sticker with a symbol “TURBO” and a graphic imitating an arrow is affixed to the handle cover 862, and the handle is notified using this seal. The handle cover 862 may be engraved or a design may be printed on the handle cover 862. Moreover, the mode of a pattern is not limited to a character and a figure, You may give a symbol, a pattern, etc.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19A, when the firing handle 860 is not operated (when the firing handle 860 is not operated or when the firing handle 860 is operated, the turbo button 864 is pressed). If the tip of the arrow on the seal of the handle cover 862 points to the direction of the turbo button 864, a handle notification is given to suggest the position of the turbo button 864 to the player. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the launching handle 134 is turbo (when the turbo button 864 is pressed), the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is configured to point in a direction other than the turbo button 864, A steering wheel notification is given to the player that the button 864 is pressed (the operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted).

  By performing such a handle notification, the player can know the position of the turbo button 864 reliably when not being operated, and can recognize the presence of the turbo button 864 even when the user does not know the presence of the turbo button 864. In addition, it is possible to easily confirm that the pressing operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted at the time of turbo, so that a sense of security can be obtained, and the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is a turbo button. By configuring to point in a direction other than 864, the visibility of the steering wheel notification can be improved because the player's hand hardly disturbs the visibility even while the turbo button 864 is being pressed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the firing handle 860 is not operated (when the firing handle 860 is not operated or when the firing handle 860 is operated, the turbo button 864 is pressed). Is configured so that the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 points in a direction other than the turbo button 864, so that the turbo button 864 is not pressed (the turbo button 864 is not operated). Handle notification is given to the player to indicate that the operation is not accepted.

  On the other hand, when the launching handle 134 is turbo (when the turbo button 864 is pressed), the tip of the arrow applied to the seal of the handle cover 862 is configured to point in the direction of the turbo button 864, so that the turbo button The steering wheel notification is made to suggest to the player that 864 is pressed (the operation of the turbo button 864 is accepted).

  As described above, if the notifying means capable of at least notifying the position where the turbo button 864 is provided is provided, the design of the launch handle 134 when not in operation can be improved, and the player can use the turbo button during turbo. It can be easily confirmed that the pressing operation of 864 is accepted, and a sense of security can be obtained. Further, there are cases where the player can easily understand and can prevent malfunction.

In addition, the notification means of this example may notify the position of the turbo button with a seal or the like on the main body frame, may notify the position of the turbo button by gradation control of a lamp or the like of the main body frame, The spherical part may be informed of the position of the turbo button with a seal or the like, or may be a display means or a voice. In addition, the notification may be performed during a non-game state such as during a demonstration, during setting of Daitomo, etc., or in part of the production. Moreover, you may alert | report so that a function may be known to turbo button itself.
<Variation of launch handle / Variation 2>

  20A is an external perspective view of a firing handle 870 according to the second modification, and FIG. 20B is an exploded perspective view of the firing handle 870. FIG. 21A to 21C are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the firing handle 870.

  The launch handle 870 is obtained by applying a turbo button 870g and a turbo switch 870h in place of the turbo button 804g and the turbo switch 804h of the launch handle 134 described above.

  The above-mentioned turbo button 804g is disposed obliquely upward on the back surface of the large-diameter portion 812 of the handle base 802, and is slidable obliquely with respect to the axial direction of the firing handle 134 (longitudinal direction of the firing handle 134). It is configured. For this reason, when the player performs a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g diagonally downward is necessary.

  On the other hand, the turbo button 870g of the modified example is disposed on the upper surface of the small-diameter portion 810 of the handle base 802 so as to be directly above the dial 806, and is perpendicular to the axis of the firing handle 870 ( It is configured to be slidable in the short direction of the firing handle 134. For this reason, when the player performs a pressing operation of the turbo button 870g, an operation of pressing the turbo button 870g directly down is required as shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the firing handle 870 of the modified example, the turbo button 870g is arranged on the upper surface of the small diameter portion 810 of the handle base 802 and close to the dial 806 so as to be slidable right below. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21A, even when the dial 806 is held, the player's finger can easily extend to the turbo button 870g, and the turbo button 870g can be easily pressed. For this reason, the operability can be further improved as compared with the above-described firing handle 134.

  Since the turbo switch 870h that also serves as a base for the turbo button 870g is a box-like body, as shown in FIG. 21B, the dial 806 is gripped when the turbo button 870g is not pressed. In some cases, a finger (an index finger in this example) can be hooked on the right side surface of the turbo switch 870h, and the state of the dial 806 can be easily and reliably maintained. In some cases, the location of the turbo switch 870g can be notified by the shape of the turbo switch 870g itself that also serves as a base.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the dial 806 is rotated by the maximum operation amount, the first operation unit 806d1 is positioned on the left side of the turbo button 870g. Since the distance between the finger hooked on 806d1 (usually the thumb) and the turbo button 870g can be ensured, an erroneous operation of pressing the turbo button 870g by mistake can be prevented in advance.

  Although not shown, in this example, the harness that connects the turbo switch 870h and the control unit is drawn into the inner space of the handle base 802 and then pulled out from the rear of the handle base 802 together with other harnesses. Yes. However, the length of the base portion of the turbo switch 870h is extended to the rear end of the handle base 802, and the harness connecting the turbo switch 870h and the control unit is drawn into the inner space of the turbo switch 870h and pulled out from behind. May be.

With such a configuration, the turbo button 870g and the turbo switch 870h can be unitized, and parts of the turbo button 870g and the turbo switch 870h can be easily replaced.
<Modification of launch characteristics of launcher>
Next, a modified example of the launch characteristics of the launcher 844 will be described in detail.
<Variation of launching characteristics of launching handle / Variation 1>

  FIG. 22A is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 1, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. In the launch characteristic shown in FIG. 11, the launch intensity corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable (the manipulated variable indicated by reference sign (s)) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NL is set to the launch intensity indicated by reference sign (f). Set, the launch intensity of the maximum manipulated variable of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TL is set to the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (su), the maximum manipulated variable of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) The firing intensity was increased.

On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 22A, the launch intensity S1 corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable H1 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLa and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) ) The firing strength S1 of the maximum manipulated variable H1 of TLb is set to the same firing strength.
<Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 2>

  FIG. 22B is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to the second modification, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the launch intensity S2 corresponding to the maximum manipulated variable H4 of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is the maximum manipulation of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb. It is set to be larger than the firing intensity S3 of the amount H4 (S2> S3).

  Further, in this example, when the manipulated variable is in the range of 0 to H2, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is larger than the launch intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). Set, within the range of operation amount H2 to H3, set the firing strength of the first launch characteristics (normal launch) NLb to be smaller than the launch strength of the second launch characteristics (turbo launch), When the manipulated variable is in the range of H3 to H4, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is set to be greater than the launch intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb. As a result, the graph of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb are represented by an intersection C1 corresponding to the manipulated variable H2 and an intersection C1 corresponding to the manipulated variable H3. It is configured to intersect at a point.

In this example, when the manipulated variable is in the range of H3 to H4, the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb is increased in proportion to the manipulated variable. Similarly to (turbo launch), the launch intensity within the range of the operation amount from H3 to H4 may be constant.
<Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 3>

  FIG. 23A is a graph showing the characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 3, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. In the launch characteristic shown in FIG. 11, the launch intensity corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NL (the manipulated variable shown by reference sign (A) = 0) is indicated by the reference sign (c). The launch intensity of the maximum operation amount of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TL is set to the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (A), and the maximum operation of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) is set. The amount of launch intensity was smaller.

On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23A, the firing intensity S3 corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable H1 (= 0) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLc, and the second launch The launch intensity S3 of the minimum manipulated variable H1 (= 0) of the characteristic (turbo launch) TLc is set to the same launch intensity.
<Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 4>

  FIG. 23B is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 4, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23B, the firing intensity S5 corresponding to the minimum manipulated variable H6 (= 0) of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd is the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). It is set to be smaller than the firing intensity S4 of the minimum manipulated variable H6 (= 0) of TLd (S4> S5).

Further, in this example, the firing intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd is the second launch characteristic (normal launch) NLd within the entire range (the launch handle operable range) of the minimum manipulated variable H6 to the maximum manipulated variable H7. Turbo launch) It is set to be smaller than the launch intensity of TLd, and the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLb graph and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLb graph are configured not to intersect. ing.
<Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 5>

FIG. 24A is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to Modification 5, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. In this example, as shown in FIG. 24A, the firing intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLe within the entire range (the launch handle operable range) of the minimum manipulated variable H8 to the maximum manipulated variable H9. Is set to be larger by a predetermined amount α than the firing intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe, and the graph of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe and the second launch characteristic (turbo) (Launch) The TLe graph is configured not to intersect.
<Variation of launch characteristics of launcher / Variation 6>

FIG. 24B is a graph showing characteristics of normal launch and turbo launch according to the modified example 6, and is a graph corresponding to FIG. 11 described above. In this example, as shown in FIG. 24B, in the first range (in this example, the range of the minimum manipulated variable H10 to the manipulated variable H11) within the launch handle operable range, Launch) The firing strength of TLf is set to be larger than the firing strength of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLf by a predetermined amount α, and the second range within the firing handle operable range (in this example, In the operation amount H11 to the maximum operation amount H12), the firing intensity of the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLf is a predetermined amount β (β <α) than the launch intensity of the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLf. ) Or an amount less than a predetermined amount β, and the first launch characteristic (normal launch) NLe graph and the second launch characteristic (turbo launch) TLe graph are configured not to intersect. ing.
<Modification of launch control board>

  Next, a modified example of the above-described launch control board 174 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a circuit diagram of a launch control board 890 according to a modification, and is a circuit diagram corresponding to FIG.

  In this example, in addition to the circuit shown in FIG. 9 above, by adding / changing the circuit surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 25, even if the player stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g halfway, As long as the dial 806 is touched, a function for enabling the pressing operation of the turbo button 408g is added.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the launch control board 890 according to the modification includes a storage unit 892 (IC10) including a flip-flop circuit. The clock signal input terminal 2CK of the storage unit 893 receives a launch intensity changeover switch signal input from the connector CN2, and the clear signal input terminal 2CLR receives a touch switch signal input from the connector CN2. When the touch switch signal input from the connector CN2 is at a low level (when the player is touching the dial 806), the firing intensity changeover switch signal is stored (held), and the stored signal is output to the output signal terminal 1Q. And / or 1Q.

  When the signal output from the output signal terminal 1Q of the storage unit 892 is a high level signal (when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is a high level signal), the FET circuit is turned on, whereby the gain adjustment unit 174d2 and The function of the bias adjustment unit 174d3 is turned on, and the launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the second launch characteristic (turbo launch). On the other hand, when the signal output from the output signal terminal 1Q of the storage unit 892 is a high level signal (when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is a low level signal), the gain adjustment is performed by turning off the FET circuit. The functions of the unit 174d2 and the bias adjustment unit 174d3 are turned off, and the launch characteristic of the sphere becomes the first launch characteristic (normal launch).

The signal output from the output signal terminal / 1Q of the storage unit 892 turns on / off the FET circuit (Q4) in synchronization with the on / off of the firing intensity changeover switch signal. As a result, the FET circuit (Q4) outputs a signal indicating the on / off state of the firing intensity changeover switch signal (launch intensity state signal) to the dispensing control board 170 via the connector CN4.
<Launching handle with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, a firing handle 900 having a plurality of turbo buttons will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 26A to 26C are rear views of the launch handle 900 having a plurality of turbo buttons, and FIG. 26D is a side view of the state of FIG.

  The launch handle 900 includes a first turbo button 902 and a second turbo button 904 having the same shape as the first turbo button 902. The number of turbo buttons is not limited to one or two, and three or more turbo buttons may be provided (hereinafter the same).

  The first turbo button 902 is disposed on the right side of the second turbo button 904 in the rear view and in the vicinity of the outer edge of the handle base 802, and the second turbo button 904 is the first turbo button 902 in the rear view. It is disposed at a position on the left side that is slightly away from the outer edge of the handle base 802. Further, the firing stop lever 905 is disposed on the lower right side of the handle base 904 when viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4D, when the tip P of the firing handle 900 is used as a reference point, the shortest distance L1 from the tip P to the firing stop lever 905, the first turbo button from the tip P The relationship between the shortest distance L2 up to 902 and the shortest distance L3 from the tip portion P to the second turbo button 904 is a relationship of distance L1 <distance L2 <distance L3, and the length of a general player's finger In other words, the relationship of the length of the thumb <the length of the index finger <the length of the middle finger.

  For this reason, the player operates the launch stop lever 905 with his thumb, operates the first turbo button 902 with his index finger, and operates the second turbo button 904 with his middle finger. It is possible to reliably and easily operate, and the operability of the firing handle 900 can be greatly improved.

  Although details will be described later, when the first turbo button 902 is pressed, the firing strength is stronger than the first launch characteristic (normal launch) described above and the third launch characteristic (described later) ( The sphere is launched according to the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch), which has a weaker launch strength than the strong turbo launch. On the other hand, when the second turbo button 904 is pressed, a third launch characteristic (launch intensity higher than the first launch characteristic (normal launch) and the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch) described above) ( The ball is fired according to (strong turbo launch). The shape of the first and second turbo buttons 902 and 904 in this example may be the structure of the turbo button having a pedestal described with reference to FIG. 21, and if such a structure is adopted, the operability is improved. There is a case where an effect that it is possible to notify the improvement or the presence of the turbo button can be obtained.

  FIG. 26A is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the first turbo button 902 and the second turbo button 904 are not depressed and the firing handle 900 is in the initial position.

  In this initial position, the first turbo button 902 and the second turbo button 904 are located higher than the firing stop lever 804e, and both are located on the left side in the rear view with respect to the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2. doing. When the player grasps the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the index finger is positioned between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2. Therefore, in this initial position, the first turbo button 902 is used by using the index finger. Alternatively, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904.

  FIG. 26B is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the firing handle 900 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the first turbo button 902 is pressed with an index finger.

  In this position, the first turbo button 902 is located between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2 and closer to the second operation unit 906d2 than the first operation unit 906d1. When the player grasps the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the index finger is located between the first operation unit 906d1 and the second operation unit 906d2 and close to the second operation unit 906d2. If the index finger is moved, it is easy to press the first turbo button 902 using the index finger.

  However, since the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 906d1 away from the first turbo button 902, it is difficult to press the first turbo button 902 using the thumb, and the middle finger is the first finger Since the second operation unit 906d2 away from the turbo button 902 is located on the left side in a rear view, it is difficult to press the first turbo button 902 using the middle finger.

  FIG. 26C is a rear view of the firing handle 900 when the firing handle 900 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined operation amount and the second turbo button 904 is pressed with the middle finger.

  In this position, the second turbo button 902 is located on the left side of the second operation unit 906d2 when viewed from the back. When the player grips the firing handle 900 in a normal manner, the middle finger is positioned on the left side of the second operation unit 906d2 when viewed from the rear. In this position, if the middle finger is moved, the second finger It is easy to press 904.

However, since the thumb is located on the right side surface of the first operation unit 906d1 away from the second turbo button 904, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904 using the thumb, and the index finger is used for the second finger. Since the operation unit 906d2 is located on the right side of the rear view, it is difficult to press the second turbo button 904 with the index finger.
<Launching handle with multiple turbo buttons / variants>

  FIG. 27A is a rear view of a firing handle 910 provided with two turbo buttons having different shapes. The launch handle 910 includes a first turbo button 912 and a second turbo button 914 having a different shape from the first turbo button 912. In this example, the first turbo button 912 has a circular shape when viewed from the back, whereas the second turbo button 914 has a rhombus shape when viewed from the back.

  If a plurality of turbo buttons of the same shape are arranged on the back of the launch handle, the player may make a mistake in operation. According to this example, the first turbo button 912 and the second turbo button 914 are distinguished by tactile sensation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player's operation mistake and not to reduce the player's willingness to play.

  In this example, the example in which the shape of each of the plurality of turbo buttons is made different is shown. However, the size of each of the turbo buttons may be made different, the amount of protrusion of each may be made different, and each operation. The sensations may be different, or the material and the touch of each may be different.

  FIG. 27B is a rear view of the launch handle 920 in which two turbo buttons are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2. The firing handle 920 is similar to the firing handle 900 described above in that it includes two parts, a first turbo button 922 and a second turbo button 924 having the same shape as the first turbo button 922. The difference is that the first turbo button 922 and the second turbo button 924 are arranged side by side between the first operation unit 916d1 and the second operation unit 916d2.

According to this example, the first turbo button 922 and the second turbo button 924 can be operated with one finger (for example, the index finger), and the operability of the operating means can be improved.
<Launch handle / Launch control board with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, the internal configuration of the launch control board 930 of the launch handle having a plurality of turbo buttons will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the launch control board 930, and is a block diagram corresponding to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the launch control unit 930 includes an input condition setting unit 174a, a clock generation unit 174b, a launch counter unit 174c, a launch characteristic setting unit 174d, a launch intensity setting unit 174e, and a constant current control unit 174f. In this respect, it is the same as the above-described launch control unit 174, but the launch identification setting unit 174d receives the first launch characteristic (based on the launch intensity changeover switch signals input from the first turbo switch 932 and the second turbo switch 934). The difference is that control is performed to select one of the normal launch), the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch), or the third launch characteristic (strong turbo launch).

  The first turbo switch 932 can detect whether or not the first turbo button 902 of the above-described firing handle 900 has been pressed. In this example, the first turbo button 902 is pressed by the player. If the first turbo button 902 is pressed down by the player, a low level firing strength switching switch signal is output to the outside. Output to.

  Further, the second turbo switch 934 can detect whether or not the second turbo button 904 of the above-described launching handle 900 has been pressed. In this example, the second turbo button 904 is pressed by the player. When not operated, a low-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is output to the outside, and when the second turbo button 904 is pressed by the player, a high-level firing intensity changeover switch signal is emitted. Output to the control unit. When both the first turbo switch 932 and the second turbo switch 934 are pressed, only one of the pressing operations may be accepted.

The launch characteristic setting unit 174d of the launch control board 930 has a first launch characteristic (normal launch) and a second launch characteristic based on the launch intensity changeover switch signal latched by the signal latch unit 174a3 of the input condition setting unit 174a. Control is performed to select either (low turbo launch) or the third launch characteristic (strong turbo launch).
<Launch handle / Launch control board with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, the firing characteristics of the firing handle 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a graph showing the characteristics of normal launch, weak turbo launch, and strong turbo launch, and corresponds to FIG.

  The launch characteristic NL of the normal launch in this example is the same as the launch characteristic of the normal launch indicated by the reference NL in FIG. 11, and the launch characteristic TLs of the strong turbo launch in this example is the turbo indicated by the reference TL in FIG. Since it is the same as the launching characteristics of launching, its description is omitted.

The launch characteristic TLw of the weak turbo launch of this example is set so that the launch intensity TLw1 of the inclined portion changes more slowly than the launch characteristic TLs1 of the strong turbo launch. In this case, the maximum launch intensity is set when the operation amount becomes larger than the launch characteristic TLs2 of the strong turbo launch.
<Game console with multiple turbo buttons>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a gaming table provided with a plurality of turbo buttons will be described. In addition, FIG. 30 is a front view of a game machine provided with a plurality of turbo buttons.

  This game table includes a second turbo button 893 on the front surface of the front frame door 106, in addition to the turbo button 864 provided in the firing handle 860 described with reference to FIGS. The turbo button 864 is an operation means for switching the launch characteristic of the launch handle 860 from the above-described normal launch to turbo launch (or turbo launch to normal launch), and another second turbo button 893 is the launch handle 860. Are the operation means for switching the above-mentioned launch characteristics from the above-described normal launch to turbo launch (or from turbo launch to normal launch), both of which have the same function in this example.

  The functions of the turbo button 864 and the second turbo button 893 may be different. For example, one of the functions is an operation means for switching from the above-described normal launch to weak turbo launch (or weak turbo launch to normal launch). The other may be an operation means for switching from the above-described normal launch to strong turbo launch (or from strong turbo launch to normal launch). Also, the location of the second turbo button 893 is not particularly limited. For example, the second turbo button 893 may be disposed on the main body 104 of the game table or disposed next to the chance button 136 disposed on the front frame door 106. May be.

  According to this example, when one turbo button and the other turbo button have the same function, it is possible to arbitrarily select a turbo button that is easy for the player to operate, thereby improving the convenience of the player. May be possible. Further, when one turbo button and the other turbo button have different functions, it may be possible to prevent an erroneous operation such as a mistake in pressing.

  As described above, the gaming table according to this example includes a plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate, and a launching means (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball. The launching means is provided with a first launch control state (for example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and is capable of firing at least a game ball. The launching means in the launch control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (weak turbo launch)) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the third launch control state (eg, the third launch control state) The launching means that is in a controlled state by the launch characteristics (strong turbo launch) of the above is capable of launching at least a game ball, and at least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means (for example, , Handle 80 ), At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, the first turbo button 902), and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means. Operating means (for example, the second turbo button 904), the firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period, the first period is the first Is the period during which at least the operating means is operated, and the firing means is in the second firing control state at least in the second period, and the second period is the first period. A period during which at least one operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the emission means is in the third emission control state in at least a third period. Third period And, he said is that the first operating means and the period for the third operating means is at least operated, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to this example, the second operation means and the third operation means are used to change from the normal first launch control state to the multiple launch control states (second launch control state, third In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of launching.

  The “launching means” according to the present invention only needs to be “at least capable of launching a game ball”. As with the launching device 844 of the above embodiment, the game is temporarily played by pressing the launch stop lever 804e or the like. Naturally, a ball that cannot be fired but a game ball can be fired by releasing the pressing operation of the firing stop lever 804e is also included.

  The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a first launch intensity, and the launching means in the second launch control state is a second launch control state. The launching means is capable of at least launching a game ball with a launch intensity, and the launching means in the third launch control state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a third launch intensity, and the first launch The strength is a firing strength at least according to the operation amount of the first operation means, and the second launch strength is in a state where the operation amount of the first operation means is the same as the first launch strength, The third launch intensity is at least stronger than the first launch intensity, and the third launch intensity is the first launch intensity when the operation amount of the first operating means is the same as the first launch intensity. Is at least a stronger firing strength than The third launch intensity may be a launch intensity that is at least stronger than the second launch intensity when the operation amount of the first operating means is the same as the second launch intensity (for example, FIG. 30 launch characteristics NL, TLw, TLs).

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to easily select a firing strength higher than a normal firing strength.

  In addition, the second operating means is configured integrally with the third operating means, and the firing means is configured such that the second firing strength is obtained by a first operation in the second operating means. And the launching means may be capable of firing at least the game ball at the third launch intensity by the second operation of the second operation means.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the operating means related to the firing intensity as much as possible, and the operability may be improved. Since the player tends to be interested in the display means during the game, the player may not confirm the position of the operation means. That is, operability may be improved by not inadvertently increasing the number of operation means.

  The second operation may be an operation that can be executed at least after the first operation is performed (for example, a turbo button is operated a first number of times → a weak (strong) turbo → a turbo button The second time operation → strong (weak) turbo, or press and hold the turbo button for the first time → weak (strong) turbo → press and hold the turbo button for the second time → strong (weak) turbo).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to change the firing intensity step by step with a single operating means. In addition, since it is possible to shift to the second operation (strong turbo) via the first operation (weak turbo), when the turbo button is not used (the firing intensity gradually increases according to the normal rotation operation amount). Since it is possible to make a transition in the firing strength similar to the above, it may be easy for the player to understand.

  Further, the first operation may be an operation that can be executed at least after the second operation is performed (for example, a turbo button is operated a first number of times → a weak (strong) turbo → a turbo button The second time operation → strong (weak) turbo, or press and hold the turbo button for the first time → weak (strong) turbo → press and hold the turbo button for the second time → strong (weak) turbo).

  With such a configuration, depending on the gaming state, if you want to fire strongly anyway (for example, when changing from left-handed to right-handed due to priority fluctuation in Figure 2), there are many relatively unfavorable big hits. There is a case where the player wants to avoid the winning of the special figure 1), and the player may be easy to operate by making the second operation (strong turbo) first.

  The second operating means may be configured separately from the third operating means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to realize cost reduction and the like without requiring complicated operations such as the number of times and time as compared with a single unit.

  Further, the firing means includes at least a handle unit (for example, a firing handle 134), and the handle unit is fixed to a main body (for example, a handle base 802). ) At least, and the first operating means is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the fixed portion, and the second operating means is provided on the fixed portion. It may be provided at least, and the third operation means may be provided at least on the fixed portion.

  With such a configuration, the second and third operation means (turbo buttons) are arranged in a concentrated manner on the fixed portion, so there is little hesitation in operation and the player may be easy to operate. is there.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fourth operation means (launching stop lever 804e), and the fourth operation means is provided at least in the fixed portion, The second operating means is a distance along the rotational direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the first distance. The third operating means is a distance along the rotational direction of the first operating means and provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the second distance. And the first distance may be closer than the second distance.

  With such a configuration, the second operating means (weak turbo) may be easier to function first than the third operating means (strong turbo), and may be easier to operate in order of firing intensity. . In addition, since it is possible to perform the transition of the firing intensity similar to the case where the turbo button is not used (the firing intensity gradually increases according to the normal rotation operation amount), it may be easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fourth operation means (launching stop lever 804e), and the fourth operation means is provided at least in the fixed portion, The second operating means is a distance along the rotation direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the third distance. The third operating means is a distance along the rotation direction of the first operating means, and is provided at least at a position where the distance from the fourth operating means is the fourth distance. The fourth distance may be closer than the third distance.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to operate when strong turbo = rotation amount: small, and weak turbo = rotation amount: easy to operate when large. As a comparison from normal launch, strong turbo is While a more rapid change in launch intensity is possible, a weaker turbo may have a relatively slow change in launch intensity.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include at least a handle unit (for example, the launch handle 134), and the handle unit includes at least a fixing portion fixed to the main body. The first operating means is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the fixed portion, and is one of the second operating means and the third operating means. Is provided in the fixed portion, and the other operating means of the second operating means and the third operating means may be provided in the main body.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous operation of the second operating means (weak turbo) and the third operating means (strong turbo).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a fifth operation means (for example, a changeover switch provided in the main body), and the fifth operation means is an operation of the fifth operation means ( For example, by switching the on / off of the changeover switch), it is possible to select at least whether the firing intensity by the operation of the operating means provided in the fixed portion is the second launch intensity or the third launch intensity. It may be.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can select and arrange the type of turbo that is frequently used by the player so that it is easy to operate.

  In addition, if the weak turbo launch intensity is set to be weaker than the normal launch intensity, the strong / weak switching operation may be easily performed. Further, three or more turbo buttons may be provided, and any two of them may be applied to the second and third operation means of the present invention. Moreover, the transition from weak turbo to strong turbo may be normal → weak → strong or normal → strong → weak. Good (normal → weak → normal → strong, etc.). Controlling the direct transition of weak turbo ← → strong turbo may reduce the control burden on launch.

  In addition, the weak turbo and the strong turbo are integrated, for example, the type that switches from weak turbo to strong turbo with the passage of operation time (type that switches from weak to strong with the same operation), for example, weak turbo is temporarily It can also be used as firing intensity. In this case, it may be possible to mitigate a sudden change in the firing intensity by the weak turbo configuration. Further, whether to execute the weak turbo or the strong turbo may be determined according to yet another condition. For example, it may be determined in consideration of conditions relating to the gaming state and conditions such as player's individual information. The turbo button may have a touch sensor type configuration or the like.

  In addition, the second operating means (turbo button 1) is on the left side of the second operating part (second convex part) when the firing strength is moderate, but the third operating means (turbo button 2) ) Is arranged on the right side of the second convex portion, the turbo buttons 1 and 2 may be operated with different fingers, and there is a high possibility that no erroneous operation will be caused. On the contrary, if the turbo button 2 is disposed on the left side of the second convex portion, the turbo buttons 1 and 2 may be operated with the same finger, and the operability is high.

  Further, regarding the launch stop lever, the turbo button 1 and the turbo button 2, the distance relationship from the top portion of the handle cover is preferably the relationship of stop switch <turbo button 1 <= turbo button 2. Further, when the turbo button 1 is operated with the index finger and the turbo button 2 is operated with the middle finger, 1 <2 may be set, and when both are operated with the same finger, 1 = 2 may be set.

  The turbo button may be a slide type button in addition to the push type button, or may be a toggle type, lever type, rocker type, rotary type or keyboard type button. In the structure in which the turbo is operated only during a period in which the button is operated, it is further preferable to have a mechanism that automatically returns to a predetermined position when the button is not operated. Moreover, the structure may have a cover body like a chance button so that a player can touch the cover body and the switch is operated, or the operation emits light, vibrates or blows air. It may have a function as a production means. Furthermore, you may comprise the structure which can identify with a chance button. For example, there are notifications by characters that can be recognized as turbo buttons (for example, see FIG. 109, characters that can be seen through a cover body such as translucent), differences in size and shape, and differences in light emission modes. Also good. Moreover, in order to make the pressing of the turbo button conspicuous, a configuration in which characters and light emission modes change while the turbo button is pressed may be used. Moreover, the structure which is assimilated or approximated to the shape and color around the position where the turbo button is disposed may be used so that the presence of the turbo button is not conspicuous.

  Further, the position of the turbo button is not limited to the above embodiment, and the position of one or a plurality of buttons may be a position where the player can operate such as a handle, a front frame, an upper plate, a frame decoration portion around the glass, etc. Can be arbitrarily set. In particular, although it is easy to operate if it is provided at a position that protrudes from the surroundings at the arrangement position, a structure that does not protrude may be used. In this case, it may be possible to prevent the player from malfunctioning the turbo button. Further, another turbo setting means may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate. For example, a dip switch etc. is provided on the back side of the game table so that whether or not turbo setting is possible can be selected at the game store side, and adjustment is possible with operation means that can be operated by the player only when it is set as turbo possible May be.

  Further, the firing handle is not limited to a pivoting type, and may be, for example, a bike-type handle or a slide lever. In addition, the handle is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. However, the handle may be provided on the left side, or a handle may be provided on both the left and right sides, and one may be a turbo handle (a handle having a function similar to a turbo button). Furthermore, the game ball may be fired vertically from the left side of the front view, or may be launched laterally from the upper left side of the front view (for example, in an enclosed game table, a game ball circulation mechanism is provided at the bottom of the game table. Therefore, the launching device may be in the upper left of the front view).

Moreover, you may have a launch control state different from a weak turbo and a strong turbo as a 4th launch control state. The fourth launch control state may be a state controlled by launch characteristics different from those of the weak turbo and the strong turbo, or may be the same as either one. Further, the fourth launch control state may be a state in which the launch characteristics are weaker than the normal launch control state. In this case, the fourth launch control state may be used for fine adjustment of the launch intensity. In addition, the conditions which can be in the fourth launch control state may be the same conditions as other launch control states, or may be different conditions.
<Communication between control boards>

  Next, communication between control boards of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a block diagram showing an example of connection between control boards. A launch unit 940 shown in the figure is a unit including the launch handle 134 and the launch device 844 described above.

  The launch control board 174 is connected to the launch handle 134 of the launch unit 940 via the handle relay board 848 and the glass frame relay board 842 shown in FIG. From the launch handle 134 to the launch control board 174, a launch intensity adjustment signal input from the launch volume 804b, a touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d, a launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f, A firing intensity changeover switch signal or the like input from the turbo switch 804h is input. The launch control board 174 is also connected to the launch device 844 of the launch unit 940, and a launch solenoid signal or the like is output from the launch control board 174 to the launch device 844.

  The launch control board 174 is also connected to the payout control board 170, and a fire permission signal or the like is output from the payout control board 170 to the launch control board 174. A touch switch signal, a firing intensity state signal, and the like are output.

  The payout control board 170 is connected to the main control board 156 via a serial communication line via the inner frame relay board 824 shown in FIG. 7, and the payout control board 170 and the main control board 156 communicate with each other in two-way serial communication. Is possible. The main control board 156 is also connected to the first sub control board 160, but the main control board 156 and the first sub control board 160 are unidirectional from the main control board 156 to the first sub control board 160. Only communication is possible.

Touch switch signals, firing intensity state signals, and the like acquired by the payout control board 170 can be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 by serial communication. These signals are further output from the main control board 156. It is possible to output to the first sub-control unit 160 by one-way communication. It should be noted that the touch switch signal and the emission intensity state signal acquired by the payout control board 170 may not be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 and the first sub control unit 160.
<Communication between control boards / variants>

  FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the main control board 156 are directly connected without going through the payout control board 170, and the launch intensity adjustment signal and the touch switch are connected from the launch control board 174 to the main control board 156. A signal, a launch stop switch signal, a launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 may be able to receive signals related to launching in both the first route and the second route. The first path may be serial communication with the payout control board 170, and the second path may be directly input from the launch control board 174. The signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first route and the second route, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first route and the second route. One may be a firing intensity state signal, and the other may be a firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  According to the present example, even if the main control board 156 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 170 due to some trouble occurring in the payout control board 170, the launch control is performed instead. Various signals can be acquired from the substrate 174, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  FIG. 31C is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the first sub control board 160 are directly connected without going through the payout control board 170 and the main control board 156, and the launch control board 174 to the first sub control board 160. The launch intensity adjustment signal, the touch switch signal, the launch stop switch signal, the launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  According to the present example, even if some trouble occurs in the payout control board 170 and the main control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 174, the first control is used instead. In some cases, the secondary control board 160 can acquire various signals from the launch control board 174 and can perform stable game control.

  Note that the first sub-control unit 400 may be able to receive signals related to launching in both the first route and the second route. Further, a command from the main control unit 300 may be input to the first route, and a direct input from the firing control unit 630 may be input to the second route. Further, the command from the main control unit 300 may be a command based on serial communication with the payout control unit 600, or may be a direct input from the launch control unit 630 different from the second route. The signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first route and the second route, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first route and the second route. One may be a firing intensity state signal, and the other may be a firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  FIG. 32A is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174 are connected by a plurality of communication lines (for example, parallel signal lines), and a launch intensity adjustment signal, a touch switch signal, and a launch stop switch are connected via each communication line. Signals, firing intensity changeover switch signals, firing solenoid signals, etc. can be individually input / output.

  In this example, the firing control board 174 and the payout control board 170 are unidirectionally communicated, and a fire permission signal or the like can be output from the launch control board 174 to the payout control board 170. Furthermore, in this example, the main control board 156 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 942 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the main control board 156 is also connected to the game ball lending apparatus connection terminal plate 942. In the same manner as the above, a firing intensity adjustment signal, a touch switch signal, a firing stop switch signal, a firing intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

  FIG. 32B is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, in addition to the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174, the launch unit 940 and the payout control board 170 are also connected by a plurality of communication lines, and the launch intensity adjustment signal, touch switch signal, launch stop switch signal, launch An intensity changeover switch signal, a launch solenoid signal, and the like can be directly output from the launch unit 940 to the payout control board 170.

  According to the present example, even if a certain problem occurs in the launch control board 174, the payout control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output from the launch unit 940 from the launch control board 174, but instead the launch unit. Various signals can be acquired directly from 940, and stable game control may be performed in some cases.

In the case where the touch switch signal and the firing stop switch signal are directly output from the launch unit 940 to the payout control board 170, the launch permission signal can be output to the launch control board 174 in consideration of these signals. In some cases, the circuit configuration of the launch control board 174 can be simplified.
<Outline of payout control microcomputer>

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A illustrates main terminals provided in the payout control microcomputer 770.

  The payout control microcomputer (hereinafter also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 770 includes two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1, two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1, and data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. , And is configured. The parallel output port POP0 can output serial communication transmission signals with chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / XCS1, PO02 / XCS2, PO03 / XCS3, PO04 / XCS4, PO05 / XCSE capable of outputting a chip select signal. Output terminal PO06 / TX. The parallel output port POP1 includes general-purpose output terminals PO10 to PO16.

  The parallel input port PIP0 includes general-purpose input terminals PI00 to PI07. The parallel input port PIP1 includes a general-purpose input terminal PI10, an input terminal PI11 / XINT that can also be used as an external interrupt input terminal, and a non-maskable interrupt. An input terminal PI12 / XNMI that can also be used as an input terminal and an input terminal PI13 / RX that can receive a reception signal of serial communication are configured. Note that a terminal indicated by “/” indicates that it is a function shared terminal, and a function can be selected by setting a value in the program management area of the built-in ROM. For example, the PO01 / XCS1 terminal is a terminal that can select either a function of an output port or a chip select output to an external device.

  FIG. 33B is a diagram (partially extracted) showing the connection between the payout control microcomputer 770 and the external device (IC). In this example, the data signal output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control microcomputer 770 are connected to three IC1, IC2, and IC3, respectively, and the chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0 are connected to IC1 having eight input / output terminals. The chip select output terminals PO01 / XCS1 are connected to an IC2 having 8 input / output terminals, and the chip select output terminals PO02 / XCS2 are connected to an IC3 having 8 input / output terminals.

  In this example, when 8-bit data is input from IC1, IC1 is selected by outputting a low level signal to chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, and then from data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Enter the data. Also, when outputting 8-bit data to IC2, IC2 is selected by outputting a low level signal to chip select output terminal PO01 / XCS1, and then data is input from data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output. Further, when outputting 8-bit data to IC3, the IC3 is selected by outputting a low level signal to the chip select output terminal PO02 / XCS2, and then the data is input from the data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output.

In this example, an example is shown in which the chip select inputs of IC1 to IC3 are low active. However, when the chip select inputs of IC1 to IC3 are high active, chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / What is necessary is just to invert the logic of the signal output from XCS1, PO02 / XCS2.
<Main command>

  Next, a main command transmitted from the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) to the first sub control unit 400 (first sub control board 160) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the main command.

  The main command in this example consists of 16-bit data, and is classified into an 8-bit upper command and an 8-bit lower command. Bits 6 to 4 of the upper command are fixed data representing a group of main commands. For example, the main command is assigned to a group such as a command related to a gaming state such as a power-on command, a special figure holding ball number command, or a device command. being classified. In addition, bits 3 to 0 of the upper command are data for identifying commands in the same group. Note that bit 7 (most significant bit) of the command is an area in which the value of STB (strobe information) is stored. When the value of STB (strobe information) is on, it indicates that the main command is set. Show.

  Bits 7 to 0 of the lower command are variable data representing parameters (number, type, state, number of times, various flags, etc.) of each command. For example, in the lower command of the special figure hold number command 1, a numerical value indicating the number of the special figure 1 hold balls is stored as the parameter of the command, and in the lower command of the device command 1-1, as the parameter of the command, A payout control communication abnormality detection state, a panel surface switch level abnormality detection state, an external clock abnormality detection state, an impact, a magnetic abnormality detection state, and a magnetic field abnormality detection state are stored.

Further, for example, the special figure fluctuation stop command is a command transmitted when the special figure fluctuation is stopped, and the launch position command is a command transmitted after a fixed wait time (for example, 600 ms) after the special figure is stopped. is there. The main control unit 300 changes the gaming state after the fixed wait time elapses. For example, the electric support ends at the timing, and the right-handed indicator lamp 224 is also turned off at the timing. The other command parameters are as shown in the figure.
<External terminal board signal>

Next, an external terminal board signal output to the outside via the above-described external terminal board 609 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a connection example of the main board 156, the payout board 170, the external terminal board 609, and the external device (hall computer) 670. FIG. 36 (a) shows an external output from the main board 156. FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of the terminal board signal, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of the external terminal board signal output from the payout board 170.
<External terminal board signals 3 to 10>

  The main board 156 is configured to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 shown in FIG. The external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is a signal that outputs a voltage of a predetermined level (for example, high level) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) when power is turned on or when an abnormality is detected. Here, “when power is turned on”, which is the output start condition of the security information signal, means that the low voltage signal input to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300 is turned off (from the main control unit 660 to the main control). When the activation time of the first sub-control unit 400 has elapsed after the voltage value of the power source supplied to the unit 300 reaches a predetermined value (9V) (sub-control unit activation counted by the main control unit 300) An example is when the wait counter becomes 0).

  Also, “when abnormality is detected”, which is the output start condition of the security information signal, is an error related to winning (for example, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field, etc.) among errors monitored by the device monitoring process of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later. An example is a case where an abnormality (abnormal error) or an abnormality relating to a switch (for example, a switch level abnormality error or a switch disconnection error) is detected.

  The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) is a signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signals 5 to 8 (big hit information 1 to 4 signals) It is a signal indicating information related to the game success / failure determination result, and the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) is a signal indicating information regarding the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232). The external terminal board signal 3 (design fixed number information signal) is a signal indicating information related to the symbol variation of the ordinary diagram or special diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 35, eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent to the external device 670 via the payout board 170 and the external terminal board 609. The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in (for example, a hall computer). Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the main board 157 has. In this example, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 are output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156, but information corresponding to the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 is described above. A control command may be output from the main board 156 to the payout board 170 via the output interface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36A, the main control unit 300 provides a storage area for 1-byte long external output signal information in the RAM 308, and Bits 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the plate signals 3 to 10 is assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 10000000B (B is a binary number), the security information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 10 is 1, the symbol fixed number information corresponding to the other external terminal board signals 3 to 9, the start The mouth information, jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information are 0.
<External terminal board signals 1 and 2>

  The payout board 170 is configured to be capable of outputting eight types of external terminal board signals 1 to 2, a CR gaming machine READY signal, a CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and payout error LEDs 1 to 4 shown in FIG. . The external terminal board signal 1 (payout signal) is a signal indicating the number of paid out game balls (payout completion number) (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signal 2 (door open signal) is the opening of the front frame door 106. The CR game machine READY signal is a signal indicating whether or not a game is possible, and the CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal, which will be described later. The signal is a signal indicating a lighting / extinguishing state of a payout notification LED described later.

  As shown in FIG. 35, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are sent via an external terminal board 609 to an external device 670 (for example, a hall). The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in the computer. Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the payout board 170 has.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36B, the payout control unit 600 has a storage area for external output signal information having a 1-byte length in the RAM, and Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the board signals 1 to 2, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the payout error LED 1 to 4 signals are respectively assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 00000001B (B is a binary number), the payout information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 1 is 1, the door opening information corresponding to the other external terminal board signal 2, the CR gaming machine READY The information corresponding to the signal, the information corresponding to the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the information corresponding to the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 are 0.
<Other connection example of external terminal board signal>

  Next, another connection example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A shows a connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are information included in the external device 670 via the main board 156 and the external terminal board 609. Input to the input circuit 350. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. It is. Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Thus, the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670, and information relating to the number of game media payouts can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

  FIG. 37B shows a connection example in which both the main board 156 and the payout board 170 are directly connected to the external terminal board 609. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are externally transmitted via the external terminal board 609 (without the main board 156). The information is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the device 670. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. In addition, even when some abnormality occurs in the main board 156, it is possible to output two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 without passing through the main board 156.

Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Can output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670, and output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670 due to an abnormality of the main board 156. Even if the payout board 170 is operating normally, the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) can be output from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 if the payout board 170 is operating normally. Can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.
<Processing of command transmitted from main control unit to payout control unit>

  FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram illustrating processing of a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in the figure, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are electrically connected via a serial communication line, and when the command transmission condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 sets the payout control unit 600. A predetermined command is transmitted to The payout control unit 600 temporarily stores the received command (before analyzing the command) in a storage unit (for example, a CPU core register or a RAM), and a process for analyzing the command stored in the storage unit And at least do.

That is, as shown in the figure, when a plurality of commands (command 1, command 2) are transmitted from the main control unit 300 that performs the first process to the payout control unit 600 that performs the second process, Both of the commands 2 are stored in a RAM or the like, and then the stored commands 1 and 2 are analyzed. For example, command 2 is a normal command, but even if command 1 is an illegal command, any command is temporarily stored in the RAM or the like. Thereafter, command analysis processing is performed, the illegal command 1 is discarded, and the normal command 2 is not discarded, but processing corresponding to the command (second processing) is executed.
<Serial communication between main control unit and payout control unit>

  With reference to FIG. 39, serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 39A is a schematic block diagram of a serial communication circuit, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining registers relating to serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600. FIG. 39C is a block diagram illustrating the flow of serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600.

  Referring to FIG. 1A, the pachinko machine 100 is for a main control unit microcomputer (microprocessor) 760 capable of executing at least game control and for a payout control unit capable of executing at least prize ball granting control. A microcomputer (microprocessor) 770 is included. The main control unit microcomputer 760 is mounted on the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300, and the payout control unit microcomputer 760 is a payout control board 170 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (what is the main control board 156? It is mounted on another board. The main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770 each include serial communication circuits 750 and 752 shown in FIG. 5B, and transmit and receive signals (for example, prize ball commands) by serial communication. be able to.

  The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes, for example, a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication registers. The main control unit microcomputer 760 includes a CPU core register 710 including general-purpose registers (A register 712, HL register (pair register) 714, other registers 716, etc.), ROM 306, RAM (buffer) 308, and the like.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes, for example, a status register 772, a reception data register 774, a transmission data register 776, and other registers 778 as serial communication registers.

  The payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes a CPU core register 720 including general-purpose registers (A register 722, HL register (pair register) 724, other registers 726, etc.) as general-purpose registers (storage areas), ROM 706, RAM (Buffer area) 708 and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, a RAM (buffer area) 708 is provided in a storage area (first storage area), and a CPU core register 720 is provided in another storage area (second storage area). And a reception data register 774 and a transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are provided in the other storage area (third storage area).

  The reception data register 764 and the transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 may be a single transmission / reception data register. Further, the reception data register 774 and the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 may be one transmission / reception data register.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 have four-channel (Ch0, Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3) circuits. All channels are functionally independent, and there are channels that can transmit and receive by having a transmitter and a receiver, and channels that can only transmit by having only a transmitter. For serial communication between the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the payout control unit microcomputer 770, a channel (Ch0) capable of transmission and reception is used. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 operate in the FIFO mode. 64 bytes for transmission and 8 bytes for reception can be used as a FIFO.

  For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 performs data transmission, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760 to indicate that “transmission is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 766. The serial communication circuit 750 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 766.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 774 of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770. The CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the received data register 774 when “reception completed”.

  For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 performs data transmission, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770 to indicate that “send is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 776. The serial communication circuit 752 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 776.

  For example, when the main controller microcomputer 760 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 764 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main controller microcomputer 760. The CPU of the main control unit 300 reads the reception data from the reception data register 764 when “reception is completed” with reference to the status register.

  Further, when transmitting data, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can detect the transmission state (data transmission completion, etc.) with reference to the status registers 762 and 772 of the serial communication circuits 750 and 752. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 refer to the status registers 762 and 772 when receiving data, and read data from the reception data registers 764 and 774 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, by referring to the status registers 762 and 772, whether there is data in which noise is detected in the received data, whether there is data including a break code, a framing error, and a parity error, or overrun detection The presence or absence can be confirmed.

  In this way, for example, a command transmitted from the main control unit microcomputer 760 is written in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 and is used for various calculation processes and determination processes. After being stored in the CPU core register 712 of the computer 770, it is stored in the RAM (buffer) 708. As will be described later, the command received by the payout control unit 600 is temporarily stored in a RAM (buffer) 708 before the command analysis process. Thus, by storing the received command in the buffer in preference to the command analysis process, the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the RAM 708 or the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the CPU core register 712. Since it is possible to reduce the period during which the command is played, it is possible to reduce the situation where commands are scattered in each register, and thus it may be possible to stabilize game control.

  With reference to FIG.39 (c), the flow of the serial communication process of the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600 is demonstrated. First, a first communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (1). The payout control unit 600 receives a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (2). Upon receipt of the main control communication confirmation command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a second communication confirmation command (a response command to the first communication confirmation command, a payout control communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 (3). . Receiving the payout control communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 transmits a command (for example, a prize ball command here) to the payout control unit 600 (4).

  Processes (1) to (3) are in a communication confirmation state. In this state, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a command to the payout control unit 600. When the process (3) is completed, the communication confirmation is completed, and the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600 in this state. For example, considering the influence of noise and the like, the process (1) is performed a plurality of times, and a communication error state is set when a command indicating completion of communication confirmation of the process (3) is not obtained a predetermined number of times. Even when this communication error occurs, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600. Further, in order to notify an error, a signal is output to a device connected to the outside. Note that signal output to an externally connected device may not be performed.

  The process (1) is executed once every predetermined number of interrupt processes, for example, once during the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 25 times (50 times,...). Process (2) and process (3) may be executed by the same interrupt process, or may be executed by different interrupt processes. Further, the control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted by the same interrupt process as the process (3). The control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted only when there is a change (for example, when the state changes from a normal state to an abnormal state (in the case of an error)).

  The payout control unit 600 can execute at least a process related to awarding when the first command (prize ball command) is stored in the first storage means (such as the reception data register 774). When the second command (main control communication confirmation command) is stored in the first storage means, the third command (payout control communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command response command) is sent to the main control unit 300. ) Can be executed at least (this will be described in detail later).

  The reception data register 764 and transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the reception data register 774 and transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are limited in size, and the CPU core When data is transmitted / received to / from the registers 712 and 722 and the RAMs 308 and 708, data leakage may occur when a condition such as an abnormality occurs, for example.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating power control according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the operation state of each control unit in accordance with the power supply cutoff and supply timing, and FIG. 40 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the operation state of each control unit at the time of power supply cutoff. It is.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current and supplies it to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400. The payout control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub control unit 500. That is, when the power source rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the first sub control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the second sub control unit 500 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. Similarly, when the power supply rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the payout control unit 600 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. The power source may input AC 100V.

  As will be described later, the payout control unit 600 can receive a command and analyze the received command during a period from when the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state until the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state. You can also Also, the payout control unit 600 can set the number of prize balls, but the payout process is not executed. Thereafter, when the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 is received by the payout control unit 600 after the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state, the set number of prize balls (not intended) It may be erased (as a prize ball command sent at timing). In addition, when the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state (and after the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state), a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Process as a normal command.

  Here, based on the content described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game machine is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like in a big hit state, when the game table is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player becomes extremely disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a situation, a power interruption process (to be described later) is executed to maintain the state of the game machine with the electric power stored in the capacitor. This power interruption process is executed not only when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as “power off”) but also when the supply voltage is temporarily reduced due to a cause such as static electricity (hereinafter referred to as an instantaneous power interruption). The FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the operation during power interruption.

  When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not immediately become 0, but the supply voltage gradually drops due to the electric power stored in the capacitor. For example, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (9.66 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. By receiving this signal, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred by a main process (described later) of the main control unit 300, and a power interruption process is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the main control unit 300 is a power-off release state from the occurrence of power interruption until the supply voltage drops to 9.66 V. After the voltage drops below 9.66V, the power is turned off. The power-off state here means a state in which the voltage is lower than a predetermined value and a low-voltage signal to be described later is turned on, and does not mean a state in which the power source is actually cut off. .

  Similarly, when the supply voltage of 12 V drops to a predetermined voltage (8.3 V in this embodiment), the payout control unit 600 determines that a power interruption has occurred, and executes a power interruption process. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, the power supply monitoring state of the dispensing control unit 600 is a power-off release state from when the power interruption occurs until the supply voltage drops to 8.3 V. After the voltage drops below 8.3V, the power is turned off.

Each of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is provided with a start signal output circuit (described later) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. For example, in the main control unit 300, when the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 receives the input of the activation signal, the main control unit main process is started according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in a reset start (reset release state) by a reset interrupt. Execute. The same applies to the payout control unit 600. When the supply voltage of 12V falls below a predetermined voltage, the reset state is entered, and the system waits until the power-off state is released.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the like. . In addition, 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set as an initial value of a communication confirmation command to be described later.

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). ) Proceeds to step S107. Even if the predetermined value (9.66 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S105, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S115).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not.

  If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S109 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the subsequent processing is performed. Proceed to step S111 to delay. If the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S115.

  In step S109, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S109, power-on information (recovery command) is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. The power-on information is set to 00H when the power is turned on by initial activation, and is set to 01H when the power is turned on by return activation. That is, in step S109, a value (01H) indicating return activation is set as the power-on information. In step S111, a delay process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this delay processing, processing for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. In this example, power-on information is set in the process of step S109 prior to the delay process (step S111). Thereby, referring to the power-on information, it can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 side whether it is an initial activation or a return activation. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the delay process (step S111) may be executed earlier than the power recovery process (step S109).

  In step S113, time measurement by the WDT 314 is started. In step S115, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S115) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S117, the same delay process as in step S111 is executed (details will be described later). In step S119, the operation permission to the WDT 314 and the initial value are set. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value, and an initial value (for example, 11111111B (FFH (H indicates that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number) is set in the mask information provided in the RAM 308. The same shall apply hereinafter))). The activation permission to the WDT 314 may be performed in the above step S101. In this case, the WDT 314 may be cleared and restarted in step 119.

  In step S121, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. In step S121, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

In step S123, command transmission processing is performed. In this command transmission process, a process of transmitting the command (the above-mentioned main command) set in the transmission information storage area in step S233 described later to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The above-described STB (strobe information) is turned on and off in this process. Here, the main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S121 and S123 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S131, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 is executed. In step S133, a sub-control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle of waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set). In step S135, the interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S137, a basic random number initial value update process is executed (details will be described later). In step S137, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, a basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed. In step S139, command transmission processing is performed, whereby various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S141, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S137. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limit counter in step S135 and is subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second elapses, the process proceeds to step S143.

In step S143, the sub-control unit activation waiting counter is decremented by 1. In step S145, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S135. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, that is, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S133 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S147. In step S147, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  The WDT 314 may be cleared and restarted not at the timer interrupt process but at the beginning of the loop process in the main process (for example, before execution of step S121).

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. Further, when a firing intensity state signal or a firing intensity changeover switch signal is input without going through the payout control means, the input / output may be detected in the process of step S205.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes in steps S215 to S235.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON. If the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S215.

  In step S215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S216, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this winning acceptance process, whether or not there has been a winning at the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the ordinary drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. If there is a prize, the corresponding number of prize balls is stored in the RAM 308 in a prize ball number storage area provided for each prize opening and start opening. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (ordinary symbol A) or the off symbol (general symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, a special figure prefetch control process is performed. In this special figure prefetch control process, prefetch such as a special figure winning random number is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on FIG. I, when the second off flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to have the respective modes of the special figure I, and the setting area of the RAM 308 Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area, which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in an output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S232, device monitoring processing is executed. Although details will be described later, in this device monitoring processing, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command output request to the first sub-control unit 400 has occurred by referring to the output request information area. When a command output request has occurred, processing for setting the corresponding main command in the transmission information storage area is performed. For example, when the main command is the special figure reserved ball number command 1, information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number is acquired from a predetermined area of the RAM 308 and a lower command indicating the information (for example, when the reserved ball number is three) "00000011") and a high-order command indicating that it is the special figure reservation ball number command 1 is set in the transmission information storage area.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the higher level command included in the received main command makes it possible to determine the production control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and information on the lower level command included in the main command Based on the above, it becomes possible to determine detailed contents of the effect control.

  In step S234, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the above-described various status display units 328 (general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, round lamp 223, state On / off control of the indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224) is performed.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this external output signal setting process, a process of outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be output to the external terminal board 609 without going through the payout board 170.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Prize acceptance process>

  Next, the winning acceptance process (step S217) in the above-described main control timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning acceptance process, and FIG. 4B shows a configuration example of the winning ball number storage areas 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting opening. FIG.

  In step S151, the result of determination as to whether or not the winning determination pattern information in step S203 (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, the previous detection signal is present, and the current detection signal is present) is used. When it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the general prize opening 226, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232, the ordinary figure start opening 228, and the variable prize opening 234 In step S152, if there is no winning, the process ends. In step S152, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball number storage area 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting port is stored, and various random values are acquired as necessary.

  For example, when there is a winning at the general winning opening 226, the general winning opening 226 is stored in the general winning opening winning ball number storage area 308d of a predetermined byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the general winning opening 226. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 10) is stored. Further, when a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of first special figure starting port prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is stored in the storage area 308b. Further, when the reserved number storage area corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as the special figure 1 winning random number value and A value is acquired as a special figure 1 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232, the number of second special figure starting port winning balls corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is stored in the storage area 308c. If the reserved number storage area corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as a special figure 2 winning random number value and A value is obtained as a special figure 2 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Also, if there is a winning at the general chart start opening 228 and the reserved number storage area corresponding to the general chart start opening 228 is not full, the value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value is displayed. Obtained as a random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the predetermined winning byte storage area 308a for a predetermined winning byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the variable winning opening 234. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 15) is stored.

Note that the number of winning prize openings and start openings is not limited to the example of the present embodiment. For example, when a plurality of variable prize winning openings are provided, the same processing as the above processing is performed for each variable winning prize opening. Can be done. In addition, the ball detection sensor may be provided for each winning a prize opening or one starting opening, or may be provided for each of a plurality of winning prize openings or a plurality of starting openings. For example, in the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided, but a ball detection sensor may be provided for each of the general winning ports 226, or one ball detection sensor is provided for the plurality of general winning ports 226. May be. In addition, when a ball detection sensor is provided for each of a plurality of winning ports or a plurality of starting ports, a winning ball number storage area may be provided for each of the plurality of winning ports or each of a plurality of starting ports. The prize ball number storage area may be an area larger than 1 byte length (0 to 15), for example, an area of 2 bytes length (0 to 255).
<Serial command management processing>

  Next, the serial command management process (step S219) in the above-described main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command management processing.

  As described above, in this serial command management process, when it is determined in step S212 that the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0 (when the timer interrupt function is limited), or in step S214, the specific abnormality is detected. This process is not executed when it is determined that the detection flag is ON (when there is specific abnormality information such as a magnetic abnormality error or a magnetic field abnormality error). The serial command management process may be executed when the timer interrupt function is limited, and the serial command management process may be executed when there is specific abnormality information. May be.

In step S155 of the serial command management process, a serial command reception process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command reception process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout control unit 600. When a command is received, a process corresponding to the command is performed. In step S156, serial command transmission processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command transmission process, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 is performed.
<Serial command reception processing>

  Next, the serial command reception process (step S155) in the above-described serial command management process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command reception processing.

In step S156, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the payout control unit 600 with reference to a specific bit (received data full flag) in the status register 762 of the main control unit microcomputer 760, and the command has not been received. If the command is received, the process proceeds to step S157. The reception data full flag is set when there is data in the reception data register 764. In step S157, the received command is acquired and stored in an internal register or RAM. In step S158, it is determined whether the stored command is normal. Here, in step S158, it is determined whether or not the command is normal based on whether or not the upper byte (command code) of the received command is within the numerical value range of the command code stored in advance. As a result of the determination, if the command is normal, the process proceeds to a command analysis process (details will be described later) in step S159. If the command is not normal, the process ends without performing the command analysis process.
<Serial command reception processing / command analysis processing>

  Next, the command analysis process (step S159) in the serial command reception process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the flow of command analysis processing.

  In step S160, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, various types of information are initialized by executing the processing in subsequent steps S161 to S163, If the command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S164.

  In step S161, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status stored in the RAM 308. In the next step S162, an initial value (in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter stored in the RAM 308. Then, 10) is set. Here, the serial command status is information indicating whether or not a prize ball command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value of 0, the prize command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted.

  The communication confirmation command transmission counter is a counter that is decremented by one every time a communication confirmation command is transmitted once in step S177 of the serial command transmission process described later, and the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is normal. It is used to determine whether or not it has been received. When 10 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission command, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 in step S178 of serial command transmission processing described later. This is when the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 has not been received even once during the period of 10 transmissions.

  In step S163, the serial command communication error flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to 0, and the process ends. Here, the serial command communication error flag is information indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in serial communication. When the information is a numerical value of 0, it indicates that serial communication is normal. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in serial communication.

  In step S164, it is determined whether or not a prize ball signal output request command is received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, the process proceeds to the subsequent step S165 to set 1 to the number of prize ball signal output requests. After the addition, the process is terminated, and if the command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S166.

  In step S166, the status (device information) corresponding to the received command is updated, and in the next step S167, it is determined whether or not the status (device information) has changed. If the status (device information) has changed as a result of the determination, the process proceeds to step S168, the processing is terminated after setting the corresponding main command output request, and the status (device information) has not changed. Ends the process without performing the process of step S168.

Here, in step S166, for example, when device command 1 (see FIGS. 60 and 61) is received from the payout control unit 600, first, the information stored in the device information 1 provided in the RAM 308 is changed to the previous time. Information is stored in a CPU core register (for example, C register). Next, the device information 1 (see FIG. 50B) provided in the RAM 308 is updated corresponding to the payout number switch error state, the illegal payout error state, and the payout excess error state included in the device command 1. In step S167, the CPU core register value is compared with the updated device information 1 to determine whether or not the status has changed. The same processing is performed for the other device commands 2 to 4, and the device information 2 to 4 (see FIG. 50B) provided in the RAM 308 corresponding to the device commands 2 to 4 are updated.
<Serial command transmission processing>

  Next, serial command transmission processing will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing, and FIG. 2B is an example of a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600.

  In step S171, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S172, whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 (a predetermined time after transmitting the communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600). (In this embodiment, whether or not 100 ms has elapsed) is determined, and if 0 (when a predetermined time has elapsed), the processing from step S174 is performed, and if other than 0 (the predetermined time has elapsed) If so, the process proceeds to step S173. In step S173, a prize ball command setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize ball command setting process, a prize ball command transmission preparation process is executed when a prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied.

  In step S174, an initial value (25 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S175, 1 (a state in which a prize ball command cannot be transmitted) is set in the serial command status. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a counter that is decremented by 1 every main control unit timer interrupt processing cycle (about 4 ms in this embodiment) in step S171, and transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600. Then, it is used to determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed. When 25 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is determined to be 0 in step S172 after about 100 ms (= 4 ms × 25) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the serial command status is set to 1 in step S175, so that the prize control command cannot be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command. However, it may be configured such that a prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing.

  In step S176, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to a communication confirmation command (described later) in the transmission data register. In step S177, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In the next step S178, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 (whether the communication confirmation command has been transmitted 10 times) or not. In the case (when transmitted 10 times), the processing from step S179 is performed, and when it is other than 0 (when not transmitted 10 times), the process proceeds to step S181.

  In step S179, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In next step S180, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status, and then the process proceeds to step S181. . In step S181, after the other serial command transmission process is performed, the process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600 the main control communication confirmation command at initial startup (value is 10H), and the main control communication confirmation at return startup. Command (value is 11H), prize ball command (value is 23H) for instructing to pay out 3 game balls, value ball command (value is 2AH) to instruct to pay out 10 game balls, 15 balls A prize ball command (value is 2FH) for instructing to pay out a game ball. When the first command received from the main control unit 300 is a main control communication confirmation command (value is 11H) at the time of return activation, a return process is performed, and a main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H at the time of initial activation). ), A RAM clear process or the like is performed. As described above, when transmitting the communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 always considers the power-on information, adds the value (10H) indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information, and transmits the result. The value indicating the power-on information is 00H at initial startup and 01H at return startup. As a result, the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of initial activation is 10H, and the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of return activation is 11H. The value indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information may be added each time the communication confirmation command is transmitted, may be added only for the first time, or the communication confirmation command is transmitted a predetermined number of times. It may be added each time.

In the present embodiment, the value (00H) indicating the power-on information set in the main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) and the power recovery process (step S109) of the main control unit main process in step S176 described above. Or a value obtained by adding (01H) to the transmission data register and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. The main control communication confirmation command is transmitted at a timing of once every 100 ms as an example.
<Prize ball command setting process>

  Next, the prize ball command setting process (step S173) in the serial command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command setting process.

  In step S191, it is determined whether or not the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S192. If not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S198. Here, “when the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied” means that in the above-described winning acceptance process (step S216), the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary figure starting port 228, Or, it is determined that there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234 and the serial command status indicates 0 (a state in which a winning ball command can be transmitted).

  In step S192, the above-mentioned variable prize opening prize ball number storage area 308a, first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, second special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308c, and general winning opening The number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308d is updated. In the present embodiment, every time the winning ball command setting process is executed (each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed once), the variable winning prize winning ball number storage area 308a → the first special figure starting port. Award ball number storage area 308b → second special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308c → general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d In order of each prize ball number storage area, the number of winning balls It is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the storage area is 1 or more. When the number of prize balls is 1 or more, the prize ball number is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of prize balls, and the prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d being referred to is designated as the prize ball command. Get from table.

  In step S193, a numerical value corresponding to the prize ball command acquired in step S192 is set in the transmission data register, so that the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

  49A to 49C are diagrams showing examples of changes in the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d. FIG. 49D shows an example of the prize ball command table. FIG. In this example, in the Nth (N is a positive integer) prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is 2 (00000010B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 2 (00000010B) to 1 (00000001B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 1) th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 2) th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Also, a general winning opening prize ball command (0AH) corresponding to the referenced general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is acquired from the winning ball command table shown in FIG. The prize ball command (0AH) for mouth is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  Although an example in which one prize ball number is subtracted by one prize ball command setting process is shown here, two or more prize balls may be subtracted by one prize ball command setting process. In this case, the number of winning balls of the same type of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted, or the number of winning balls of different types of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted. Further, the order of referring to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is not limited. For example, the prize ball number storage area 308a to 308d may be referred to first in descending order of the number of prize balls. You may refer previously from the opening | mouth 213 and the 2nd special figure starting opening | mouth 214). The number of prize ball commands transmitted in one prize ball command setting process is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  Returning to FIG. 48, in step S194, the values of the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are read out, the values stored in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are added, and the total number of prize balls provided in the RAM 308 is obtained. Store in the storage area. In step S195, it is determined whether or not the value (total prize ball number) in the total prize ball number storage area calculated in step S194 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). If not, go to step S198.

  In step S196, 10 is subtracted from the value of the total number of winning balls, and in the next step S197, 1 is added to the number of output requests provided in the RAM 308, and then the process returns to step S195. In step S198, after other prize ball command setting processing is performed, the processing is terminated.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S195 that the total number of winning balls is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process returns to the determination in step S195 after performing the processing in steps S196 and S197. When the number of winning balls is 25, the processing of steps S196 and S197 is performed twice, and as a result, 2 is set as the number of output requests. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing. For example, after performing the processing of steps S196 and S197, the prize ball command setting process is once ended, and the remaining output in the next prize ball command setting process is performed. It is good also as a structure which adds the number of requests.

In such a configuration, in the previous example, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 25 to 15 in step S196, and in the subsequent step S197, the number of output requests is set to 1, and the next winning ball command setting processing step is performed. In S196, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 15 to 5, and in the subsequent step S197, 1 is set as the output request number.
<Device monitoring process>

  Next, the device monitoring process (step S232) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing, and FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S251, the core register (C register in this example) used for temporary storage of status (device information) is initialized. Specifically, the C register is cleared and predetermined port information (port information corresponding to magnetic field detection, RAM clear switch signal, etc.) is set in the C register. In step S252, the C register is referenced to determine whether or not there is a specific abnormality (in this example, the magnetic field detection bit assigned to bit 0 of the C register is 1 or 0). If detected (when the magnetic field detection bit is 1), the process proceeds to step S253. On the other hand, when a specific abnormality is not detected (when the magnetic field detection bit is 0), the process proceeds to step S255. The “specific abnormality” determined in step S252 is not limited to the magnetic field detection, and one or more other abnormalities may be set as the specific abnormality.

  In step S254, the specific abnormality detection flag stored in the RAM 308 is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next step S255. Note that the specific abnormality detection flag is not necessarily used (bit 0 of a device error status described later may be used).

  In step S255, it is determined whether the serial command communication error flag is 1 or 0. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S256 to set 1 to a predetermined bit of the core register (C register), and then to step S257. move on. On the other hand, if the serial command communication error flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S257 without performing the process of step S256. As described above, the C register is used to set information on a predetermined port and various error information. Then, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the status as compared with a status for previously storing information (device error status) described later.

  In step S257, the signal states of various sensors are referred to. If there is any other abnormality, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the core register (C register), and the process proceeds to step S258. In step S258, the value of the core register (C register) is compared with the device error status stored in the RAM 308. If there is no change in the status, the process ends. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step S259. move on.

  In step S259, the value of the core register (C register) is overwritten on the previous information storage status (device error status), and then the device command 1-1 (main control is monitored) in the command setting transmission process (step S233). Predetermined transmission information indicating that device command transmission settings should be set is additionally stored in an output request information area, which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the process ends.

  Here, examples of errors monitored by the device monitoring process include a magnetic field abnormality error, a magnetic abnormality error, an impact sensor error, an external clock abnormality error, and a switch level abnormality error. In addition, the errors monitored on the payout control side are: tray full tank error (bottom pan full error), payout device error, payout excess error, incorrect payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit unconnected error , CR unit communication error, and the like.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout. The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is the payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180. The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of a payout number switch (not shown) of a game ball controlled by the payout control board 170, and when a connection abnormality of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board), a payout operation is performed. It will stop. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released. The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected. The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.
<External output signal setting process>

  Next, the external output signal setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S301, based on each information corresponding to the above-mentioned external output signal information (excluding payout schedule information, symbol fixed number information, start port information, jackpot information 1 to 4, and security information) Update the value. For example, when the security information is 1 and the other information is 0, the value of the external output signal information is updated to 10000000B.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of output requests is 1 or more, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S303, 1 is set in Bit 6 (payout schedule information) of the external output signal information. For example, in the previous example, the value of the external output signal information is updated from 10000000B to 11000000B. In step S304, 1 is subtracted from the number of output requests, and the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S307. In step S306, mask processing of external output information provided in the RAM 308 is performed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of the masking process of external output signal information in step S306. In this example, the value of the external output signal information before the mask processing is 1100010001B, that is, the security information, the payout schedule information, and the symbol determination frequency information are 1, the other jackpot information 1 to 4, and the start port information is 0. Is shown. Further, it is indicated that the value of the mask information used for the mask processing is 10000000B.

  Here, “mask information” is the same 1-byte length information as the external output signal information, and Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the mask information correspond to Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information, respectively. The mask process in step S306 is configured to compulsorily set (mask) a part of the external output signal information to 0 by calculating the logical product (AND) of the mask information and the external output signal information. Yes.

  The main control unit 300 sets the mask information to 11111111B (initial value) in the initial setting, but if it is determined that the specific abnormality detection flag is on in step S305 of the external output signal setting process (when there is specific abnormality information). Then, any one of bits 0 to 7 of the mask information is updated from 1 to 0. In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error or magnetic field abnormality error has occurred, the mask information is set to 10000000B by updating Bit 0 to Bit 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0 as shown in FIG. , Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are forcibly set to 0 (masked) by mask processing.

  Thereby, when 1 is set to any of Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information, that is, 1 is set to any one of the symbol determination number information, the start opening information, the jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information. Even when the information is set, all the information is masked (set) to 0, and a low level signal is output from the signal corresponding to each information.

  Returning to FIG. 51, in step S307, for example, processing for outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed based on the external output signal information. Specifically, when Bit 0 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 3 (design determination number information signal). The signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit information 1 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit information 2 signal) for a predetermined period (for example, , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When 1 is set in Bit 4 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 7 (big hit information 3 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When 1 is set in Bit 5 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 8 (big hit information 4 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) for a predetermined period (for example, For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. The “predetermined period (output time of each signal)” in this example is not limited to a period of 500 ms, and may be a period of less than 500 ms or a period of more than 500 ms.
<Variation 1 of external output signal setting processing>

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a first modification of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to Modification 1, the processes of steps S305, S401, and S402 are applied instead of the processes of steps S305 to S306 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S401 to perform the first masking process of the external output signal. Proceeding to S402, second mask processing of the external output signal is performed. In the first mask process, the same process as the mask process in step S306 is performed. In the second mask process, mask information (first mask information) different from the mask information (first mask information) used in the first mask process is used. Mask processing is performed using the second mask information. Here, in this embodiment, the first mask information is provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 and the contents can be rewritten. On the other hand, the second mask information is provided in the storage area of the ROM 306 and the contents can be rewritten. It is impossible.

  For example, in the first mask processing, the mask information is updated from 1111111B to 10000000B by updating Bit 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0, and Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are changed by the mask processing. Forcibly set to 0 (mask). On the other hand, in the second mask processing, the initial value 11111111B is used as it is as mask information, and Bits 0 to 7 of the external output signal information are not forcibly set (masked) by mask processing.

With such a configuration, mask processing can be used properly according to conditions (for example, depending on whether there is a specific abnormality), and an external signal suitable for the conditions may be output in some cases.
<Modification 2 of External Output Signal Setting Process>

  FIG. 59 shows a second modification of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to the second modification, the order of the process of step S305 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG. 51 and the process of steps S302 to S304 are switched.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306 to perform mask processing, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S302 and subsequent steps. It is configured.

With this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external signal can be prevented from being output (or the external signal is delayed). For example, when there is a specific abnormality May be able to prevent external signals from being output (or to delay external signals). For this reason, an external signal may be output at an appropriate timing.
<Discharge control microcomputer>

Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described in detail.
<Discharge control microcomputer / terminal arrangement>

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the terminal arrangement of the payout control microcomputer 770. As described above, the payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1, and in this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP0 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP1 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. For example, in the case of FIG. 6A, for example, the terminal corresponding to the payout number switch signal of Bit0 is the PI00 terminal, and the terminal corresponding to the payout switch operation confirmation signal of Bit2 is the PI02 terminal. The same applies to the following. The payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1, and in this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel output port POP0 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of POP1 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 770 is connected to IC1 to IC3, and FIG. 9E corresponds to IC1, FIG. 9F corresponds to IC1, and FIG. Corresponds to IC3.
<Details of payout control microcomputer / terminal arrangement / LED control>

  FIG. 56A is a diagram showing a data configuration of the output port 1 register for outputting data of the parallel output port POP1, and FIG. 56B is an output pattern in the case of outputting via the 7SEG decoder. FIG. FIG. 56 (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and each segment of the LED.

  In this example, the output terminals POP10 to POP16 of the parallel output port POP1 are connected to each segment of the 7-segment LED, and the 7-segment LED is output via the output port 1 register for outputting the data of the parallel output port POP1. Turn on / off control of.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the output port 1 register of this example can select whether or not to control the LED through the built-in 7SEG decoding by setting bit 7 (7DEN). When bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 1, on / off of each of the output terminals POP10 to POP16 is individually controlled to control lighting / extinguishing of each segment of the LED. The correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and the LED segments is as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 0, the output pattern shown in FIG. 5B is output from the output terminals POP10 to POP16 (bit 6 to bit 0 of the output port 1 register) to the 7SEG decoder. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing control of the LED is performed via the 7SEG decoding.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the relationship between the error name, LED display (LED lighting pattern), error display LED state, and payout display LED state. In this example, for example, when an error has not occurred, the number 0 is displayed using the LED, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned off. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the numbers 1 to 8 are displayed using LEDs according to the type of error, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned on or off according to the display pattern shown in FIG. Take control.

The error display LED and the payout LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, may be provided on a game board or a game frame that can be visually recognized by the player, and either one of them is provided as the payout control board. The other may be provided on the game board or the game frame. Further, a plurality of error display LEDs may be provided, the first error display LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, and the second error display LED may be provided on the game board or the game frame.
<Discharge control microcomputer / timer>

FIG. 58A is a diagram showing an example of a timer used by the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 stores a plurality of timers (software timers) shown in FIG. 5A in the RAM 708, and these timers are periodically updated in a timer update process of a payout control unit interrupt process described later ( It is configured to count up or count down). In addition, the numerical value described in the item of “timer value (ms)” indicates the time measured by each timer. For example, the CR unit connection signal monitoring timer is used to measure 2 seconds (= 2000 ms). Indicates that it is a timer.
<Discharge control microcomputer / signal state storage unit>

FIG. 58B is a diagram showing a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 of the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 is provided with a signal state storage area for storing various states shown in FIG. 5B in a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 (in this example, the range of addresses F051h to F056h).
<Discharge control microcomputer / detectable error>

  Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770, and FIG. 59 (b) shows a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error that are conditions for generating a door opening error. It is the figure which showed the combination.

As described above, the main control unit 300 can output errors of various devices detected in the device monitoring process (step S232) to the payout control unit 600. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 770 is similar to the main control unit 300. , Tray full tank error (bottom plate full tank error), dispensing device error, excessive dispensing error, unauthorized dispensing error, dispensing number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit disconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error error, external It is possible to detect clock error errors, magnetic field error errors, switch level error errors, frame opening errors (front frame door opening errors), switch disconnection errors, impact sensor errors, and so on. In addition to these errors, the payout control microcomputer 770 can also detect a main control communication error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example). .
<Discharge control microcomputer / Discharge control command>

  Next, a payout control command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 (payout control board 170) to the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a payout control command, and FIG. 61 shows an example (a) of transmission command output request information used when executing a send command process to be described later and some payout control commands. It is the figure (b-e) which showed the data structure of these.

  Commands received by the payout control unit 600 from the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation command (sometimes referred to as a “main control communication confirmation command”) and a prize ball number command (sometimes referred to as a “prize ball command”). is there. These received commands are analyzed in a command analysis process (step S309) of a payout control unit main process described later, and a process corresponding to each command is executed.

  The main control communication confirmation command is a command indicating a communication state between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and an activation method (initial activation or return activation) of the main control unit 300. The prize ball command is a command indicating the payout of game balls for the designated number of prize balls.

  Commands that the payout control unit 600 transmits to the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation return command, a prize ball signal output request command, device commands 1 to 4, and a prize ball payout operation state command. These transmission commands are transmitted to the main control unit 300 in a transmission command process (step S311) of a payout control unit main process described later. The main control unit 300 analyzes these commands in the command analysis process (step S159) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described above, and executes a process corresponding to each command.

  The communication confirmation return command (sometimes referred to as “communication confirmation command”) is a command indicating that a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 has been received. The prize ball signal output request command is a command for instructing output of a prize ball signal to the trial test signal terminal. Device commands 1 to 4 are commands indicating various states of the device, and the data structure of each is as shown in FIG. The prize ball payout operation state command is a command indicating the operation state of the prize ball payout.

In this example, the information of the above-described launch intensity state signal (turbo switch signal) is transmitted as the device command 4 (set to bit 1) from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, and the above-described touch switch signal The information is transmitted as the device command 4 from the payout control unit 600 (set to bit 0) to the main control unit 300. In this example, the firing intensity state signal and the touch switch signal are configured to be transmitted with the same device command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the device may be configured to transmit with a different device command. In addition, the launch intensity status signal (including the touch switch signal) may be configured to be transmitted by the same device command as other signals, and a device command different from a predetermined signal (for example, CR unit unconnected error). A combination of the device commands 1 to 4 and various states is possible as appropriate. The type of device command is not limited to 1 to 4.
<Discharge control microcomputer / RAM>

  Next, the configuration of a RAM (buffer area) 708, which is a storage area of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of items stored in each storage area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing storage areas provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the initialization timing of the storage areas.

  The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 store the gaming state at the time of power interruption in the RAMs 308 and 708 by power-off processing in order to restore the gaming state at the time of power interruption / recovery (for example, at the time of power failure recovery). The contents of the RAM are held by a backup power source.

  As a configuration of the backup function of the pachinko machine 100, although not shown, a backup power supply unit, a power supply monitoring circuit, and a RAM clear switch are provided. The RAM clear switch initializes the backed up RAM data.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is provided with a first area 708A from a small address (here, 7F00H) to an address 7F0DH and a second area 708B from an address 7F0EH to an address 7FFFH. It has been. The first area 708A is further divided into a plurality of storage areas, and stores, for example, the number of prize balls, the number of game balls, game information, an error state, an unsent command, a program activation state flag, and power state information. On the other hand, the second area 708B is divided into a setting pointer storage area, an analysis pointer storage area, a reception command buffer area, and the like. The reception command buffer area is an area for storing received commands, and the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area are areas for storing pointers used for storage processing of received commands. The setting pointer storage area, the analysis pointer storage area, and the reception command buffer area will be described later.

  The first area 708A is an area where stored information is saved (backed up) when the power is turned off, and the second area 708B is an area initialized immediately after the power is turned on. For example, in an initialization process in which the power interruption is not detected (for example, step S115 in FIG. 41), all of these storage areas are initialized (cleared), and a power recovery process at the time of recovery start (step S109 in FIG. ) Initialize (clear) only some of them. That is, in the initialization process, the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared, but when power interruption occurs, only the information in the first area 708A is backed up. In the subsequent power recovery process, the information backed up in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 is restored (set) in the first area, and only the second area 708B is cleared. Thus, there are a plurality of timings for clearing the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and there are a plurality of areas to be cleared (first area 708A, second area 708B). Further, the second area 702B may be cleared even when the payout control unit 600 is activated to return, and is not backed up even when a power interruption occurs. In other words, the area for storing received commands (reception command buffer area), the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area (values of each pointer) used for the storage processing may be cleared even at the time of return start. It becomes an area that is not backed up when power is cut off. By adopting such a configuration, the second area is cleared immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 regardless of whether the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated or when the return control is started. In some cases, a prize ball command or the like can be prevented from being transmitted to the payout control unit 600 at an unintended timing.

  Although illustration is omitted here, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 may have the same configuration. That is, it may have a first area that is backed up when a power interruption occurs and a second area that is cleared by a subsequent power recovery process. Information stored in the first area of the main control unit 300 includes, for example, a big hit state (including the number of rounds), a high probability / short time state, a random number value of a reserved memory (special symbol, normal symbol), an error state, an unresolved state, etc. The transmission command, the operation state of the movable member (ordinary electric accessory, first type special electric accessory), and the like. In addition, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, only the information stored in the first area may be backed up when a power interruption occurs.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the initialization timing for the first area and the second area of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, a plurality of timings for initializing the RAM 708 are provided. In the figure, the first timing is the timing immediately after each of the payout control units 600 is turned on, and the second timing is the timing of the main control communication confirmation command reception process. The timing immediately after power-on of the payout control unit 600 will be described later (FIG. 64, etc.).
(1) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated

  In this case, both the first area 708A and the second area 708B are initialized at the first timing, and neither the first area 708A nor the second area 708B is initialized at the second timing. .

(2) When the main control unit 300 is a return start and the payout control unit 600 is an initial start or the like, it is the same as (1).
(3) When the main control unit 300 is initially activated and the payout control unit 600 is reactivated

In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and only the first area 708A is initialized at the second timing.
(4) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are restarted

In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and no area is initialized at the second timing.
<Payment control unit main process>

  The payout control unit 600 includes a CPU, a RAM 708, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. These CPU, RAM 708, ROM, and I / O port are constituted by a single microcomputer (dispensing control microcomputer). In addition, the payout control microcomputer may have the same function as the main control microcomputer in this specification, and may not include a part of the function (for example, a random number circuit). Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the payout control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600). When the voltage is less than 9.66 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the reception of this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process. In this embodiment, the payout control unit interrupt process is not performed when a command is received, and the payout control unit interrupt process is performed using a timer interrupt. However, the payout control unit interrupt process can be performed when a command is received by setting the serial communication circuit.
<Payout control unit / Payout control unit main process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the payout control unit main process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit main process.

  First, in step S301, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S302, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S303. move on.

  In step S303, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in a counter timer, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S305 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S306. Specifically, also in this step S304, the same process as in step S107 of the main control unit main process is performed, and if the RAM needs to be cleared, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and if the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S305. If it is information indicating suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S306 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S305 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S306, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the storage area to be cleared at the time of power recovery, among the storage areas of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is initialized. That is, since the state of this step is the first timing (the state immediately after the dispensing control unit 600 is turned on), the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared for initial startup or the like, If it is a return activation, only the second area 708B is cleared (see FIG. 63).

  In step S307, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, a part of error information provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S308, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main controller 300. Here, the process is performed by comparing the value referenced by the setting pointer in the RAM 708 with the value referenced by the analysis pointer, which will be described later. If there is unanalyzed data as a result of the determination, command analysis processing is performed in step S309, and if there is no unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, it is determined whether there is an untransmitted command. If there is an untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S311. If there is no untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S311, an untransmitted command is set in the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit side microcomputer 770, and is output as a transmission command.

  In step S312, as in step S302, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S308. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S313, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a checksum calculation numerical value storage area The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is performed. Further, only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is backed up.

In subsequent step S314, a process for monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is off is performed in the same manner as in step S302, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the payout control unit. Returning to the top of the main process (step S301), if the low voltage signal is on, step S314 is repeatedly executed.
<Discharge Control Unit / Discharge Control Unit Interrupt Process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, payout control unit interrupt processing executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt process. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter / timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). With this timer interrupt as a trigger, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Start.

  In step S401, the register value is saved, in step S402, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S403, WDT clear and restart are performed. In step S404, a received command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, a prize ball command is received), and if received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

  In step S405, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S406; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S414. As described above, since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from the payout control unit 600. For this reason, in this step, until the main control unit 300 is activated, a determination process is performed in order to wait for subsequent processes in steps S406 to S413.

  In step S406, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is stored in an input signal information storage area provided in the RAM. In addition, when the launch intensity state signal input from the launch control board 174 is a signal indicating the on state, the turbo state notification lamp 151 is turned on, and when the launch intensity state signal is a signal indicating the off state, the turbo condition notification lamp Control to turn off 151 is performed.

  In step S407, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, the motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. Update various timers including timers.

  In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this device monitoring process, whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300 is monitored, whether or not various errors have occurred, and depending on the error occurrence status The LED is turned off / on.

  In step S409, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication processing, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the number of payouts in the lending number of payout storage unit described later.

  In step S410, a payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S411, signal output processing is performed. In this signal output processing, a signal output to the outside from an external terminal board (not shown) is controlled.

  In step S412, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, a process for setting various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed. These various commands include commands related to errors. “Error” in this specification refers to “error” in this specification, such as payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, lower pan full error, payout error, main control communication error, door open error, etc. Includes everything you did. In step S413, port output processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this port output process, a process of outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 174 is performed.

  In step S414, the register value is restored. In step S415, the interrupt is set, and the process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the process of storing the received command in the RAM 708 (buffer) is performed by the received command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process, and the process of analyzing the command is the main process of the payout control unit. In the command analysis process (step S309).
<Receiving command processing (Example A, Example B)>

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the details of the reception command processing (step S404) of the payout control unit interruption processing shown in FIG. 65, and FIG. 66 (a) shows an example of the reception command processing (Example A). FIG. 66 (b) is a flowchart showing another example (embodiment B) of the received command process.

  Referring to FIG. 11A, in the reception command processing of the embodiment A, first, in step S501, a specific bit (reception data full flag) of the status register 772 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to for main control. Whether or not a command is received from unit 400 is determined. The reception data full flag is set when there is data in the reception data register 774. When a command transmitted from the main control unit 400 is received by the reception data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, the received command is stored in the A register 722. If there is a received command in the A register 722, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S502, the reception command of the A register 722 is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) using a pointer (described later).

  In the embodiment A, when there is a received command, the received command is always stored in the received command buffer area. Commands that should not be accepted (unauthorized commands) are excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process.

  Referring to FIG. 6B, in the received command processing of the embodiment B, first, in step S601, the received data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to, and the command reception from the main control unit 400 is performed. Determine presence or absence. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not a main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604; otherwise, the process ends. The prize ball command acceptance permission flag will be described later.

  In step S604, the received command is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

  In Example B, commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in a buffer (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. More specifically, the data in the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in, for example, the A register 722 of the CUP core register 720, and then stored in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, a command that should not be accepted (an illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. In addition, before the determination process of step S1603, you may perform the process which determines whether the received command is a prize ball command. Thus, when a command that should not be received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be eliminated by the determination process.
<Command analysis processing>

  With reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process of FIG. 64 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of command analysis processing (Example C). For example, as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 64, when the process shown in FIG. 67 (Example C) is performed, the received command process of the payout control part interrupt process shown in FIG. In step S404), the process of FIG. 66A (Example A) is performed. Or it is good also as a process which combines either the received command process of Example A, and the command analysis process of Example C or Example D. Not limited to this, the reception command processing of the embodiments A and B and the command analysis processing of the embodiments C and D can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

  With reference to FIG. 67, the command analysis processing of the embodiment C will be described. In step S701, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S702, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed. Details of this processing will be described later.

  In step S703, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, main control communication confirmation command reception processing is performed. The main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described later.

  In step S705, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process ends. In this step, if the received command is neither the main control communication confirmation command nor the prize ball command, the command analysis process is terminated without performing the process for the received command.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S707, and if not, the process ends. In step S707, prize ball command reception processing is performed. The process for receiving a prize ball command will be described later.
<Processing upon reception of main control communication confirmation command (Embodiment E)>

  Next, the main control communication confirmation command reception process (steps S704 and S805) in the command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing upon reception of the main control communication confirmation command.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after activation of the payout control unit 500. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and does not apply. In that case, the process proceeds to step S904. Whether or not it is the first received main control communication confirmation command determines whether or not the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is off, and the main control communication confirmation command received flag is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S903 to execute start-up processing (details will be described later).

In step S904, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S905, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In step S906, the process is terminated after the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON.
<Startup process>

  Next, the starting process (step S903) in the main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2B is a flowchart showing the flow of activation processing.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is an initial activation. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process ends. This step is determined by referring to the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (10H at initial startup and 11H at return startup). To do. That is, when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, the process proceeds to step S1002, and when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 11H, the process ends. Here, once it is determined that the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, since then, it will be at the time of return activation until the next initial activation (always the value of the main control communication confirmation command 11H), the value of the lower 4 bits is not referred to even if the main control communication confirmation command is received after the next time. Note that 10H may be transmitted after 11H is transmitted on the main control unit 300 side.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the payout control unit 600 is a return start (start to return to the state before power interruption). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process ends. .

  In step S1003, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited. In subsequent step S1004, a part of the RAM 708 is initialized. The area to be initialized here is that the main control unit 300 is initially activated (step S1001) and the payout control unit 600 is activated for return (step S1002), and the second timing (when the main control communication confirmation command is received). Process), only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 is initialized.

In step S1005 following step S1004, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Process for receiving a prize ball command (Example F, Example G)>

  With reference to FIG. 69, a process upon receiving a prize ball command (step S707 in FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 24A is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command reception process (embodiment F) in step S707 of FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 69 (a), the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command in the embodiment F will be described. First, in step S1101, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1102, the number of prize balls is added to the next prize ball number area based on the analysis data. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is displayed in the number of next prize ball requests in the next prize ball number area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. Are added and stored, and after the predetermined period, the number of prize balls for the next prize ball request number is continuously paid out. For this reason, in this step, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) stored as unanalyzed data in the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 408 is added to the number of next prize ball requests stored in the next prize ball number area. To do. Note that the value of the prize ball command in this embodiment is 23H (three-ball payout instruction), 2AH (10-ball payout instruction), and 2FH (15-ball payout instruction). In the case of a command other than 3H, AH, and FH, it may not be added (excluded).

In the next step S1103, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Timer update processing>

  Next, the timer update process (step S707) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing.

  In step S751, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is other than 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S752, and 1 is subtracted from the main control communication monitoring timer, and then the process proceeds to step S753. Then, the process proceeds to step S753. In the present embodiment, the period of the payout control unit timer interrupt process is about 1 ms, and 500 is set as the initial value of the main control communication monitoring timer in the main control communication confirmation command reception process, so step S751 The main control communication monitoring timer is determined to be 0 when about 1000 ms (= about 1 ms × 1000) has elapsed since the communication confirmation command was received from the main control unit 300. Also, the timer exemplified in FIG. 58 is updated in step S753.

In step S753, after other timer update processing is performed, the processing ends. As other timer update processing, for example, update processing of the lending request waiting timer and the lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. For example, timer update processing.
<Device monitoring process>

  Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0, and if it is 0 (a predetermined time (about 1000 ms in this embodiment) after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300). When the time elapses), the process proceeds to step S1302. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1302, after setting the main control communication error flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON. That is, when a predetermined period (1000 ms = 100 ms × 10) has elapsed after receiving the main control communication confirmation command, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the command indicating that the communication confirmation state is received from the main control unit 300 (that is, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command and before reaching 1000 ms), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off. It may be set.

  When the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality (magnetic error), as described above, the main control unit 300 does not execute the serial command management process in step S219, so the main control communication is performed to the payout control unit 600. The confirmation command cannot be sent. As a result, the payout control unit 600 causes a main control communication error, and shifts to a state in which the game ball cannot be fired. Here, in this example, it takes about 1000 ms from when the main control unit 300 detects the specific abnormality until the payout control unit 600 becomes a main control communication error. At least one ball can be launched. However, without being limited thereto, for example, when the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality, the command indicating that the specific abnormality is detected is transmitted to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 immediately permits the launch. You may comprise so that a signal may be turned off.

  In step S1304, other device state update processing is performed. In step S1305, display display setting processing is performed. In the display device display setting process, LED lighting / extinguishing / lighting control is performed based on the device state updated in step S1305. Here, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED (for example, an LED disposed on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100) for notifying the player that an error has occurred is turned on. When the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the excessive payout error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that the excessive payout error has occurred is turned on, and the excessive payout error flag is cleared. In that case, the LED is turned off. Further, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, an LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is set. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

In step S1306, after the other device monitoring process is performed, the process ends. Examples of the other device monitoring process include a process of stopping the launching and dispensing of the ball by the launching device 844 when the main control unit communication error flag is set to ON in step S1302.
<Discharge management process>

  Next, the payout management process (step S710) in the payout control unit interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout management process.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not a ball payout signal is input from the payout sensor 604. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information stored in the loan payout number storage unit provided in the RAM is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, the process proceeds to step S904. . In step S903, the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1).

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S905, and if not, the process proceeds to step S910. In step S905, the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1). In step S906, the payout amount information in the payout external output payout storage unit provided in the RAM is incremented (added by 1).

  In step S907, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for payout at the time of payout is 10 or more. . In step S908, the value of the payout external device output count provided in the RAM is incremented (added by one). In step S909, 10 is subtracted from the value of the payout amount information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout, and the subtraction result is stored in the payout amount information. In step S910, it is determined that there is an excessive payout error state, the information is stored in the RAM, and then the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S911, whether or not it is in a payout prohibition state, that is, during a payout excess error, receiving tray full sensor detection, not connected to main control unit, not connected to card unit 608, abnormal communication with card unit 608, etc. It is determined whether it corresponds to. If it is not in the payout prohibition state, the process proceeds to step S912. If it is in the payout prohibition state, the process ends.

  Even during detection of the pan full sensor, the payout control is performed so that the payout operation is stopped when the ball is full up to the passage connecting the payout device and the lower pan, and the payout device cannot physically pay out. You may comprise. Moreover, you may comprise so that the sub-control part 400 may alert | report a dish full tank based on the detection of a dish full tank sensor.

In step S912, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process proceeds to step S913. In step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process ends. In step S914, the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 is driven to pay out the game ball.
<Signal output processing>

  Next, the signal output process (step S711) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of signal output processing.

  In step S951, it is determined whether or not the payout external device output counter is greater than 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S952, and if not, the process proceeds to step S954. In step S952, a signal indicating the payout amount information (payout signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out) is output to the external terminal board 609. In step S953, the value of the external device output counter is decremented (one). Subtract).

  More specifically, the payout control unit 600 receives the above-described output schedule information and the payout request information from the main control unit 300, and then pays out the payout external output payout number storage unit in step S907 of the payout management process. If the value of the number information is 10 or more, the payout external device output counter is incremented in the next step S908. Accordingly, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 in step S952 of the signal output process (interrupt process). That is, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal indicating the payout completion number of game balls to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 after starting the payout of the ball in the payout process.

  In step S952, as other signal output processing, for example, based on the external output signal information, the external terminal board signals 1 and 2 toward the external terminal board 609, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine rental completion signal, and Processing for outputting payout error LEDs 1 to 4 is performed. Specifically, when 1 is set in Bit 0 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) for a predetermined period. (For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 2 (door opening information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as a CR gaming machine READY signal (PRDY signal) for a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms). And a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output when 0 is set. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as a CR gaming machine lending completion signal (EXS signal). For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When Bit 4 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED1 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 5 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED2 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED3 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED4 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.
<Send command processing>

  Next, the transmission command process (step S412) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74A is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

  In step S2001, transmission command output request information setting processing (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S2002, transmission command setting processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then the processing ends.

Here, an outline of processing until the dispensing control unit 600 transmits a command to the main control unit 300 will be described. First, in the transmission command output request information setting process in step S2001, a process for determining the type of command to be transmitted to the main control 300 is performed. Next, in the transmission command setting process in step S2002, the specific content of the transmission target command is determined, and information on the command to be transmitted (untransmitted command) is set in the transmission command buffer area of the RAM 708. Then, in the transmission command output process of step S311 of the payout control unit main process, the untransmitted command set in the transmission command buffer area is set in the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit side microcomputer 770, whereby the payout control unit Processing for transmitting a command from 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed.
<Transmission command output request information setting process>

  Next, the transmission command output request information setting process (step S2001) in the transmission command process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74B is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command output request information setting processing.

  In step S2003, a first type command output request information setting process (details will be described later) is performed. In a next step S2004, processing is performed after a second type command output request information setting process (details will be described later). Exit.

Here, the command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 includes a first type command that is a command transmitted in accordance with the transmission of the communication confirmation return command, and information to be transmitted. There is a second type of command to send. The first type commands are a device command 1, a device command 2, a device command 3, a device command 4, and a prize ball payout operation state command, and a second type command is a prize ball signal output request command and a device command. 2 (main control communication error only). Step S2003 described above is a process related to the determination (setting) of whether or not to transmit the first type command, and step S2004 described above determines whether or not to transmit the second type of command ( This is a process related to (setting). In this example, the device command 4 including the “firing intensity state” which is one of the characteristics of the present invention is the first type command, but may be the second type command.
<First type command output request information setting process>

  Next, the first type of command output request information setting process (step S2003) in the above-described transmission command output request information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the flow of the first type command output request information setting process.

In step S2101, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is off, the process ends. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, a communication confirmation return command output request is set. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 0 of the transmission command output request information (see FIG. 61; the same applies hereinafter). Here, the transmission command output request information may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 or may be stored in a CPU core register (for example, C register). In step S2103, another first type command output request is set, and the flow advances to step S2104. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 2 to Bit 6 of the transmission command output request information. In step S2104, the communication confirmation command reception flag is turned off. In next step S2105, the prize ball command reception permission flag is turned on, and the process is terminated. Here, in this example, when a communication confirmation return command output request is set, it is configured to set an output request such as a device command regardless of various statuses, but only when there is a change in status, for example. An output request may be set. In this example, when a communication confirmation return command output request is set, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bits 2 to 6, but only one of them is set. The other output request may be set when the next communication confirmation return command output request is set.
<Second type command output request information setting process>

  Next, a second type of command output request information setting process (step S2004) in the above-described transmission command output request information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the flow of the second type command output request information setting process.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2203, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, a main control communication error command output request (device command 2 output request) is set. Specifically, a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information.

Next, in step S2203, it is determined whether the prize ball signal flag is on or off. If it is off, the process ends. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the process ends after setting a prize ball signal command output request. Specifically, after a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, the process is terminated. Note that the processing of step 2201 to step 2202 is not executed when a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in the device command 2 output request in the processing of step 2003 (so as not to pass the processing). ) It may be configured. Also, the processing in steps 2203 to 2204 is not executed when a predetermined value (for example, “1”) is set in the prize ball signal command output request in the processing in step 2003 (does not pass the processing). To).
<Send command setting process>

  Next, the transmission command setting process (step S2002) in the above-described transmission command process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75C is a flowchart showing the flow of the transmission command setting process.

In step S2205, after setting the command based on the output request information, the process ends.
<Port output processing>

  Next, the port output process (step S413) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the flow of the port output process.

  In step S2301, the firing permission signal bit is cleared, and in the next step S2302, it is determined whether or not a main control unit communication error has occurred. If so, the process proceeds to step S2305 and has not occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether a CR unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2304. That is, the process proceeds to step S2304 only when it is not a main control unit communication error and a CR unit unconnected error.

In step S2304, the firing permission signal bit is set. As a result, a firing permission signal is output from the dispensing control board 170 toward the firing control board 174. In step S2305, after the other port output process is performed, the process ends.
<Transmission timing of launch intensity state (device command 4 including launch intensity state)>

  Next, the transmission timing of the above-described device command 4 (command including the firing intensity state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77A is a time chart showing an example of the transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the firing intensity state signal is ON, and FIG. 77B shows the firing intensity. 6 is a time chart showing an example of transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the status signal is off. FIG. 78 is a time chart illustrating an example of transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  Times T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 77 indicate the elapsed time from the timing when the firing intensity state signal is switched from on to off (or off to on), and the times T1 and T5 are times less than 100 ms (for example, 80 ms), times T2 and T6 are times longer than 100 ms (eg, 120 ms) longer than T1 and T5, and times T3 and T7 are times longer than T2 and T6 (eg, 180 ms).

  As described above, in this example, the payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit information of the firing intensity state signal to the main control unit 300 by setting bit 1 of the device command 4. However, since the timing after the time T1 has elapsed after the time T1 has elapsed since the launch intensity state signal was switched from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF) (see FIG. 55), the time T1 has elapsed and the time T5 has elapsed. At this timing, the firing intensity state of the device command 4 is turned off.

  Further, the timing after the time T2 has elapsed after the firing intensity state signal has been switched from off to on (or from on to off) and after T6 has exceeded 100 ms, but the payout controller 600 communicates with the main controller 300. Since the timing for transmitting the confirmation command has not arrived, the device command 4 itself is not transmitted at the timing after the lapse of T6 after the lapse of time T2.

  Then, after the time T3 has elapsed since the launch intensity state signal has been switched from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the timing after T7 has exceeded 100 ms, and the payout control unit 600 confirms communication with the main control unit 300. Since it is the timing for transmitting the command, the device command 4 whose firing intensity state is ON is transmitted at the timing after the elapse of time T3 and after the elapse of T7.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the firing intensity state signal received from the payout control unit 600 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a control command. As shown in FIG. It is configured to transmit only when the status signal changes from off to on (or from on to off). However, not only when there is a change, but every time the main control unit 300 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400, or a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 immediately after receiving the command from the payout control unit 600. You may comprise so that it may transmit at every timing.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 processes the command from the main control unit 300 at a timing of about once every 33 ms (analyzes the received command and executes a predetermined process). The determination is delayed by about 33 ms at the maximum as compared with the main control unit 300, and various processes performed based on the firing intensity state signal (for example, display based on the firing intensity state signal) are delayed for the time at least. (As described above, since the time after operating the turbo button 870g is delayed by each control unit, it will be delayed by 33 ms or more).
<Communication example 1 between main controller 300 and payout controller 600>

  Next, communication example 1 between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a timing chart of communication example 1 of main control unit 300 and payout control unit 600 and an example of changes in variables at a predetermined timing.

  The main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer in the serial command transmission process of the N (N is a positive integer) main control unit timer interrupt process, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to 0. At that time, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to an initial value of 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms), and the serial command status is set to 1 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command cannot be transmitted). Set. At the same timing, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612, and then the communication confirmation command transmission counter 1 For example, when the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 10, it is updated to 9.

  On the other hand, when the main control communication confirmation command is received in the command analysis process, the payout control unit 600 executes the main control communication confirmation command reception process. In this main control communication confirmation command reception processing, the main control communication monitoring timer is set to an initial value of 1000 (a value corresponding to a time of about 1000 ms), the main control communication error flag is set to OFF, and the communication confirmation is performed. Set the command reception flag to ON.

  Subsequently, since the payout control unit 600 determines that the communication confirmation command reception flag is on in step S1001 of the transmission command process, it sets the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, thereby enabling serial communication. After transmitting the communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 via the line 612, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF.

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600 in the serial command reception process of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process. 0 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command can be transmitted) is set, an initial value of 10 is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter, and 0 is set in the serial command communication error flag. Further, in the serial command transmission process of the N + 1th main control unit interrupt process, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer is updated from 25 to 24 by subtracting 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a prize ball command transmission condition is established in the prize ball command setting process of the N + 2 and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processing. By setting a numerical value corresponding to the ball command in the transmission data register, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.
<Example of prize ball command transmission timing>

  For example, in the period indicated by t1 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives a communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (after the winning ball command is ready to be sent), the winning ball command is sent to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 3th main control unit timer interruption process. Sending once.

  In the period indicated by t2 in the figure, after the communication confirmation command is received from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 (the prize ball command can be transmitted). Since the award ball command transmission condition is satisfied twice, the award ball command is issued once to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 2 and N + 3 main control unit timer interruption processes. Is sending.

  Also, during the period indicated by t3 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and before the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (before the winning ball command can be sent), the sending of the winning ball command is temporarily suspended. Then, in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, after waiting for a communication confirmation command to be received from the payout control unit 600 (waiting for the award ball command to be transmitted), the N + 1th main control unit timer interruption process. In the control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 once.

  FIG. 80A is an enlarged view of a time chart when a prize ball command is transmitted. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing indicated by the reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, FIG. 80B is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown at t3 in FIG. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. In addition, the main control unit 300 confirms reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then holds the payout control unit 600 on hold. The prize ball command that was being sent is sent once.

Returning to FIG. 79, during the period indicated by t <b> 4 in FIG. 79, the main control unit 300 determines that the award ball command transmission condition is satisfied twice before the N-th main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interruption process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, but immediately after that, the timing for transmitting a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 has arrived. Therefore, the serial command status is set to 1 (the prize ball command cannot be transmitted). For this reason, the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended, and it waits for reception of a communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600 in the N + 2th main control part timer interruption process (a state in which the prize ball command can be sent). In the N + 2 main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.
<Example of serial communication error>

  In the period indicated by t6 in the figure, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, and then the Nth and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processes. Since the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command has not been received, the serial command status is held at 1.

Thereafter, the main control unit 300 waits for the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command until the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter becomes 10 to 0. If there is still no response, as shown in t8 in FIG. The serial communication error flag is changed from 0 to 1. If there is a response from the payout control unit 600 thereafter, the serial communication error flag is changed from 1 to 0 and the serial communication is restarted, as shown at t9 in FIG.
<When multiple winnings are detected at the start opening or winning opening>

FIG. 81 (a) is an example of a time chart in the case where a plurality of winnings at the start opening or winning opening is detected in one main control unit timer interruption process. In this example, the balls enter the start opening or the winning opening at the timings indicated by reference signs A and I, respectively, and then start at the timing indicated by reference signs B and J in the Nth main control unit timer interruption process. A ball entering the mouth or winning a prize is detected. In addition, at the same timing indicated by reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, and the subsequent N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process is performed. At the timing indicated by the symbol K, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.
<Modification of Communication Confirmation Command from Payment Control Unit 600>

  FIG. 81 (b) is a time chart showing a modification of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. Further, the main control unit 300 confirms the reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then receives a prize ball for the payout control unit 600. Sending the command once. In response to this prize ball command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at a timing indicated by a symbol M of the M + 3th payout control unit main process.
<External terminal board signal output example>

Next, an output example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that “prize ball” in the drawing indicates the timing of winning detection by the main control unit 300 and the number of winning balls (the number of payout requests), and “payout” indicates the timing of game ball payout by the payout control unit 600. The number of payouts is shown. The “payout schedule information signal” indicates the waveform of the payout schedule information signal (external terminal board signal 9) output by the main controller 300, and the “payout information signal” is output by the payout controller 600. The waveform of the payout information signal (external terminal board signal 1) is shown.
<External terminal board signal output example 1>

  FIG. 82 is a time chart showing an output example 1 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main controller 300 detects the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the winning port counter updating process (step S216) by detecting the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. While storing 3 as the number of prize balls in the storage area, a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 3) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 in the serial command management process (step S219).

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Although 1 is added to the number of output requests, since the total number of winning balls is 3, processing for adding 1 to the number of output requests is not performed. Further, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more, but here the number of output requests is 0. The process of outputting the payout schedule information signal is not performed.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (3 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process (step S503) of the command analysis process. The payout amount information in the payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) and the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) are respectively added to payout for payout The payout number information in the number storage unit is updated to 3, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 3. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout amount storage unit is 3, after paying out three game balls, The number-of-payout information in the number-of-payouts storage unit is updated to 0 (= 3-3).

  Subsequently, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 outputs an external number when the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the terminal board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 3, the payout information signal is Processing for output is not performed.

  Subsequently, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the main control section 300 stores the number of winning balls in the winning ball number storage area corresponding to the variable winning opening 234 in the winning opening counter updating process (step S216). 15 and, in the serial command management process (step S 219), a prize ball command including information on the number of withdrawal requests (= 15 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 15 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 15 to update the total number of winning balls to 5, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. The number of output requests is updated to 1.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period Ta as the first payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (3 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 18. Further, the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout management process (step S710) and the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit to pay out the game ball. The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, the payout is made after paying out 15 game balls. The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) or more, Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit at the time of payout is 18, the value of the payout number information The payout information signal is output once at a timing when it is determined that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). In this example, a high level signal is output over the period Tb as the payout information signal.

Here, the high-level period Ta of the payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300 and the high-level period Tb of the payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are not particularly limited. Ta is set longer than the period Tb (the shortest period is 800 ms). With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference in pulse width.
<External terminal board signal output example 2>

  FIG. 83 is a time chart showing an output example 2 of the external terminal board signal. As described above, in the serial command management process (step S219), the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number 10, and if applicable, calculates 10 from the total number of winning balls. Subtract and add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After that, since the total number of winning balls after subtraction is 14, which is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number of winning balls 14, and the total number of winning balls is updated to 4. Has been updated.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 2. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the first payout schedule information signal, and then in the subsequent external output signal setting process, the low level signal is once In the external output signal setting process thereafter, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (9 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 24. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, after paying out 15 game balls, The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output part for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more, the external terminal board The processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via 609 is performed, but here, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 24, which is a predetermined number 10 or more. While outputting the information signal once, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 24 in the payout number output unit for payout external output, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for payout is updated to 14. Yes. Further, the payout control unit 600 outputs the payout information signal once again and outputs the payout information signal once again because the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout after payout after subtraction is 14 or more. The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 14 in the output payout number storage unit, and the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is updated to 4. In this example, as the first payout information signal, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period, and then a low level signal is output once over a period Td, and then the second payout information signal. As a result, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period.

  In this example, the output of the payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output of the payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 are performed twice each, and the first payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 is performed. The output period of the high level signal and the output period of the high level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. With such a configuration, the external device can detect the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.

  Further, the first payout information signal and the second payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are larger than the interval Tc between the first payout schedule information signal and the second payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300. The interval Td is set longer. With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference between the output interval of the payout schedule information signal and the output interval of the payout information signal.

  In this example, in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 because the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number 10 or more. Is updated to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After the subtraction, the total number of winning balls is 14, which is equal to or more than the predetermined number 10. Therefore, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number 14 of winning balls. Although the number of winning balls is updated to 4 and the number of output requests is updated to 2, it is not limited to this example.

  Therefore, for example, in the N (N is a positive integer) serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and outputs it. After updating the number of requests to 1, once the serial command management process is completed, the first payout information signal is output in the external output signal setting process, and then in the N + 1th and subsequent serial command management processes, the total number of winning balls The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from 14 to update the total number of winning balls to 4 and the output request number is updated to 1, and then the second payout information signal may be output in the external output signal setting process. That is, instead of updating all the output request numbers in one serial command management process, the output request number may be updated in a plurality of serial command management processes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing time of the serial command management process varies depending on the number of winning balls, the output timing of the payout information signal is not delayed, and stable. In some cases, game control can be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 3>

  FIG. 84 is a time chart showing an output example 3 of the external terminal board signal. Here, the “symbol-related signal” in the figure indicates the waveform of the symbol determination frequency information signal (external terminal board signal 3) output by the main control unit 300, but other start port information signals (external terminal board signal). Signal 4) and jackpot information 1 to 4 signals (external terminal board signals 5 to 8) can be replaced (considered in the example described below).

  In this example, the main control unit 300 outputs a high-level signal as a payout schedule information signal and a high-level signal as a symbol-related signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. Output. Thereafter, in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing, a low level signal is output as the payout schedule information signal, and a high level signal is output as the symbol related signal. That is, the high level signal is output for the same period as the payout schedule information signal and the symbol related signal.

With this configuration, the external device can simultaneously detect the payout schedule information signal and the symbol-related signal, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.
<External terminal board signal output example 4>

  FIG. 85 is a time chart showing an output example 4 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, in the N (N is a positive integer) number of external output signal setting processes, the main control unit 300 has an output request count of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected). In this case, the payout schedule information signal is output by outputting the payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes without outputting the payout schedule information signal in the Nth external output signal setting process. The output is delayed by a predetermined period from the first external output signal setting process.

  On the other hand, when the number of output requests is 1 or more and the specific abnormality detection flag is on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the N-th external output signal setting process, the main control unit 300 performs the external output signal setting process. In this case, the symbol-related signal is not output, and the symbol-related signal is not output in the (N + 1) th and subsequent external output signal setting processes.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud. In this example, the symbol related signal is not output when the specific abnormality detection flag is on. However, as with the payout schedule information signal, the output is delayed with respect to the original output timing. However, there are cases where the same effect can be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 5>

  FIG. 86 is a time chart showing an output example 5 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the number of winning balls by winning the variable winning opening 234 is set to 10.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the number of winning balls in the variable winning slot 234 in the winning slot counter updating process (step S216) by detecting winning in the variable winning slot 234. 10 is stored, and in the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= 10 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 10 and the predetermined number 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total winning ball number 10 to update the total winning ball number to 0, and the output request number is updated to 1. .

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the payout schedule information signal.

  In other words, in this example, the number of winning balls (10 in this example) by winning the variable winning opening 234 and the threshold value (10 in this example) as a condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same. The number of output requests is updated to 1 in one serial command management process, and a high level signal is output as a payout schedule information signal in the subsequent external output signal setting process.

In this way, if the configuration is such that the number of winning balls for winning a specific winning opening and the threshold value that is the condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same, each time a specific winning opening is won, the payout is made. Since the schedule information signal can be output once, it is possible to estimate the number of winnings for a specific winning opening. For example, when the number of winnings per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined as abnormal. Appropriate processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 6>

  FIG. 87 is a time chart showing an output example 6 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the winning to the variable winning opening 234 twice, and therefore, as the first payout schedule information signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. After outputting a high level signal for a predetermined period Ta, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing after the elapse of the predetermined period Tc. .

  On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S711) that the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). The payout information signal is output once for a predetermined period Tb.

In this example, the output period of the high-level signal of the second payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output period of the high-level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. . With such a configuration, the external device can detect the second payout schedule information signal and the first payout information signal at the same time. New information may be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 7>

  FIG. 88 is a time chart showing an output example 7 of the external terminal board signal. FIG. 88 (a) is a partial extraction of the time chart of FIG. 83, and FIG. It is a time chart at the time of determining with specific abnormality detection flag ON in the example shown to a).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In such a case, the payout schedule information signal is not output. With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud.
<External terminal board signal output example 8>

  FIG. 89 is a time chart showing an output example 8 of the external terminal board signal. FIG. 89 (a) shows a part of the time chart in the normal state, and FIG. It is a time chart.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In this case, the payout schedule information signal is not output, but the security information signal is output. On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S1708) that the value of the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in this example). A payout information signal is output.

With this configuration, even when the security information signal cannot be output to the external device due to disconnection or the like, the external device can issue the payout schedule information signal from the main control unit 300 and the payout information signal from the payout control unit 600. Based on the information, it may be possible to determine whether there is an abnormality related to payout. In addition, the external device can detect the security signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can sometimes obtain new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. When the security information signal is output, the payout schedule information signal may be output at a timing delayed by a predetermined time from the output timing of the payout schedule information signal when the security information signal is not output.
<Embodiment 3>

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 90 to 93 and these reference numerals are used only for the explanation in the third embodiment.

  FIG. 90 shows an example of power supply among the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described above. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are drawn from the power supply board 182 including the power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric gaming machines, and the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are extracted. Both are connected to a payout board (payout control board) 170 including a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC (direct current) voltage of 12V is applied to the power supply line pl01, and a direct current voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl02. A power supply line pl03 is drawn from the payout board 170, and the power supply line pl03 is connected to a main board (main control board) 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game. The power supply line pl03 is connected to the power supply line pl01 in the payout board 170. Accordingly, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 through the payout board 170. Note that these voltage values are merely examples, and it is of course possible to apply voltages having different voltage values depending on the circuit to be driven.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90B, the power supply line pl04, the power supply line pl05, and the power supply line pl06 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl04 is connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl05 and the power supply line pl06 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl04 and the power supply line pl05, and a DC voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl06. That is, when a certain time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is directly supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 without going through the payout board 170.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90C, the power supply line pl07, the power supply line pl08, the power supply line pl09, and the power supply line pl10 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl08 are connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl09 and the power supply line pl10 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time has elapsed after power-on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl09, a DC5V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl08, and a DC voltage different from DC5V / 12V is applied to the power supply line pl10. Is done. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, two types of voltages, DC5V and DC12V, are directly supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 without passing through the payout board 170.

  FIG. 91 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. This example will be described using the configuration shown in FIG. The power supply line pl03 drawn from the payout board 170 is drawn into the main board 156 and connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter 7001. The DC-DC converter 7001 has a function of converting DC12V voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 into DC5V. The voltage of DC5V generated by the DC-DC converter 7001 is applied to the power supply line pl11.

  A plurality of branch lines are connected to the power supply line pl11, and a predetermined branch line is connected to the power supply terminal A of the reset IC 7003. When a certain period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied as a drive voltage to the power supply terminal A, thereby driving the reset IC 7003. Further, another branch line branched from the power supply line pl11 is connected to the power supply terminal F of the microcomputer (CPU) 304. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied to the power supply terminal F as a drive voltage for the microcomputer 304. Note that the drive voltages of the reset IC 7003 and the microcomputer 304 are not the same and may be different. Further, the voltage value itself of the drive voltage of the reset IC 7003 or the microcomputer 304 may be different from the voltage value of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl11.

  The signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl11 through another branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B and grasps the state of the driving voltage of the microcomputer 304 applied to the terminal F of the microcomputer 304. On the other hand, the signal input terminal C of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl03 via a predetermined branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C and grasps the state of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03.

  The reset IC 7003 is provided with at least two signal output terminals D and E. A reset signal (start signal) is output from the signal output terminal D, and a low voltage signal is output from the signal output terminal E. If the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset IC 7003 negates the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D. To. On the other hand, if it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B has exceeded the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted (valid). That is, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D becomes a negated state, and the signal input terminal When the terminal voltage of B exceeds the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted. Note that the number of terminals of the reset IC 7003 is arbitrary, and the illustrated one is only an example, and only the terminals necessary for the description are illustrated, and the number and arrangement positions of the terminals may be the same as those illustrated. And it doesn't have to be the same.

  The signal output terminal D of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal G of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl12. The signal input terminal G is used as a system reset (XSRST) terminal. For this reason, when the reset signal output to the signal line pl12 is asserted, the microcomputer 304 shifts to the security mode. Thus, the reset IC 7003 functions as the start signal output circuit 340 shown in FIG. 4 with the signal output terminal D functioning as a reset signal output terminal.

  When the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C does not exceed a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the reset IC 7003 asserts the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C exceeds a predetermined voltage value, the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is negated.

  The signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal H of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl13. The signal input terminal H is used as one of the data terminals D0 to D7. For example, the microcomputer 304 repeats the processing of step S103 and step S105 of FIG. 42, for example, until the low voltage signal output to the signal line pl13 is negated. As described above, the reset IC 7003 functions as the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG. 4 with the signal output terminal E functioning as a constant voltage signal output terminal.

  In this example, the predetermined threshold voltage value of the signal input terminal C when the low voltage signal on the signal line pl13 changes from the asserted state to the negated state (or vice versa) is set to 9V, but is not limited thereto. For example, if the voltage at which the microcomputer 304 can continue the power interruption process is applied to the power supply terminal F during the period required from the power interruption detection to the power interruption process in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interruption process described above. Good. The DC5V voltage output from the DC-DC converter 7001 to the power supply line pl11 starts to gradually decrease around the time when the DC12V voltage of the power supply line pl03 input to the DC-DC converter 7001 decreases to about 7V. Therefore, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C becomes less than a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is changed from the negated state to the asserted state. If, for example, 9V is used as the predetermined voltage value, even if the voltage of the power supply line pl11 gradually decreases, the microcomputer during the period required for the power interruption process from the power interruption detection in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interrupt process 304 can continue to operate.

  FIG. 92 shows an example of power supply in the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. When compared with the power supply configuration shown in FIG. 91, the DC-DC converter 7001 and the reset IC 7003 arranged in the main board 156 in FIG. 91 are arranged on the power supply board 182 in the configuration shown in FIG. Yes. Thereby, the power supply line pl11 and the signal lines pl12 and pl13 are wired across the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to supply all the power of DC5V, DC12V, and other voltage values with the power supply board 182, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a power supply circuit on the main board 156 or the payout board 170. In some cases, there is a margin in the above circuit layout.

FIG. 93 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. FIG. 93A shows a state in which the branch line of the power supply line pl11 is connected to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT and the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI of the CPU 304, and a DC5V voltage is constantly applied to both terminals XINT and XNMI. ing. By doing so, the interrupt signals input to both terminals XINT and XNMI always maintain a negated state, so that malfunction due to noise or the like can be reliably prevented when an external interrupt by the interrupt terminal is not used. The configuration shown in FIG. 93B illustrates a case where the terminal H of the CPU 304 in the configuration shown in FIG. 91 functions as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Note that the symbol X of the interrupt terminal indicates low active and the L signal is input to be in an asserted state, but in the case of a circuit that is in a high active and asserted state, the L signal (for example, 0 V) is always input. Like that.
<Received command processing, received command acquisition processing, received command analysis processing (details)>

  Details of the received command processing, received command acquisition processing, and received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS.

  94 and 95 are diagrams showing an example of the reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the reception command buffer area is provided as a ring buffer that uses a storage area (buffer) of a fixed length (here, addresses 00H to 03H) in a ring shape and stores data in the buffer. Here, the storage area of addresses 00H to 03H is illustrated as the buffer size, but the buffer size is not limited to this. In the receive command buffer area, data (receive command value) is set and analyzed using a data write pointer (setting pointer) and a data read pointer (analysis pointer) as shown in the figure. When both pointers reach the end of the buffer (here, the bottom layer), they are rotated back to the beginning of the buffer (here, the top layer). In this way, data is processed conceptually as if it were a ring, and data overflows with only the actual area (fixed-length buffer area) and two pointer variables (setting pointer and analysis pointer). It is possible to realize buffer management without any problems.

  FIG. 94 is an example in which the value of the setting pointer directly indicates the address of the storage area. First, as shown in FIG. 5A, both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to the position of the start address (00H) of the reception command buffer area. In the ring buffer, the read pointer (analysis pointer) reads data from the current reference position, but when the write pointer (setting pointer) matches the reference address, the reading of data ends (waits). That is, in the state of FIG. 5A, the positions of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are the same, so the CUP of the payout control unit 600 is waiting for data reading.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH (award ball command for instructing 10 ball payout)) from the main control unit 300, the value of the received command ( 2AH) is written ((b) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((c) in the figure) Note that in FIGS. “H” indicating “” is omitted.

  Since the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to different addresses, the analysis pointer starts reading data. In other words, the analysis pointer refers to the value (2AH in this case) stored at the head address (00H), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, and jumps to the corresponding module ((c) in the figure). . After the value is read by the analysis pointer, the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((d) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (01H) ((e) in the figure). Data may be read after incrementing the value of the analysis pointer.

  Next, when a received command (for example, 23H (a prize ball command for instructing a three-ball payout) is received, the value (23H) of the received command is written at the position (01H) of the setting pointer ((f) in the figure) and set. The pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((g) in the figure) When the next reception command (for example, 2FH (a prize ball command for instructing 15 ball payout) is received, the pointer is moved to the setting pointer position (02H). The value (2FH) of the received command is written ((h) in the figure), the setting pointer moves to the next address (03H) ((i) in the figure), and the analysis pointer is stored at the current address (01H). The received value (23H here) is referred to, the content of the received command is analyzed from the value and jumped to the corresponding module ((i) in the figure), and then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared. When the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared, the analysis pointer moves to the next address (02H) ((k) in the same figure). The buffer value (2FH) is read and analyzed (because they do not match), then the storage area referred to by the analysis pointer is cleared ((l) in the figure), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (03H) ( (M) in the figure.

In the state shown in FIG. 5M, since the reference addresses of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer match, the analysis pointer waits for data reading. When the next reception command (for example, 23H) is received, the value (23H) of the reception command is written in the setting pointer position (03H) ((n) in the figure), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (00H). ((O) in the figure). The analysis pointer reads the value 23H at the current address 03H and performs analysis ((o) in the figure). Similarly, data writing and reading are performed.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of the reception command buffer area. In the example shown in the figure, the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is different from the address of the storage area where the data is actually stored. That is, based on the position (its value) referenced by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, the address where the data is stored is calculated, and the data is written and read.

  Referring to FIG. 94A, for example, an area from addresses 7F10H to 7F13H is secured as a reception command buffer area in which reception commands are stored. On the other hand, the setting pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0EH of the RAM 708, and the analysis pointer is stored in, for example, the address 7F0FH of the RAM 708. .

  That is, in the state shown in the figure, the leading value 00H is set for both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, and no data is stored in the reception command buffer area.

  In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first received command (for example, 2AH) from the main control unit 300, it performs a predetermined calculation process based on the value (00H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the received command The value (7F10H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated. Then, the reception command (2AH) is stored at the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area ((b) in the figure). After the received command is stored, the position of the setting pointer is updated (incremented) and moved to the next address. The analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (00H), and calculates the value (7F10H) of the start address of the reception command buffer area. Then, the data (2AH) at the address 7F10H in the received command buffer area is read and analyzed ((c) in the figure). Thereafter, the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area is cleared ((d) in the figure), the analysis pointer is updated, and the value of the next address is set ((e) in the same figure). In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the next reception command (for example, 23H) from the main control unit 300, it performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the value (01H) set in the setting pointer, and receives the reception command. The value (7F11H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated, and the received command (23H) is stored in the address 7F11H ((f) in the figure). Thereafter, the setting pointer refers to the next address, the analysis pointer performs a predetermined calculation process based on the set value (01H), calculates the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area, and stores the stored data ( 23H) is obtained and analyzed. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated to store and analyze data.

Note that values set to the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are actually values of 0 to 15 (4 bits), and the values are updated by an increment function. Although the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are 8 bits, the result of logical product of the value to be set (4 to 0 to 15) and 0FH is set in the pointer. Is possible.
<Configuration of storage area>

  96 (a) and 96 (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area used in the reception command process, the reception command acquisition process, and the reception command analysis process according to this embodiment. FIG. 96C shows an example of a command (reception command) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic diagram of a status register 772 and a reception data register 774, which are part of the built-in registers of the payout control microcomputer 770 (see FIG. 39). Information indicating the state of the serial communication circuit is stored in the status register 772, and a reception command is stored in the reception data register 774. Here, although shown as a reception data register 774 for storing a command received by the payout control unit 600, a transmission / reception data register for storing transmission / reception data may be used.

  FIG. 96B is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. As shown in the figure, the second area 708B is composed of areas from addresses 7F0EH to 7F13H, for example, the address 7F0EH is a setting pointer storage area 7081, and the address 7F0FH is an analysis pointer storage area 7082. Addresses 7F10H to 7F13H are a reception command buffer area (ring buffer) 708R.

The reception command buffer area 708R stores the reception command shown in FIG. The content of FIG. 7C is the same as that shown in FIG.
<Receive command processing (details)>

  With reference to FIG. 97, an example of the received command process will be described in detail. As described above, the received command process is a process (see FIG. 66) performed in step S404 of the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 65). In the following description, as shown in FIG. 93, an example is shown in which the address of the received command buffer area is indirectly calculated and referred to based on the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer. That is, in the initial state, the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are both 00H, and the area where data is stored first is the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area.

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 reads received data (received command) from the received data register 774 when “reception complete” is made with reference to a specific bit of the status register 772 (1).

  As an example, the storage location of the reception command is obtained based on the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the storage destination address 7F11H is calculated by adding the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R to the value (01H) of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (address 7F0EH) (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R (3). When a reception command is read from the reception data register 774, a specific bit in the status register 772 is cleared. Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the setting pointer (4).

Note that the CPU of the payout control unit 600 may store the reception command of the reception data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R and clear the specific bit of the status register 772.
<Receiving command acquisition processing (details)>

  With reference to FIG. 98, an example of the received command acquisition process will be described in detail. The received command acquisition process is a process (step S701 in FIG. 67) performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 64).

  First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 compares the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (here 02H) with the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 (here 01H), and these values do not match. If so, perform analysis. As an example, the storage location of the data to be analyzed (reception command) is obtained based on the value in the analysis pointer storage area 7082 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the value of the analysis pointer (here 01H) and the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R are added to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the data stored at the address 7F11H in the reception command buffer area 708R in another area (for example, the A register 722), and clears the data at the address 7F11H in the reception command buffer area 708R. (3). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the analysis pointer (4).

Thereafter, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the type of received command stored in the A register 722 (whether it is a prize ball command or a communication confirmation command) and jumps to the corresponding module.
<Received command analysis processing>

  An example of the received command analysis process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The received command analysis process is a process (step S702 in FIG. 67) performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relationship between an example of received command data and a jump table. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a setting example (contents) of a received command in bit units, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of a jump table.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the received command is 8-bit data, the upper 4 bits indicate the command type, and the lower 4 bits indicate the actual data. For example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “1”, it is a main control communication confirmation command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “0”, it indicates that it is the initial start time, When the value of the 4-bit actual data portion is “1”, it indicates that the recovery is being started. Further, for example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is “2”, it indicates a prize ball command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is “3”, it indicates that 3 balls are paid out, When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “10”, it indicates that 10 balls are paid out. When the value of the lower 4 bits of the actual data portion is “15”, it indicates that 15 balls are paid out. Show. The upper 4 bits of the command type and the lower 4 bits of actual data are temporarily stored separately, which will be described later.

  FIG. 4B shows an example of a jump table. The jump table is provided in the ROM control area of the ROM 706 of the payout control unit 600, and the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address 0750H of the main control communication confirmation command reception process (program) are stored in the address 0700H. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the head address (0750H in this case) of the main control communication confirmation command reception process are stored in 0701H. In addition, the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0780H) of the winning ball number command reception processing (program) is stored at address 0702H, and 0703H is received when the winning ball number command is received. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the processing start address 0780H are stored.

  The CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and when it is “1”, it refers to the address 0700H of the jump table in FIG. Jump to the start address (here 0750H). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the winning ball command, and in the case of “2”, it refers to the jump table address 0702H of FIG. Jump to the top address (0780H in this example).

  FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are diagrams showing details of the received command analysis process, and showing an example of analyzing the received command stored in the A register in (3) of FIG.

  FIG. 100A shows a case where “00100011” is stored in the A register as, for example, a prize ball command (23H) instructing to pay out three balls. First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 saves the value of the A register to the B register in order to determine the command type later. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off in step S1403 of FIG. 66B, the process is terminated without storing the received command in the buffer, If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off in step S706 of FIG. 67, the process is terminated without performing the prize ball command reception process. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 100A (after the prize ball command is stored in the buffer), it is analyzed that the prize ball command is referenced with reference to the upper 4 bits and the prize ball command cannot be accepted (the prize ball command). If the acceptance permission flag is off), the command may be discarded and the process terminated. Even when a command other than the main control communication confirmation command and the prize ball command is discarded, or when an unintended prize ball command is discarded by turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag, the main control unit 300 It is not necessary to send an error message.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4B, in order to obtain the value of the lower 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the values “00100011” of the A register and 0FH (“000011111”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value of the actual data portion (“00000011”) is obtained.

  Next, the value (actual data portion) of the A register is saved in the C register as shown in FIG. 8C, and then the B register is used to determine the command type as shown in FIG. The value “00100011” is stored (returned) in the A register. Note that the order of the comparison process of the actual data portion and the return process for determining the command type may be reversed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 4E, in order to obtain the value of the upper 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the value “00100011” of the A register and F0H (“11110000”) is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value indicating the command type (“00100000”) is obtained.

  In FIG. 101 (a), the value of the A register is shifted right four times. As a result, the value of the A register is “00000010” as shown in the case of the prize ball command (“00000001” in the case of the main control communication confirmation command).

  In FIG. 5B, the value of the A register is subtracted (decremented) to obtain “00000001” for offset calculation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5C, the value after decrementing of the A register is compared with a specific value (eg, 02H in this case) (CP 02H instruction). At this timing, the value of the A register (after decrementing) is normally 00H or 01H. Therefore, if a carry occurs, it is a normal command, and if no carry occurs, an unintended command Can be judged. Therefore, if no carry occurs, the process is terminated as an unintended command. The comparison with a specific value may be performed before the subtraction process.

  Next, in FIG. 9D, the start address 0700H of the jump table shown in FIG. 99B is stored in the HL register (pair register) 724 of the payout control unit 600.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5E, the value “00000010”, which is twice the value of the A register in FIG. 5B, is added to the value of the HL register, and the value is stored in the HL register after the addition. Jump to the current address (transition to the module). A jump to an address stored in the HL register is performed by, for example, a “JP (HL) instruction”. In this example, the process jumps to the address 0780H stored in the address 0702H of the jump table, and the process at the time of receiving the winning ball number command is executed.

  Although not shown, when the received command is a main control communication confirmation command, the value of the A register in FIG. 4B is “00000000”. That is, the double value of the A register value added to the HL register in FIG. 5E is also “00000000”, and jumps to the address 0750H stored in the address 0700H of the jump table. Processing on reception is executed.

  When the process shifts to the process for receiving a prize ball number command after the figure (e), the actual data portion saved in the C register in FIG. 100 (c) becomes the prize ball number. In step S1102 of FIG. 69 (a) or step S1203 of FIG. 69 (b), a process of adding to the next prize ball number area is performed. In addition, although the illegal measure about the number of prize balls is not performed, as an illegal measure for the number of prize balls, a process of referring to the actual data portion (lower 4 bits) saved in the C register may be performed.

  The reception command processing, reception command acquisition processing, and reception command analysis processing have been described above. However, the transmission command processing (step S412 in FIG. 65) and the transmission command output processing (step S311 in FIG. 64) are described above. The process may be executed in the same manner as at least one of the received command acquisition process and the received command analysis process.

  Although the main control communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted to the payout control unit 600, it may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. In this case, only the first main control communication confirmation command is awarded as the prize ball. You may make it transmit separately from a command. Further, for example, the main control communication confirmation command 1 may be transmitted for each prize ball command 1 transmission. Further, one transmission per interrupt of the main control unit timer interrupt processing or a plurality of transmissions per interrupt, a transmission per group per interrupt, a plurality of transmissions within a range not exceeding 255 per interrupt, etc. .

  Further, when a prize ball command is transmitted / received when a prize ball is generated, transmission / reception of information related to the state of the device or the like results in an excessive increase in the amount of communication. Therefore, the main controller 300 and the payout controller 600 periodically When the communication confirmation command is transmitted / received, the payout control unit 600 may transmit / receive information on the state of the device or the like at the transmission / reception timing of the communication confirmation command.

  Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is not received, the error-related command may not be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In this case, some errors may be transmitted using an error command, such as transmitting a predetermined type of error.

  When a main control communication confirmation command is received, a plurality of types of commands may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 at different timings (for example, different main processes). For example, when a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the same time, for example, the error commands may be transmitted in the order of the upper 4 bits, or may be transmitted in the order of the higher 4 bits. Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

  In addition, the flow of each process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the illustrated flow as long as the same function can be obtained, and the processing order can be changed as appropriate.

  Also, the reception command process (step S404) may be executed in the payout control unit main process, and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed in the payout control part interrupt process, or the reception command process in the payout control part main process. (Step S404) and command analysis processing (Step S309) may be executed, or reception command processing (Step S404) and command analysis processing (Step S309) may be executed in the payout control unit interrupt processing. Good.

In the prize ball command reception process shown in FIG. 69 (b), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag determination process (FIG. 66 (b) in the reception command process (step S404) in the payout control unit interruption process (FIG. 65). In step S1403), even if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag in this step is on, the process proceeds to the next step S1203. In other words, even if it is determined that the command is invalid in the payout control unit interrupt process, the process as a normal received command may be performed in this step.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Special figure determination table>

  FIG. 102 (a) shows an example of the low probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 102 (b) shows the high probability state table for special figure success / failure determination (Special Figure 1). An example is shown. FIG. 10C shows an example of a special figure success / failure determination low probability state table (Special Figure 2), and FIG. 10D shows a special figure success / failure determination high probability state table (Special Figure 2). ) Is an example.

In these special figure success / failure determination tables, presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), lottery value data for special figure big hit determination, and special figure variable game success / failure results are displayed. Stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).
<Special figure success / failure judgment table / Special figure variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the case of special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) in the jackpot judgment of special figure 1 variable game, refer to the low probability state table for special figure success / failure judgment (special figure 1) shown in FIG. When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and information indicating that the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is a big hit is set. (Hereinafter, setting the jackpot information in the jackpot flag storage area is referred to as “turning on the jackpot flag”). If the acquired special figure winning random value is 10220 to 10384, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), and the small hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is determined to be a small hit. (Hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In addition, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10385 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the above-mentioned big hit flag and small hit flag storage areas are out of place. (Hereinafter, setting the outlier information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag off”, and the outlier information in the small hit flag storage area.) Setting is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219), the winning probability of the special figure 1 variable game big hit in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit in the special figure low probability state Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 10220 to 10384 (the size of the numerical value range is 164), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/399 (= 165/65536). ).

  Also, in the case of special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment, refer to the special figure success / failure judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in FIG. If the acquired special figure winning random numbers are 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. If the acquired special figure winning random number is 12186 to 12349, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), and the small hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12350 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 2185), the winning probability of the special figure 1 probability game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 12186 to 12349 (the size of the numerical value range is 164), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/399 (= 163/65536). ). Therefore, in the special figure 1 variable game, the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is almost the same as the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state. Is set to In this embodiment, a random number (for example, 10001) that is a big hit is set regardless of the lottery probability state of the special drawing, but it is set so that the random numbers that become a big hit do not overlap in a plurality of lottery probability states. You may do it.
<Special figure success / failure determination table / Special figure variable game jackpot determination>

  In the case of special figure low probability state (no special figure certain change) in jackpot judgment of special figure 2 variable game, refer to the low probability state table (special figure 2) for special figure success / failure judgment shown in FIG. When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10220 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219), the winning probability per jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536).

  Also, in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment, in the case of a special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), refer to the special figure success / failure judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in FIG. If the acquired special figure winning random numbers are 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. When the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12186 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is lost, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to OFF.

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 2185), the winning probability of jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). In this embodiment, the small hits are assigned to the special figure 1 and the special hits are not assigned to the special figure 2, but conversely, the small hits may be assigned only to the special figure 2 or to both. Also good. Moreover, it is not necessary to provide the small hit itself.
<Table for determining whether or not it is normal>

  FIG. 103 (a) shows an example of a low probability state table for determining whether or not a normal figure is reached, and FIG. 103 (b) shows an example of a high probability state table for determining whether or not a normal figure is correct.

In the table for determining whether or not a special figure is received, the presence / absence of a special figure change (a high probability state or a special low probability state), a lottery value data for determining a special figure, and a success / failure result of a common figure variable game are displayed. Stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 has a predetermined sphere detection sensor that detects whether the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228a or the general map start port 228b. Based on the random number value for winning a common figure acquired when it is detected, a hit determination for determining the success / failure result of the usual figure floating game is performed.
<Table for determining whether or not a normal figure / Judgment is made for a variable figure game>

  If the special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) is determined in the normal figure variation game, refer to the low probability state table for the normal figure success / failure judgment shown in the figure (a), and the acquired normal figure winning selection When the numerical value is 49, it is determined that the winning game (winning) of the usual game is won, and information indicating that the winning flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is hit is set (hereinafter referred to as the winning flag storage area). Setting the winning information is called “setting the winning flag to ON”). In addition, when the acquired common figure winning random number is a numerical value of 0 to 48 or 50 to 99, it is determined that the common figure variable game is out of play, and indicates that the above-mentioned hit flag storage area is out of place. Information is set (hereinafter, setting out-of-order information in the hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the hit flag off”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the random number value for the normal drawing is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100), and the numerical value range of the lottery value data per hit in the special figure low probability state is 49 (the large numerical value range). Since the value is 1), the winning probability per game in the special figure low probability state is 1/100.

  In the case of a special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation) in the hit determination of the common figure variable game, the common figure obtained by referring to the high probability state table for the normal figure success / failure judgment shown in FIG. When the winning random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 99, it is determined that the ordinary game is winning (winning) and the winning flag is set to ON.

In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the random number value for winning the standard drawing is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100). The winning probability per game of the variable game in the high probability state is 100/100 = 100%. In this way, the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is set higher than the winning probability of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state. It is in a state where it is easier to win the regular game than the probability state. In addition, the winning probability of the ordinary figure is not particularly limited. For example, both the winning probability of the ordinary figure variable game in the special figure high probability state and the winning probability of the ordinary figure variable game in the special figure low probability state are set to 100%. May be. On the contrary, in the special figure low probability state, the winning probability of the normal figure may be set to 0%.
<Normal hit action table>

  FIG. 103 (c) is an example of a hit action table that defines the hit action of the usual figure. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a general symbol lottery that determines the type of the general symbol stop symbol based on the table shown in FIG. When the winning flag is on, the winning symbol random value generated from the above-mentioned common symbol winning random number is used as the symbol lottery random value. When the winning flag is off, the above-mentioned common symbol winning random number is used. The symbol random value for loss generated from the numerical value is used as the symbol lottery random value.

  In this example, when the normal figure is a win, the normal figure A is selected with a probability of 50/100, and the normal figure B is selected with a probability of 50/100. Is selected with a probability of 100/100. Then, when the normal figure A is selected when the time-short operation is not performed, the electric Chu 232 is opened for 100 ms and then closed for 500 ms, and then is controlled to open 5250 ms. When the normal figure A is selected for the short-time operation, The control for closing the electric Chu 232 for 500 ms after opening it for 180 ms is performed three times.

  In addition, when the normal figure B is selected when the time shortening is not activated, the electric chow 232 is controlled to be opened for 100 ms. When the normal figure B is selected during the short time operation, the electric chew 232 is opened for 2400 ms and then closed for 500 ms. Next, after opening 1450 ms, close 500 ms and finally open 1450 ms

In the present embodiment, the average time of the public utility service opening time at the time of short-time non-operation is set to be shorter than the average time of the public power service opening time at the time of short-time operation. The average duration of the public service opening time may be long.
<Special Figure 1 Determination Table>

  FIG. 104 (a) is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, and FIG. 104 (b) shows the jackpot operation corresponding to each of the stop symbols of special figure 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or the special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the acquired symbol random number value. Do. When the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol random number value generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the above special figure winning random number is used. When the small-hit symbol random number value generated from the random number value is used as the random lottery value for symbol lottery, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are off), the above-mentioned special The symbol random number value for loss generated from the symbol winning random value is used as the symbol random number value.

  In the special figure 1 variable game symbol lottery, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, select the special figure A with a probability of 30/100, select the special figure B with a probability of 25/100, The special figure C is selected with a probability of 25/100, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 10/100, and the special figure E is selected with a probability of 10/100. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, the special figure F is selected regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for small hits), that is, with a probability of 100% at the small hit. To do. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is a failure, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol lottery random number value (the symbol random value for loss).

  In addition, when special figure A, special figure B, special figure D, or special figure E is selected, the special figure high probability state (probability change) is entered after the big hit game ends, but when special figure C is selected. Shifts to a special figure low probability state (non-probable change) after the big hit game ends. In addition, when Special Figure A, Special Figure B, Special Figure C, or Special Figure D is selected, the time is shortened after the big hit game ends in either the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state (electric support) Is granted. When special figure C is selected, the assigned time is 100 fluctuations of special figure 1. In addition, if Special Figure E is selected when the special figure low probability state is not activated and the time is not activated, the latent probability change state is not provided after the big hit game is finished, and the state other than the special figure low probability state and the short period of time is not activated. When special figure E is selected, time is given after the big hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, the performance changes according to the number of fluctuations of the special figure only for the short time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance may be changed according to the number of fluctuations of the special figure. For example, the transition to the special figure low probability state may be performed based on the fact that the special figure has changed by 100 in the special figure high probability state. Further, a falling lottery may be executed separately from the determination of success or failure, and when the falling lottery is won, the special figure high probability state may be shifted to the special figure low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when Special Figure A is selected as a result of the symbol drawing of Special Figure 1, a big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is 15 If the special figure B or special figure C is selected, the big hit game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed seven times (round). Is selected, the big hit game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed twice (round).

  In addition, if Special Figure E is selected when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated, the jackpot game that opens the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) with an opening time of 100 ms is performed twice (round). When the special figure E is selected in a state other than the low probability state and the short time non-operating state, the big hit game in which the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is opened with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed twice (round). In other words, if the special figure E is selected when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated, it is difficult to enter the first attacker (variable winning opening 234). When the special figure E is selected, it is easy to enter the first attacker (variable winning opening 234). When special figure F (small winning) is selected, the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is opened twice with an opening time of 100 ms, and special figure E is displayed when the special figure is in a low probability state and the time is not activated. The same control as when selected is performed.

Note that the opening pattern of the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) and the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 104 (b), and for example, during the one big hit game You may perform control which opens and closes both an attacker (variable winning opening 234) and a 2nd attacker (variable winning opening 235). Also, when the special figure 1 is a big hit, only the first attacker (variable winning opening 234) is always opened, and when the special figure 1 is a big hit, the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) is opened. May not be opened. Further, when a predetermined number of game balls have won the variable winning opening, the variable winning opening may be shifted to a closed state before reaching a predetermined opening time.
<Special Figure 2 Determination Table>

  FIG. 105 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, and FIG. 105 (b) shows the jackpot operation corresponding to each of the stop symbols of special figure 2. It is the figure which showed an example.

  In the special drawing 2 variable game symbol lottery, if the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, select the special figure a with a probability of 70/100, select the special figure b with a probability of 5/100, The special figure c is selected with a probability of 25/100. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss).

  When special figure a or special figure b is selected, the special figure high probability state (probability change) is entered after the big hit game is finished. However, when special figure c is selected, the special figure is low after the big hit game is finished. Transition to a probability state (non-probability change). In addition, when special figure a, special figure b, or special figure c is selected, time reduction (electric support) is given after the big hit game is ended in any of the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When special figure c is selected, the assigned time is set to 100 fluctuations of special figure 2.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, when the special drawing a is selected as a result of the symbol drawing of the special drawing 2, the big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is 15 When the special figure b or special figure c is selected, the big hit game for releasing the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) with an opening time of 29000 ms is performed seven times (round).

In this way, in the special figure 2 variable game, there is no small hit with a small number of balls, the opening time of the second attacker (variable winning opening 235) during the big hit game is all 29000ms, and time is always given after the big hit game ends. Therefore, the game has a higher advantage than the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the variable prize opening 234 and the variable prize opening 235 can be made different for each special figure by differentiating the prize balls to be paid out to the player when a game ball is won, or by varying the maximum number of prizes in one opening. A difference can be provided in the degree of advantage.
<First sub-control unit main process>

  Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main process.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 403 described above, the first sub control unit 400 starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 406. First, in step S301, initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT described later to 0), and the like are performed.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is 33 or more. If the variable CNT is applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the determination process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. Here, the variable CNT is a variable added every 1 ms in a 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the variable CNT is 33 or more in step S302 is the process for determining whether or not 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S301 or step S303. It is synonymous with. In step S303, after the variable CNT is initialized to 0, the process proceeds to step S304. Note that the process of step S302 is not limited to this example, and for example, the main loop process (steps S302 to S312) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times per second).

  In step S304, liquid crystal reception driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal reception driver processing, processing of a command received from a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) (control unit that controls the decorative symbol display device 208) is performed. In step S305, an effect control driver process is performed. In the effect control reception driver process, a command received from the second sub control unit 500 is processed.

  In step S306, effect control main loop processing is performed. In this effect control main loop process, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process to be described later is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed. For example, FIG. The lamp and sound are controlled based on the performance execution timing data shown in FIG.

  In step S307, a lamp control main loop process is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306. In step S308, sound control main loop processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound control main loop process, control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306.

  In step S309, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, the light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process in step S307. In step S310, sound driver processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound driver process, the sound output from the speaker 120 is controlled via the sound control circuit 431 based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop process in step S308.

  In step S311, liquid crystal communication driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal communication driver process, a process of transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) is performed. In step S312, the effect control unit communication driver process is performed. In the effect control communication driver process, the process proceeds to step S302 after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 and the like.

The first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S302 to S312 except for interruption due to a command reception interrupt process, a 1ms timer interrupt process, a 10ms timer interrupt process, or a DMA interrupt process, which will be described later. .
<Command reception interrupt processing>

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S401, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.
<1ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a 1 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes a 1 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S501, the process ends after adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406.
<10ms timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4D is a flowchart showing the flow of 10 ms timer interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (in this example, 10 ms), and executes a 10 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S601, the first sensor reading process is performed. In the next step S602, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a detection signal of the second output setting switch 194 is acquired via the sensor circuit 428 (see FIG. 6), and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as a player setting value. Processing to memorize is performed. In the second sensor reading process, a detection signal from another switch is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408. <DMA interrupt process>

  Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5E is a flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt notifying the end of the DMA transfer, and executes a DMA interrupt process triggered by this DMA interrupt. In step S <b> 701, after performing various processes accompanying the end of DMA transfer, the process ends.
<Production control main loop processing>

  Next, the effect control main loop process (step S in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 107 (a) shows the flow of the effect control main loop process. It is a flowchart to show.

In step S801 of the effect control main loop process, the command of the main control unit 300 stored in the command storage area of the RAM 408 is acquired. In step S802, the status is updated based on the acquired command. Here, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 has a status management area in a part of the storage area of the RAM 408, and stores various statuses in the area. In step S803, an electric-chu-long opening effect (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S804, the other effect control main loop process is performed, and then the process ends.
<Electric Chulong opening effect>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the electric-chu-long opening effect (step S803) in the effect control main loop process will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the flow of the electric-chu long opening effect.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in the RAM 408 is off or on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2406. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2402. Here, in this example, the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is set to ON during the period of the effect performed based on the determination result of the special figure, and is set to OFF during the period other than the effect. Flag.

  In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is a win, and in the case of a win (in this example, the stop symbol of the normal figure is the normal figure A or the normal figure B), the process proceeds to step S2403. In the case of deviation (in this example, the usual stop symbol is usual figure C), the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary figure is the ordinary figure A. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2404, where the effect data corresponding to the effect of the successful pattern is set. In the example, in the case where the usual figure stop symbol is ordinary figure B), the process proceeds to step S2405, where the production data corresponding to the production of the failure pattern A is set, and the process proceeds to step S2406. Here, in the production of the success pattern of the present example, notification (turbo button notification) indicating that the turbo button 902 is pressed is performed. A specific example of turbo button notification will be described later.

  In step S2407, an electric-chu long open gasse effect execution lottery process is performed, and in the next step S2408, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S2407 has been won. Production data corresponding to the production is set, and the process proceeds to step S2406. On the other hand, if the lottery in step S2407 is not won, the process proceeds to step S2406 without setting the effect data. In step S2406, after the other electric long opening effect control process is performed, the process ends.

  The production data of the failure pattern A and the failure pattern B may be different data or the same data. In addition, an example in which a success pattern is always produced when the success / failure determination result is normal is shown, but when the success / failure determination result is normal, an effect lottery is performed and the effect lottery is won. You may comprise so that the production | generation of a success pattern may be performed only in the case.

In addition, since the game stand in this embodiment has the above-described configuration of the electric-chu long open, an opportunity to launch a game ball toward the right side of the game board surface on which the electric-chu is arranged even in a low-probability state. There is. Since the electric Chu in the present embodiment is arranged on the right side of the game board surface, it cannot be won if it is not made to the right, but this is not limited to this. There may be, and it may be arranged in the position which can win a prize from both right and left. Moreover, the structure which never wins according to the direction which launches a game ball may be sufficient, and the structure where the other winning rate becomes worse than one may be sufficient.
<Turbo button notification>
Next, an example of the turbo button notification described above will be described.
<Turbo Button Notification / Example 1-1>

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 1-1 in time series. In the following drawings, the turbo button 804g is exaggerated above the firing handle 134 in order to explain whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed. In addition, the turbo button may actually be provided on the upper plate 126, or may be provided on the upper plate 126 while being provided on the back surface of the firing handle 134.

  As described above, in the game area 124 of the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at the center, the general start port 228a is disposed on the left side, the general start port 228b, the second special view on the right side. A start opening 232 and a second variable winning opening 235 are arranged, and a first special figure starting opening 230 and a first variable winning opening 234 are arranged at the lower center.

  FIG. 5A shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal state, and the player operates the launch handle 134 to launch a ball into the gaming area 124. Since this normal state is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 is conditioned on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, as shown in FIG. Using the display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) of “release turbo” is performed using the first display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 and “release turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120 at the first volume. Note that the notification execution condition is not limited to pressing a button. For example, the configuration that can detect the passage of a game ball provided on the right side of the board (for example, the normal start port 228a or the second variable winning port 235), Notification may be given when passage is detected.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been detected after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the first turbo button notification shown in FIG. As a condition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to perform second turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g. In this example, as a second turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “Warning to release the turbo button immediately” is used by using a second display area larger than the first display area. At the same time, a voice (warning sound) “Please release the turbo button now” is output from the speaker 120 at a second volume higher than the first volume.

  If such turbo button notification is performed, an operation leading to a player's disadvantage can be stopped, and the player's willingness to play may be sustained in some cases. In addition, it may be possible for an amusement store to prevent an excessive profit from being given to a player.

  In this example, in the second turbo button notification, the display using the second display area larger than the first display area used in the first turbo button notification is performed. The second display area is set at a position where the visibility of the decorative symbol, the hold icon, and the variation icon displayed simultaneously on 208 is not hindered.

  Further, in this example, an example is shown in which the turbo button is notified by a warning display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and a warning sound by the speaker 120. For example, by pressing the turbo button 804g, an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. You may be encouraged to stop. In this case, the vibration amount may be different between the first turbo button notification and the second turbo button notification, or the first turbo button notification is not vibrated but only the second turbo button notification is vibrated. May be. In addition, the turbo button 804g may be prompted to stop pressing the turbo button 804g by causing the turbo button 804g to emit light or blink.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 passes a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) even after the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected (even after the player stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g). Until then, the second turbo button notification is continued using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the case of performing turbo button notification using the turbo button 804g, the second turbo button notification may be terminated when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-2>

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-2 in time series. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the first sub control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during the normal reach in the normal state, the first sub control unit 400 notifies the first turbo button notification. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the production of the super reach in the normal state, the second turbo button notification is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, during the super reach, the second turbo button notification is performed in order to move the display of the decorative symbol in the reach state to the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display area and reduce the display. In addition, at least a part of the display of the decorative design may be displayed on the character display by the second turbo button notification, and conversely, the second turbo button may be displayed on the display of the decorative design. You may superimpose and display at least one part of the character display by alerting | reporting. At this time, by superimposing one display on the other display, the other display may be completely invisible to the player.

Further, in the second turbo button notification during the super reach, the warning sound by the speaker 120 may be stopped and only the warning display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed. With such a configuration, the warning sound from the speaker 120 does not make it difficult to hear the sound during super reach, and the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Conversely, during the second turbo button notification, the sound that was originally reported during the super reach may not be notified. When turbo button notification is performed in a plurality of notification modes (sound, display, vibration, etc.), the first turbo button notification is performed in all notification modes during reach, and at least one notification mode is used during super reach. You may perform 2nd turbo button alerting | reporting by changing or canceling.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-3>

  FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-3 in time series. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the mode of turbo button notification according to the state of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g when the ball passes through the general opening 228b.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decoration on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected when the sphere passes through the general opening 228b. Using the symbol display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, the character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sound (warning sound) “release the turbo” is generated. Output from the speaker 120.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5C, the first sub-control unit 400 has a decorative design on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected when the ball passes through the general opening 228b. The display device 208 is used to provide a third turbo button notification that prompts the firing handle 134 (dial 806 thereof) to rotate to the left. In this example, as a third turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “return the handle to the left” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (return the handle to the left) ( Warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

According to this example, optimal notification can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation means, and the player's profit may be increased. It should be noted that the game ball passed through the normal start port 228a while the first and second turbo button notifications were being executed (the turbo button was released or the launch handle was twisted to the left). Based on the detection, the notification may be stopped, or the notification may be continued for a certain time.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-4>

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 1-4 in time series. FIG. 6A shows a state in which the gaming state is an electric support probability change state (a special high-probability normal figure high-probability state), and the player is operating a launching handle 134 to launch a ball into the game area 124. . Since this electric support probability changing state is a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Strike promotion notification. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the right stroke promotion notification, and a character display of “right stroke” and an animation display in which a plurality of right-pointing arrows are moved in the right direction are performed.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in (b) of the figure, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after performing the right stroke promotion notification shown in (a) of the figure. The symbol display device 208 is used to notify that the turbo button 804g is being pressed while the turbo button 804g is being pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display “turbo in progress” and an animation display in which a plurality of right-pointing arrows are moved to the right (in comparison with “right-handed” display). The arrow moves quickly to the right), and a translucent aura is displayed on the edge of the screen, and the running Yoshimune is accelerating.

  Here, the notification that changes the mode based on the reception of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g may be related to the lottery result, or may be notified regardless of the lottery result. good.

  In other words, the right-handed promotion notification that is performed before pressing the turbo button 804g and the turbo-button-pressing notification that is performed after pressing the turbo button 804g share the same animation display for moving a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right. The character display is different. As described above, only a part of the notification mode may be different between the notification performed before the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g and the notification performed after the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g (the notification mode of other parts is common), All notification modes may be different.

  According to this example, information that is advantageous to the player can be provided by the right-handed promotion notification, and it can be easily confirmed that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted. May give a sense of security to the person. Further, since the mode can be changed depending on whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed, the pressing of the turbo button 804g can be promoted.

  FIG. 3C shows a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game. The jackpot start interval state is a normal state (ordinary low probability state and no variable winning opening is opened), but as shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the big hit start interval state. Thus, the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to do so is not performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect the turbo button 804g while the jackpot game is being executed. A notification is given while the turbo button is being pressed, which suggests that the pressing operation of the button 804g has been accepted. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display an animation that rotates a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the letter “T”. Note that when the turbo button 804g is not pressed, the circular image itself with the letter “t” does not have to be displayed, but it is displayed but not rotated or has a rotational speed. It may be displayed later than when pressed.

As in this example, the notification mode of the notification while the turbo button is pressed may be different depending on the gaming state (for example, in the electric support probability change state and the big hit state), or a part of them may be shared. The notification while the turbo button is pressed may be a moving image or a still image.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-5>

  113 and 114 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the fifth embodiment in time series. Although this example is in a normal state, as shown in FIGS. 114 (c) and 114 (d), when the normal / unusual determination result is normal A or normal B (the second special figure starting port 232 is set for a predetermined time). When the release control is performed), the right-handed state is recommended. Therefore, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g in the normal state of the present example, The first turbo button notification for urging to stop the pressing operation is not performed. (The first turbo button notification may not be performed at all times, or the first turbo button notification may not be performed only for a predetermined period when the ordinary figure A or ordinary figure B is won. In the latter case, the right warning including the first turbo button notification is performed in other periods.)

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a normal map related to the determination result of the normal map during the normal symbol variation by the general map display device 210 in the normal state shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b). A notice is given. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), an image g1 (“help” in the general notice notice) suggests that the result of determining whether or not the common figure is correct (in this example, general figure A or common figure B). Sphere image) marked with “”.

  Subsequently, in the normal state shown in FIG. 114 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 opens the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined period of time in accordance with the normal / unusual determination result. While performing an electric chew opening effect that suggests that control (electrical chow opening) is performed, a right-handed promotion notification is made to urge right-handing. In this example, as an electric chew release effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display the characters “helping chance is occurring”, and as a right-handed promotion notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display “right-handed”. "!" Is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the execution of the electric chew release. The turbo button 804g pressing operation is notified to indicate that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted, and the sound effect is continuously output.

  In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display an animation that rotates a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the letter “T”. In addition, in this example, the animation display by the notification while the turbo button is pressed is superimposed on a part of the character display of “right-handed!” By the right-handed promotion notification, and a part of the electric Chu opening effect is changed. It is covered by the decorative pattern being displayed.

  The turbo button pressing notification may be applied as a turbo button pressing suggestion prompting the user to press the turbo button 804g when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected after the right stroke promotion notification. In this case, even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the display of the turbo button pressing suggestion notification may be continued, or another display is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the turbo button pressing suggestion notification. May be. In addition, while displaying a circular image with the letters “t”, the turbo button press notification is performed, and the “t” is selected based on the detection of the turbo button press operation during the notification. A circular image with letters may be rotated and displayed. In other words, the press-promotion notification and the press-in-progress notification may be associated and notified.

In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is normal, when the electric chew is opened for a long time, the content is permitted to be right-handed, but not limited to this, the launch direction is set for each gaming state. It may be completely specified. For example, in the same way as described above, the electric Chu may be long open even in the normal state, and even if the right-handed winning rate is better, the right-handed warning may be warned. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-6>

  FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 1-6 in time series. This example shows a state in which the operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed across both gaming states when the gaming state shifts from the electric support probability change state to the normal state.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 5A on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability changing state. A turbo button pressing notification that indicates that the pressing operation is accepted is performed. Note that the pachinko machine according to the present example is a number cut probability change machine (ST machine), and the gaming state shifts to the normal state from the next fluctuation of the fluctuation.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decoration as shown in FIG. 5B on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the gaming state shifts from the electric support probability change state to the normal state. The symbol display device 208 is used to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g or to make a right-hand stop notification for urging left-handed for a predetermined time (in this example, during the period until the special figure change ends). In this example, as a right-handed stop notification, a character display of “Please return to left-handed” (first warning display) and an animation display (second warning display) that moves multiple left-pointing arrows to the left In addition to using the decorative symbol display device 208, a voice (warning sound) “please return to left-handed” is output from the speaker 120.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g as shown in FIG. 10C on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the end of the right-handed stop notification. The first turbo button notification that prompts the user to perform is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) of “release turbo” is performed using the first display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 and “release turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120 at the first volume.

According to this example, even when the gaming state changes during the pressing operation of the turbo button 408g, appropriate notification can be performed, and thus the player's profit may be increased. The content is the reverse of this example, but if the button continues to be pressed for a period during which the button operation is not permitted from the period during which the turbo button is allowed to be pressed, the button is pressed during the period when the button is not allowed. In such a case, it is not necessary to notify the hazard that is originally performed. If the button is released during a period when it is not permitted and the button is operated again, a warning notification may be issued again.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-7>

  FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 1-7 in time series. This example shows a state in which an operation of pressing the turbo button 804g is performed during the demonstration in the normal state.

  The states shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B are states where the demonstration is started on the condition that a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the stop of the special figure fluctuation in the normal state. In this example, when the demonstration (simulated game) shown in FIG. 5B is started, the decorative symbol and hold icon display area displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. The change icon display area is erased and the characters “DEMO” are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4C, the first sub-control unit 400 does not perform turbo button notification even when detecting the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during the demonstration, as shown in FIG. In addition, during the demonstration, a left-handed promotion notification for urging left-handed is performed on the condition that a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected and the ball has passed through the normal opening 228b. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the left-handed promotion notification to display the characters “return to left-handed”.

In other words, this example is configured such that notification is performed when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed during symbol variation display. Further, for example, even when the player releases the handle immediately after the game ball is launched in the state shown in FIG. 5C, and continues to press the turbo button 804g, as shown in FIG. Warning notification may be performed. That is, the warning notification may be a notification that is slightly delayed from the timing at which the right strike is actually performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-8>

  FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 1-8 in time series. This example shows a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed during the small hit state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is winning (small hit), and a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the small hit (in this example, decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3) (B) is a state in which a small hit game is started.

  Since this small hit state is a gaming state in which the opening control of the second special figure starting port 232 is performed and the second variable winning port 235 can be opened, the first sub-control unit 400 is shown in FIG. As described above, the decorative pattern display device 208 is used to make a right-handed promotion notification that prompts a right-handed person. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as a right stroke promotion notification to display a character display of “right strike” and a still image with a right-pointing arrow. The right-handed indicator lamp 224) is turned on.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the decoration as shown in FIG. 10C on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after performing the right stroke promotion notification shown in FIG. Using the symbol display device 208, a first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (warning sound) “release the turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120. At this time, the display position of the character “right-handed” is changed based on the detection of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g.

  In other words, in this example, although it is inconspicuous, a warning notification will be given if the player actually presses the turbo button and tries to make a right turn, even though a “right-handed” display that prompts the player to make a right turn is displayed. Is executed.

In addition, in this example, when right-handed acceleration notification is performed after the right-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. It is not necessary to perform notification.
<Turbo button notification / Example 1-9>

  FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 1-9 in time series. This example shows an example in which another image is hidden by a notification while the turbo button is being pressed or a notification while the turbo button is being pressed is hidden by another image.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a notification while the turbo button is being pressed on condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability change state. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display “turbo in progress” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  In this example, the decoration is changed during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the electric support probability changing state shown in FIG. 5A or during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decoration symbol in the reach state in the electric support positive changing state shown in FIG. There is a case where a display is made such that a notification is superimposed on the symbol while the turbo button is pressed. According to this example, the visibility of the notification while the turbo button is being pressed can be improved, and the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g can be surely confirmed by the notification while the turbo button is being pressed. Since it can be confirmed, there is a case where a sense of security can be given to the player.

  On the other hand, during the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 10C, there is a case where the decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the notification while the turbo button is pressed. During the super reach shown in FIG. There is a case where the notification while the turbo button is pressed is made invisible by the super reach production. According to this example, it is possible to improve the visibility of displays and effects important to the player, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the turbo button 804g is pressed by a notification during the turbo button pressing operation. May give you a sense of security.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) according to the present example includes a notification means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of notifying at least a plurality of notifications and a launching means (for example, capable of firing at least a game ball). , And a launch handle 134), wherein at least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a turbo button pressing notification (“turbo” shown in FIG. 112 (b)). Character display of “medium” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right)), and in the first launch control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launch means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on the first launch characteristic (normal launch)) reduces the number of game balls. The second firing control state is at least different from the first firing control state, and the launching means is at least in a first period (eg, pressing a turbo button 804g). In the turbo state by the operation), the first firing control state is entered, and the launching means is in the normal state by at least the second period (for example, the suspension of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) In the second period), and the notification means is capable of at least starting notification of the first notification in the first period. It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the first launch control state by the first notification. There may be a case where it is possible to provide a game table that can be operated and has characteristics of launching means.

  The launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball with a first launch characteristic (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and The launching means in the launch control state is capable of firing at least a game ball with a second launch characteristic (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the second launch characteristic is It may be a characteristic different from the one firing characteristic.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to launch a game ball with different launch characteristics.

  Further, the notification unit may not notify at least the first notification in the second period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second launch control state by the first notification, so that the player plays a game in accordance with the state of the launching unit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification (for example, a right-handed promotion notification (a character display of “right-handed” shown in FIG. 112A) and a plurality of right-pointing arrows in the right direction. The second notification is the first notification (for example, the first turbo button notification shown in FIG. 111B (character display (warning display)). ) And the voice (warning sound)) “separate the turbo”), and the gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a normal state), and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, electric support). The probable state) and the launcher Is in the first launch control state at least in the third period, and the notification means is capable of at least starting notification of the second notification in the third period, The first period may be a period during the first gaming state, and the third period may be a period during the second gaming state.

  The first operation means (for example, the turbo button 804g) provided at least at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first period is a period during which the first operation means is at least operated. The second period may be a period during which the first operating means is not operated at least.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a third notification (for example, a turbo button pressing operation promotion notification (character display “turbo standby”) shown in FIG. 133 (d)). The means does not at least notify the third notification in the first period, and the notification means can at least start notification of the third notification in the second period, Also good.

  In addition, a plurality of the notification means (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notification means”) (for example, a decorative symbol device device 208, a speaker 120, various lamps, and an effect movable body) are provided, and at least of the plurality of notification means One is a first notification means, at least one of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means, and the first notification means is the first notification means in the first period. The second notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the first notification in the first period.

  In addition, the first notification by the second notification unit may be started after the first notification by the first notification unit.

  The launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball when a player performs a launch operation, and the launch means is a game when the player has not performed a launch operation. It may be one that does not fire a sphere.

  In addition, it comprises second operating means (for example, a firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player, and firing control means (for example, a firing control board 174) that can at least control the firing means, Is capable of launching a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by symbol (e) in FIG. 11A) when the first condition is satisfied. The means is capable of launching a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 11A) when the second condition is satisfied, The first condition is that the firing control means rotates the firing handle 134 by the operation amount indicated by the first operation (for example, the symbol (u) in FIG. 11A) in the operation means in the first firing control state. Operation) is performed at least. The second condition is that when the firing control means is in the second firing control state, the operation means is operated by a second operation (for example, the firing handle 134 is operated with an operation amount indicated by reference sign (u) in FIG. 11A). Rotation operation) is performed, the first operation is the same as the second operation, and the first launch intensity is the same as the second launch intensity. It may be.

  With such a configuration, even if the state of the launch control means has changed, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player, providing a gaming table characterized by the launch means You may be able to.

  In addition, it comprises second operating means (for example, a firing handle 134) that can be operated at least by the player, and firing control means (for example, a firing control board 174) that can at least control the firing means, Is capable of launching a game ball with a first launch intensity (for example, a launch intensity indicated by a symbol (e) in FIG. 11A) when the first condition is satisfied. The means is capable of launching a game ball with a second launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (s) in FIG. 11A) when the second condition is satisfied, The launching means is capable of launching a game ball with a third launch strength (for example, a launch strength indicated by a symbol (f) in FIG. 11A) when the third condition is established, When the fourth condition is satisfied, the launching means has a fourth launch intensity ( For example, the game ball can be fired at the launch intensity indicated by the symbol (ki) in FIG. 11 (a), and the first condition is that the launch control means performs the operation in the second launch control state. Means including at least that a first operation (for example, a rotation operation of the firing handle 134 with an operation amount indicated by a symbol (o) in FIG. 11A) is performed, and the second condition is as follows: In the second firing control state, the firing control means performs a second operation on the operating means (for example, the firing handle 134 is rotated by the amount of operation indicated by the symbol (ka) in FIG. 11A). And the third condition includes at least that the first operation has been performed on the operation means in the first firing control state, and the third condition The fourth condition is the launch control The stage includes at least that the second operation is performed on the operation means in the first firing control state, and the first operation is different from the second operation, The first launch strength is different from the second launch strength, the third launch strength is different from the fourth launch strength, and the first launch strength and the second launch strength are different. The difference from the launch intensity may be greater than the difference between the third launch intensity and the fourth launch intensity.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the firing strength can be made stronger in the second state than in the first state even though it is the same operation, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by launching means. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the notification unit may be capable of at least reporting the first notification when the emission unit is in the first emission control state.

  Further, the notification mode may be changed for each gaming state, for example, notification may be performed when the launch state is switched from the first state to the second state, and the launch state is changed from the second state to the first state. You may alert | report when it switches to the state of. Further, the notification may be continuously performed during the turbo, or the notification may be performed only when the turbo is operated. In addition, the notification mode may be the same during the probable substation support and during the time reduction, the first mode is a notification indicating that the turbo is operating, and the second mode prompts the turbo to stop operating. Notification may be used. In addition, there may be a case where notification is not performed by pressing detection (in the period in which the player loses, even if pressing is detected, notification is not performed. In the period in which the player gains notification)

  Further, even when a game ball is not being fired (stop button pressed, number of remaining upper plate balls 0), it may be notified. Further, when the game ball is not being fired, it may be prevented from being notified even if the launch characteristics have changed. In addition, even when the launch state is switched, the notification mode may be different (or no notification is performed) when no game ball is fired. In spite of the period during which the player is likely to lose when the turbo is activated, even if the turbo is activated, the player is not angry (notification that is notified in the period during which the player loses is not notified. There is no notification.) There may be cases.

  In addition, when the notification is composed of multiple elements (display, sound, light emission, moving object operation, etc.), such as when the system is hit or immediately after power recovery, or during error notification, one or more elements may be May be hidden. However, other elements that are not hidden may be continuously notified. In addition, when a serious error that causes the game to stop is generated, a notification that prompts the player to stop firing the game ball may be performed based on detection of pressing of the turbo button.

  Further, other notifications may be hidden by the turbo notification, or the turbo notification may be hidden by other notifications. For example, some notifications are hidden, all notifications are hidden, notices are hidden by turbo notifications (notice of changes, pre-reading notices, hold, symbols, characters, etc.), turbo notifications are hidden during super reach The turbo notification is hidden by the movable object, the turbo notification is hidden by the launch position suggestion notification (“Please return to the left-handed”), the turbo system notification is hidden by the error notification, and the power supply is restored for a predetermined time. Is not notified (the launch characteristics are changed even during the period when the notification is not performed), the notification mode changes depending on the number of operations and the operation time, the notification mode changes to a completely different mode, When it is not performed (the player can stop the notification by any operation), the notification mode changes stepwise (related to a plurality of notification modes), and should not be operated The notification mode is changed according to the first operation count and the second operation count. A notification is given to a player who has entered a password, and notification is given to a player who has not entered a password. Not performed (even if the notification condition is achieved), the notification mode is changed according to the detection result of other detection means (the turbo button is turned on even though the touch sensor of the handle is OFF) In this case, since there is a risk of failure, it may be notified in an error-like manner different from the usual notification manner.

  Further, there may be a case where the notification timing is shifted for each notification means. In addition, the player may be notified at a position where it is difficult to see (a turbo button provided on the back of the handle shines). Further, the notification based on pressing of the turbo button may be notified on the right side from the center of the game board, and the notification based on non-pressing (released) of the turbo button may be notified on the left side from the center of the game board.

  In addition, when conditions relating to operation of the operation means are satisfied (for example, occurrence of a serious error or detection of fraud, operation by a store clerk, etc.), the firing of the launching means is stopped or one of a plurality of launch characteristics is set. You may control so that the used launch cannot be performed. In addition, the first attacker that opens and closes at the time of the first big hit and the second attacker that opens and closes at the time of the second big hit, the first attacker and the second attacker are provided on different flow paths. Regardless, the game table may be one that can digest the first big hit and the second big hit at the same handle angle (the game ball can enter the attacker that opens and closes during the big hit). The first handle angle can digest both the first jackpot and the second jackpot, but the second handle angle can only digest the second jackpot and digests the first jackpot Can't). That is, even if the steering angle is the same, the firing characteristics can be changed by pressing the turbo button, so that the above contents can be realized.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button is performed, and the notification may be ended by performing an operation according to the notification (the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button). The notification is terminated based on the detection). In this case, the notification prompting the user to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. Good.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-1>

  119 and 120 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 2-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which notification regarding the turbo button 902 is performed based on a change in the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a turbo button pressing notification on condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the electric support probability changing state. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 performs right-handed stop notification on the condition that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support probability change state to the normal state. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. In this example, because the right-handed stop notification is given on the condition that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support probability change state to the normal state, the gaming state is not detected even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected. A right-handed stop notification is made when the power support change state is shifted from the normal state to the normal state. (Even when the turbo button is released and the handle is twisted to the right, a right-hand stop notification is given.)

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 does not detect the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g after performing the right-handed stop notification (the player presses the turbo button 804g). 119), or when a new pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected after the right-handed stop notification as shown in FIG. 119 (d) (after the right-handed stop notification is given, the player is The right-handed stop notification is continued even when the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed again after the pressing operation of the button 804g is stopped. According to this example, an appropriate operation method that matches the gaming state can be notified, and the player's profit may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 indicates that a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the right-handed stop notification (or the turbo button 804g). The right-handed stop notification is terminated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed since the pressing operation is stopped and the turbo state is switched to the normal state), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (f) In addition, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to perform the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, a character display (warning display) “release the turbo” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a voice (warning sound) “release the turbo”. Is output from the speaker 120.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-2>

  FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 2-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which notification regarding the launch handle and notification regarding the turbo button 804g are simultaneously performed in the right-hand stop cancellation notification.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the player has made a right turn with the firing handle 134 in the normal state, and the first sub-control unit 400 has passed the normal start port 228b in the normal state. On the condition that this is detected, the right-hand stop cancellation notification shown in FIG. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. In other words, in this example, even when the turbo button 804g is not right-handed, a character display (second warning display) “Please release the turbo button” may be displayed. Is partly contradictory.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 5B is a state where the player has pressed the turbo button 804g in the normal state, and the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g in the normal state. (C) in the same manner as in the case of right-handed by the launching handle 134, on the condition that (or the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected when the ball passes through the normal opening 228b). The right-hand stop cancellation notification shown is performed. That is, in this example, even when the firing handle 134 is not right-handed, the character display (first warning display) may be displayed as “Please return the handle to the left”, and the actual operation and notification Is partly contradictory.

In the present gaming machine, it is possible to press the turbo button while twisting the handle to the right, so that the right-handed stop notification described above is consistent in such a situation. That is, one notification may or may not contradict depending on the situation.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-3>

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 2-3 in time series. This example shows an example in which a plurality of types of notifications are performed while the turbo button 804g is kept pressed.

  The state shown in FIG. 6 (a) is a special state variation display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, so the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. The first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition. In this example, as the first turbo button notification, the character display (warning display) “Please release the turbo button” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice “Please release the turbo” ( Warning sound) is output from the speaker 120.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6B is a special state stop display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, so the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. On the condition that it is detected, the first turbo button notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g is continued. In this example, the decorative symbol stop display has a higher priority for display than the first turbo button notification, and therefore the decorative symbol is displayed on the first turbo button notification.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6C is a jackpot confirmation display in the normal state, and is not a gaming state in which right-handed is recommended, but a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, but the first sub-control unit 400 The first turbo button notification is not performed until the timing of the big hit start interval shown in FIG.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6D is a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game. Although the big hit start interval state is a normal state, right hitting is recommended in the big hit game (big hit state) that is started immediately thereafter, so the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208. The right-handed promotion notification is made to urge right-handing. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as a right-handed promotion notification, and the text “Press the turbo button to aim the right attacker!” Is displayed.

In this example, since the right-handed promotion notification is performed on the condition that the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot start interval state, the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected (the transition to the jackpot start interval state). Even when the player continues to press the turbo button 804g from the front), when the gaming state shifts to the big hit start interval state, the right-handed promotion notification is performed. That is, even if the player has already pressed the turbo button 804g, a notification that prompts the player to operate again is performed, so that the player who has continued to operate continues to feel uncomfortable.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-4>

  123 and 124 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 2-4 in time series. In this example, notification that contradicts the actual operation of the turbo button 804g is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 123 (a) is a state in which notification is made while the turbo button is pressed in the electric support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  The state shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the number of times of the variable game of the special figure reaches the specified number (100 in this example) in the number cut probability change machine (ST machine) and shifts to the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a right-handed hit on the condition that the number of special games has reached the specified number of times (100 in this example) during the power support probability change state. A right-handed stop notification is issued to prompt the stop. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used. The game machine continues to execute this notification for a certain period regardless of the detection result of the transition.

  That is, in this example, even when the firing handle 134 is not right-handed, the character display (first warning display) may be displayed as “Please return the handle to the left”, and the actual operation and notification Is partly contradictory. In addition, in this example, even when a new pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not performed (when the turbo button 804g is pressed before the timing shown in FIG. 5B), “release the turbo button. May be displayed (second warning display), and the actual operation and the notification partially contradict each other.

  Further, in this example, in the normal state shown in the following (c) to (d), the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected, but the stop cancellation notification started at the timing of (b) in the same figure. continuing.

  In addition, in the big hit start interval shown in FIG. 124 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 continues the right-handed stop notification while the turbo button pressing operation suggestion notification prompting the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g (in this example, Character display “Press the turbo button!” And a circular image (an image simulating the turbo button 802g) with the “T” character in accordance with the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) ing.

That is, in this example, a notification that prompts the user to stop pressing the turbo button 804g and a notification that prompts the user to press the turbo button 804g are simultaneously performed. According to this example, by making contradictory notifications, gameability can be improved, and new fun can be added to the game. The contradictory states due to the plurality of notifications are a plurality of patterns when the right-handed stop notification is normalized first, and when the turbo button press promotion notification is normally ended first There is. Further, the contradiction may be resolved by simultaneously finishing a plurality of notifications.
<Turbo button notification / Example 2-6>

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 2-6 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state and the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g are common.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which notification is made while the turbo button is pressed in the electric support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.

  The state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the power support probability changing state shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the gaming state has changed regardless of the detection of the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. Stop notification. In this example, as a right-hand stop cancellation notification, the text display "Please return the handle to the left" (first warning display) and the text display "Please release the turbo button" (second warning display) The decoration symbol display device 208 is used.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 10C is a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected in the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, regardless of the gaming state, and uses the decorative pattern display device 208 to make a right-handed notification. Stop notification.

  That is, in this example, the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g shown in FIG. According to this example, since the same notification is performed based on different factors, it may be possible to perform unexpected notification. Note that the notification mode based on the change in the gaming state and the notification mode based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g do not have to be completely the same, as long as at least a part is common. In this way, it is not necessary to switch the notification mode for each condition, so that design and control become easy.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can at least notify a plurality of notifications, and a launch unit (for example, a launching device) that can at least emit a game ball. 884), and one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a right-hand stop notification ("handle is displayed" shown in FIGS. 119 (b) to (d)). ”Return to the left” and “Please release the turbo button”)), and in the first firing control state (for example, the control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) The launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the launching means in a second launch control state (for example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)) launches at least a game ball. Possible The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is in the first launch control state at least in the first period. Yes, the launching means is in the second launch control state at least in the second period, and the notifying means can at least start notifying the first notice in the first period. The notification means does not start the first notification in the second period, and the notification means starts notification in the first period in the second period. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification can be continued (for example, during the period shown in FIGS. 119 (b) to 119d) and at least notification can be made.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, the first notification can be continued even when the launching unit is changed from the first launch control state to the second launch control state. In some cases, an appropriate operation can be performed in accordance with this notification, and a game stand having characteristics of the launching means can be provided.

  In addition, the first notification is a notification that prompts a change to one of the first period and the second period (for example, right-handed stop notification shown in FIGS. 119 (b) to 119d). (The character display “Please return the handle to the left” and the character display “Please release the turbo button”)).

  With such a configuration, the player can appropriately switch the state of the operation means in accordance with the first notification, and may be able to maintain the game motivation.

  In addition, the notification means can at least notify the first notification that has been started in the first period over a first time (for example, 30 seconds) in the second period. It may be.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification, and the notification unit is capable of starting at least a second notification in the second period, and the notification unit In the first period, the second notification that has been started in the second period can be continued at least, and the second notification is the first notification. Different notifications may be used.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of notifications may be a third notification, and the notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the third notification in the first period. Good.

  In addition, the notification may be executed regardless of the detection result of the turbo button. For example, the turbo button is pressed based on the fact that the through button provided on the right side of the board detects the game ball without pressing the turbo button. It is also possible to notify the user to release (the notification content does not change even if it is released or not). Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through, it may be determined whether or not the turbo button has been pressed for the first time, and notification may be made based on the determination result.

  Further, although the turbo button is being pressed (for example, at the timing of changing the gaming state or the timing at which a specific determination result is derived), a notification that prompts the user to press the turbo button may be issued. . Further, the notification may be performed over a predetermined time. Further, the notification that is started regardless of the result of detecting the pressing of the turbo button may be terminated based on the result of detecting the pressing of the turbo button. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be a notification prompting the change of the launch characteristics. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be notification regarding the player's profit. Further, the notification performed regardless of the pressing detection result may be a notification that is not related to the player's profit. The notification may be notified over a predetermined time.

  In addition, although notification based on the detection result is performed, notification that is not based on the detection result may be performed. For example, notification based on the detection result and notification based on the detection result may not be reported together. It may be. In addition, when the other notification is started while one notification is being executed, the notification that was being performed may be stopped (in normal gaming state, the warning is notified by pressing the turbo button immediately before the big hit. During the warning notification, symbol stop + right strike notification (notification based on the detection result of the turbo button is promoted) Notification based on the detection result is more effective than notification based on the detection result. You may make it alert | report for a long time (or short time).

In addition, notification based on the detection result and notification not based on the detection result may be performed at the same time. For example, the notification may be performed while performing the “return to the left” notification without using the detection result at the end of the right handing. Since the press of the auto button is detected, “return to the left notification” may be additionally performed based on the press detection. In addition, conflicting notifications may be performed at the same time. For example, based on the fact that the auto button was pressed during non-electric support, a “return to the left notification” is started, and Based on what is hit, "right-handed promotion (prompt to press the auto button) notification" may be performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-1>

  126 and 127 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed during the electric support probability changing state.

  The state shown in FIG. 7A to FIG. 9B is a state in which the tutorial notification is started in the electric support probability changing state (not changing). The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the special figure variation game has not occurred for a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) during the power support probability change state, and uses the turbo button 804g. Make a tutorial notification to inform you how to use. Note that the tutorial notification in this example consists of a movie, and the progress is not changed by an operation by the player. (See below for cancellation)

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to explain the location of the turbo button 804g during the period of FIGS. 126 (b) to 127 (f) (in this example, FIG. 126 (c) ), And the description of the function of the turbo button 804g (in this example, the “sphere strength” shown in FIG. 127 (e)). Is displayed in the animation display. Note that the tutorial notification is not limited to animation display, and may be constituted by one or a plurality of still images.

  In the tutorial notification, various configurations related to the turbo button (such as a handle and a turbo button) may be notified to the player through video and images. At this time, what can be visually recognized by the player is not an actual configuration but may be CG or the like. Further, it is not necessarily the same as the actual configuration, and deformation or the like may be applied.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that an operation according to the content of the tutorial notification (in this example, a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g) is detected. Note that the tutorial notification end condition is not limited to the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and may be ended when the operation of other operation means is detected, or automatically when the tutorial notification is performed to the end. You may end it.

Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 performs tutorial notification on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the tutorial notification). It is configured to forcibly end (cancel). The forced termination condition for the tutorial notification is not limited to the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and may be forcibly terminated when the operation of other operation means is detected, or when the fluctuation of the special figure is started. You may kill it.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-2>

  FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed at the big hit start interval.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a special figure stop display in the normal state, and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 5B is a jackpot start interval state waiting for the start of the jackpot game.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs tutorial notification for notifying the usage method of the turbo button 804g using the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the state has shifted to the big hit start interval state.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to explain the location of the turbo button 804g at the timing shown in FIG. 7C (in this example, the character display “push” and the turbo button 804g). , An image indicating an arrow pointing to the right) by the turbo button 804g, and an animation for explaining a winning opening aimed at by right-handed hitting (in this example, a character display of “Enter!” And an image indicating an arrow pointing to the second variable winning opening 235) Display is in progress. In this example, since the big hit game is started immediately after the big hit start interval state, and the opening control of the second variable winning opening 235 is performed, the timing shown in FIG. Even if the explanation related to the second variable prize opening 235 is performed in a state where the second variable prize opening 235 is opened, the player does not have a significant disadvantage because the second variable prize opening 235 opens immediately after.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 4D is a state where the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that the jackpot game has been started (the jackpot start interval state has ended).
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-3>

  FIG. 129 and FIG. 130 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-3 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notification is performed during a normal state where right-handed is not recommended.

  The state shown in FIG. 10A to FIG. 10B is a state where tutorial notification is started in the normal state. The first sub-control unit 400 is conditioned on the condition that the determination result of the special figure is a specific result (in this example, a failure) during the normal state, and that the fluctuation time of the special figure is a specific fluctuation time. Using the decorative symbol display device 208, the start notification display of the tutorial notification for notifying the usage method of the turbo button 804g is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which a tutorial notification start suggestion display is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 confirms that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, when special figure fluctuation is started and the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is out of date and a specific fluctuation timer is selected). As a condition, tutorial notification is started. Note that the tutorial notification start condition is not limited to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and may be terminated when an operation of another operation means is detected, or the tutorial notification may be automatically started.

  When the special figure change is started, a message “What is the turbo button?” Is displayed by the character 爺 and a chance button is displayed on the character Yoshimune side. When the press of the chance button is detected within a predetermined time, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 5C, and when the press of the chance button is not detected within the predetermined time, the effect ends. . Even if the pressing of the chance button is not detected, the effect may be advanced.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used during the period of FIGS. 129 (b) to 130 (f) to explain the location of the turbo button 804g (in this example, FIG. 129 (c) ) “What is a turbo button?” And “Let's say a button near the handle”), explanation of the function of the turbo button 804g (in this example, “ “What will happen?” And “Character display of“ The momentum of the sphere will change! ”).

  Note that the tutorial notification is not limited to animation display, and may be constituted by one or a plurality of still images. Also, the tutorial notification during a normal game may also serve as a preliminary announcement that suggests that the result of whether or not the special figure is successful, and the winning probability of the special figure variable game for which the tutorial notification is given will be notified by the tutorial notification. It may also serve as an advance notice that suggests that the winning probability of the special figure variable game is not lower.

  The state shown in FIG. 5G is a state where the tutorial notification is finished. The first sub-control unit 400 ends the tutorial notification on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the tutorial notification has been performed to the end). Note that the tutorial notification end condition is not limited to the completion of the tutorial notification, and may be ended when the operation of the operation unit is detected.

  Further, in this example, during the tutorial notification shown in FIG. 5 (f), on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the first turbo button notification that prompts to stop the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g ( In this example, the character display (warning display) “Please release the turbo button 804 g” is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, although the operation described in the tutorial notification (the operation of pressing the turbo button 804g) is performed, notification that prompts the user to cancel the operation is performed.

In addition, after the tutorial notification shown in Fig. 5 (g), on the condition that the ball has passed through the general opening 228b, the right-hand stop notification is displayed (in this example, "Please return the handle to the left") (The first warning display) and the character display “second turbo display” (second warning display) are performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In other words, in this example, in spite of an event (entrance to the normal start port 228b) caused by the operation described in the tutorial notification (pressing operation of the turbo button 804g), a notification that prompts the user to stop the operation is performed. Yes. In other words, if an operation is performed as informed by the tutorial notification just because the tutorial notification is being performed, the user may be prompted to stop the operation. Although not shown, a part or all of the tutorial notification may be prevented by notification that prompts the user to stop the operation.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-4>

  FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-4 in time series. This example shows an example in which a tutorial notification according to a player's operation is performed.

  In this example, as a tutorial notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to explain the location of the turbo button 804g and the function of the turbo button 804g during the jackpot game 2R. Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 explains the location where the turbo button 804g is arranged (this example) on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is not detected at the timing shown in FIG. Then, using the decorative symbol display device 208, “character display that it is easy to digest a big hit if the turbo button near the handle is used” is performed.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected, the location of the turbo button 804g is described (in this example, the text “Yes! That button is displayed”) Is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not shown, when another operation means is operated at this timing (for example, the chance button 136), an error may be notified, or the area where the turbo button 804g is provided. The player may be notified of the correct placement position of the turbo button 804g.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the function of the turbo button 804g is explained on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected (in this example, the momentum of the sphere while the button is pressed). Is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that another notification may be performed based on the player releasing the turbo button 804g during the notification.
<Turbo button notification / Example 3-5>

  FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to Example 3-5 in time series. This example shows an example in which tutorial notifications regarding a plurality of operation means are simultaneously performed.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5A and the tutorial display shown in FIG. The right-handed explanation by In addition, you may display the animation which repeatedly performs the tutorial display shown to the figure (a), and the tutorial display shown to the figure (b).

  Specifically, in the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5A, an image display imitating the turbo button 804 and a character display “Turbo button ...” indicate that it is an explanation of the turbo button 804. The image display of holding the firing handle 134 with the hand and the character display “handle is...” Indicate that the firing handle 134 is explained.

  Further, in the tutorial display shown in FIG. 5B, an image display showing the state where the turbo button 804 is pressed and a character display “push!” Suggest a right-handed method by the turbo button 804 and the launch handle 134 is displayed. An image display showing a state of rotation and a character display “twist!” Suggest a right-handed method using the firing handle 134.

  Note that the tutorial notification described in the present embodiment may be notified immediately before the period when right-handed is recommended (during electric support, during big hits, etc.), or right-handed is recommended. It may be notified during the period. Also, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, both notifications do not need to be repeatedly executed in the same cycle, the cycle may be different for each notification, and one notification is periodically repeated. It does not have to be a thing, and it may end in one time.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launching unit (for example, a launching device) capable of firing at least a game ball. 844), and at least one of the plurality of notifications is a tutorial notification (for example, the tutorial notifications shown in FIGS. 126 (b) to 127 (f)), The launching means in one launch control state (for example, a control state by the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and a second launch control state (eg, first The launching means in the launch characteristic (normal launch) control state) is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the second launch control state is the first launch control state. The firing means is in the first firing control state at least in the first period, and the firing means is in the second firing control in at least the first period. The first period is a period that is operated at least by the first operation, and the second period is a period that is operated at least by the second operation. The tutorial notification is notification including at least notification regarding the first operation (for example, description of the location of the turbo button 804g and description of the function of the turbo button 804g). It is a game stand.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, since the tutorial notification regarding the first operation can be performed, the player can perform an appropriate operation after grasping the information regarding the operation according to the tutorial notification, and the launching unit. In some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming table with features.

  The first operation means (for example, a turbo button 804g) provided at least at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first operation is an operation in which the first operation means is at least operated. (For example, pressing operation), and the second operation is an operation in which the first operation means is not operated at least (for example, stopping the pressing operation). Good.

  With such a configuration, the first operation unit can easily switch between the first state and the second state, and the convenience of the player may be improved.

  In addition, the tutorial notification is a notification (for example, “push shown in FIG. 128 (c)” indicating an operation method of the first operation means for shifting the first period to the second period. ”And an image display of an arrow pointing to the turbo button 804g) may be included.

  With such a configuration, the player can know the operation method of the first operation means by tutorial notification, and may be able to perform an appropriate operation.

  The gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state. , At least one of the plurality of gaming states is in a second gaming state, and the launching means is in the second launch control state in at least a third period, and the second Is a period during the first gaming state, the third period is a period during the second gaming state, and the second period is more gaming than the third period. It is a period unfavorable to the user, and the notification means may be capable of at least starting notification of the tutorial notification in the second period.

  Further, it may include a symbol display unit capable of displaying at least a symbol variation display, and the notification unit may be capable of at least initiating notification of the tutorial notification in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

  In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go judging means capable of at least executing the go / no-go judgment, and the notifying means is capable of at least starting the informing of the tutorial notice when the first go / no-go judgment result is derived by the go / no-go judging means. May be.

  Further, the symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a losing symbol variation when the losing is derived by the success / failure determination unit, and the notifying device displays the tutorial during the display of the losing symbol variation. The notification may be at least capable of starting notification.

  Also, the player includes at least second operation means (for example, a dial 806) that can be operated, and further includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least effect display. In the fourth period, the first launch control state is set, and the launching means can launch at least a game ball in an area on the right side of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed area”). The fourth period is a period in which the second operation means is operated at least in the third operation, and the launching means in the first launch control state is At least the game ball can be fired in the right-handed area, and the tutorial notification is a notification that suggests one of the first operation and the third operation. Notification (e.g., shown in FIG. 132 (a), and tutorials indication as to the turbo button 804 g, shown in FIG. (B), either one of the tutorial displays about the handle 806) to include or may be that of.

  Also, the player includes at least second operation means (for example, a dial 806) that can be operated, and further includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least effect display. In the fourth period, the first launch control state is set, and the launching means can launch at least a game ball in an area on the right side of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed area”). The fourth period is a period in which the second operation means is operated at least in the third operation, and the launching means in the first launch control state is A game ball can be fired at least in the right-handed area, and the tutorial notification includes at least a notification indicating both the first operation and the third operation (example) If, shown in FIG. 132 (a), and tutorials indication as to the turbo button 804 g, shown in FIG. (B), may be that the tutorial both display) relating to the handle 806.

  Moreover, you may perform the tutorial alert | report regarding a turbo button during a demonstration. Further, the tutorial notification may be canceled when the symbol variation is started. Further, as a tutorial notification, an operation for changing the launch characteristics may be illustrated. Further, even during the tutorial notification, depending on the gaming state, a warning may be given if the tutorial notification is followed.

  In addition, the probability that the tutorial notification is interrupted when launching according to the tutorial notification (turbo press right-handed) is less likely to be interrupted than when the launch is not following the tutorial notification. Good. The tutorial notification may be started by a player's operation. Further, the tutorial notification may be canceled by the player's operation. Further, the turbo button press may be detected during the tutorial notification, and the notification mode may be changed based on the detection result (for example, the tutorial notification may be changed according to the player's operation mode). May be).

  Moreover, you may perform the tutorial alerting | reporting regarding a turbo button during a pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may make it the alerting | reporting aspect of a tutorial differ with the timing and conditions performed. Further, the tutorial notification may be more easily executed in the case of the loss variation than in the big hit variation (for example, the tutorial notification may not be performed in the case of the big hit variation).

  Further, the tutorial notification may be partially or entirely hidden by other notification notifications (regardless of the change / prefetching notification). Also, tutorial notification may be executed in accordance with the fluctuation lottery result (for example, as a result of the fluctuation, a state where the turbo button may be pressed (preferably pressed) is started. The tutorial notification may be executed as a notification of the start of the state). In addition, the changing tutorial effect may be a notification that the change is a big hit.

  Further, the tutorial notification may be performed immediately before the period in which the game is actually performed using the turbo button is started. Also, the tutorial notification may be performed during the big hit. Moreover, when the conditions regarding operation of an operation means are materialized, you may control so that the launch of a launching means may be stopped, or the launch using one of several launch characteristics cannot be performed.

  In addition, the first attacker that opens and closes at the time of the first big hit and the second attacker that opens and closes at the time of the second big hit, the first attacker and the second attacker are provided on different flow paths. Regardless, the first jackpot and the second jackpot can be digested at the same handle angle (a game ball can be entered into an attacker that opens and closes during the jackpot). The first handle angle can digest both the first jackpot and the second jackpot, but the second handle angle can only digest the second jackpot and digests the first jackpot I can't.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button may be performed, and the notification may be terminated by performing an operation according to the notification. For example, the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button. The notification may be terminated based on the fact that this is detected. Further, the notification that prompts the player to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 4-1>

  FIGS. 133 and 134 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 4-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which turbo button notification is performed using a combination of decorative symbols.

  The state shown in FIG. 133 (a) is a state in which the decorative pattern combination in the reach state (in this example, decoration 7- (changing) -decoration 7) is displayed, and the state shown in FIG. 133 (b) is This is a state in which the turbo button notification is started using the decorative pattern combination in the reach state.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs turbo button notification using the decorative symbol combination in the reach state on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the decorative symbol combination in the reach state. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to (c), as a turbo button notification, among the decorative symbol combinations in the reach state, the transparency is set before the decorative symbol image (↓) being displayed in a variable manner. Animation display is performed in which a rectangular image with the characters “turbo” is gradually appearing.

  Note that this turbo button notification may also serve as a preliminary notification indicating that the determination result of the special figure being fluctuated is a specific determination result (for example, special figure D (sudden probability change)). It may also serve as an advance notice that suggests that the result is a determination result (for example, loss or small hit). In addition, when a rectangular image with a transparent “turbo” character as shown in FIG. 5B is displayed, the special figure D may be always displayed in a stopped state, or the discontinuity is displayed in a stopped state. It may be done. Further, the probability that the probability change is suddenly generated may be higher when the rectangular image is displayed than when the rectangular image is not displayed.

  According to this example, since it is possible to suggest whether or not a special figure is changing, it is possible to suggest an event (such as an electric-chu release) that is executed based on the result of the success / failure determination. You may be able to increase your expectations. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the player's sense of immersion in the game by giving notifications related to before the event occurs and during the event.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which a big hit game in which the opening control of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is performed is being executed. Since this big hit game is a game state in which right-handed is recommended, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a right-handed promotion notification that encourages right-handing. In this example, animation display for moving a plurality of right-pointing arrows in the right direction is performed as right-handed promotion notification.

  In this example, simultaneously with this right-handed promotion notification, a turbo-button pressing operation promotion notification that indicates that it is a recommended period for pressing the turbo button 804g is performed. In this example, as the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display the characters “Waiting for turbo”. In addition, in the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification of this example, in order to increase the relevance with the turbo button notification performed immediately before the big hit game, the notification using the character “turbo” is illustrated, but other characters are used. The notification which used the image which imitated the turbo button 804g may be sufficient.

  Further, the states shown in FIGS. 134 (e) and (f) are states of an end interval for shifting from the big hit state to the electric support probability changing state, and the state shown in FIG. 134 (g) is an electric support probability changing state. In the big hit state (end interval), the first sub-control unit 400 continues the right stroke promotion notification that prompts the user to make a right strike, and sets the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification as a “turbo standby” character display → Character display of “Turbo activation !!” → Image display imitating turbo button 804, character display “turbo button ...” + image display indicating that turbo button 804 has been pressed, and character display “press!” The order is changed.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which notification is being made while the turbo button is being pressed in the power support probability changing state. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to detect that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been accepted on the condition that the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is detected during the electric support probability change state. A notification is made while the suggested turbo button is pressed. In this example, as a notification that the turbo button is being pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display a character display of “in turbo” and an animation display that moves a plurality of right-pointing arrows to the right.
<Turbo button notification / Example 4-2>

  FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the example 4-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which turbo button notification is performed based on a prefetch result of a special figure.

  The state shown in FIG. 7B is a state in which turbo button notification is performed based on the result of prefetching the special figure being changed and on hold. The first sub-control unit 400 performs turbo button notification based on the prefetching result of the special figure being changed (or the prefetching result of the special figure on hold). In this example, as a turbo button notification, a band-like image display with the letters “in preparation for turbo” and a hold corresponding to the second hold based on a pre-read result of a special figure corresponding to the second hold The icon “Turbo” is added to the icon.

  In this example, simultaneously with the increase in the special figure hold, an effect of blinking the turbo button 804g is started, and the effect is continued until the special figure variable game corresponding to the increased hold is completed. The effect may be ended before the special figure variable game corresponding to the increased hold is ended, or a gaze effect that does not give a right-handed opportunity while performing the effect may be performed. When the effect is executed, the special figure D may always be stopped and displayed, or a big hit or a small hit different from the special figure D may occur. Furthermore, the effect that “Turbo” is displayed on the hold icon and the effect that “Turbo is being prepared” may be separately executed.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to this example includes a notification unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can at least notify a plurality of notifications, and a launch unit (for example, a launching device) that can at least emit a game ball. 844), and a determination unit for determining whether or not it is possible to execute at least determination (for example, special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229 shown in FIG. 43, special figure 1 related lottery process in step S231 shown in FIG. 43). It is a gaming machine, and at least one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, turbo button notification performed using a decorative combination of reach states shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and (c)) And the launching means in the first launch control state is capable of launching at least a game ball, and the launching means in the second launch control state emits at least a game ball. The second launch control state is at least different from the first launch control state, and the launching means is configured to be in the first launch control state at least in the first period. The launching means is in the second launch control state at least in the second period, and the notifying means has a first success / failure determination result (for example, In the case of special figure D (sudden probability change)), the first notification can be notified at least, and the first notification is a notification including at least a notification regarding the first launch control state. It is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and may have an expectation that some profit may be obtained by the first notification. In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand having a characteristic launching means.

  In addition, a symbol display means (for example, the second special figure display device 214) capable of displaying at least the symbol fluctuation display is provided, and the notification means finishes the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the first success / failure determination result. Alternatively, the notification of the first notification may be terminated.

  With such a configuration, the first notification can be performed as the advance notification of the change, and the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced.

  In addition, a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display is provided, and the notification unit is configured to start displaying the symbol variation display corresponding to the first determination result. In addition, the first notification may be started at least.

  With such a configuration, the first notification can be performed as the pre-reading advance notification of the variation after the variation, and the player's expectation may be further enhanced.

  Further, the notification unit may not notify the first notification when the second determination result is derived by the determination unit.

  In addition, the notifying means, at least one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification,

  The notification means is capable of notifying at least the second notification when the second determination result is derived by the determination unit, and the second notification is the first notification and the second notification. The same notification mode is included, and the second notification may include a notification mode different from the first notification.

  Further, the gaming table can be in any one of a plurality of gaming states, and at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, , Non-electric support state), at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, electric support state), and the gaming table is When the determination result is derived, it is possible to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the first gaming state, the launching means is in the first firing control state. In this case, it may be more disadvantageous for the player than in the case where the launching unit is in the second firing control state in the second gaming state.

  In addition, a turbo button press-promoting notification may be performed with a pre-reading notice. Moreover, the notification mode of the hold icon includes a mode related to a notification mode that is notified when the firing characteristics of the launching unit are changed. (At least a part of the mode that is notified while the launch characteristics are changed is the same as at least a part of the display mode of the hold icon.)

  In addition, a turbo middle symbol (decorative symbol suggesting that it is in the first state) is notified when at least one symbol aspect of the symbol combination indicating the lottery result changes the firing characteristics of the launching means. It may consist of a mode related to the notification mode. Moreover, about the general figure long release effect, you may make it notify about turbo according to the lottery result of a normal figure change, and the information about turbo in the effect and the information which is not related to turbo are a part of the aspect. May be common and other parts may not be common.

In addition, when the launch characteristics are changed and when the launch characteristics are not changed, the execution probability of a specific effect may be different. For example, even if there is an effect that is not executed with one characteristic Good. In addition, not only the start of the turbo state is notified, but the advance notification may be made that the turbo state ends. In addition, a phenomenon (gase effect (false effect)) different from the notified content may occur.
<Turbo button notification / Example 5-1>

  FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 5-1 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the gaming state.

  In this example, in the normal state (the normal state immediately before the electric support state starts) shown in FIG. 11A, the turbo button notification using the decorative combination of the reach state described with reference to FIG. 133B above. In the big hit state (end interval) shown in FIG. 7B, the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the electric support state shown in FIG. 14C, the right-handed promotion notification described with reference to FIG. 134G is performed, and the normal state shown in FIG. In the normal state), the left-handed promotion notification for urging the left-hand is performed in a manner different from the notification manner shown in FIGS.

  According to this example, in the normal state immediately before the electric support state starts, in addition to performing the turbo button notification using the decorative symbol combination shown in FIG. In the state (end interval), since the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 5B is performed, the player can prepare for the right-handed stroke using the turbo button 804g before shifting to the electric support state. In the electric support state, it becomes possible to obtain profits more reliably. For this reason, it is possible to improve the player's impression of the game table and to increase the operating rate of the game table.

Further, in the normal state immediately after the power support state is over, the left-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. 5D is performed, but the notification regarding the operation of the turbo button 804g is not performed. The player's willingness to play is not reduced more than necessary. Further, an operation suitable for the game can be notified to the player who has made a right turn with the launch handle 134.
<Turbo button notification / Example 5-2>

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the embodiment 5-2 in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the player's degree of advantage.

  In this example, at the start of the big hit with a ball shown in FIG. 11A, the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification described with reference to FIG. 134F is performed. At the start of the big hit with a ball, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 is longer than that at the start of a big hit without a ball as shown in FIG. Since it is in a state, the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification is actively performed. Thereby, the winning probability to the 2nd variable winning opening 235 can be raised, and a player's willingness to play may be improved.

  On the other hand, at the start of a big hit without a ball shown in FIG. 5B, a notification that a part of the turbo button pressing operation promotion notification is changed to the character display of “turbo?” Is performed. At the start of the big hit without a ball, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 is shorter than that at the start of the big hit with a ball shown in FIG. Therefore, while notifying that the right-handed stroke is to be made, the notification that promotes the pressing operation of the turbo button is not actively performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing useless operations (operations that are hardly linked to profits), and it may be possible to avoid a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  According to this example, when the right-handed operation is advantageous for the player, a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the turbo button is performed, and when not, a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the turbo button is performed. Since it is configured so that there is no inconvenience to the player, the impression of the turbo button can be improved and the game motivation can be increased.

  Moreover, according to the game stand (for example, pachinko machine) according to the present example, a notification means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least reporting a plurality of notifications, and a launch means (for example, capable of firing at least a game ball) , And a launcher 844), wherein one of the plurality of notifications is a first notification (for example, a left-handed promotion notification for promoting left-handedness shown in FIG. 136 (d)). The launching means in a first launch control state (eg, a control state based on the second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) is capable of at least launching a game ball, and is in a second launch control state (eg, The launching means in the first launch characteristic (control state by normal launch) is capable of launching at least a game ball, and the second launch control state is the first launch control state. At least in a different state The launching means is in the first launch control state in at least a first period, and the launching means is in the second launch control state in at least a second period. The gaming table takes a first state when operated in a first operation in the first period, and the gaming table operates in a second operation in the second period. The second state is an operation different from the first operation, and the first notification relates to the first state. The game machine is characterized in that the notification includes at least notification.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the first state by the first notification. Therefore, the player performs an appropriate operation according to the first notification. There may be a case where it is possible to provide a game stand having characteristics of launching means.

  Also, the game apparatus includes a plurality of operation means that can be operated at least by the player, and one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a turbo button 804g), One of them is a second operating means (for example, a launch handle 134), and the first operation is to operate (for example, to press) the first operating means, and The first operation is to operate (for example, rotate) the second operation means, and the second operation is to not operate the first operation means (for example, pressing operation) And the second operation may be to operate the second operation means.

  With such a configuration, the first operation unit can easily switch between the first state and the second state, and the convenience of the player may be improved.

  Further, the display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display is provided, and the launching unit is a game ball in a region (hereinafter referred to as “left-handed region”) on the left side of the display unit when viewed from the front. At least in the second period, the gaming table takes a second state when operated in a third operation, and the second state is the second state. The second state is a state in which the launching means at least launches a game ball in the left-handed region, and the third operation is the first operation means. The third operation may be to operate the second operation means.

  In addition, one of the plurality of notifications is that the second notification includes at least a notification related to one of the second operation and the third operation (for example, in FIG. 136 (d)). The second notification may be a notification different from the first notification.

  As for the notification regarding “left-handed”, since the left-handed operation cannot be realized if the operation is continued with either the turbo button or the dial, the method is used instead of performing the notification for the specific method. You may make it alert | report the phenomenon which may occur in a case. This is often the timing of returning to the left-hand side when the advantageous state has ended (end of jackpot, end of electric support, etc.), and the advantageous state may end and the player may feel frustrated In spite of this, it is because there is a possibility that the irritation of the player may be further amplified if the player speaks again about the method already performed by the player.

  In addition, regarding notification regarding “right-handed”, specific notification can be emphasized by providing a case where specific notification is performed while there is a case where specific notification is not performed. There is a case. In addition, there may be a pattern that specifically informs both the “left-handed” and “right-handed” methods. Even if the pattern is not automatically notified, it may be possible to imagine what method the player should take during the notification.

  Even if the result is the same (return to the left), the notification mode may be different. For example, “turn back to the left” by switching the gaming state, detect turbo when not in turbo state A notification such as “return to the left” may be performed based on the above. Moreover, when the conditions regarding operation of an operation means are materialized, you may control so that the launch of a launching means may be stopped, or the launch using one of several launch characteristics cannot be performed.

Further, a notification regarding the turbo button may be performed, and the notification may be terminated by performing an operation according to the notification. For example, the notification is performed so that the turbo button is released, and the player releases the button. The notification may be terminated based on the fact that this is detected. Further, the notification that prompts the player to release may be performed based on the player pressing the turbo button, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the player is operating the turbo button. .
<Turbo button notification / Example 6>

  FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the sixth embodiment in time series. This example shows an example in which the notification mode of turbo button notification is changed according to the gaming state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b), the game state is shifted from the electric support state shown in FIG. The main control unit 300 transmits a control command (subcommand) notifying that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state after displaying the special figure stop display. In the example, since the transmission timing of the subcommand is the next special chart fluctuation display start time, the first sub-control unit 400 can grasp the transition of the gaming state than the next special chart fluctuation start time. It will be late.

  In the state shown in FIG. 138 (c), the main control unit 300 recognizes that the gaming state is the normal state, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet grasped the transition of the gaming state and the gaming state is This is a state in which the power support state is recognized.

  In this state, since the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), it is assumed that the sub-command notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g has been received. However, turbo button notification (warning display) cannot be performed.

  In addition, the demonstration stage is not performed in the electric support state, but the demonstration stage starts the demonstration stage when the demonstration start condition is satisfied in the normal state (for example, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop display of the special figure). In this case, in the state shown in FIG. 5C, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state). Even if a demonstration start command for notifying the demonstration start is received, the demonstration production cannot be started.

  In the state shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet grasped the transition of the gaming state and has recognized that the gaming state is the electric support state, This is a state in which a ball entering the normal start port 228b is detected.

  Even in this state, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), and therefore has detected that the ball has entered the normal start port 228b. Even if a subcommand for notification is received, turbo button notification (warning display) cannot be performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 139 (f) is a state immediately before the main control unit 300 detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 and starts to display the fluctuation of the special figure. The main control unit 300 transmits a subcommand notifying that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of the special figure variation display. After the timing, the first sub-control unit 400 can grasp the transition of the gaming state.

  The state shown in FIG. 139 (g) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 grasps the transition of the gaming state. The first sub-control unit 400 performs notification for promoting left-handed based on the fact that the gaming state has shifted from the electric support state to the normal state.

  In addition, the state shown in FIG. 139 (h) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has grasped the transition of the gaming state and has received a sub-command notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g from the main control unit 300. It is.

In this state, since the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the turbo button should not be pressed (normal state), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. In this case, turbo button notification (warning display) can be performed.
<Turbo button notification / Example 7>

  140 and 141 are diagrams illustrating an example of turbo button notification according to the seventh embodiment in time series. This example shows an example of a notification mode of turbo button notification when the power is shut off (power interruption) and the power is restored (power recovery).

  The state shown in FIG. 140 (c) is a state where a power interruption has occurred during a normal state due to a power failure or the like. In this state, since the power supply to the game machine is stopped, even if the turbo button 804g is pressed, the operation cannot be detected. Therefore, the process corresponding to the turbo button 804g is not performed, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 cannot be performed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 140 (d) is a state in which the gaming machine is returning to the state before the power interruption due to power recovery (during power recovery). When power supply to the game machine is started, the first sub-control unit 400 performs power recovery processing. As part of the power recovery processing, the first sub-control unit 400 displays “ "???" is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits a command for instructing the LED of the turbo button 804g to be lit in a special manner to the launch control unit 630 via the payout control unit 600. Thereby, LED of turbo button 804g notifies that it is returning to power by lighting in a special mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 141 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying that a ball entering the normal start port 228b has been detected, Even when a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the button 804g is received, turbo button notification (warning display) is not performed.

  In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g during a period from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time elapses, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the turbo button 804g. The LED is lit in a special manner and is configured to output a voice “turbo button” from the speaker 120. With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily confirm whether or not the turbo button 804g functions effectively.

  The state shown in FIG. 141 (f) is a state in which a special figure that has been fluctuating at the time of power interruption is stopped and displayed due to restoration of the power supply. After the restoration of the power supply, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a subcommand notifying that the entrance to the normal start port 228b has been detected or receiving a subcommand notifying the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g. Sometimes, turbo button notification (warning display) is performed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (For example, a decorative symbol display device 208), a first control means (for example, a launch control board 174) capable of at least executing control of the launching means, and a first control means capable of executing at least control of the first notifying means. And a second control means (for example, a payout control board 170, a main control board 156, a first sub control board 160, a second sub control board 164, an effect control board 820), wherein the launching means Is capable of at least transitioning to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)) At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and in the first state, the launching means at least plays a game ball. The second state is a state in which the launching means is capable of firing at least a game ball, and the second state is different from the first state. The first state and the second state are states of the first notification (for example, right-handed promotion notification shown in FIG. 122 (d) (“Press the turbo button to aim the right attacker!”). Character display), turbo button pressing notification, turbo button operation notification, turbo button operation cancellation notification, turbo button tutorial notification, turbo button monitor signal, and second state Performed easiness of knowledge, etc.) are different, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first notification can easily grasp whether the launching unit is in the first state or the second state, the player can make a first notification. The player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification, and can improve the fun of the game by performing notification in various modes. There is a case. In addition, since the first control means capable of executing the control of the firing means and the second control means capable of executing the control of the notification means are provided, the control burden of each control means is reduced by distributing the control burden. And stable game control may be possible.

  Further, the firing means is configured to include the first control means, and the firing means is configured to include a firing execution means (for example, a firing solenoid). The control means may be capable of at least controlling the firing execution means, and the first control means may be capable of at least shifting to the plurality of states.

  The first state is a state in which at least a game ball can be launched with a first launch characteristic (for example, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the second state is a second launch characteristic. It is in a state where at least the game ball can be launched with characteristics (for example, first launch characteristics (normal launch)), and the second launch characteristics may be different from the first launch characteristics.

  The first notification is performed when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when performing a right-handed notification, when performing a left-handed notification, when performing a turbo press display, or when performing a turbo release display). In addition, it may be configured to at least notify.

  Moreover, you may provide the 2nd alerting | reporting means (for example, right-handed indicator lamp 224) which can perform at least 2nd alerting | reporting. The second notification may be configured to at least notify when the second condition is satisfied.

  The launching means is capable of at least launching a game ball when a launch operation is performed, and the launch means does not launch a game ball when the launch operation is not performed. There may be. The first notifying unit may be capable of displaying at least an image.

  In addition, it is possible to at least control the notifying means capable of emitting at least a game ball, first control means capable of executing at least first control, notifying means capable of executing at least first notification, and notifying means. And a second control means, wherein the first control includes at least a control for adjusting a firing strength of a game ball launched from the launching means. The control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity, The first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied when the first operating means is operated. There are certain conditions, The notification, the one in which the at least one notification regarding operation means may be a gaming table, characterized in that.

  The timings of the first notification and the second notification are as follows: during liquid crystal loading, when special processing is not performed (when the load on the control unit is low), when the turbo button is operated in the normal gaming state (when special effects are performed) ), During special production (production for suggesting the state at the time of latent hit, trigger for one announcement, trigger for promotion production), when operating the turbo button during the special game state, turbo button during the electric support game state At the time of operation, special game state transition (except in case of small hit, latent probability change), at the start of a specific round in special game state (extra round, V Attacker release), electric support game state transfer, electric support Special during the transition from the probabilistic state to the probable state (right-handed gaming state → left-handed gaming state), during transition from the non-normal gaming state to the normal gaming state (right-handed gaming state → left-handed gaming state) Other than out (right-handed notification continuation) may be a (hereinafter the same).

  In addition, the conditions for performing the first notification and the second notification are when one, a plurality, or all of the various errors (underfill full tank error, payout shortage error, etc.) shown in FIG. 57 occur. Or it may be the case where it does not occur.

  In addition, the notification means includes an LED indicating that the turbo button is effective, an LED indicating that the turbo button is operated, an LED indicating that the turbo button is operated, The turbo button signal connection LED, the turbo button on / off LED, the turbo button on / off LED controlled by the main control board, the turbo button on / off LED controlled by the first sub control board, etc. A speaker, an LED, a liquid crystal display device, an accessory, a turbo button itself, a decorative body on the upper right of the frame, or the like may be used (or the like).

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (For example, various state display units 328 including a state display lamp (right-handed display lamp) 224) and second notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device) capable of executing at least a second notification. A gaming machine, wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a first launch characteristic (normal launch ), And at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, a control state by a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)), and the first state is Play balls at least The second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state different from the first state, and the second notification ( For example, the right-handed indicator light 224 is turned on) at least in the case of the first game state (for example, the hit state, the electric support state), and the first condition is the first game. In the state (for example, a big hit gaming state), it is configured to notify at least, and the first notification (for example, the right-handed display lamp (right-handed display light) 224 is turned on by turning on) Promotion notification, turbo button press notification, turbo button operation prompt notification, turbo button operation cancel notification, turbo button tutorial notification, turbo button monitor signal, and second state Execution start timing of knowledge, etc.), said a second execution start timing of the broadcast is a gaming table characterized are different, that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. Moreover, since the 1st alerting | reporting means which can perform 1st alerting | reporting and the 2nd alerting | reporting means which can perform 2nd alerting | reporting are provided, the control burden of each control means is reduced by distributing a control burden. And stable game control may be possible.

  Further, the second notification is configured to notify at least when the third condition is established, and when the third condition is the first gaming state, Conditions that may hold may be used.

  The second notification is configured not to be notified in the second gaming state (for example, non-electric support state), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. The state may be a state having at least a different degree of advantage.

  Also, a launching means capable of firing at least a game ball, a launch control means capable of executing at least a first control, a first notifying means capable of executing at least a first notification, and at least a second notification. And a second informing means, wherein the first control includes at least a control for adjusting a firing strength of a game ball fired from the launching means. The control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states is a first state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity, The first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied when the first operating means is operated. There are certain conditions, The notification is at least executable when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first gaming state is satisfied, The second notification includes at least notification related to the first operation means, and the execution start timing of the second notification is different from the execution start timing of the first notification. It may be a characteristic game stand.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a first notification unit capable of executing at least a first notification. (E.g., a decorative symbol table device 208), wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first One state (for example, a control state by a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) Control state), the first state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, and the second state is What is the first state? In the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, the normal state and the winning state, the electric support state and the non-electric support state), the first notification (for example, FIG. 115B) Right-handed stop notification (character display “Please return to left-handed” and animation display to move multiple left-pointing arrows to the left), turbo button press notification, turbo button operation notification, turbo button operation The game table is characterized in that the easiness of performing the notification of canceling, the tutorial notification regarding the turbo button, the monitor signal of the turbo button, the notification regarding the second state, and the like is different.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. There may be a case where a game stand having a characteristic launching means can be provided. In addition, since the first notification is performed in the case of the first gaming state, the player can grasp the gaming state through the first notification and may be able to perform an operation suitable for the gaming state. .

  Further, the display unit is capable of executing at least symbol variation display, and the first condition (the first game state and the symbol variation display is not being executed, or the symbol variation display is not being executed, etc.) There may be a condition that may be satisfied when the symbol variation display is not executed (may also be satisfied when the symbol variation display is executed). “Start notification” may be during non-execution of symbol variation display or during symbol variation display.

  A gaming machine comprising: a launching unit capable of launching at least a game ball; a launch control unit capable of executing at least a first control; and a notifying unit capable of executing at least a first notification. The first control includes at least control for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball launched from the launching means, and the launch control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and At least one of the states is a first state, the first state is a state relating to the firing strength, and the first state is when the first condition is satisfied, The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operating means is operated, and the first notification is the first operating means. Including at least The first notification is at least executable when the second condition is established, and the second condition is established when the first gaming state is established. There may be a gaming machine characterized by the condition that there is a case.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a launching unit (for example, a launching device 844) capable of firing at least a game ball and a notification unit (for example, capable of executing at least the first notification). A game table provided with a decorative symbol table device 208), wherein the launching means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state. (For example, a control state based on a first launch characteristic (normal launch)), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, a control state based on a second launch characteristic (turbo launch)) And at least one of the plurality of states is a third state (for example, a state where the firing stop lever 804e is pressed, a state where the player is not touching the dial 806, or between control units) The first state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, the second state is a state where at least a game ball can be fired, and The third state is a state in which at least the game ball cannot be fired, and the second state is a state different from the first state. Even in the third state, the first state Notification (for example, a right-hand stop notification shown in FIG. 115 (b) (character display “please return to left-handed” and animation display that moves a plurality of left-pointing arrows to the left), At least notification of turbo button operation notification, notification of canceling turbo button operation, tutorial notification regarding turbo button, monitor signal of turbo button, notification regarding the second state, etc. can be notified at least Those that are configured, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the launching unit is in the second state by the first notification, so that the player can perform an appropriate operation according to the first notification. In addition, there are cases where the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing notification in various modes. There may be a case where a game stand having a characteristic launching means can be provided. In addition, since the first notification is performed even in the third state, the player can grasp whether or not the launch is impossible through the first notification, and can perform an operation suitable for the gaming state. There are cases where it is possible.

  A gaming machine comprising: a launching unit capable of launching at least a game ball; a launch control unit capable of executing at least a first control; and a notifying unit capable of executing at least a first notification. The first control includes at least control for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball launched from the launching means, and the launch control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of states, and At least one of the states is a first state, at least one of the plurality of states is a second state, and the first state is a state relating to the firing intensity; The second state is a state in which the launching means does not cause a game ball to be launched, and the first state is a state that can be shifted at least when the first condition is satisfied, One condition is the first The first notification is at least a notification related to the first operation means, and the first notification is a second condition. The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied even when the firing control means is in the first state, and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied. A game machine characterized by

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and instead of (or in addition to) the configuration of the pachinko machine 100, modified examples described below. You may apply.
<Modification / Receiving command processing>

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the received command process. In this reception command process, first, in step S601, the reception data register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is referred to and whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 400 is determined. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not a main control communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not a prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604; otherwise, the process ends. In step S604, the received command is stored in a buffer of the RAM 708 (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

  In Example B, commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in a buffer (a received command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. More specifically, the data in the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in, for example, the A register 722 of the CUP core register 720, and then stored in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, a command that should not be accepted (an illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. In addition, before the determination process of step S1603, you may perform the process which determines whether the received command is a prize ball command. Thus, when a command that should not be received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be eliminated by the determination process.
<Modification / Command analysis processing>

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the command analysis process. In step S801 of this command analysis process, the reception command stored in the reception command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S802, processing for analyzing the acquired received command is performed.

  In step S803, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether the received command is a prize ball command. If the received command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S806, and if not, the process ends. In step S805, a main control unit communication confirmation command reception process is performed. In step S806, a prize ball command reception process described below is performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the flow of a prize ball command reception process (step S806) in the command analysis process shown in FIG. In step S1201 of the award ball command reception process, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

  In the next step S1202, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is ON. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1204. In this step, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is OFF, the received command is ignored. That is, an illegal command is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the main process of the payout control unit.

In the next step S1203, the number of winning balls is added to the next winning ball number area based on the analysis data. In the next step S1204, all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.
<Modification / Transmission command processing>

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the transmission command process. In step S1501 of the transmission command process, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processes of steps S1504 to S1507 are executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1504, the transmission request for the payout control communication confirmation command (10H) is set by setting 1 to Bit0 of the transmission command output request information of 1 byte length stored in the RAM 708.

  In step S1505, another command transmission request is set. Other commands transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 include, for example, a prize ball signal output request command (20H), an error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), and an error 2 command (40H, 41H). 42H, 44H, 48H), payout display LED notification commands (50H, 51H), and the like.

  When a prize ball signal output request command (20H) is transmitted, a transmission request for the prize ball signal output request command (20H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, and an error 1 command When transmitting (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), by setting Bit2 of the transmission command output request information to 1, transmission request for error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H) Set.

  Further, when transmitting an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H), by setting 1 to Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information, an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H) and a payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) are transmitted, the payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is set by setting 1 to Bit 4 of the transmission command output request information. ) Transmission request.

  In step S1506, other command output information is set. Here, when notifying the error release state or the completion of the prize ball payout operation as error information, 0 is set to Bit 0 of the output information of 1 byte length provided in the RAM, the occurrence of the payout number switch error, the full of the saucer When notifying the occurrence of a tan error or a prize ball payout operation, 1 is set to Bit0 of the output information. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an illegal payout error or a payout device error, 1 is set in the output information Bit1, and when notifying the occurrence of a payout excess error or a main control communication error, the output information Bit2 is set. When 1 is set and notification of the occurrence of a door opening error or CR unit non-connection error is made, 1 is set in Bit 3 of the output information.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1503 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1503, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612, and then the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1507, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1508, it is determined whether or not a winning ball signal command transmission request setting condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1509, after setting a transmission request for a prize ball signal command, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the transmission command setting counter stored in the RAM 708 is set to 5, and then the process proceeds to step S1511.

  In step S1511, it is determined whether the transmission command setting process execution condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1512. If not, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1512, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, the least significant bit (Bit 0) of the transmission command output request information set in step S1505 is referred to. When 1 is set, a numerical value (indicated by the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register) In this example, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting 10H).

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 1 command are supported. By combining the numerical value to be transmitted (30H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, 30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, or 38H) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 1 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via this.

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 2 command are supported. By combining the numerical value (40H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, or 48H in this example) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 2 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the payout display LED are supported. By combining the numerical value (50H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, either 50H or 51H) in the transmission data register, the main control unit 300 is connected via the serial communication line 612. The payout display LED notification command is transmitted to

In step S1513, 1 is subtracted from the transmission command setting counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1514. In step S1514, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting counter is 0. If the transmission command setting counter is 0, the process ends. If not, the process returns to step S1511 to continue the command transmission process.
<Modification / Main control communication confirmation command reception processing>

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the main control communication confirmation command reception process. In step S1601 of the main control communication confirmation command reception process, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the main control communication confirmation command received first after the payout control unit 600 is activated. If YES in step S1602, the process advances to step S1602. If not, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1602, after the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S1603 to execute the above-described activation process.

In step S1604, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S1605, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1606, the winning ball command acceptance permission flag is set to ON, and in the next step S1607, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON, and then the process ends.
<Modification / Transmission command processing>

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the transmission command process. In step S1701 of the transmission command process, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register.

  In step S1703, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1704, after other error command set processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S1705. As another error command set process executed in step S1704, for example, both a communication confirmation command and a second command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error) are transmitted. For example, a process for determining whether it is necessary and transmitting a second command following the communication confirmation command when it is necessary corresponds.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the main control communication error flag is 1 (on or off). If it is on (1), the process of step S1706 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1708. move on. In step S1706, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register.

In the next step S1707, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S1708, other transmission command processing is executed and the processing is terminated.
<Display control of pachinko machine 100>

  Next, display control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. 148 is a conceptual diagram for explaining display control of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a specific example of “display about how to hit”.

  In the pachinko machine 100, as displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, “display relating to the first type of hitting” shown in FIG. 148 (a) and “second type” shown in FIG. "Indication about how to hit". In addition, the “display relating to the first type of hitting” shown in FIG. 10A further includes the “display relating to the first hitting type” shown in FIG. “Display for the second type” shown in FIG. 4B is further divided into “Display for the first type” (not shown) and FIG. Suppose that there is an “indication about the second hit”.

Here, as an example of “display about how to hit the first type”, there is “display about how to hit the game ball”, and as an example of “display about how to hit the first ball”, Display ”(for example, three types of right-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to (c)). As an example of“ display for second-handed ”,“ display for left-handed ”( For example, there are two types of left-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 149 (d) and (e).
<Display control of pachinko machine 100 / right-handed notification, left-handed notification>

  In addition, each of the three types of right-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (c) has different display contents and position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. In addition, the right-handed notification “please right-hand” shown in FIG. 149 (c) is classified as a warning display for warning the player, and the type is different from other display modes. ing. In the right-handed notification during the big hit, the notifications shown in (a), (b), and (c) of FIG.

In addition, each of the two types of left-handed notifications shown in FIGS. 149 (d) and (e) has different display contents and the position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. In addition, the left-handed notification “please left-handed” shown in FIG. 149 (e) is classified as a warning display for giving a warning to the player, and the type is different from other display modes. ing.
<Display control of pachinko machine 100 / turbo button notification>

  An example of “display relating to the second type of strike” is “display relating to right strike”, and an example of “display relating to the first strike” is related to “right strike by firing handle 134”. Display ”(for example, a character display such as“ turn the handle to the right ”or the like) is an example of“ display related to the second hit ”, for example,“ display related to right stroke by the turbo button 804g ”(for example, FIG. 149). (F) to (i) shown, four types of turbo buttons 804g turbo button notification).

  In addition, each of the four types of turbo button notifications shown in FIGS. 149 (f) to (i) has different display contents and position / size of the display area, and is displayed after the display start condition is satisfied. The time until the display is started and the time from when the display end condition is satisfied until the display ends are different. In addition, the turbo button notification “turbo button operation prohibited state” shown in FIG. 149 (i) is classified as a warning display for giving a warning to the player. Are different.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), “display relating to the first type of hit” and “display relating to the second type of hit” are simultaneously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 148 (d), there are other displays in the display area between the “display relating to the first type of hitting” and the “display relating to the second type of hitting”. It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), “display about the first type” and “display about the second type” of “display about the first type of hit” are either one. As shown in FIG. 148 (f), “display about the first type” and “second type” of the “display about the second type” Only one of “display concerning” can be displayed exclusively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 148 (g), the “display regarding the second type” of the “display regarding the second type of hit” is the “display regarding the first type of hit”. Covering at least a part of the “display for the first type” of “and displaying at least part of the“ display for the first type ”of the“ display for the first type ” (Or at least the visibility has changed. As a result, it may be easier to visually recognize).

  In the example shown in FIG. 148 (h), the entire “display relating to the second type” of the “display relating to the second type of hit” is the “display relating to the first type of hit”. By placing it in the display area of “Display for the first type”, the display of most of the “Display for the first type” of the “Display for the first type” is displayed. Invisible (or difficult to see) (at least the visibility has changed. As a result, it may be easier to visually recognize).

  The time chart shown in FIG. 148 (j) is a diagram schematically showing the change of the state, and the “first state” at the timing shown in t1 in FIG. It changes from the “first state” to the “second state” at the timing, indicating that this “second state” is maintained after the timing shown in FIG.

  Here, as an example of the combination of “first state” and “second state”, for example, “normal state” and “big hit game”, “stop display of special figure” and “variable display of special figure” , “Electric support state” and “non-electric support state”, “probability change state” and “non-probability change state”, “lighting state” and “light-off state”, “turbo state” and “non-turbo state”, and the like.

  The display period of the above-mentioned “display relating to the first type of strike” and “display relating to the second type of strike” may be a period from the timing indicated by t1 in FIG. 148 (i) to the timing indicated by t3. The period from the timing indicated by t1 in FIG. 148 (i) to the timing indicated by t2 may be used, or the period from the timing indicated by t2 in FIG. 148 (i) to the timing indicated by t3 may be used. In addition, the period from the timing indicated by t1 to the timing indicated by t2 in FIG. 148 (i) is displayed in the first display mode, and the period from the timing indicated by t2 to the timing indicated by t3 is the first display mode. You may display in the 2nd display mode different from.

The classification of “display relating to the first type of hit” and “display relating to the second type of hit” is not limited to this example, and “display related to the first type of hit” is a warning display (for example, 149 (c), (e), (i), etc.), the “display relating to the second type of hitting” may be classified as a display other than the warning display, or “related to the first type of hitting”. In the display (for example, FIGS. 149 (a), (d), (f), etc.) in the first stage (for example, the first display in the configuration in which the display is switched in time series), “Display on type” is classified as a display (for example, FIG. 149 (b), (e), etc.) in the second stage (for example, displayed after the first stage or at a different timing). 149 in FIG. 149 regarding “how to strike the first type Display ", displayed on the" second type of Uchikata "," indication of a first Uchikata ", the display mode in FIG. 150 as" display regarding the second Uchikata "can be appropriately combined.
<Example of right-handed notification>

  Next, an example of the right-handed notification described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the right-handed notification during the big hit game in time series. Each display shown by reference numerals (a) to (i) is a part of the display performed during the period from the special figure change display shown in (a) to the big hit effect shown in (i). The time interval between the displays is not necessarily constant.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display are performed. At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. The fluctuation variation display using the symbol combination (decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) is performed. Further, at the timing shown in the same figure (c), a stop display is made with a combination of decorative symbols (decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) corresponding to the jackpot, and at the timing shown in the same figure (d), the gaming state is displayed. While shifting from the normal game to the special game state, the round lamp 223 (16R in this example) and the right-handed indicator lamp 224 are turned on.

  Further, at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 5E, the big hit notification (character display of “big hit” in this example) and the first right strike notification (in this example, FIG. 149 described above) are performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. (Right-hand notification shown in (a)) is performed, and turbo button notification (in this example, turbo button notification shown in FIG. 149 (g)) is performed at the subsequent timing shown in FIG.

  Further, at the timing shown in the same figure (g), instead of the first right-handed notification, a second right-handed notification (in this example, the right-handed notification shown in FIG. 149 (b) above) is performed, and then continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable winning opening (attacker) 235 is opened, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 5I, the big hit effect and the first right-hand notification are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6J, in this example, after the game state is shifted from the normal state to the special game state at the timing shown in FIG. Strike notification (display related to the first type of display regarding the first type of strike) is performed, and turbo button notification (display related to the second type of strike) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. The second right-hand-notification is performed at the timing shown in (g) of the drawing (display related to the second hitting method among the indications relating to the first type of hitting), and at the timing shown in FIG. The variable winning opening (attacker) 235 is opened, and the first right-hand notification (the display related to the first type of display related to the first type) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. ing.

Note that the execution order of each display ((e), (f), (g), (i) in the figure) is not limited to this example. For example, the figure (e) may be displayed after the figure (f), and the figures (e) and (f) may be simultaneously displayed after the figure (g). The same applies to the execution timing and execution order of each operation state and each display. Further, only one type of execution order or the like may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. For example, at least a part of the execution order may be different depending on the type of jackpot.
<Turbo button notification delay processing>

  Next, turbo button notification delay processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing time-series turbo button notification when the turbo button is pressed during the electric support, and FIG. 151 (b) shows the turbo button notification during the non-electric support. It is the figure which showed the turbo button alerting | reporting when a pressing operation was performed in time series. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a firing-related signal input to the first sub control board 160 and an input signal that is a basis of the firing-related signal.

  The gaming table of this example includes a first path for inputting a firing-related signal (a firing intensity state signal, a touch switch signal, and a solenoid signal shown in the output signal of FIG. 152) to the first sub-control unit 160 through a delay circuit; A second path that bypasses the delay circuit and inputs the fire-related signal to the first sub-control unit 160. Then, during the electric support shown in FIG. 5A, the turbo button 804g is pressed by inputting the firing intensity changeover switch signal based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g to the first sub-control unit 160 through the second path. Ta is the time from when an operation is detected until turbo button notification (in this example, the character display of “pressing turbo button”) is performed based on the firing intensity changeover switch signal.

  On the other hand, during the non-electric support shown in FIG. 5B, the firing intensity changeover switch signal based on the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is input to the first sub-control unit 160 through the first path, so that the turbo button 804g The time from detection of the pressing operation until turbo button notification (in this example, “Turbo button operation is prohibited”) is delayed from Ta based on the firing intensity switch signal. Tb.

  In this example, an example in which a firing-related signal is directly input to the first sub-control board 160 has been shown. However, as described above, other examples such as the launch control board 174, the payout control board 170, and the main control board 156 are used. A control unit or a substrate may be used. Also, the firing related signal may be one or more of a firing strength state signal, a touch switch signal, and a solenoid signal.

  In addition, the discharge control board inputs information (signal itself, command indicating the state, etc.) regarding the firing intensity state signal and the firing intensity changeover switch signal (either one or both), but the main control board and sub-control board Even in the case of adopting a configuration that does not input, a configuration that inputs the payout control board and the main control board but does not input the sub control board, etc. It is.

The state shown in FIG. 152 (a) is a normal state, and the state shown in FIG. 152 (b) is a state in which the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is performed in the normal state shown in FIG. 152 (a). The state shown in FIG. 5C is a state in which the firing handle 134 is being operated and the firing permission signal is off. FIG. 4D shows a state in which the turbo button 804g is pressed in addition to the state shown in FIG. 4C. The state shown in FIG. (F) of FIG. 5 shows a state where the firing stop lever has been pressed.
<Turbo button notification when game ball cannot be fired>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, turbo button notification in a state where the game ball cannot be fired will be described. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing time-series turbo button notification when a turbo button is pressed during magnetic error detection.

  In this example, when a specific error (an error prohibiting the launch of a game ball. For example, a magnetic error) occurs during the game, the launch of the ball by the launch device 844 is prohibited and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. Error notification. In addition, when a specific error occurs, in addition to prohibiting the launch of the game ball, a part of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is restricted, and operations such as power cycle and RAM clear Unless it is performed, it is configured not to return to a normal gaming state from a specific error.

  However, in this example, even when such a specific error occurs, it is possible to accept the pressing operation of the turbo button 804g, and in addition to the turbo button notification (in this example, prohibiting the turbo button operation) based on the pressing operation. Character display) is possible. The specific error is not limited to a magnetic error. For example, a CR unit disconnected error, a main control communication error, a solenoid signal is turned off (the firing stop lever is pressed or the touch switch is turned off) Error). The detection of a specific error is not limited to the main control unit 300, and may be performed by another control unit.

It should be noted that the display related to the operation of the turbo button during any error may or may not have changed in visibility compared to the non-error case. When it is changing, at least one of the error display and the display related to the turbo button operation may be difficult to view (impossible). In this case, one display may change the visibility of the other display, or the visibility may change depending on the display (for example, LED) related to the one display.
<Other application examples of turbo buttons>

  Next, another application example of the turbo button 804g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining an application example of the turbo button 804g.

  The states shown in FIGS. 7A and 7C show a state before the game machine is turned on, and no image is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. is there. When the gaming machine is turned on from this state, as a first initial operation, for example, initial setting of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, processing for developing effect data in VRAM, operation checking operation of the accessory, A process of outputting a sound or turning on an LED, a process of operating a chance button 136, or the like). In addition, during this first initial operation, as shown in FIGS. 2B and 2D, a notification (in this example) indicates that the first initial operation is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. , Character display during loading (first initial operation)).

In this example, after the first initial operation is finished, an operation means (in this example, the turbo button 804g or the chance button 160) provided at a position where the player or game clerk can operate is operated. In addition, the second initial operation is performed. In addition, although the example which performs a 2nd initial operation when an operation means is operated was shown, for example, when other conditions are satisfied (for example, when the front frame door 106 is open), The second initial operation may be performed when the operation means is operated.
<Power interruption and power recovery during turbo button notification>

  Next, power interruption / recovery during turbo button notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining power interruption / recovery during turbo button notification.

  In this example, the turbo button 804g is pressed during the big hit shown in FIG. 10A, and the turbo button notification shown in FIG. 10B is displayed (in this example, “Turbo is operating!” Is displayed). This shows an example in which power interruption / recovery was performed while

After power recovery, the initial screen is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, based on the fact that the turbo button notification was performed before power recovery, a part of the initial screen after power recovery A right-handed notification (in this example, a character display of “please make a right-hand →”) is displayed. This right-handed notification is configured to maintain the display as shown in FIG. 4D even when a pressing operation of the turbo button 804g is accepted.
<Execution timing of various displays>

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of various displays. Right-handed display (right-handed notification) can be started at various timings (for example, at the start of a small hit) shown in the rightmost column of FIG. Further, the turbo press display can be started at various timings shown in the rightmost column and the second column from the right in FIG. Left-handed display (left-handed notification) can be started at various timings (for example, after the end of a small hit) shown in the rightmost column and the second column from the left in FIG. Further, the turbo separation display can be started at various timings (for example, turbo operation during non-electric support) shown in the rightmost column and the leftmost column in FIG.

  Note that the execution timing of this example is merely an example, and for example, any display timing (for example, the timing of starting an effect by a light guide plate described later, the timing after the end of a blackout effect) or operation in the present embodiment or an embodiment described later. In addition to external timing such as the movement start timing of the movable object and the movement start timing of the sub liquid crystal, internal timing (for example, transition timing of the variation pattern table) may or may not be included. May be. Also, a predetermined detection (such as a gate) is one of the conditions that change the control state of the game table, such as the determination of the number of Rs and the passing timing of the game ball to the predetermined gate for starting the opening of the attacker. The timing of detection of entry of a game ball into a predetermined area may be included.

  As will be described later, the display related to the turbo button in the present embodiment (displayed before operation, or at least one display displayed during operation or after operation) is another object (display, accessory, etc.). The visibility may or may not be changed depending on the configuration of the game machine, and the visibility of other objects may or may not be changed. Indirect ones may also be included. For example, the visibility of other objects may be changed by the effect of the light guide plate in a configuration in which an image is displayed based on a turbo button operation and the effect is displayed on the light guide plate described later. Moreover, what is necessary is just to change visibility by at least one of an indirect thing and a direct thing (both are included).

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<< Embodiment 2 >>
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back>

  FIG. 158 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 157 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 159 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display are provided at the lower right of the game area 124. A device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, an effect display area 208d, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol display. The region 208f is configured. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of the special figure 1 variable game (to be described later), and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f has the result of the special figure 2 variable game (to be described later). For example, “-” blinks during special figure variation game (during special figure variation), and “○” is displayed when the result of special figure variation game is winning, If the result of the special figure variation game is wrong, “×” is displayed. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208f can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, below the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special figure start port 230, a second special figure start port 232, A first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, they are respectively disposed below and below the center of the game board 200. As will be described in detail later, the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 have the same structure and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball is inserted while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the ball is impossible and the special figure display device wins the special figure change game and the special figure display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a are set at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds, a closing time of 1. 5 seconds), and opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable game is won. In this case, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course. The effect movable body 224 includes a motor (not shown) and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234, and a second variable winning port. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 235a of 235 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 161 (a), five types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 1 in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. There are four types of special symbols “stop” from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as special symbols 2 of special symbol 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  The stop symbol mode of the other special figure 1 will be described. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. The “special drawing E” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  Further, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol. , “Special Figure d” is an outlier symbol.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and the 8R jackpot of “Special Figure c” are notified, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1—Decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 8R special jackpot of "Special Figure b", a combination of symbols in which three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged (For example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” suddenly changes is notified. Then, “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E or the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 161 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of the normal figure, “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol and “normal figure B” which is an outlier symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  FIG. 162 (a) shows an example of the high probability state table for determination of success / failure (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 162 (b) shows an example of the low probability state table for determination of success / failure (Special Figure 1). Is. FIG. 4C shows an example of the high probability state table for success / failure determination (special figure 2), and FIG. 4D shows an example of the low probability state table for the success / failure determination (special figure 2). It is shown.

These success / failure determination tables correlate presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), special figure big hit judgment lottery value data, and special figure variable game success / failure results. Has been remembered. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).
<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 12185 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 1 variable game winning (big hit) ) Is set and information indicating that a big hit flag is provided in the storage area for the big hit flag provided in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is set to “turn on the big hit flag on”) "). Further, when the special figure winning random number value is 12186 to 13823 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the storage area for the small hit flag is set (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag to ON”). If the acquired special figure winning random number is a value other than 10001 to 12185 or 12186 to 13823 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of the above state. Set the information indicating that there is a loss in the storage area of the big hit flag and the small hit flag (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to off) In other words, setting out-of-order information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 12185), so the winning probability of the special figure 1 probability game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 12185/65536). Since the numerical value range of the lottery value data is 12186 to 13823 (the size of the numerical value range is 12185), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/399 (= 1638/65536). ). On the other hand, the winning probability per jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the numerical range of the lottery value data per small lot in the special figure low probability state is 10220. Since it is ˜11857 (the size of the numerical range is 1638), the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/399 (= 1638/65536).
<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment>

  In the special figure 2 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 12185 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 2 variable game winning (big hit) ) And the big hit flag is set to ON. The special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit. Also, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number is a value other than 10001-12185, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play, and a big hit flag and a small hit Set the flag off.

In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numeric value range). Is 12185), the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 12185/65536), and the special figure 1 in the special figure high probability state. It is set to be the same as the winning probability for the jackpot of the variable game. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), They are set the same.
<Special figure determination table>

  FIG. 163 (a) is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, and FIG. 163 (b) is a special figure used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. It is an example of the table for determination. In these special figure determination tables, the determination result of special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game), the lottery value data, and the types of stop symbols are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs symbol lottery to determine the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the symbol random number value. In addition, when the big hit flag is on, the acquired big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. When the symbol random number value is used as the symbol lottery random number value and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of order), the acquired random number value for losing is drawn in the symbol lottery Use as a random value.
<Special figure determination table / Special figure 1 stop symbol>

For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 24, the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 25 When the numerical value is -49, the special figure B is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and when the symbol random number is a numerical value of 50-99, the special figure C is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 floating game is successful is a small hit, the special figure 1 is stopped regardless of the symbol random number value (the symbol random value for small hit), that is, with a probability of 100% at the small hit. When special figure D is selected as the symbol, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong, it is unrelated to the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. The special figure E is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol.
<Special Figure Determination Table / Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern>

For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value between 0 and 69, the special figure a is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol and the symbol lottery random value is 70. When it is a numerical value of -74, the special figure b is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol, and when the symbol lottery random value is a numerical value of 75-99, the special figure c is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure 2 stop symbol is used regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. Select special figure d.
<Variable prize opening performance, special performance>

  FIG. 164 (a) shows the variable prize opening performance. The variable winning opening performance includes the relationship between the type of the variable winning opening, the arrangement position on the game board 200, the maximum number of rounds of the big hit game, the maximum number of counts per round, and the number of prize balls per count. Show. FIG. 2B shows special figure performance. This special figure performance shows the relationship between the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2, the type of variable winning opening, the maximum number of rounds, the total number of prize balls, the probability change and the presence or absence of electric support.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs the 15R special big hit game when the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery. This 15R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened up to 15 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 9, and the number of prize balls per count is 14 The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed as 15 maximum rounds × 9 maximum counts × 14 winning balls = 1890. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty and with electric support).

  When special figure B is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-mentioned symbol lottery, a 15R normal big hit game is performed. This 15R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened up to 15 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 9, and the number of prize balls per count is 14 The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed as 15 maximum rounds × 9 maximum counts × 14 winning balls = 1890. In addition, after the 15R normal big hit game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (no probability change, with electric support).

  When the special figure C is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 2R special big hit game is performed. This 2R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 is opened for a short time twice at maximum, and the magnitude of the game value (cumulative prize ball number) is expressed as almost zero. Can do. In addition, after the 2R special jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty change, with electric support).

  When the special figure D is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 2R normal big hit game is performed. This 2R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened for a short time twice at maximum, and the magnitude of the game value (cumulative prize ball number) is expressed as almost zero. Can do. Also, after the 2R normal big hit game is over, the game state is not shifted.

  Further, when the special figure a is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, a 16R special big hit game is performed. This 16R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened up to 16 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 16 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 2400. In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty, with electric support).

  Further, when the special figure b is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 8R special big hit game is performed. This 8R special jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened up to 8 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10 times, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 8 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 1200. In addition, after the 8R special jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (with certainty change, with electric support).

Further, when the special figure c is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol in the above-described symbol lottery, the 8R normal big hit game is performed. This 8R normal jackpot game is a game in which the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened up to 8 times, the maximum number of counts per round is 10 times, and the number of prize balls per count is 15. The magnitude of the game value (cumulative number of winning balls) can be expressed by the maximum number of rounds 8 times × the maximum number of counts 10 times × the number of winning balls 15 = 1200. In addition, after the 8R normal big hit game ends, the gaming state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (no probability change, with electric support).
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 160. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 160, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that this has occurred.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 161 (d)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 161 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure a shown in FIG. ~ Special figure d (In the special figure 1 state update process, the special figure A to the special figure E shown in FIG. 161 (a) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a) is provided to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high-probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 164 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Structure of the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235)>

  Next, the structure of the first variable winning opening 234 will be described in detail. Note that the second variable prize opening 235 has the same structure as the first variable prize opening 234, and thus the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 169 (a) is an external perspective view of the first variable winning opening 234 attached to the decorative member 250 and the door member 234a being closed. FIG. 169 (b) is attached to the decorative member 250. It is an external appearance perspective view of the 1st variable prize opening 234 in the state where the door member 234a was opened. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative member 250 and the first variable winning opening 234.

  The decorative member 250 includes a winning port unit 250a in which the wall portion 250a1 constituting the above-described general winning port 226 is formed, a base unit 250b to which the winning port unit 250a is fixed, and a base unit 250b that is fitted and fixed. And a decorative unit 250c made of a transparent member.

  Two U-shaped wall portions 250a1 constituting the general winning port 226 are formed in the winning port unit 250a. In the base unit 250b, a ball passage 256b1 for guiding a game ball that has entered the wall 250a1 to a predetermined position is formed in a projecting manner at a position corresponding to the wall 250a1 formed in the winning opening unit 250a. . The base unit 250b has a first opening 250b2 for fitting the decoration unit 250c from the back side on the left side when viewed from the front, and a door member of the first variable prize opening 234 on the right side when viewed from the front. A rectangular second opening 250b3 into which 234a is fitted is formed.

The first variable winning opening 234 is a door member 234a that is rotatably attached to the second opening 250b3 of the base unit 250b, and a variable winning opening unit 260 that is disposed behind the door member 234a and is attached to the base unit 250b. And is configured.
<Variable prize opening unit>

  Next, the variable prize opening unit 260 will be described in detail. As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 170, the variable prize opening unit 260 includes a lower case 262 made of a translucent member, a rectangular parallelepiped ball-entry sensor 264 housed in a sensor housing portion of the lower case 262, and a lower case. A drive unit 266 for driving the door member 234 a, a plate-shaped magnetic shield plate 268 disposed so as to cover the drive unit 266, and a half fixed to the lower case 262. And an upper case 270 made of a transparent member.

  The incoming ball sensor 264 includes a ball passage 264a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the maximum diameter of the game ball, and is configured to be able to detect that the game ball has passed through the ball passage 264a. Note that the method of detecting the game ball by the entrance sensor 264 is not limited. For example, when the game ball passes through the internal space of the ball passage 264a, a high level signal is output, and the game ball passes through the ball passage 264a. It is configured to output a low level signal when not passing through the internal space. In addition, the incoming ball sensor 264 is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is along the short direction of the lower case 262 (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the lower case 262). Thereby, the length in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning a prize opening unit 260 is made shorter than that of the conventional game stand to save space.

  The drive unit 266 is engaged with a solenoid 266a, a solenoid shaft of the solenoid 266a, and is engaged with the bearing 266b slidable in the axial direction of the solenoid shaft, and the bearing 266b, and rotates the door member 234a. Arm portion 266c. Further, a magnetic shield 268 is disposed above the solenoid 266a, thereby preventing the magnetic force generated when the solenoid 266a is energized from leaking to the outside and affecting the rolling of the game ball. .

In a state where the power to the solenoid 266a is not supplied, the arm 266c engaged with the bearing 266b is rotated counterclockwise by the solenoid shaft retracting toward the solenoid 266a. Thereby, the door member 234a engaged with the arm portion 266c is rotated to the closed position shown in FIG. On the other hand, in a state where electric power is supplied to the solenoid 266a, the arm portion 266c engaged with the bearing portion 266b is rotated clockwise by the solenoid shaft protruding in a direction away from the solenoid 266a. Thereby, the door member 234a engaged with the arm portion 266c is rotated to the open position shown in FIG. 169 (b). That is, by energizing the solenoid 266a, the door member 234a can be moved to the open position so that a ball can enter the first variable prize opening 234, and the energization to the solenoid 266a stops the door. The member 234a can be moved to the closed position so that a ball cannot enter the first variable winning opening 234.
<Variable prize opening unit / ball passage>

  FIG. 171 (a) is an external perspective view of the variable prize opening unit 260 as seen from the front right diagonally upper side, and FIG. 171 (b) is an external perspective view of the variable prize port unit 260 as seen from the diagonally upper left side of the front. is there. FIG. 172 (a) is an external perspective view of the variable winning opening unit 260 as seen from a slightly lower side than FIG. 171 (a), and FIG. 172 (b) is a side sectional view of the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272. It is.

  The variable prize opening unit 260 is provided with a ball passage 272 (274, 276, 278) for guiding the game ball that has entered by rolling the door member 234a to a predetermined position when the door member 234a is in the open position. It has been. The spherical passage 272 includes a lower surface 274 formed on the lower case 262, a lower side surface 262b formed to protrude in the vertical direction on the lower case 262, and an upper side surface 270b formed to protrude in the vertical direction on the upper case 270. (262a, 270b) and an upper surface 278 formed on the upper case 270, the three sides are surrounded. That is, the part facing the side surface 276 is an opening that is opened or closed by the door member 234a.

  The lower surface 274 of the ball passage 272 is an inclined surface that descends from the right end portion 274a in the front view of the variable prize opening unit 260 toward the left end portion 274b. Due to the inclined surface of the lower surface 274, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 272 rolls from the right end portion 274a of the lower surface 274 toward the left end portion 274b, and the ball entering sensor 264 disposed near the left end portion 274b. The guide is smoothly and reliably guided in the direction of the ball passage 264a.

  In addition, a guide wall 274c that protrudes upward is formed in the vicinity of the left end 274b of the lower surface 274. The guide wall 274c is an inclined surface that descends from the door member 234a side toward the entrance sensor 264 side on the lower surface 274. Due to the inclined surface of the guide wall 274c, the game ball that rolls from the right end 274a to the left end 274b of the lower surface 274 is directed toward the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264 disposed in the vicinity of the left end 274b. Thus, the game ball is prevented from jumping out from the ball passage 272 toward the door member 234a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 is composed of two members, that is, the lower side surface 262b of the lower case 262 and the upper side surface 270b of the upper case 270. A slight gap is provided between the side surface 262b and the upper side surface 270b. Accordingly, the game ball B rolling on the lower surface 274 while contacting the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 contacts the end portion 262b1 of the lower side surface 262b and the end portion 270b1 of the upper side surface 270b, and these end portions 262b1. It rolls on the lower surface 274 while being guided by 270b1 (movement is restricted). Accordingly, the game ball is smoothly and reliably guided along the side surface 276 toward the ball passage 264a of the ball entering sensor 264. In FIG. 172 (b), the lower side surface 262b and the upper side surface 270b are flush with each other, but one surface projects from the other surface, and the game ball is guided by the end of the projecting surface. You may comprise as follows.

  FIG. 173 is a plan view showing a part of the variable prize opening unit 260 in a transparent manner. On the lower side surface 262a of the lower case 262, a guide convex portion 262a1 that protrudes toward the spherical passage 274 is formed. The guide protrusion 262a1 is formed in an inverted triangular shape in plan view. The guide convex portion 262a1 guides the game ball rolling on the lower surface 274 from the right end portion 274a toward the left end portion 274b while contacting the lower side surface 262a of the ball passage 272 in the direction of the guide wall 274c. I have to.

  In addition, a triangular rib 278 a that protrudes toward the lower case 262 is formed on the upper surface 278 of the upper case 270. The triangular ribs 278a guide the game balls that have jumped up by colliding with other game balls on the lower surface 274 toward the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264 smoothly and reliably.

  FIG. 174 is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. The back surface of the side surface 276 of the spherical passage 272 (the surface opposite to the spherical passage 274) is provided with a knurled knurled process. This knurling prevents the board 280 and the solenoid 266a arranged on the back side of the side surface 276 from being difficult to see from the front by the player, and prevents the board 280 and the solenoid 266a from being improperly crafted. Yes. In addition, a rectangular tube-shaped ball passage 282 through which a game ball can pass is formed between the housing portion that houses the substrate 280 and the housing portion that houses the solenoid 266a. A rib 282a that protrudes in the direction is provided. The rib 282a is not subjected to the knurling process described above, so that the game ball passing through the ball passage 282 is visible from the front side.

In addition, an insertion hole 274d for discharging dust and dust accumulated on the lower surface 274 downward is formed in the vicinity of the ball entry sensor 264 on the lower surface 274 of the ball passage 272. By providing such an insertion hole 274d, dust and dust attached to the game ball and accumulated in the vicinity of the entrance sensor 264 can be dropped downward, and a ball clogging in the vicinity of the entrance sensor 264 can be prevented. Can be prevented. Although not shown, when the variable prize opening unit 260 is assembled, another member is inserted into a part of the insertion hole 274d, so that dust and dirt accumulated in the insertion hole 274 can be removed. It is configured to be forcibly discharged by another member. Further, a rib 810 is provided on the left outer side of the incoming ball sensor 264.
<Door member>

  175 (a) to (f) are a plan view, a front view, a left side view, a right side view, a bottom view, and a rear view of the door member 243a, respectively, and FIG. 175 (g) shows the door member 243a. FIG.

  The door member 243a is made of a plate-shaped transparent member, and a first drop-off prevention wall 290a and a second drop-off prevention wall 290b are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction so as to protrude in the vertical direction with the back surface 290 as a base end. . The first drop prevention wall 290a and the second drop prevention wall 290b prevent the game balls that have entered the back surface 290 from falling (falling off) from both sides of the back surface 290 when the door member 243a is in the open position. It is a member for doing.

  On the first drop-off prevention wall 290a, an engaging portion 290a1 made of two rod-like members engaged with the arm portion 266c of the driving portion 266 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is formed to protrude. A recess 290b1 is formed in the second dropout prevention wall 290b as shown in the left side view of FIG. Since the door member 243a is made of a transparent member, the recess 290b1 changes the bending rate of light at the portion, and from the front of the door member 243a (from the direction of FIG. 5B), the door member 243a. This is a part that makes it difficult to see the incoming ball sensor 264 arranged in the left back of the player (prevents the visual recognition of the incoming ball sensor 264) and prevents fraud.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g), the back surface 290 of the door member 243a has a long side 290c which is the long side on which the game ball enters, on the side where the game ball retreats. A first inclined surface 290e that descends toward the exit side long side 290d that is the long side, and a second inclined surface 290f that descends toward the exit side long side 290d at an angle different from the first inclined surface are formed. Yes.

  Further, on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the back surface 290 of the door member 243a, a first guide slope 290g descending toward the back surface 290 with the point where the first drop prevention wall 290a and the exit side long side 290d intersect each other, A second guide slope 290h that descends toward the back surface 290 is formed at a point where the drop prevention wall 290b and the exit side long side 290d intersect. The first guide slope 290g and the second guide slope 290h are parts for guiding the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 over the entrance-side long side 290c toward the center of the exit-side long side 290d, The rear view in which the diameter increases from the entry-side long side 290c toward the exit-side long side 290d is a substantially triangular non-target portion.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the second guiding slope 290h is designed to be larger than the tilting angle of the first guiding slope 290g, so that the game ball is back at the same speed as the back surface 290 of the door member 243a. Even if the vehicle enters the vehicle, the slope of the first guide slope 290g can be overcome, but the slope of the second guide slope 290h that is steeper than the first guide slope 290g may not be overcome.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9E, a protrusion 294a is formed on the front surface 294 of the door member 243a so as to protrude from the upper right side to the lower side when viewed from the front. The protrusion formed on the front surface 294 may have a curved shape as shown in FIG. 176 (a), or may have a polygonal pyramid shape as shown in FIG. By forming such a protrusion, positioning may be easily performed when a decorative seal or the like is attached to the front surface 294.

FIG. 176 (c) is a view of a conventional door member in the open position as seen from the right side, and FIG. 176 (d) is a view of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment in the open position as seen from the right side. FIG. The maximum width W2 of the front end portion of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment is designed to be narrower than the maximum width W1 of the front end portion of the conventional door member, and the door member 243a and a transparent plate member (panel glass). The possibility that a game ball will be sandwiched between 118 and the present invention is reduced as compared with the prior art. Moreover, the maximum protrusion amount L2 of the door member 243a according to the present embodiment is designed to be larger than the maximum protrusion amount L1 of the conventional door member, and when the door member 243a is in the open position, In addition, a large number of game balls are allowed to enter the door member 243a so as to give as much profit as possible to the player.
<Rolling route of game balls>

  Next, the rolling route along which the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 rolls will be described in detail. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of a rolling route of game balls. A plurality of types of game ball rolling routes are conceivable. For example, there are three possible routes: a first route R1, a second route R2, and a third route R3.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a state of a game ball passing through the first route R1. As shown in the figure, the first route R1 is after the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position has fallen over the first guide slope 290g ( (A)), the ball passage 272 enters the vicinity of the right end 274a of the lower surface 274 (FIG. (B)), and extends from the right end 274a toward the left end 274b along the side surface 276 of the lower surface 274. Rolls on the inclined surface (FIGS. (B) to (c)), collides with the guide convex portion 262a1, bounces away from the side surface 276 (FIG. (C)), and reaches the guide wall 274c facing the side surface 276. Colliding (Fig. (D)), rolling the lower surface 274 to the left end portion 274b along the guide wall 274c (Fig. (E)), passing through the ball passage 264a of the entrance sensor 264 (Fig. (F)), the route to reach the ball passage .

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a state of a game ball passing through the second route R2. The second route R2 has a back surface 290 along the edge of the first guide slope 290g without the game ball entering the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position, riding on the first guide slope 290g. It rolls up (FIG. (A)), and in a portion where there is a height difference (step) between the door member 243a and the lower surface 274, it rolls on the back surface 290 (FIG. (B)), and the door member 293a and the lower surface 274 are moved. In a portion where there is no height difference (step), the ball enters the lower surface 274 of the spherical passage 272 (FIGS. (C) to (d)), passes through the side of the guide wall 274c, and rolls the lower surface 274 to the left end 274b. ((D) to (e) in the figure), the route passes through the ball path 264a of the incoming sensor 264 ((f) in the figure) and reaches the ball path. This second route R2 is the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 290 of the door member 234a until it passes through the ball passage 264a of the ball entry sensor 264 (the time during which the game ball stays in the first variable winning opening 234). ) Is the shortest route that is the shortest of the first route R1 to the third route R3.

  FIG. 180 is a view showing a state of a game ball passing through the third route R3. The third route R3 collides with the side surface 276 after the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when riding on the second guiding slope 290h (FIG. 5A) when the door member 234a is in the open position. After rolling from the left end portion 274b toward the right end portion 274a against the inclination of the lower surface 274 (FIG. 5B), the inclined surface is rolled from the right end portion 274a toward the left end portion 274b. At the beginning (Fig. (C)), it passes by the side of the guide wall 274c and rolls to the left end portion 274b (Figs. (D) to (e)), and passes through the ball passage 264a of the entrance sensor 264. (Figure (f)) is a route that reaches the ball passage. This third route R3 is the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 290 of the door member 234a until it passes through the ball passage 264a of the ball entry sensor 264 (the time during which the game ball stays in the first variable winning opening 234). ) Is the longest route that is the longest among the first route R1 to the third route R3.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing another state of the game ball passing through the third route R3. After the game ball that has entered the back surface 290 of the door member 234a when the door member 234a is in the open position rides on the second guide slope 290h (FIG. 5A), the above-described figure is applied until it collides with the side surface 276. Although the route is the same as the route of 180, in this example, as shown in FIG. 5B, after the game ball rebounds at a reflection angle of about 90 degrees with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball, the first guide After rolling on the back surface 290 along the edge of the slope 290g (Fig. (C)), and further rolling on the back surface 290 in a loop along the longitudinal direction (Figs. (D) to (f)). This is a route that passes by the side of the guide wall 274c and rolls to the left end 274b (FIGS. (G) to (h)), passes through the ball passage 264a of the incoming sensor 264, and reaches the ball passage. . In this route, the game sphere can be guided by the side surface 276 in a direction away from the entrance sensor 264 (outside the winning entrance), so that it is easy to take the entering gaming ball out of the winning entrance again. It may be possible to make the time taken to pass the means longer.
<Effects of the first and second variable winning entries>

  Next, the effects of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 will be described. FIG. 182 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front, and is the same as FIG. 159 described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first variable prize opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200, and the second variable prize opening 235 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 200. When a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of 124, the game ball is easier to enter the first variable prize opening 234 than the second variable prize opening 235, and the game ball is launched at the right side of the game area 124. In such a case, the game ball is configured to enter the second variable prize opening 235 more easily than the first variable prize opening 234. When the special figure 1 variable game is won, a big hit game (or a small hit game) is performed in which the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When the variable game is won, the jackpot game is performed in which the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  Therefore, when the player wins the special figure 1 variable game, the player strikes the game ball on the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed) with the aim of entering the first variable winning opening 234. Thus, when the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is adjusted and the special figure 2 variable game is won, the game ball is launched to the right of the game area 124 with the aim of entering the second variable winning opening 235 ( The game is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 so as to make a right-hand hit.

  For this reason, the entrance to the first variable winning opening 234 is more from the left side (the first route R1 or the second route R2) than the first variable winning entrance 234 (the third route R2). R3) is highly likely, and the time for the game ball to stay in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes longer, and an over winning is induced than in the second variable winning opening 235, and the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 variable game Can enjoy for a long time.

  The pachinko machine 100 closes the door member 235a when the ball sensor 264 detects the passage of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls at the first variable winning port 234 (same as the second variable winning port 235). To change. However, during the movement period from the open state to the closed state (until the door member 235a is completely closed), the game ball can enter the first variable winning opening 234. That is, even after the entrance sensor 264 detects the passage of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, it is possible for more game balls to enter, which is advantageous for the player. In this specification, winning a game ball in a predetermined number (for example, more than 10) is referred to as over winning.

  There may be a case where time is required from when the ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 until it is detected by the ball sensor 264. For this reason, a predetermined number of game balls may be detected by the ball entry sensor 264 during a period in which the game balls stay in the first variable prize winning opening 234.

On the other hand, the ball entering the second variable winning port 235 is a ball entering from the right side (the first route R1 or the second route R2) rather than the ball entering from the left side (the third route R3) of the second variable winning port 235. ), The time during which the game ball stays in the second variable prize opening 234 is shortened, over-winning is suppressed more than the first variable prize opening 234, and the big hit game based on the special figure 2 variable game is digested Efficiency is increased.
<Variation of variable prize opening>

  Next, a modified example of the variable winning opening will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a variable prize opening 600 according to the first modification. The variable prize opening 600 according to the first modification includes a variable prize opening unit 602 and a door member 604, and dropout prevention walls 604 a are formed on both sides of the door member 604 in the longitudinal direction.

  The back surface 606 of the door member 604 is formed continuously from the first inclined surface 606a that descends from the right side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 604 to the left side, and the lower edge of the first inclined surface 606a. A second inclined surface 606b that descends toward the variable prize opening unit 602 in a direction parallel to the short side direction, is formed continuously with the upper edge of the first inclined surface 606a, and is opposite to the first inclined surface 606a. A third inclined surface 606c that descends toward the bottom, and a lower edge of the third inclined surface 606c that is formed continuously with the lower edge of the third inclined surface 606c and parallel to the short direction of the door member 604. And a fourth inclined surface 606b. The lengths of the third inclined surface 606c and the fourth inclined surface 606d in the longitudinal direction are designed to be longer than the lengths of the first inclined surface 606a and the second inclined surface 606b in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

  A lower surface 608 of the variable winning opening 602 is adjacent to the second inclined surface 606b of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 and descends toward the ball entering sensor 610 in a direction parallel to the short direction of the variable winning opening 602. An inclined surface 608a, a second inclined surface 608b that is adjacent to the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 and descends obliquely toward the entrance sensor 610, and the second inclined surface 608b. And a third inclined surface 608c that is formed and descends obliquely toward the entrance sensor 610.

  In the first modified example, when the door member 604 is in the open position, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 606a of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the first inclined surface 606a → the first inclined surface 606 of the back surface 606 of the door member 604. 2 The inclined surface 606b → rolls on the first route of the first inclined surface 608a of the lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602 and reaches the ball entering sensor 610. In this first route, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball entry sensor 610 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600) is the longest. This is the shortest route to be shortened.

  In addition, the game ball that has entered the third inclined surface 606c of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the third inclined surface 606c of the rear surface 606 of the door member 604 → the fourth inclined surface 606d → the first lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602. It rolls on the second route of the second inclined surface 608b (or the third inclined surface 608c) and reaches the entrance sensor 610. This second route has the longest time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball sensor 610 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600). It is the longest route that gets longer.

  In addition, the game ball that has entered the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 is the fourth inclined surface 606d of the back surface 606 of the door member 604 → the second inclined surface 608b of the lower surface 602 of the variable winning opening 602 (or It rolls on the third route of the third inclined surface 608c) and reaches the entrance sensor 610. In this third route, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 606 of the door member 604 until it passes through the ball passage 610a of the ball entry sensor 610 (time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning opening 600) This route is shorter than the second route and longer than the first route.

  According to the variable prize opening 600 according to the first modification, the game ball can be guided to the ball entry sensor 610 through at least three routes by one variable prize opening. For example, in the second route, an over prize is obtained. In the first route, over-winning is suppressed and the digestion efficiency of the jackpot game is increased.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the variable winning opening 620 according to the second modification. The variable winning opening 620 according to the second modification includes a variable winning opening unit 622 and a door member 624, and dropout prevention walls 624 a are formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624.

  The back surface 626 of the door member 624 includes a first inclined surface 626a that descends from the left side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624 toward the center, a second inclined surface 626b that descends from the right side in the longitudinal direction of the door member 624 toward the center, And the lower edges of the first inclined surface 626a and the second inclined surface 626b are configured to substantially coincide with the central axis of the entrance sensor 630. Further, the length n1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 626a is designed to be longer than the length n2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 626b (n1> n2).

  The bottom surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 includes a first inclined surface 628 a that descends from the left in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning opening 622 toward the central winning sensor 630, and the central winning sensor from the right in the longitudinal direction of the variable winning opening 622. And a second inclined surface 628b that descends toward 630. The length m1 of the first inclined surface 628a in the longitudinal direction is designed to be longer than the length m2 of the second inclined surface 628b in the longitudinal direction (m1> m2).

  In the second modification, a game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 626a of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 when the door member 624 is in the open state is the first inclined surface 6206a → second of the back surface 626 of the door member 624. The inclined surface 626 b → rolls along the first route of the second inclined surface 628 b of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 and reaches the ball entering sensor 630. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 626b of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 is the second inclined surface 626b of the rear surface 626 of the door member 624 → the first inclined surface 626a → the first lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 620. Roll along the second route of the two inclined surfaces 628 a to reach the entrance sensor 610.

  The length n1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 626a of the back surface 626 of the door member 624 is the same as the length m1 in the longitudinal direction of the first inclined surface 628a of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622, and the door member 624. If the length n2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 626b of the rear face 626 and the length m2 in the longitudinal direction of the second inclined surface 628b of the lower surface 628 of the variable winning opening 622 are the same, the variable according to the second modification example At the winning hole 620, the time from when the game ball enters the back surface 626 of the door member 624 until it passes through the ball passage 630a of the ball sensor 630 (the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning hole 620) is The first route and the second route are the same.

  According to the variable prize opening 620 according to the modified example 2, the time that the game ball stays in the variable prize opening can be made uniform regardless of whether the game ball passes through the first route or the second route. .

  FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which a route that easily wins over and a route that won't easily win over are formed on the lower surface of the variable winning opening and the back of the door member with the central axis of the ball sensor as a boundary.

  In this example, a game ball that has entered the right region on the back surface of the door member is guided in a direction approaching the ball sensor by the door member and the variable winning opening, but a game that has entered the left region on the back surface of the door member. The sphere is guided once in the direction away from the entrance sensor by the door member, and then guided in the direction approaching the entrance sensor by the variable winning opening. According to the variable winning opening and the door member according to this example, the rolling route of the game ball can be made different depending on the ball entry position of the door member.

  FIG. 184 (b) shows that a route that is easy to win over and a route that is hard to win over is formed on the bottom surface of the variable winning opening and the back surface of the door member, and both the winning sensors are not connected. It is the figure which showed the example provided on the route | root.

  In this example, the game ball that has entered the right region on the back surface of the door member is guided in a direction approaching the right first entrance sensor by the door member and the variable winning opening, but in the left region on the back surface of the door member. The game ball that has entered the ball is guided once in the direction away from the left second incoming sensor by the door member, and then guided in the direction approaching the second incoming sensor by the variable winning opening. According to the variable winning opening and the door member according to this example, the rolling route of the game ball can be made different depending on the entrance position of the door member, and the game ball can be made to enter a different entrance sensor. it can.

  FIG. 185 (a) is an external perspective view showing an example of a shutter-type variable winning opening 650, and FIG. 185 (b) is a side sectional view showing a partial cross section of the variable winning opening 650. The variable winning opening 650 includes a door member 654 that can slide between an open position where a ball can be entered into the variable winning slot unit 652 and a closed position where a ball cannot be entered.

  The door member 654 is formed continuously from a first inclined surface 654a that descends away from the entrance sensor 656, and an upper edge of the first inclined surface 654a, and descends in a direction approaching the entrance sensor 656. 2 inclined surfaces 654a.

  In the variable winning opening 650, the game ball dropped on the first inclined surface 654a of the door member 654 rolls away from the ball-entry sensor 656 along the inclination of the first inclined surface 654a, and the door member 654 is opened. When it falls into the variable prize opening unit 652 due to the movement to the position, it is guided in the direction of the ball entry sensor 656 by the inclination of the bottom face of the variable prize opening unit 652. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen on the second inclined surface 654b of the door member 654 rolls in a direction approaching the entrance sensor 656 along the inclination of the second inclined surface 654b, and the door member 654 moves to the open position. When falling into the variable prize opening unit 652, it is guided in the direction of the ball entry sensor 656 by the inclination of the bottom surface of the variable prize opening unit 652.

According to this variable winning opening 650, a single game can be used to guide a game ball to the winning sensor 656 via at least two routes. For example, in a route that rolls on the first inclined surface 654a, In addition, it is possible to induce over winning and enjoy the big hit game for a long time. In the route that rolls on the second inclined surface 654b, over winning is suppressed and the digestion efficiency of the big hit game is increased.
<Variable prize opening unit and ball passage shape>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 to 192, the shapes of the variable prize opening unit 260 and the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 according to the present embodiment will be further described.

  FIG. 186 is a plan view showing a part of the variable prize opening unit 260 in a transparent manner (here, a front view seen from the side of the door member 234a not shown). As described above, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is an area surrounded by the lower surface (bottom surface) 274, the side surface 276, and the upper surface 278, and the front side (side surface 276 shown in FIG. 186) of the variable prize opening unit 260. The portion facing) is an opening 820 that is opened or closed by a door member 234a (not shown here). As shown in the figure, hereinafter, the distance between both ends in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 (the left end 274b in front view and the right end 274a in front view) is referred to as an opening width W0, and the opening width W0. The center (center line) in the longitudinal direction LD is referred to as an opening center line 820c.

  In the variable prize opening unit 260, the ball entry sensor 264 is provided at a position closer to the left end 274b than the opening center line 820c. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the entrance sensor 264 (for example, the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264 in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820) to the left end 274b is the first distance The distance LL1 is the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264 to the opening center line 820c. The second distance LL2 is the second distance LL2. The distance is longer than the distance LL1. Here, the first distance LL1 and the second distance LL2 have been described with reference to the center 264c of the entrance sensor 264, but any one end portion in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 of the entrance sensor 264 ( In the illustrated state, the left end or the right end) may be used as a reference.

  187 (a) is a side sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 186, and FIG. 187 (b) is a side sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 187 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 of the present embodiment is arranged along the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 in the first ball path area 822 (the diagonally downward slanting line). A hatched area), a second spherical passage area 824 (horizontal stripe hatched area), and a third spherical passage area 826 (lower right hatched area). That is, the variable winning a prize opening unit 260 has a ball entry sensor 264 arranged further to the left of the left end 274b of the opening 820, and the third ball passage area 826, from the left end 274b toward the right end 274a, The first ball passage region 822 and the second ball passage region 824 are arranged in this order. Further, the third sphere passage region 826, the first sphere passage region 822, and the second sphere passage region 824 are adjacent to each other, and the third sphere passage region 826 and the first sphere passage region 822 are all connected to the opening center line 820c. It arrange | positions between the entrance sensors 264 (left side edge part 274b). The third ball passage region 826 is disposed between the first ball passage region 822 and the incoming ball sensor 264.

  The first ball passage region 822 is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 820. The first sphere passage region 822 includes at least a region having a first sphere passage width W1. The first ball passage width W1 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the tip of the guide convex portion 262a1 to the guide wall 274c facing the first ball passage width 262a in the drawing.

  The second sphere passage region 824 is disposed between the first sphere passage region 822 and the right end portion 274a so as to cross both sides of the opening center line 820c with the opening center line 820c interposed therebetween. The second ball passage region 824 includes at least a region having a second ball passage width W2 in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. The second ball passage width W2 is a distance (width) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822 to the end portion on the right end portion 274a side. The second ball passage width W2 is larger than the first ball passage width W1 and larger than twice the diameter WB of the game ball B. Further, the second ball passage width W2 is larger than the width WC (= W0 / 2) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the left end 274b to the opening center line 820c, and is smaller than the opening width W0. The second ball passage area 824 is at least easily visible to the player when the door member 234a of the variable prize opening unit 260 is in the open position (in the state shown in the drawing).

  The third ball passage region 826 includes at least a region having a third ball passage width W3. The third ball passage width W3 in the same figure in the short side direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260 from the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272 in the vicinity of the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822 to the guide wall 274c opposite thereto. Distance (width). The third ball passage width W3 is the maximum width of the third ball passage region 826 in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260, and the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 822 and the game ball Greater than diameter.

  The third ball passage area 826 is provided at a position closer to the incoming sensor 264 than the first ball passage area 822. More specifically, the first ball passage area 822 (for example, the variable winning opening of the first ball passage area 822) from the ball entering sensor 264 (for example, the center 264c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of the ball entering sensor 264). The distance in the longitudinal direction LD to the center 260 in the longitudinal direction LD of the unit 260 is the third distance LL3, and the third sphere passage region 826 (for example, the third sphere passage region) from the center 264c of the incoming sensor 264. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD to the center 826c) in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning award slot unit 826 is the fourth distance LL4, and the fourth distance LL4 is shorter than the third distance LL3. It is.

  Further, the second ball passage region 824 is a region provided on the right end 274a side with respect to the first ball passage region 822. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 from the right end 274a to the first ball passage region 822 (for example, the center 822c of the first ball passage region 822) is the fifth distance LL5. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD from the right end 274a to the second ball passage area 824 (for example, the center 824c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of the second ball passage area 824) is the sixth distance The sixth distance LL6 is shorter than the fifth distance LL5. Here, the third distance LL3 to the sixth distance LL6 have been described with reference to the center of each area. However, any one end of each area in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260 ( In the illustrated state, the left end or the right end) may be used as a reference.

  Further, the second sphere passage region 824 includes at least a region (wide portion 824a) having a fourth sphere passage width W4 in a part thereof. Here, the fourth ball passage width W4 is the width in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260 of a part (wide portion 824a) of the second ball passage region 824 in the vicinity of the adjacent portion to the first ball passage region 822. It is. The fourth ball passage width W4 is the maximum width of the second ball passage region 824 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 260, and is larger than the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 822.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the ball entry sensor 264 has a ball passage (sensor hole) 264a into which the game ball B can enter at least, and when the game ball B enters the ball passage 264a, the game ball The entry of B can be detected. The spherical passage 264a has a fifth spherical passage width W5. The fifth ball passage width W5 is the maximum width of the ball passage 264a. Here, as an example, the spherical passage 264a in the side sectional view of FIG. 5B is not a perfect circle, but is configured by a curve over the entire circumference, and is more in the X-axis direction than the diameter WY in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction). The horizontal diameter (WX) has a slightly long circular shape, and the fifth spherical passage width W5 is a width in the X-axis direction (maximum diameter WX). Further, the diameter in the X-axis direction passing through the center of the spherical passage (sensor hole) 264a (indicated by the intersection of the alternate long and short dash line) is the maximum diameter. The first sphere passage width W1 of the first sphere passage region 822 is smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5.

  The diameter WY in the Y-axis direction and the diameter WX in the X-axis direction of the ball passage 264a are both longer than the diameter WB of the game ball B. The diameter WY in the Y-axis direction may be the same length as the fifth sphere passage width W5 (X-axis direction diameter WX), may be smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5, or may be smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5. It can be large. Further, the shape of the spherical passage 264a may be a perfect circle, or at least a part thereof may be constituted by a straight line. For example, it may be a hexagonal shape or an octagonal shape. W5 is the length of the maximum diameter.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 has a width (first ball path width W1) shorter than the diameter WB of the game ball B by the guide convex portion 262a1. A ball passage region 822 is provided, and the second ball passage width W2 of the second ball passage region 824 located on the right side of the guide convex portion 262a1 in FIG. 187 (a) is the width in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. The width is equal to or greater than the first ball passage width W1, and more specifically, a width equal to or greater than two game balls (more than twice the diameter WB of the game balls B).

  The second ball passage area 824 is an area in which the game ball B rolling on the variable prize opening unit 260 is temporarily retained. With such a configuration, the game ball B is placed in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 260. Even if a large amount of liquid stays, clogging of the balls can be suppressed.

  In addition, a third ball passage region 826 including a first ball passage width W1 and a width wider than the diameter of the game ball (third ball passage width W3) is provided between the guide convex portion 262a1 and the entrance sensor 264. .

  Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball B is detected by the incoming ball sensor 264 and to make it easier to over-win.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a side cross section of the variable prize opening unit 260, FIG. 188 (a) is a plan view similar to FIG. 186, and FIG. 188 (b) is an AA line in FIG. 188 (a). 188 (c) is a side sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 188 (a), and FIG. 188 (d) is taken along line CC in FIG. 188 (a). FIG. 188 (e) is a side sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 188 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 5B, a rib 810 is provided on the left outside of the incoming ball sensor 264 to guide the game ball to the out ball path. The ribs 810 are provided in a substantially C shape in a side sectional view from the back side of the lower case 262 to the back side of the upper case 270, the upper side of the upper case 270, the front side of the upper case 270, and the front side of the lower case 262. The rear side (the left side in the figure) is inclined to be lower than the front side (the right side in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 6C, a light emitting means 830 is provided below the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 of the ball passage 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260. The light emitting means 830 is, for example, an LED, and illuminates the spherical passage 272 from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the ball path 272 of the variable prize opening unit 260 is at least partially open (for example, the area of the first ball path area 822 and the third ball path area 826). A guide wall 274c is configured such that the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 on the side (the door member 234a not shown here) is higher than the other lower surface 274. Further, the width of the guide wall 274c (the amount of protrusion to the ball passage 272) increases from the vicinity of the guide convex portion 262a1 toward the ball entering sensor 264. The game ball can be smoothly guided to the entrance sensor 264 by such a guide wall 274c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5E, the guide wall 274c is not provided on the right end side of the guide convex portion 262a1, and the lower surface 274 of the spherical passage 272 is a flat surface without reducing the momentum. The game ball can roll on the ball passage 272. In addition, the width (fourth ball passage width W4) of the lower surface 274 of a part (the wide portion 824a) of the second ball passage region 824 in the same figure is larger than the diameter of the game ball. 826 is larger than the third ball passage width W3 ((d) in the figure).

  FIG. 189 is a side sectional view that is the same as FIG. 188 (b) and shows a state in which the game ball B that has passed through the ball-in sensor 264 is guided to the path of the out ball.

  The rib 810 is inclined downward toward the back side, and the width W ′ of the ball path of the game ball B that passes through the ball sensor 264 toward the path of the out ball is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and It is smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball B (more specifically, 1.5 times the diameter).

  The game ball B that has passed through the ball passage (sensor hole) 264a of the incoming ball sensor 264 rolls along the shape of the bottom surface of the rib 810 (FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C) and moves toward the back side. . Since the width of the variable winning award opening unit 260 in the short direction SD is small, if the game ball B rolls too much, the game ball B may jump up and cause a ball clogging on the way to the path of the out ball. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 5E, the momentum of rolling is moderately attenuated by the ribs 810, the jumping of the game ball B is suppressed, and the ball is smoothly moved to the path of the out ball. The ball of the game ball B is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first spherical passage width W1 of the first spherical passage region 822 is the width at the lower surface (bottom surface) 274 of the first spherical passage region 822, that is, the lower end (lower surface) of the guide convex portion 262a1 as described above. The distance (width) from the end portion on the 274 side to the lower end (the end portion on the lower surface 274 side) of the guide wall 274c facing this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first spherical passage width W1 may be a horizontal distance (width) from the upper end of the guide protrusion 262a1 to the upper side of the opposite guide wall 274c, or the first protrusion 262a1. The distance (width) in the horizontal direction from between the lower end and the upper end to the opposing guide wall 274c may be used. In addition, as shown in the side cross-sectional view of FIG. 188 (c), the guide wall 274c is a wall (gradient is inclined) so that the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the lower end is larger than the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the upper end. The wall is not limited to a vertical wall, but may be an overhanging wall (a wall whose gradient exceeds vertical) that is inclined so that the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the lower end is smaller than the protruding amount from the side surface 276 at the upper end. In addition, a protrusion-like wall (a wall that slopes below the vertical and has an overhang in the middle while projecting from the upper end and the lower end may be formed between the upper end and the lower end.

  FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view showing an example of a shutter-type winning device (variable winning unit) 700 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 190 shows the shutter-type winning device (variable winning unit) 700 from the front to the rear from the lower left to the upper right.

  The shutter-type winning device 700 is roughly classified into a variable winning opening defining unit 710, a winning device base 720, an illumination unit 730, a base cover 740, a shutter driving member 750, a shutter driving solenoid 760, and a shutter driving system. The unit 770 and the shutter 800 are included.

  The variable winning opening defining unit 710 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a front surface (front surface) 710a, a front surface rear surface 710b, a left surface 710c, a right surface 710d, and a bottom surface first inclined plane 710e. , Bottom bottom second inclined plane 710f, non-winning ball passage 710g, rear inclined surface 710h, and upper end side 710i. In addition, in FIG. 190, since the bottom face part 2nd inclined plane 710f and the back inclined surface 710h are hidden, the leader line and the code | symbol are not attached | subjected. Further, the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the like face forward from the base plane portion (base plate) 720a that is in contact with the surface of the game board 200. So that it may be referred to as a protruding portion.

  The variable winning opening defining part 710 has a pair of left side part 710c and right side part 710d formed toward the front. An upper portion of the left side surface portion 710c is provided with a non-winning ball passage 710g having an inclined plane that descends from the right to the left. An inclined plane descending from right to left is also provided on the upper portion of the right side surface portion 710d. The inclined plane of the non-winning ball passage 710g and the inclined plane above the right side surface portion 710d are included in substantially the same plane (hereinafter referred to as a first reference plane). That is, the height of the left side surface portion 710c is lower than the height of the right side surface portion 710d.

  In addition, the variable winning opening defining unit 710 has a front surface portion 710a formed on the front surface side that is connected to the left side surface portion 710c and the right side surface portion 710d. The flat surface of the front surface portion 710a is provided with a decorative pattern with low unevenness, and the convex portion is plated with gold, for example. For this reason, the front surface portion 710a is also referred to as a decorative portion 710a.

  An upper end side 710i that is linearly inclined parallel to the first reference plane at a predetermined distance from the first reference plane is provided on the upper portion of the front surface portion 710a.

  The front surface rear surface 710b is formed in a planar shape substantially orthogonal to the first reference plane. In the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b, an uneven portion 900 (not shown) is arranged along the upper end side 710i in parallel with the first reference plane. The uneven portion 900 will be described later.

  A bottom surface portion is formed in a lower portion of a region surrounded by the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, and the front surface portion 710a. The bottom surface portion has a bottom surface inclined plane that is substantially orthogonal to the front surface rear surface 710b and is inclined downward from left to right. Further, the bottom surface portion includes a rear inclined surface 710h (not shown in FIG. 190) following the bottom surface inclined plane. The bottom surface inclined plane is a bottom surface first inclined plane 710e having a first inclination angle and a bottom surface portion first continuous with the bottom surface first inclined plane 710e and having a smaller inclination angle than the bottom surface first inclined plane 710e. 2 inclined planes 710f (not shown in FIG. 190). Hereinafter, a plane including the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f is referred to as a second reference plane. For example, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility, the second reference plane is substantially opposite to the first reference plane across the horizontal plane, and the angle formed between the second reference plane and the horizontal plane is the first reference plane and the horizontal plane. It is almost equal to the angle between A rearward inclined surface 710h that is inclined downward from the front to the rear is provided downstream of the bottom surface second inclined plane 710f. The inclined plane may be partially curved.

  The rear end sides of the left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the second bottom surface inclined surface 710f, and the non-winning ball passage 710g of the variable winning opening defining portion 710 are constant from the front surface back surface 710b. Are included in a plane parallel to the rear face 710b on the rear side by a predetermined width.

  The winning device base 720 is a member screwed to the game board 200 only when the shutter-type winning device 700 is positioned and fixed at a predetermined position on the lower right of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The winning device base 720 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an arc shape in which an edge from the bottom toward the upper right matches the arc shape of the lower right side of the game area 124. The winning device base 720 includes a base plane portion (base plate) 720a, a shutter retracting opening 720b, a winning ball passing opening 720c, light emitting windows 720d and 720e, a shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f, and a general winning ball passage. 720g.

  The entire front surface of the winning device base 720 is substantially flat. A base plane portion 720a serving as one inner surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is provided at a predetermined position above the front surface. At a predetermined position on the right end of the base plane portion 720a, there is provided a winning ball passing opening 720c in which an opening of a size through which a game ball can pass is formed. The left side surface portion 710c, the right side surface portion 710d, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the non-winning ball passage 710g of the variable winning a prize opening defining portion 710 are arranged on the base plane portion 720a. The variable prize opening defining part 710 is fixed to the front side of the base plane part 720a from the back side of the base plane part 720a with two mounting screws 714 after being aligned with a predetermined position on the front surface. Is configured. The second variable prize winning opening 235 includes a front inner back surface 710b and a base flat surface portion 720a, which are opposed inner walls arranged substantially in parallel with a predetermined width, and includes a bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e and a bottom surface portion second inclined plane. 710f, the rear inclined surface 710h, and the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d perpendicular to the front surface rear surface 710b and extending in the vertical direction form a bottom surface portion and a side surface portion connecting the opposing inner walls. Further, a plane including the front surface rear surface 710b, a plane including the surface of the base plane surface portion 720a, a plane including the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, and a plane including the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d intersect the first reference plane. An opening surface (opening region) of the second variable winning award port 235 is configured by a closed region in the first reference plane defined by the above. The rear inclined surface 710h is fixed with its rear end extending to the lower side of the winning ball passing opening 720c.

  The base plane portion 720a below the line of intersection between the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 and the surface of the base plane portion 720a is an elongated rectangle parallel to the line of intersection and within the width in the left-right direction of the line of intersection. A light emitting window 720d in which three openings are formed is disposed. Above the intersection line, a shutter protrusion / disengagement opening 720b in which an elongated rectangular opening having a width slightly exceeding the width in the left-right direction of the intersection line is formed in parallel to the intersection line.

  A light emitting window 720e having a circular shape with a transparent resin flat plate having a relatively high smoothness is disposed below the surface of the base flat portion 720a and above the arc-shaped end of the winning device base 720. Yes. A predetermined surface of the winning device base 720 is decorated with a low unevenness, and a part of the convex part is plated with, for example, gold, the other part has transparency, and the concave part has, for example, semi-transparency. Has been processed.

  A shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f is provided on the back surface of the base flat portion 720a and above the shutter protruding / sending opening portion 720b. A general winning ball passage 720g is arranged on the right side of the shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f. A general winning opening 226 is arranged on the front side of the general winning ball passage 720g, and is fixed by two mounting screws 716 from the back of the winning device base 720. On the upper end surface of the arc-shaped edge of the winning device base 720, a ball path 712 is disposed to change the course of the game ball flowing down from the upper right of the gaming area 124 to the lower left, and the back of the winning device base 720. Are fixed by one mounting screw 718.

  The illumination unit 730 has a shape that is integrally formed with a transparent resin material, for example, and is fitted into a not-shown uneven portion formed on the back surface of the winning device base 720. The illumination unit 730 includes light emitting units 730a and 730b, a winning ball passage 730c, and an upper plane portion 730d.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted to the back surface of the winning device base 720, the light emitting unit 730a has an opening outline of the three light emitting windows 720d so that the light emitting unit 730a is fitted to the three light emitting windows 720d opened in the base flat part 720a. It has a projecting portion to follow. The front portion of the protruding portion is formed in a planar shape that substantially matches the surface of the base plane portion 720a when the light emitting portion 730a is fitted into the light emitting window 720d. A plurality of microprisms that scatter incident light are arranged on the back surface of the front flat surface of the protrusion. A light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED is disposed inside the protruding portion, and the light emitting portion 730a receives the light from the light emitting element from the front surface of the protruding portion through the light emitting window 720d to the second variable prize opening. Inject into 235.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, the light emitting unit 730b follows the opening contour of the light emission window 720e so that the light emission unit 730b is fitted into the circular light emission window 720e below the front surface of the base plane part 720a. Has a protrusion. The front portion of the protruding portion is formed in a planar shape that substantially matches the back surface of the light emitting window 720e when the light emitting portion 730b is fitted into the light emitting window 720e. A plurality of minute prisms that scatter incident light are randomly arranged on the front rear surface of the protrusion. A light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED is disposed behind the protruding portion, and the light emitting portion 730b emits light from the light emitting element forward from the front surface of the protruding portion through the light emitting window 720e.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, the winning ball passing passage 730c is fixed in the front-rear direction with the winning ball passing opening 720c opened at a predetermined position on the right end of the base flat portion 720a. Opposes at a distance.

  When the illumination unit 730 is fitted on the back surface of the winning device base 720, a predetermined space including a gap between the winning ball passage 730c and the winning ball passage opening 720c is formed, and a ball detection sensor is formed in the predetermined space. 732 is sandwiched. The sphere detection sensor 732 includes an opening having an inner diameter through which the sphere can pass, and an electric circuit section that generates a sphere detection signal when the sphere passes through the opening. The opening of the ball detection sensor 732 is disposed between the winning ball passage opening 720c and the winning ball passage 730c, enters the second variable winning opening 235, and enters the winning ball passage opening 720c. The reached game ball is allowed to flow and flow down to the winning ball passage 730c.

  The upper flat portion 730d on the upper side of the light emitting portion 730a is disposed at a position lower than the lower side in the left-right direction of the shutter protruding / retracting opening 720b by a predetermined distance when the illumination unit 730 is fitted to the back surface of the winning device base 720.

  The base cover 740 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and is disposed in combination with the back surface of the winning device base 720. The base cover 740 has a substantially flat cover surface on the front surface and an edge portion standing upright at a predetermined height on the front side of the cover surface around the cover surface. A thin recess is formed between the front surface and the edge of the cover surface. A winning ball passing opening 740a and an upper flat portion 740b are formed at predetermined positions on the cover surface. The lighting unit 730 and the ball detection sensor 732 are fitted into the back surface of the winning device base 720, and the light emitting elements (not shown) and their wirings are accommodated in the recesses, and the base cover 740 is attached to the back surface of the winning device base 720. Position and fix to the back of the winning device base 720 with three mounting screws 746.

  The winning ball passing opening 740a is disposed at a position exposing the rear opening of the winning ball passing passage 730c of the lighting unit 730, and the upper flat portion 740b substantially coincides with the lower side in the left-right direction of the shutter retracting opening 720b. Placed in position.

  The shutter driving member 750, the shutter driving solenoid 760, and the shutter 800 are housed in the shutter drive system housing portion 770. The shutter drive system accommodating part 770 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a box shape with an open front surface. The solenoid housing portion 770a, the shutter drive plate housing portion 770b, the ball passage 770c, and the sensor housing portion 770d are partitioned in order from the left to the right when viewed from the front. A shutter accommodating portion 770e is defined above the solenoid accommodating portion 770a, the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b, and the ball passage 770c, and an upper portion of the shutter accommodating portion 770e is a shutter accommodating roof rear portion 770f. A plurality of slits for heat dissipation are opened in the shutter housing roof rear part 770f.

  The solenoid housing portion 770a houses a shutter driving solenoid 760. The shutter drive solenoid 760 includes a yoke 760a, a coil 760b, and a movable iron core 760c. The coil 670b has a copper wire wound around a bobbin made of ferrite, for example. A fixed iron core is disposed on one end side inside the bobbin, and the fixed iron core and, for example, an iron yoke 760a are magnetically connected. The yoke 760a has a structure in which two opposing surfaces are removed from a hollow box shape. The coil 670b is installed in the yoke 760a so that the fixed iron core of the coil 670b is fixed to one surface of the upper and lower surfaces of the yoke 760a and the other end of the bobbin is located on the other surface. On the other surface of the yoke 760a, an opening through which the other end side inside the bobbin is exposed is provided. The movable iron core 760c is inserted into the bobbin through the opening. A gripping disc to be inserted into the gripping portion at the upper end of the swing jig 750a of the shutter driving member 750 is fixed to the tip of the movable iron core 670c. The movable iron core 670c is held so as to be movable in the vertical direction inside the coil 760b. The movable iron core 670c is biased downward by a spring (not shown) in a state where no current flows through the coil 760b, and moves upward when a current flows through the coil 760b. Thereby, the swing jig 750a attached to the tip of the movable iron core 670c moves up and down.

  A mounting bracket 772 for fixing the shutter driving solenoid 760 to the solenoid housing portion 770a is fixed to the rear wall surface of the solenoid housing portion 770a by two mounting screws 776. Two screw holes are provided on the side of the yoke 760a of the shutter driving solenoid 760 facing the rear wall of the solenoid housing portion 770a. Through holes are provided in positions corresponding to the two screw holes in the rear wall of the solenoid housing portion 770a and the mounting bracket 772, respectively. Through this through hole, two mounting screws 774 are screwed into the two screw holes of the yoke 760a from the rear side of the mounting bracket 772, and the shutter driving solenoid 760 is fixed to the solenoid housing portion 770a.

  The shutter driving member 750 includes a swing jig 750a and a shutter driving plate. The swing jig 750a is formed of, for example, black resin. The shutter drive plate is integrally formed of, for example, black resin, and has a shaft portion 750b, a plate-like first plate portion 750c, a second plate portion 750d, and a third plate portion 750e.

  The first plate portion 750c protrudes into a guide groove formed on the right side surface of the swing jig 750a accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 770a on the lower left side surface of the first plate portion 750c, and is movable with its direction regulated by the guide groove. A guide shaft is formed.

  A shaft portion 750b having an axis projecting substantially vertically from the left and right side surfaces is formed on the upper end side of the first plate portion 750c. The lower end side of the second plate portion 750d is integrated with the upper end side of the first plate portion 750c and shares the shaft portion 750b. With respect to the first plate portion 750c, the second plate portion 750d is bent forward at a predetermined angle at the shaft portion 750b. The third plate portion 750e is formed to extend in parallel with the plate surface of the second plate portion 750d from the upper end side of the second plate portion 750d. The plate thickness of the third plate portion 750e is formed thinner than the plate thickness of the second plate portion 750d. The upper end side of the third plate portion 750e has an arc shape in cross section.

  The distance from the shaft portion 750b to the upper end of the third plate portion 750e is longer than the distance from the shaft portion 750b to the guide shaft of the first plate portion 750c.

  The shutter driving plate of the shutter driving member 750 is accommodated in the shutter driving plate accommodating portion 770b. The shutter drive plate housing portion 770b is provided with a bearing portion that receives both shafts of the shaft portion 750b of the shutter drive plate. When the shutter drive plate is accommodated in the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b and both shafts of the shaft portion 750b are placed on the bearing portion, the first to third plate portions 750c to 750e of the shutter drive plate have the shaft portion 750b as the center of rotation. It can be rotated back and forth.

  In addition, the shutter drive plate is accommodated in the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b, and the guide shaft that protrudes to the left bottom surface of the first plate portion 750c is formed on the right side surface of the swing jig 750a accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 770a. Inserted into the guide groove.

  When the shutter driving solenoid 760 is not driven, the bottom surface of the swing jig 750a at the end of the movable iron core 670c is in contact with the bottom surface of the solenoid housing portion 770a and is stopped. The position of the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e at the stop position of the guide shaft in the guide groove of the swing jig 750a at the time of non-driving is set as the initial position.

  The guide groove of the swing jig 750a is formed with a groove passage so that when the swing jig 750a is raised, the guide shaft of the first plate portion 750c is rotated forward about the shaft portion 750b. For this reason, when the shutter driving solenoid 760 is energized to drive the movable iron core 670c and raise the swing jig 750a by a predetermined distance, the guide groove of the swing jig 750a rises along the groove path in the guide groove. The guide shaft is moved to rotate the first plate portion 750c in the forward direction with the shaft portion 750b as the center of rotation. Thereby, the upper end side of the 3rd board part 750e located in the other side of the 1st board part 750c on both sides of the axial part 750b can be moved back predetermined distance from an initial position.

  A set of left and right rail members 752 and 754 are attached to the shutter accommodating portion 770e so as to hold the accommodated shutter 800 so as to be able to protrude and retract. Each of the left and right rail members 752 and 754 is formed of, for example, black resin. The left rail member 752 has an inverted U-shaped concave rail portion and an attachment end portion provided at the base end of the concave rail portion. The right rail member 754 has a U-shaped concave rail portion and an attachment end portion provided at the base end of the concave rail portion. The left and right rail members 752 and 754 are fixed to the rear wall surface of the shutter accommodating portion 770e by two mounting screws 756 and 758, respectively, with allowance for slidably holding the left and right ends of the shutter 800. The left and right rail members 752 and 754 are arranged such that the right rail member 754 is higher than the left rail member 752 so that the shutter 800 can protrude and retract from the shutter retracting opening 720b when the shutter-type winning device 700 is assembled. Is attached.

  The shutter (door member) 800 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin member, and has a thin rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole. The shutter 800 includes a shutter flat surface portion 800a, a shutter tip portion 800b, and a driving member connecting portion 800c. The shutter flat surface portion 800a has a substantially rectangular flat surface, and the left-right width is slightly wider than the left-right width of the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235. A shutter front end portion 800b is formed with a predetermined width from the front side edge of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. The shutter front end portion 800b has an inclined upper plane that descends forward at a predetermined angle from the front side edge of the upper plane of the shutter plane portion 800a, and a lower plane that extends forward in line with the lower plane of the shutter plane portion 800a. Yes. The front end side where the inclined upper plane and the lower plane intersect is subjected to predetermined rounding. An angle between the inclined upper plane and the lower plane is, for example, 25 degrees to 30 degrees. Since the shutter front end portion 800b of the shutter 800 is formed thin, the area that becomes a contact point when the shutter 800 and the game ball come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the possibility of ball engagement can be reduced. Since the upper surface side of the shutter front end portion 800b is inclined, it is possible to release the force when the game ball is caught between the corner portions of the uneven portion 900.

  A driving member connecting portion 800c is provided at substantially the center of the rear side edge of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. The driving member connecting portion 800c has a recess that is open on the lower side and into which the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e of the shutter driving member 750 is inserted.

  The third plate portion of the shutter driving member 750 is inserted into the concave portion of the driving member connecting portion 800c while the left and right side surface portions of the shutter 800 are inserted into the left and right rail members 752 and 754 with the driving member connecting portion 800c side of the shutter 800 facing rearward. The shutter 800 and its drive system are configured by inserting the upper end side of 750e.

  The shutter drive system accommodating portion 770 has a spherical passage 770c formed on the right side of the shutter drive plate accommodating portion 770b. Further, a sensor housing portion 770d is formed on the right side of the ball passage 770c. A predetermined sensor 762 is disposed in the sensor housing portion 770d.

  The shutter driving system accommodating portion 770 accommodating the shutter driving member 750, the shutter driving solenoid 760, the shutter 800, and the like is attached to the back surface of the base cover 740 that is screwed to the back surface of the winning device base 720. It is fixed to the base cover 740 with a screw 748. A closed portion is provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of the base cover 740 so as to block the opening of the bearing portion so that the shaft of the shaft portion 750b of the shutter drive plate does not fall off from the bearing portion of the shutter drive plate housing portion 770b. Yes. Further, the upper surface of the shutter accommodating roof rear portion 770f of the shutter drive system accommodating portion 770 substantially coincides with the upper surface of the shutter accommodating roof front portion 720f.

  FIG. 191 is a perspective view of the assembled shutter-type winning device 700. 191 (a) and 191 (b) both show the shutter type winning device 700 from the front to the rear from the lower left to the upper right. FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the shutter 800 appears and blocks the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the shutter driving solenoid 760 is not driven, the movable iron core 670c is pushed downward by the spring, and the third plate portion 750e is in the initial position through the driving member connecting portion 800c. In this state, 800 is pushed forward. As a result, the shutter 800 appears from the shutter retracting opening 720b, the shutter tip 800b comes into contact with the front surface rear surface 710b, closes the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235, and closes the second variable winning opening 235. It is in a state.

  Further, the left end of the shutter tip 800b appears above the non-winning ball passage 710g, and the right end appears so as to partially cover the right side 710d to close the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235. . The shutter flat surface portion 800a is inclined so as to descend from the right to the left, and functions as a spherical passage. Since the space above the opening surface of the second variable prize winning opening 235 is made as wide as possible, the game ball riding on the upper part of the shutter 800 can be quickly allowed to flow down when the shutter 800 is closed. For example, the ball that has reached the ball passage 712 bounces or rolls, passes through the shutter flat surface portion 800a on the second variable winning opening 235, rolls or jumps over the non-winning ball passage 710g, and moves to the lower left. Flow down.

  FIG. 191 (b) shows a state in which the shutter 800 has exited and the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235 appears. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the shutter driving solenoid 760 is in a driving state, the magnetic force of the electromagnet is greater than the force of the spring and the movable iron core 670c is raised, and the upper end side of the third plate portion 750e is moved backward from the initial position. In this state, the shutter 800 is moved rearward via the driving member connecting portion 800c. In this state, the shutter 800 is retracted behind the shutter retracting opening 720b, the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235 appears, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. As described above, the shutter 800 can appear and disappear in the space S including the upper left end of the left side surface 710c of the variable winning opening defining unit 710, the upper right end of the right side 710d, and the upper end 710i of the front surface 710a. ing. When the opening surface of the second variable prize opening 235 appears as shown in FIG. 191 (b), for example, the sphere that has reached the ball passage 712 bounces or rolls while the space S and the opening surface are detected with high probability. Pass through and enter the second variable prize opening 235.

  When there is a ball in the special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 starting port 230, 232 and the lottery processing of special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 (steps S229 and S231 in FIG. 163), the main control is performed. The unit 300 controls the moving operation of the shutter 800 in the jackpot game after the end of the special figure variable game by the state update process of the special figure 1 or 2 (steps S225 and S227 in FIG. 163). At this time, based on the control of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S315 in FIG. 164, etc.), during the big hit game, from the light emitting unit 730a facing the rear lower side of the opening surface of the second variable winning port 235 The shutter-type winning device 700 shines by the light emission and the light emission from the light emitting unit 730b.

  It should be noted that the shutter-type winning device 700 shown in the figure may be provided with other winning means (winning port).

  FIG. 192 shows the assembled shutter-type winning device 700. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the shutter-type winning device 700 as seen from a position shifted from the upper right to the right rear. The front side of the shutter-type winning device 700 is shown on the left side of the drawing, and the left side is shown on the upper side of the drawing. ing. FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the shutter-type winning device 700 is viewed from directly above, in which the front side of the shutter-type winning device 700 is shown on the left side and the left side is shown on the upper side of the drawing. FIGS. 192 (a) and (b) are diagrams in which the shutter 800 is submerged in the shutter protrusion / disengagement opening 720b and the opening surface of the second variable winning opening 235 (or the first variable winning opening 234, and so on) is exposed. The state of 191 (b) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), an uneven portion 900 extending substantially parallel to the upper end side 710i is formed in the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b. The uneven portion 900 is formed in the space S above the position where the shutter 800 appears. The uneven portion 900 is formed integrally with, for example, the variable prize opening defining portion 710, and a plurality of inclined portions having substantially the same shape are discretely arranged in a line on the upper surface of the convex beam portion extending along the upper end side 710i. Have a structure. The slope portion has an inclined plane extending from the vicinity of the upper end side 710i of the front surface rear surface 710b toward the rear lower side, and has a schematic shape of a triangular prism having the inclined plane as one side surface. This shape is formed in the left-right direction at the uneven portion 900. With this shape, when the game ball flowing down from above hits the inclined plane, the game ball can be dropped to the rear side of the second variable winning opening 235. Further, the corners of the front surface rear surface 710b and the lower surface of the convex beam portion are concave portions of the uneven portion 900. Details of the uneven portion 900 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), at the intersection angle between the front surface back surface 710b and the left wall surface of the right surface surface 710d, the spherical alignment of the planar plate-shaped portion is almost perpendicular to the front surface back surface 710b. One member 910 is formed. The first spherical alignment member 910 is formed integrally with the left wall surface of the front surface rear surface 710b and the right side surface portion 710d below the uneven portion 900, for example. The first spherical alignment member 910 is flattened leftward from the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d by a predetermined distance from the front surface back surface 710b.

A rear end side extending in a row and a linear oblique end side extending leftward from the rear end side and in contact with the front surface rear surface 710b.

  The width between the front surface back surface 710b and the surface of the base flat surface portion 720a is, for example, about 1.3 to 1.6 times the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, and preferably about 1.5 times. It has become. Similarly, the width from the front surface rear surface 710b of the first ball alignment member 910 to the rear edge is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 0.4 times. Is set to For this reason, the plate-like portion of the ball alignment first member 910 is formed so as to protrude smaller than half of the game balls from the front surface rear surface 710b side, so that the game balls ride on the ball alignment first member 910. It is designed not to be stupid. In addition, it is possible to reduce side friction caused by rolling of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (b), the length of the rear end side of the first ball alignment member 910 viewed from directly above is, for example, about 1.3 to 1.6 times the diameter of the game ball, and is preferably Is about 1.5 times. Similarly, the length of the oblique end side of the ball alignment first member 910 is, for example, about 0.6 to 1.0 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 1.0 times. As shown in FIG. 192 (b), when viewed from directly above, the rear inclined surface 710h is partially hidden at the rear end side of the ball alignment first member 910 and is observed in a substantially square shape on which one game ball can be placed. Is done.

  When the game ball comes into contact with the rear end side or the oblique end side of the ball alignment first member 910, the bottom surface portion first inclined plane 710e, the bottom surface portion second inclined plane 710f, and the rear inclined surface 710h are constituted by the bottom inclined portions. It is possible to align the balls flowing down by gradually narrowing the rollable width (or region) of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball path. This makes it possible to align the game balls toward the ball detection sensor 732 as the ball detection sensor 732 is approached. Further, the clogging of the ball passage in the second variable prize winning opening 235 can be eliminated.

  As shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), a planar thin plate-like sphere alignment second member 920 is formed so as to intersect with the sphere alignment first member 910. The second spherical alignment member 920 rises from the rear inclined surface 710h and is substantially parallel to the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d and substantially perpendicular to the front surface rear surface 710b. For example, the second ball alignment member 920 is integrally formed with the rear surface 710b, the first ball alignment member 910, and the rear inclined surface 710h. The second spherical alignment member 920 includes a rear end side extending in parallel upward from the rear inclined surface 710h by a predetermined distance to the front surface rear surface 710b, and a straight line extending forward from the upper end portion of the rear end side and in contact with the front surface rear surface 710b. And an upper end side of the shape.

  The width from the front surface rear surface 710 b to the rear end side of the ball alignment second member 920 is substantially the same as that of the ball alignment first member 910. The distance from the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d of the second ball alignment member 920 is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, and preferably about 0.4 times. For this reason, the game ball is prevented from riding on the ball alignment second member 920.

  The first spherical alignment member 910 is formed continuously from the upper side of the first inclined plane 710e of the bottom surface portion to the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d on the downstream side, and the second spherical alignment member 920 is the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d on the downstream side. Is projected at a position that is shorter than a half of the game balls. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from getting on between the left wall surface of the right side surface portion 710d and the ball alignment second member 920.

When the game ball comes into contact with the upper end side or the rear end side of the ball alignment second member 920, the game ball stays above the rear inclined surface 710h, or by winning the game ball from the upper side of the ball alignment first member 910, It is possible to eliminate the game ball from being placed above the ball alignment first member 910.
<< Embodiment 3 >>

  With reference to FIG. 193 to FIG. 194, another form of the variable prize opening unit 840 and the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 will be described.

  FIG. 193 is a view showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, and FIGS. 193 (a) and (c) are top views and correspond to FIG. 187 (a). It is a figure (the figure which visually recognizes the lower surface (bottom surface) 848 of the ball path 842). FIG. 193 (b) is a transparent side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 as seen from the front side (player side).

  As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the variable prize opening unit 840 guides the game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 840 to a predetermined position when the door member (not shown) is in the open position. A ball passage 842 (844, 846, 848, 850, 852) is provided. The ball passage 842 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by a front side (player side) side surface 844, a back side surface 846, a lower surface 848, a left side surface 850, and a right side surface 852. . That is, the part facing the lower surface 848 is an opening 860 that is opened or closed by the door member. The both ends in the longitudinal direction of the opening 860 are a right side surface 852 and a left side surface 850 here. Further, here, as an example, a shutter-type variable prize opening unit 840 as shown in FIGS. 190 to 192 is shown, and the door member is located at a portion facing the lower surface 848, for example, the rear side surface 846 and the front side surface. It moves between 844 and can slide between the open position and the closed position, and the state shown in the figure shows the case where the door member is in the open position.

  A ball entry sensor 854 is provided on the rear side surface 846 from the right side surface 852 of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840. The ball entry sensor 854 has a substantially circular ball passage 854a in the side view of FIG. 5B, and the ball passage 854a is located in the vicinity of the right side surface 852 of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, an inclined surface 850c is formed on the left side surface 850 of the variable prize opening unit 840. The inclined surface 850c has a gradient such that the amount of protrusion increases from the upper surface (opening 860) of the variable prize opening unit 840 toward the lower surface 848 of the ball passage 842. The lower surface 848 includes an inclined portion 848a, a step portion 848b, and a flat portion 848c. The inclined portion 848a is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the left side surface 850 (inclined surface 850c) toward the right side surface 852, and the inclination angle is smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 850c. A stepped portion 848b is formed at the right end of the inclined portion 848a, and a flat portion 848c is formed at a lower position. The flat portion 848c is located in front of the ball passage 854a of the incoming sensor 854, and the ball passage 854a is located between the step portion 848b and the right side surface 852.

  In addition, a guide protrusion 868 that protrudes toward the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 is provided at the lower end of the front side surface 844. The guide convex portion 868 guides a game ball that rolls on the lower surface of the ball passage 842 from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 in the direction of the back side surface 846, thereby making the game ball smooth. It is possible to enter the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854.

  The opening width W0 of the present embodiment is a distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860, which is a distance from the upper end of the left side 850 (inclined surface 850c) to the upper end of the right side, and is the length of the opening width W0. The center (center line) in the direction LD is referred to as an opening center line 860c.

  The guide convex portion 868, the stepped portion 848b and the flat portion 848c, and the ball passage 854a of the entrance sensor 854 are provided between the opening center line 860c and the right side surface 852.

  That is, the entrance sensor 854 (a ball passage 854a for detecting entrance) is located closer to the right end 856a than the opening center line 860c (position closer to the right end 856a side than the opening center line 860c). Provided. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860 from the center of the ball passage 854a to the right end 856a is the first distance LL1, and the opening from the opening center line 860c to the right end 856a. The distance in the longitudinal direction LD of 860 is the second distance LL2, and the second distance LL2 is longer than the first distance LL1.

  Further, here, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 820 from the center of the spherical passage 854a to the opening center line 820c is the second 'distance LL2', and the second 'distance LL2' is the first distance LL2 '. The distance is longer than the distance LL1. The spherical passage 854a only needs to be disposed on the right side of the opening center line 820c and between the opening center line 820c and the right side surface 852, and the first distance LL1 is longer than the second ′ distance LL2 ′. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, the variable winning award opening unit 840 includes a first ball passage area 862 (a left-hatched hatched area), a second ball passage area 864 (a horizontal stripe hatching area), and a third ball. The second ball passage region 864, the first ball passage region 862, and the third ball from the left side surface 850 along the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840. The passage areas 866 are arranged in this order.

  The first ball passage area 862 is disposed between the opening center line 860c and the incoming sensor 854 (ball passage 854a), and is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 860. The first sphere passage region 862 includes at least a region having the first sphere passage width W1. The first ball passage width W1 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the front end of the guide convex portion 868 to the back side surface 846 opposite to the first ball passage width W1.

  The second sphere passage region 864 is disposed between the first sphere passage region 862 and the left end 856b. The second ball passage region 864 includes at least a region having a second ball passage width W2 in the longitudinal direction LD of the opening 860 (variable prize opening unit 840). The second ball passage width W2 is a horizontal distance from a portion adjacent to the first ball passage region 862 to an end portion of the left side surface 850 (upper end portion of the inclined surface 850c) (a distance in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840). It is. The second ball passage width W2 is larger than the first ball passage width W1, larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, and smaller than the opening width W0. The second ball passage area 864 is at least easily visible to the player when the door member (not shown) of the variable prize opening unit 840 is in the open position (in the state shown).

  The third ball passage region 866 is provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the incoming ball sensor 854 at a position closer to the incoming ball sensor 854 (ball passage 854a) than the first ball passage region 862. More specifically, the distance in the longitudinal direction LD from the center 854c of the ball passage 854a to the first ball passage region 862 (for example, the center 862c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the first ball passage region 822) is , The third distance LL3, and the length from the center 854c of the ball passage 854a to the third ball passage region 866 (for example, the center 866c in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the third ball passage region 866). The distance in the direction LD is the fourth distance LL4, and the fourth distance LL4 is a distance shorter than the third distance LL3.

  The third ball passage region 866 includes at least a region having a third ball passage width W3. The third ball passage width W3 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the rear side surface 846 to the front side surface 844 opposite to the third ball passage width W3 in FIG. The third ball passage width W3 is the maximum width of the third ball passage region 866 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840, and the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862 and the game ball Greater than diameter.

  The second sphere passage region 864 is a region provided on the left end 856b side of the first sphere passage region 862, and includes at least a region having a fourth sphere passage width W4 (wide portion 864a). The fourth ball passage width W4 is a distance (width) in the short direction SD of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 from the back side surface 846 to the front side surface 844 opposite thereto. The fourth ball passage width W4 is the maximum width of the second ball passage region 864 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840, and is larger than the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862. Here, the third ball passage width W3 and the fourth ball passage width W4 are equal.

  The ball passage (sensor hole) 854a of the incoming ball sensor 854 has a fifth ball passage width W5. The fifth ball passage width W5 is the maximum width of the ball passage 854a. Here, as an example, the diameter passing through the center in the X-axis direction of the spherical passage 854a is the maximum diameter. The first sphere passage width W1 of the first sphere passage region 822 is smaller than the fifth sphere passage width W5.

  In addition, a part of the front side (player side) side surface 844 protrudes in the direction of the back side surface 846 in the guide convex portion 868 of the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide convex portion 868 may have a part of the lower surface 848 (inclined portion 848a) protruding upward. Moreover, the guidance convex part 868 which protrudes in the direction of the front side surface 844 from the back side surface 846 may be sufficient. Moreover, the convex part may be provided in the wall part on the opposite side to the player side.

  In addition, the first ball passage area 862 of the present embodiment has a first ball passage width W1 sandwiched between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846 and the diameter of the game ball around the guide convex portion 868. This is a region including a wide region (regions on the left and right of the guide convex portion 868 in FIG. 5C) and the guide convex portion 868. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 may be only the region of the first ball passage width W1 sandwiched between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846, or a region having a width wider than the diameter of the game ball. May be included, or only a region having a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball may be included, or a region not including the guide protrusion 868 may be included.

  In the present embodiment, the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  The third sphere passage width W3 may be a passage width different from the fourth sphere passage width W4, or the third sphere passage width W3 may be a passage width larger than the fourth sphere passage width W4. The reverse may be possible.

  FIG. 194 is a view showing a state in which the game ball B rolls in the variable prize opening unit 840 of the second embodiment, and FIGS. 194A to 158F are top views corresponding to FIG. 193A. FIGS. 9A to 9F are transparent side views corresponding to FIG. 193B.

  As shown in the figure, when the door member (not shown) is in the open position, the game ball B enters from the opening 860 from the left end 856b and rolls along the inclined surface 850c of the left side 850. (Figs. (A) and (A)), and then rolls from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 along the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 to reach the guide convex portion 868 (Figs. B)). In the first ball passage area 862, since the first ball passage width W1 between the guide convex portion 868 and the back side surface 846 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B collides with the guide convex portion 868 and rides on this. ((C), (C) in the figure). Thereafter, the game ball B passes through the stepped portion 848b of the lower surface 848 (FIGS. (D), (D), (e), and (E)), reaches the flat portion 848c, and enters the ball path 854a of the incoming sensor 854. It enters ((f), (F) in the figure).

  The inclined surface 850c of the left side surface 850 and the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 cause the game ball B that has entered the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 to roll from the left end portion 856b toward the right end portion 856a, The guide is smoothly and reliably guided in the direction of the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 disposed in the vicinity of the right end 856a.

In addition, a guide convex portion 868 and a step portion 848b are provided in the vicinity of the ball passage 854a of the incoming ball sensor 854. The game ball B collides with the guide convex portion 868 and overcomes it, and further passes through the stepped portion 848b and falls to the flat portion 848c, whereby the rolling speed (momentum) is moderately attenuated. As a result, the game ball B is smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball passage 854a of the ball sensor 854, the game ball B collides with the right side surface 852, rebounds, and collides with the subsequent game ball B. Thus, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of ball clogging in front of the ball passage 854a.
<< Embodiment 4 >>

  With reference to FIG. 195, other forms of the variable prize opening unit 840 and the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 shown in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, and FIGS. 195 (a) and (c) are top views, and FIG. It is the permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from (player side). Here, the configuration different from the second embodiment will be mainly described, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the lower surface 848 (a part of the right end of the inclined portion 848a) is a position separated from both the front side surface 844 and the rear side surface 846 in a top view (FIG. 5A). In addition, a rectangular notch 870 is provided, and the shape of the stepped portion 848b is uneven when viewed from above, and this is used as a guide protrusion 872. The notch 870 has a width 870W1 in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840 and a width 870W2 in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 smaller than the radius (WB / 2) of the game ball B. It is about 5 mm. The widths 870W1 and 870W2 may be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball B.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the first spherical passage region 862 includes a notch 870, a step 848b on the front side of the notch 870 (front-side guide protrusion 872a), and a step on the back side. This is a region including the portion 848b (back side guide convex portion 872b). Further, the widths in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840 of the front side guide convex portion 872a, the notch portion 870, and the back side guide convex portion 872b are the first ball passage widths W11, W12, and W13, respectively. .

  The second ball passage region 864 is a region between the first ball passage region 862 and the left side surface 850, and the second ball passage width W2 is the second ball passage region in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840. The length is 864.

  The third sphere passage region 866 is a region between the first sphere passage region 862 and the right side surface 852, and the third sphere passage width W3 is between the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 opposite thereto. Is the distance.

  Further, the fifth ball passage width W5 of the ball passage (sensor hole) 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 is, for example, the maximum diameter passing through the center of the ball passage 854a in the X-axis direction.

  The first ball passage area 862 of the present embodiment has an area of the first ball passage widths W11, W12, and W13 and an area that is wider than the diameter WB of the game ball B around the guide convex portion 872 (see FIG. The left and right regions of the guiding convex portion 872) and the guiding convex portion 872 are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage area 862 may be only the area of the first ball passage width W11, W12, W13, may include an area wider than the diameter of the game ball, Only a region having a width narrower than the diameter may be included, or a region not including the guide convex portion 872 may be included.

  In the present embodiment, the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sphere passage region 862 and the second sphere passage region 864 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the second ball passage region 864.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866 are adjacent to each other. The region may be a region provided at a matching position, or another region may be provided between the first ball passage region 862 and the third ball passage region 866.

  FIG. 196 is a view showing a state where the game ball B rolls in the variable prize opening unit 840 of the third embodiment, and FIGS. 196A to 198E are top views corresponding to FIG. 193A. FIGS. 9A to 9E are transparent side views corresponding to FIG. 193B.

  As shown in the figure, when the door member (not shown) is in the open position, the game ball B enters from the opening 860 from the left end 856b and rolls along the inclined surface 850c of the left side 850. (Figs. (A) and (A)), rolling along the inclined portion 848a of the lower surface 848 from the left side surface 850 toward the right side surface 852 (Figs. (B) and (B)). ((C) and (C) in the figure). The guide convex portion 872 including the stepped portion 848b provided with the notched portion 870 in a concavo-convex shape in a top view holds the game ball B slightly. Thereafter, the game ball B reaches the flat portion 848c and enters the ball passage 854a of the ball entering sensor 854 ((d), (D), (e), and (E) in the figure).

In the state shown in FIGS. 7C and 7C, if the guiding convex portion 872 (notch portion 870) is too large, the holding amount of the game ball B is increased, the rolling of the game ball B is stopped, and the ball is blocked. In this embodiment, the width 870W1 and 870W2 of the notch 870 are both smaller than the radius of the game ball B, so that the rolling speed (momentum) of the game ball B is moderately attenuated. . As a result, the game ball B is smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball passage 854a of the ball sensor 854, the game ball B collides with the right side surface 852, rebounds, and collides with the subsequent game ball B. Thus, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of ball clogging in front of the ball passage 854a.
<Modification 1>

  FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating another form of the guide projection 868 of the second embodiment. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, FIG. 197 (a) is a top view, and FIG. 197 (b) is a front side (player side). It is a permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from ().

  The guide convex portion 868 may not be in contact with the front side surface 844, and may be provided at a position separated from either the front side surface 844 or the back side surface 846, as shown in FIG. .

  In this case, the first sphere passage area 862 includes first sphere passage widths W11 and W12. The first ball passage width W11 is a length in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 from the guide convex portion 868 to the front side surface 844, and the first ball passage width W12 is from the guide convex portion 868 to the back surface. This is the length in the short direction SD of the variable prize opening unit 840 up to the side surface 846.

  The first ball passage region 862 includes a region having a width WZ larger than the diameter of the game ball B in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B (first ball passage widths W11 and W12). However, in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, a region having the same width as the diameter of the game ball B may be included, or in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, Other regions narrower than the diameter may be included.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing another form of the guiding convex portion 872 of the third embodiment. 198 is a diagram showing the variable prize opening unit 840 when a door member (not shown) is in the open position, FIG. 198 (a) is a top view, and FIG. 198 (b) is the front side (player side). It is a permeation | transmission side view of the variable prize opening unit 840 seen from ().

  The guide convex portion 872 may be provided at a position adjacent to the back side surface 846. That is, a guide convex portion 872 including a notch portion 870 and a step portion 848b is formed on a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) 848 of the back side surface 846.

  In this case, the first ball passage width W1 of the first ball passage region 862 is the length in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840 from the guide convex portion 872 to the back side surface 846, and the first ball passage The width W1 is smaller than the radius of the game ball B.

  The first ball passage region 862 includes a region having a width WZ larger than the diameter of the game ball B in addition to a region having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B (the first ball passage is Awa W1). In addition to an area having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, an area having the same width as the diameter of the game ball B may be included. In addition to an area having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the diameter of the game ball may be included. Other narrow areas may be included.

  In this case, the guide convex portion 872 may be provided at a position adjacent to the front side surface 844.

Further, the guide convex portion 868 of the second embodiment and the guide convex portion 872 of the third embodiment are rectangular in a top view, and are configured in a cube or a rectangular parallelepiped (the wall surfaces of the guide convex portions 868 and 872 are vertical). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wall surfaces of the guide protrusions 868 and 872 may be inclined surfaces. In that case, the slope of the inclined surfaces of the guiding convex portions 868 and 872 may be an inclined surface that is smaller than the vertical, or may be an inclined surface that is larger than the vertical (an inclined surface of an overhang), and includes these. It may be a shape.
<< Embodiment 5 >>

  With reference to FIG. 199, another form of the variable prize opening unit will be described. FIG. 199 is a view showing an example of the variable prize opening unit 880 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 199 is an external perspective view, FIG. 199 is a top view, and FIG. FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 2B, FIG. 4D is a front view, and FIG. 4E is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. Moreover, in the same figure, it is a figure which shows the variable prize opening unit 880 when a door member not shown is in an open position. FIG. 200 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 199 (e).

  As shown in FIG. 199, the variable prize opening unit 880 includes a ball path 882 (for guiding a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 880 to a predetermined position when the door member (not shown) is in the open position. 884, 886, 888, 890, 892). The spherical passage 882 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by a left side surface 884, a right side surface 886 that opposes the left side surface 884, a lower surface (bottom surface) 888, an upper surface 890 that opposes this, and a rear side surface 892. That is, the part facing the back side surface 892 is a first opening 894 that is opened or closed by the door member.

  The left side surface 884 includes a curved portion 884a and a flat surface portion 884b that protrude toward the center of the spherical passage 882. Similarly, the right side surface 886 includes a curved portion 886a and a flat portion 886b that protrude toward the center of the spherical passage 882. Due to the curved portions 884a and 886a, the spherical passage 882 has a shape in which the width W in the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894 gradually narrows from the first opening 894 toward the back side. Further, the flat portions 884b and 886b are arranged to face each other so as to be parallel to each other, and constitute a rectangular space SP together with the back side surface 892. In the rectangular space SP, a portion facing the back side surface 892 is a second opening 896. The second opening 896 is not provided with a door member and is always open, but a door member that can move between an open state and a closed state may be provided. Further, here, a ball passage 898a of the incoming sensor is provided in the vicinity of the flat portion 886b and the rear side surface 892 of the right side surface 886. Although not shown in the drawing, a ball entering sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage 898a is provided.

  Furthermore, in this example, the guide protrusion 900 is provided in the second opening 896. The guide convex portion 900 is a rectangular parallelepiped convex portion provided at the lower end portion of the left side surface 884 so as to protrude into the spherical passage 882. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the guide convex portion 900 may have a shape having an inclined surface. In addition, the guide convex portion 900 may be provided so as to protrude from the right side surface 886, and in this case, the entrance sensor 898 may be provided in the vicinity of the flat surface portion 884 b of the left side surface 884 and the back side surface 892. . In addition, the guide convex portion 900 may be provided in the vicinity of the center of the second opening 896, separated from both the left side surface 884 and the right side surface 886. Further, the guide convex portion 900 may be a concave and convex portion by providing a notch on the left side surface 884 (or right side surface 886) or the lower surface 888.

  In this example, the curved portion 884a on the left side surface 884 and the curved portion 886a on the right side surface 886, even if the game ball enters the first opening 894 from any direction, the entrance located in the innermost portion is located. It is possible to guide the game balls almost uniformly into the ball passage 898a of the ball sensor. In addition, since the ball path 898a is provided in the innermost part of the variable prize opening unit 880, the ball path 898a (enter The distance to the ball sensor) is increased and the game ball stays, so that it is easy to induce an over winning.

  In such a configuration, the guiding convex portion 900 provided on the left side surface 884 allows the game ball to enter more smoothly into the ball passage 898a disposed on the right side of the innermost portion. For example, when the guide convex portion 900 is not disposed, a game ball that has entered from the right direction of the first opening 894 is unlikely to directly enter the ball passage 898a disposed on the right side of the innermost portion, and the left side After colliding with the flat surface portion 884b of the side surface 884, the back side surface 892, and the like, the possibility of entering the ball passage 898a increases. At this time, depending on the speed at which the game ball rolls, it may collide with the flat surface portions 884b and 886b and the back side surface 892 to cause clogging of the ball. In such a case, by providing the guide convex portion 900 on the left side surface 884, there is a possibility that the game ball entering from the right direction of the first opening 894 collides with this and the momentum of rolling is moderately attenuated. Since the height is increased, it is possible to prevent clogging of the balls and make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering sensor. In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball that has changed its direction by colliding with the guide convex portion 900 will directly enter the entrance sensor.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered from the left direction of the first opening 894 collides with the guide convex portion 900, the rolling direction changes or the rolling speed decreases, so that the ball path 898a (incoming The time to reach the ball sensor) can be earned, and the possibility of inducing over winnings can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the width W0 of the first opening 894 in this case is the left end 894b of the first opening 894 from the front end of the left side 884 to the front end of the right side 886. To the right end 894a in the longitudinal direction LD.

  In addition, the ball passage 882 includes a first ball passage region 902 (a region with hatching with a left-downward slant), a second ball passage region 904 (a region with horizontal stripe hatching), and a third ball passage region 906 (a region with vertical island hatching). have. The first spherical passage region 902 is a region including the guide convex portion 900, and a front-side region and a back-side region of the guide convex portion 900. Further, the width in the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894 from the guide convex portion 900 to the right side surface 886 is the first spherical passage width W1. The second sphere passage area 904 is an area between the first opening 894 and the first sphere passage area 902, and the second sphere passage width W2 is the end of the first sphere passage area 902 from the first opening 894. The distance in the direction (referred to as the depth direction DD) from the front side to the back side of the variable prize opening unit 880. The third ball passage region 906 is a region between the first ball passage region 902 and the back side surface 892, and the third ball passage width W3 is from the end of the first ball passage region 902 to the back side surface 892. Until the distance in the depth direction DD.

  In addition, the fifth spherical passage width W5 of the spherical passage (sensor hole) 898a of the incoming sensor is, for example, the maximum diameter of the spherical passage 898a (diameter parallel to the longitudinal direction LD of the first opening 894).

  As described above, a plurality of variable prize opening units have been described. However, at least in the case of a big hit, the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is adjusted so that the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 124 (so-called right strike). In a game stand (pachinko machine) for playing a game, it is preferable to provide a variable winning opening unit having a shape specialized for right-handed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 200, and when a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area 124, The game ball is configured to be easier to enter the second variable winning opening 235 than the first variable winning opening 234. In such a case, the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper right side of the second variable winning opening 235 is higher than the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper left side of the second variable winning opening 235. In such a configuration, for example, a variable prize opening unit 260 of the second embodiment as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187 may be provided.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the game ball that rolls in the ball path 274 of the variable prize opening unit 260 to the ball entering sensor 264. In addition, depending on the game balls to be won, it may be possible to extend the distance until the ball sensor 264 is detected by extending the distance to the ball sensor 264. Therefore, it is possible to induce over winning and enjoy the big hit game for a long time. be able to.

  Similarly, at least in the case of a big hit, a game stand (pachinko machine) that adjusts the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 so as to launch a game ball to the left side of the game area 124 (so-called left-handed). In this case, it is preferable to provide a variable winning opening unit having a shape specialized for left-handed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 182, when the first variable prize opening 234 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 and a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game area 124, the first variable prize is obtained. A game ball can easily enter the mouth 234. In such a case, the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper left side of the first variable winning port 234 is higher than the possibility that the game ball enters from the upper right side of the first variable winning port 234. In such a configuration, for example, a variable prize opening unit 840 of Embodiment 3 as shown in FIGS. 193 to 198 may be provided.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the game ball rolling on the ball path 842 of the variable prize opening unit 840 to the ball entering sensor 854. In addition, depending on the game balls to be won, it may be possible to extend the distance until the ball sensor 854 detects the game by extending the distance to the ball sensor 854. be able to.

  For left-handed use, it is also suitable to use the variable prize opening unit 880 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. As described above, the variable prize slot unit 880 in FIG. 199 can enter the game ball regardless of whether the game ball enters from the left direction of the first opening 894 or from the right direction. It may be easy to guide to the ball sensor 898, and depending on the game ball, it may be possible to extend the time to be detected by the ball sensor 898 by extending the distance to the ball sensor 898. , You can enjoy a big hit game for a long time.

Further, the variable winning opening unit 260 described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 181 and FIGS. 186 to 189 is suitable for either left-handed use or right-handed use. Moreover, as for the suitable variable winning a prize opening units 260 and 840 described above, a right-handed unit may be applied for left-handed use, and a right-handed unit may be applied for left-handed use. In addition, even in a game stand that makes a right hit during a big hit, a variable winning opening may be provided below the center of the game board 200.
<Modification 2>

  With reference to FIG. 201, another form of the variable winning a prize opening unit will be described. 201 (a) and 201 (b) are diagrams showing a schematic configuration of a variable prize opening unit 908 according to the second modification, and are transparent front views seen from the front side (player side).

  As shown in FIG. 201 (a), the variable prize opening unit 908 may be provided with blade-shaped opening / closing means. That is, the variable prize opening unit 908 has a movable part (blade member) 924 that can move between an open position and a closed position, and a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening unit 908 when the blade member 924 is in the open position. A ball path 912 (914, 916, 918) for guiding the vehicle to the position and a ball entering sensor 950 are provided. The blade member 924 is provided on the right side surface of the variable prize opening unit 908 in the illustrated front view. The spherical passage 912 is configured to be surrounded on five sides by an upper surface 914, a lower surface (bottom surface 916), a left side surface 918, and a front side surface and a rear side surface that are not shown. That is, the part facing the left side surface 918 is an opening 922 that is opened or closed by the door member. The ball passage 912 (lower surface 916) is an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the right end portion toward the left end portion in a front view. Also, a ball entry sensor 950 is provided in the vicinity of the right end portion of the variable winning a prize opening unit 908 (in the vicinity of the left side surface 918 of the ball passage 912). A guide protrusion 926 that protrudes toward the upper surface is provided on a part of the lower surface 916.

  Thus, by providing the guide convex part 926 in a part of the ball passage 912, it becomes easy to guide the game ball to the ball entering sensor 950, and depending on the game ball, the distance to the ball entering sensor 950 is extended. In some cases, the time until the ball sensor 950 is detected can be extended, so an overwinning can be induced and the big hit game can be enjoyed for a long time.

  In addition, the variable pitching means may be another winning entry unit or a movable accessory provided with a movable portion (opening / closing means) 924, and another variable pitching means is provided inside the variable pitching means. The present invention can also be applied to two types, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, applicable to a first variable winning port unit 930 having a second variable winning port (V winning port) 932 and the like. is there. Further, the present invention is also applicable to variable ball entry means that does not have a detection means (ball entry sensor).

  Referring to FIG. 5C, the first variable prize opening unit 930 includes another prize opening (V prize opening 932) in a part of the lower surface 916 of the ball passage 912. The V prize opening 932 is provided with, for example, a shutter-type door member 962. Then, when winning at either the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, the blade member 924 of the center accessory unit 930 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times. By opening and closing (for example, once) and entering the V prize opening 932 at the time of opening and closing, a jackpot game for opening and closing the blade member 924 for a specific number of times (for example, 15 times) is started. . Alternatively, if the winner of the special drawing lottery is won, the big win game for opening the door members of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is started. As a result of the special drawing lottery, When winning, the blade member 924 of the first variable prize opening unit 930 and the door member 962 of the V prize opening 932 are opened and closed, and when the blade member 924 is opened, a game ball is placed in the open V prize opening 932. A big hit game that opens and closes the door members of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 may be started by entering the ball. In addition, if the win is won as a result of the special drawing lottery, the blade member 924 and the door member 962 of the V prize opening 932 may be opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and a payout may be made when the ball is entered (1 Round), when the blade member 924 is opened, if the player enters the open V prize opening 932, a big hit after two rounds may be started. Furthermore, the probability variation flag may be turned on by entering the V winning opening 932 during the big hit round. (If you do not enter the V prize opening 932, you will not be in the state of special high accuracy and high accuracy.)

  FIG. 202 is a view for explaining the first ball passage region 822 in the present embodiment. FIG. 202 (a) is a top view of the variable prize opening unit 260 of the second embodiment, and FIGS. ) Is a top view of the variable prize opening unit 840 according to the third and fourth embodiments.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first ball passage region 822 may be a region having only a width smaller than the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 260. In this case, an area having the same width as the diameter WB of the game ball B is not included in the first ball passage area 822. That is, in the same figure, the area | region shown with hatching except the guidance convex part 262a1 in the lower surface 274 of the ball path 272 is the 1st ball path area | region 822. In addition, although illustration is omitted, also in the variable prize opening unit 840 according to the third and fourth embodiments, the first ball passage area 862 is similar to the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction of the variable prize opening unit 840. For example, in FIG. 193 (c), a region where the guide convex portion 868 is excluded on the lower surface 848 in the hatched hatching region with the lower left in FIG. 193 (c) is the first spherical passage region. It may be 862.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c), a plurality of guide protrusions 868 (a first guide protrusion 8681 and a second guide protrusion 8682) may be provided. In this case, the first spherical passage region 822 is a continuous region from one end (leftmost end) of the first guide convex portion 8681 to one end (rightmost end) of the second guide convex portion 8682. There may be a plurality of (separated) first spherical passage regions 822 including a region including the first guide convex portion 8681 and a region including the second guide convex portion 8682.

  In these cases, the first ball passage area 822 includes the first guide protrusion 8681 and the second guide protrusion 8682, and the diameter WB of the game ball B in the short direction SD of the variable winning opening unit 840. May be a region including a lower surface 848 having a small width, or may be a region including only the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 (only the lower surface thereof). There may be a region only of the lower surface 848 having a width smaller than the diameter WB of the game ball B (the region of hatching with a downward slanting left side) excluding the portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 are disposed at adjacent positions (the same side surface (here, the front side surface 844)). May be. In this case, as shown in the figure, the adjacent first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 may be disposed at a position where they do not contact each other, or disposed at the contacting position. May be. In the case of no contact, the distance between the guide protrusions may be such that the distance between the bottom surfaces (or the end of the widest part of the guide protrusion) is larger than the diameter WB of the game ball B. It may be small or the same.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682 are disposed to face each other (on the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 side, respectively). Arrangement). In this case, the first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 may be disposed so as to completely face each other at the same position in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable prize opening unit 840, or may completely face each other. Instead, it may be arranged at a position shifted to the left or right in the longitudinal direction LD of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 (a position where a part of the variable winning a prize opening unit 840 opposes), and the first guiding convex portion 8681 and the second guiding convex portion 8682 Are disposed on the front side surface 844 and the back side surface 846 side, but may not be disposed at all (see the right figure), or may not be provided on the same side surface.

Although not shown, the plurality of guide convex portions (the first guide convex portion 8681 and the second guide convex portion 8682) can also be applied to the variable prize opening unit 260 in FIG.
<Modification 3>

  FIG. 203 and FIG. 204 are views showing the second special figure starting port 232, FIG. 203 (a) is an external perspective view seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 203 (b) is a front view. 204 (a) is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front right upper side, and FIG. 204 (b) is an exploded perspective view as seen from the upper left rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed. Then, when the general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 204, a ball detection sensor (entrance sensor) 940 is provided on the back side of the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232. When the entrance sensor 940 detects the entrance to the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 (not shown) is driven here, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the second special figure display device 214. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 rolls in the ball path 942 for discharge, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In such a second special figure starting port 232, a portion (in this case, for the discharge path of the game ball after passing through the ball passage 940a of the ball entering sensor 940) that is located behind the ball entering sensor 940 (for discharging) A notch 944 for guiding the game ball may be provided in the ball passage 942). The notch 944 can moderately suppress the momentum of the game ball passing through the ball passage 942 and smoothly guide the game ball to the ball passage communicating with the game island side.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has variable pitching means (for example, variable winning unit 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232). The variable entry means is provided with at least a first opening (for example, openings 820, 860, 894, 922), and the variable entry means is a sensing device. Means (entrance sensor 264, 854, 940) are provided at least, and the variable entry means is in either a first state (for example, a closed state) or a second state (for example, an open state). The second state is a state in which a game ball is at least more likely to enter than the first state, and the detection means is a game ball. Entry is detectable at least, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the first opening is a first end (eg, left end 274b, 856b, 894b), and the first The other end in the longitudinal direction of the opening is a second end (e.g., right end 274a, 856a, 894a), and the detection means is provided at least in the first position, The first position is a position closer to the first end than the center of the first opening, and the variable entry means has a first region (for example, a first ball passage). Region 822, 902) is provided, and the first region includes at least a region having a first width (for example, the first spherical passage width W1), and the first width and Is the width in the short direction of the variable pitching means The first area is an area provided at least between the center of the first opening and the detection means, and the variable ball entry means is a second area (for example, a first area). Two ball passage regions 824, 904) are provided at least, and the second region is a region provided at least between the first region and the second end, The second region includes at least a region having a first lateral width (for example, a second ball passage width W2), and the first lateral width is a width in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the distance of the first lateral width is at least larger than the distance of the first width.

  The distance from the detection means to the first end is a first distance, and the distance from the detection means to the center of the first opening is a second distance, The second distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the second distance may be a distance that is at least longer than the first distance.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided with at least opening / closing means (for example, door member 234a), The first state is a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least closed, and the second state is a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least opened. It may be a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the variable ball entry means is provided with an opening, a detection means, an opening / closing means, and a ball passage including at least a first area and a second area. The ball passage may be a passage including the first region, the second region, and other regions, or may be a passage having only the first region and the second region.

  Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least closed” may include a state where the opening / closing means is closed and a period during which the opening / closing means transitions from the open state to the closed state. . Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least closed” may be a state indicating only the state where the opening / closing means is closed.

Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least opened” may include a state where the opening / closing means is opened and a period during which the opening / closing means transitions from the closed state to the opened state. . Further, the “state including the state where the opening / closing means is at least opened” may be a state showing only the state where the opening / closing means is opened.
Further, the “variable winning means” may be “variable winning means”.
The detecting means may be capable of detecting at least a game ball.

  Further, the distance from the center to the detection means may be longer than the distance from the center of the first opening to the first end. Moreover, the reverse may be sufficient and the same may be sufficient.

  The first width is the width at the bottom surface, and the width of the passage at the first height from the bottom surface may be the fifth width. Here, the distance from the bottom surface to the first height may be the same as the radius of the game ball, may be lower than the radius, or higher than the radius. Further, the fifth width may be wider, narrower, or the same as the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the height from the bottom surface of the opening in the first region to the top surface of the opening is the second height, and the second height may be higher than the first height. The second height may be higher than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the height from the bottom surface to the top surface of the variable pitching means is a third height, and the third height may be lower than the first height, may be the same, or higher. Also good. Further, the third height may be higher, lower or the same as the diameter of the game ball.

  In addition, the first lateral width in the second region may indicate “the lateral width of the path of the game ball on the bottom surface”.

  The second region may be a region provided at least between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The second region may be a region provided only between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The second region may be a region provided other than between the center of the first opening and the second end.

  The detection means (for example, the incoming ball sensors 264, 854, 940) has a second opening (for example, the ball passages 264a, 854a, 898a, 940a of the incoming ball sensor 264) through which at least a game ball can enter. The detection means is capable of detecting at least the entry of the game ball when the game ball enters the second opening, and has the first width (for example, the first width) The one-ball passage width W1) is a width that is at least smaller than the second width (for example, the fifth ball-passage width W5), and the second width is the maximum at the second opening. It is good also as what is the diameter which becomes.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent clogging of the balls in the variable ball entry means and to smoothly detect the game balls.

  The first lateral width (for example, the second ball passage width W2) may be a width that is at least larger than twice the diameter of the game ball.

  With this configuration, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the detection means detects the game ball moving on the furthest route from the detection means. In some cases, it is possible to increase the time to be played and to make the game ball easily stay. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  Further, the variable pitching means is capable of changing at least to the first state (for example, the closed state) when the first condition is satisfied in the second state (for example, the open state). The establishment requirement of the first condition may be a requirement including at least that the first number of game balls are detected by the detection means.

  Further, “at least changeable to the first state” may indicate that the second state can be changed only to the first state. In addition, the phrase “at least changeable to the first state” may indicate that it can change from the second state to a third state different from the first state.

  In addition, the requirements for establishing the first condition are “the gaming state is a big hit”, “the opening / closing means is in an open state”, and “a first number of game balls detected by the detecting means” It may be.

The first condition is a requirement that includes requirements other than the requirement that “the first number of game balls are detected by the detection means” (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the open state was started) It may be established even when (Yes) is established.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to make the game ball stay easily. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning.

In the second area (for example, the second ball passage area 824, 904), the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening unit 260) is in the second state (for example, the open state). Furthermore, it may be at least easily visible to the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

  When it is possible to increase the player's expectation by making it easy to see the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means and making it easier to recognize that there will be profits in the future by adopting such a configuration There is.

  The variable ball entry means is easily visible in the second state, the transition period from the first state to the second state, and the transition period from the second state to the first state. Also good. Further, the variable pitching means may be easily visible from the player only in the second state.

  Further, the game board (for example, the game board 200) is provided, and the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided at least on the game board. It is good also as what was made.

  Further, the variable pitching means may be provided only on the game board. Moreover, the variable pitching means may be provided also in parts other than the game board (for example, the front frame door). Further, the variable pitching means may be provided on the game board.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by variable entry means. That is, among the game balls that enter the detection means via a plurality of routes inside the variable pitching means, the time until the detection means detects a game ball that moves on the farthest route from the detection means is increased. In some cases, however, the game ball can be easily retained. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means. In addition, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible.

In the above configuration, the first width may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The third width may be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the first width may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
Thereby, the game ball may be smoothly guided to the detection means.

  Further, at least a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. The inclined surface may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the detection means. Further, the inclined surface may be inclined downward from the second region toward the detection means.

Further, at least a part of the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. Further, the entire bottom surface (bottom surface) of the variable ball entry means may be an inclined surface. The inclined surface may guide the game ball to the detecting means.
Thereby, there is a case where the game ball can be smoothly guided to the detection means.

  The opening / closing means has an inclined surface on the first surface of the opening / closing means (for example, the door member 234a) (for example, the back surface side of the door member 234a (the surface through which the game ball passes when the door member 234a is open)). The inclined surface may be at least capable of guiding the game ball into the variable pitching means when the opening / closing means is in the second state (for example, open state). The opening / closing means may be provided with a second surface, and the second surface may be the back surface of the first surface. It may be a surface adjacent to a game area that can be passed (for example, a surface that is visible next to the game region 124 when the door member 234a is closed), for example, in the above-described embodiment, the second embodiment. Door member 234a in the open state is With game ball can be rolled to a first surface, game balls on the second surface is rollable in a closed state.

  Thereby, when the opening / closing means is in the second state, the game ball may be easily guided into the variable pitching means, and it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, there are cases where the game ball can be guided smoothly and the time until the game ball is guided to the detecting means can be shortened. Further, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from stagnating on the opening / closing means.

  In the above configuration, the opening / closing means may be provided with at least a plurality of inclined surfaces. The first inclined surface of the plurality of inclined surfaces may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the first position. The second inclined surface of the plurality of inclined surfaces may be capable of at least guiding the game ball to the second position. Further, the first position may be a position (first end side) close to the detection means side. Further, the second position may be a position (second end side) close to the side opposite to the detection means. Further, the detection means may be provided at a position closer to the first position than the second position. Further, the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface may have different shapes (asymmetrical left and right). Moreover, the same shape (left-right symmetry) may be sufficient as the shape of a 1st inclined surface and a 2nd inclined surface.

  The opening / closing means may be provided with only one inclined surface. The opening / closing means may be provided with only the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. The opening / closing means may be provided with three or more inclined surfaces.

  Thereby, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball guided to the second inclined surface is detected by the detection means. Further, since the game ball is easily guided in a plurality of directions, it may be difficult to cause the ball clogging.

  The opening / closing means may be provided with a first surface, and the first surface may be capable of guiding the game ball to the game area when the opening / closing means is the first. The first surface may be moved out of the game area when the opening / closing means is the second. In addition, the opening / closing means may be provided with a second surface, and the second surface may be the back surface of the first surface. For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of a shutter type variable winning device (variable winning unit) 700 as shown in FIG. 191, one surface (shutter flat surface portion 800a) of the door member (shutter 800) is closed by the shutter 800. In the state, the game ball can roll, but in the open state, the game ball does not roll to the back side of the shutter flat surface portion 800a. That is, in the case of the shutter-type variable ball entry unit 700, the game ball can roll only on one surface of the door member.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, at least one part of the lower edge of an opening part may be located in the position higher than at least one part of an opening-and-closing means.

  Further, only a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than only a part of the opening / closing means. Further, only a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the entire opening / closing means. Further, the entire lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than only a part of the opening / closing means. Further, the entire lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the entire opening / closing means.

  In this way, by providing the guide wall (guide wall 274c) that protrudes upward and has an inclined surface on the lower surface (lower edge of the opening) of the ball path of the variable winning means, the inclined surface of the guide wall is provided. The game ball can be rolled so as to be lifted from the bottom along the path, and the game ball can be smoothly and reliably guided toward the ball path of the detecting means, and the game ball can be moved from the ball path of the variable winning means to the door member. It may be possible to prevent jumping out to the side.

  Further, the first width may be a width on the lower surface (bottom surface) of the variable pitching means.

  In the above embodiment, the payout means may be provided, and the payout means may be capable of paying out at least the second number of game balls when the second condition is satisfied. Further, the requirement for establishing the second condition may be a requirement including at least that the game ball is detected by the detection means. In that case, when the detecting means detects the first number of game balls, the variable pitching means may change to the first state. Until the first state, the game ball can enter, and at least a third number of game balls can enter the variable entry means, and the third number is greater than the first number. There may be many.

  Thereby, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detecting means and to easily induce over winning. Further, there are cases where the profit given to the player can be increased.

  In addition, it is a gaming machine equipped with variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), wherein the variable pitching means has a first opening portion. (For example, openings 820, 860, 894, and 922) are provided at least, and the variable entry means is provided with at least detection means (eg, entry sensors 264, 854, and 940). And the variable entry means can change at least from one of a first state (for example, a closed state) and a second state (for example, an open state) to the other, and the second state Is a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the first state, and the detection means is capable of detecting at least the entry of the game ball, and is in the first opening. One end in the longitudinal direction is a first end (for example, left end 274b, 856b, 894b), and the other end in the longitudinal direction in the first opening is a second end. Part (for example, right end parts 274a, 856a, 894a), and the detection means is provided at least at the first position, and the first position is the center of the first opening. The variable entrance means is provided with at least a first area (for example, a first ball passage area 822, 902), The one region includes at least a region having a first width (for example, the first ball passage width W1), and the first width is a width in the short direction of the variable ball entry means. Yes, the first region is the center of the first opening and the detection It is an area provided at least between the steps, and the first area is provided at least at a position that is at least visually recognizable by the player through the first opening. It is a stand.

  The distance from the detection means to the first end is a first distance, and the distance from the detection means to the center of the first opening is a second distance, The second distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable pitching means, and the second distance may be at least a distance longer than the first distance.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in variable pitching means. That is, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable pitching means, the occurrence of a clogged ball in the variable pitching means is prevented. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), and the variable pitching means has a first opening. The part (for example, the openings 820, 860, 894, 922) is provided with at least opening / closing means (for example, a door member 234a), and the first state is that the opening / closing means is at least closed. It is a state including a state, and the second state may be a state including a state in which the opening / closing means is at least opened.

  By adopting such a configuration, even when a part of the game ball stays in the variable ball entry means, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the variable ball entry means. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232), and the variable pitching means has a first opening. The portion (for example, the opening 820, 860, 894, 922) is provided with at least a second region (for example, the third ball passage region 826, 906), It is a region provided at least at a position closer to the detection means than the first region, and the second region includes at least a region having a second width (for example, a third ball passage width W3). The second width is a width in the short direction of the variable pitching means, and the second width is a width at least larger than the first width. It may be a thing.

  The distance from the detection means to the first area is a third distance, the distance from the detection means to the second area is a fourth distance, and the fourth distance is The distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the fourth distance may be a distance that is at least shorter than the third distance.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is easy for the game balls to stay in the variable ball entry means, and the player has a sense of expectation that there are many game balls in the variable ball entry means. It may be easy to give. Further, since the momentum of the rolling of the game ball in the first region having the first width is moderately attenuated, it may be possible for the player to easily see the game ball in the variable pitching means. .

  The detection means (for example, the incoming ball sensors 264, 854, 940) has a second opening (for example, the ball passages 264a, 854a, 898a, 940a of the incoming ball sensor 264) through which at least a game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the second opening, the detection means can detect at least the entry of the game ball, and the first width (e.g., The first sphere passage width W1) is at least a width smaller than a third width (for example, the fifth sphere passage width W5), and the third width is a diameter that is maximum in the second opening. It is good also as a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent clogging of the balls in the variable ball entry means and to smoothly detect the game balls.

  The second area (for example, the third ball passage area 826, 906) may be an area provided at least between the detection means and the first area.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to make the game ball stay easily. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  In addition, the variable pitching means (for example, variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) has a fourth area (for example, a part of the second ball passage area 824 (wide) Portion 824a)) is provided, and the fourth region is provided with at least a region having a fourth width (for example, a fourth ball passage width W4), and the fourth width is provided. Is the width in the short direction of the variable pitching means, the fourth width is a width at least larger than the first width, and the fourth region is It is good also as what is the area | region provided at least in the said 2nd edge part side rather than said 1st area | region.

The distance from the second end to the first region is a fifth distance, and the distance from the second end to the fourth region is a sixth distance, The sixth distance may be a distance in the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means, and the sixth distance may be a distance that is at least shorter than the fifth distance.
It may be.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay in the variable entry means and to increase the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means. Thereby, it may be possible to easily induce over winning. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the concentration of game balls immediately before the detection means.

  Further, the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) satisfies the first condition in the second state (for example, the open state). The first condition (e.g., the closed state) is at least changeable, and the first condition is satisfied when the first number of game balls is detected by the detection means. It is good also as what is the requirement which contains at least.

  By adopting such a configuration, it may be possible to lengthen the time until the game ball is detected by the detection means and to easily induce over-intrusion.

  Further, the game board (for example, the game board 200) is provided, and the variable entry means (for example, the variable prize opening units 260, 650, 700, 840, 880, 908, 930, 232) is provided at least on the game board. It is good also as what was made.

  By adopting such a configuration, by setting the width of the first region to the first width, even if a part of the game ball stays in the variable ball entry means, In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging. In addition, since the first area is visible from the player through the first opening, it is easy for the player to check the game ball in the opening / closing means and to recognize that a profit will be given from now on. May increase the player's expectation.

  Moreover, the detection means may be provided outside the variable pitching means. In that case, the game ball detected by the detection means may be able to enter the variable entry means.

  Further, the “bottom surface” may be “a plane in which the game ball can roll inside the variable ball entry means”, and “a plane in which the game ball can roll in the variable ball entry means”. It may be “the widest plane among them”. A part or all of the bottom surface may be inclined.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a first state (for example, a state in which the door members 234a and 235a are in the closed position) and a second state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first state ( For example, a game table provided with variable pitching means (for example, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235) that can be changed from any one of the door members 234a and 235a in the open position). The variable entry means has an opening through which a game ball can enter (for example, an opening facing the side surface 276 of the ball passage 272), and the variable entry means allows the game ball to enter. Detectable detection means (for example, a ball entry sensor 264), the variable ball entry means has openable / closable opening / closing means (for example, door members 234a, 235a), and the opening / closing means In the state of In the second state, the opening / closing means is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the opening, and the detection means is configured to be unable to guide to the opening. It is provided at a first position (for example, near one end in the longitudinal direction) of the variable ball entry means, the opening / closing means includes a plurality of guiding means, and the plurality of guiding means are first guiding means (for example, Second guiding slope 290h) and second guiding means (for example, first guiding slope 290g), wherein the plurality of guiding means are provided asymmetrically in the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing means, and the first guiding means May be configured to be capable of guiding the game ball toward a second position different from the first position.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by providing a plurality of guiding means asymmetrically left and right, even if there is a difference in the right and left ratio of the game balls contacting the opening and closing means, the big hit without causing a ball clogging or the like May be able to digest. In addition, since it is possible to lengthen the time required for the game ball guided by the first guide means to be detected by the detection means after entering the variable entry means, more than the specified number of game balls enter the ball. In some cases, the frequency of over winning can be improved, and the profit given to the player can be increased. In addition, even when game balls heading in the direction of the detection means are concentrated and a ball is clogged, it is possible to apply different vector (direction) forces depending on the game balls guided to the first guide means. There are cases where it is easy to eliminate clogging. In addition, by providing it on the back, it is difficult to visually recognize the shape of the guiding means from the game ball (it is not visible when the opening / closing means is closed, and it is difficult to see it almost horizontally with the player's eyes when opened). In the game store, the game ball staying time is changed so that it is difficult for the player to be noticed even when adjustments advantageous to the game store are made, while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game stand, You may be able to keep the side profits.

  The variable entry means has an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the first position (on the bottom surface (for example, the lower surface 274)), and the first guiding means is at the second position. The second guiding means may have an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the first position.

  With such a configuration, the game ball guided to the first guiding means is guided in the direction opposite to the first position, so that the residence time in the variable winning means can be increased. On the contrary, the residence time of the game ball guided to the second guide means can be shortened. In addition, the game ball guided to the second guide means can be digested smoothly due to the high speed of the ball due to the guide by the second guide means and the guide by the inclined surface. Cheap. However, there is a case where the ball clogging can be eliminated by applying a force of another vector to the game ball guided to the first guide means. In addition, since the change in the degree of advantage that occurs when the direction of the game ball toward the variable winning means is changed by adjusting the nail becomes significant, the player's attention may be attracted to the game nail. In addition, even if a single game stand is provided with a plurality of variable winning means of the same shape, the performance of the big hit is changed depending on the area provided with the variable winning means and the gauge configuration (placement and adjustment of nails). Therefore, there are cases where the player's attention can be attracted to the rolling of the game ball, in particular, the state of entering the variable winning means and the state of entering the detecting means after entering the variable winning means.

  The first position is a specific side surface in the short direction of the variable ball entry means, and the detection means is in a direction coinciding with the longitudinal direction of the variable ball entry means at the first position. It is provided so that it can detect a moving game ball, and the bottom surface of the variable pitching means is a first bottom surface on the specific side surface side on which the detection means is provided and a second bottom surface on the opposite side to the specific side surface. The first bottom surface is provided at the same height as the uppermost portion of the inclined surface, and the second bottom surface is provided at the same height as the lowermost portion of the inclined surface. Also good.

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where the difference in residence time changed by the guided guiding means can be made more conspicuous (for example, when being guided to the first guiding means, over-winning is more likely). When induced and guided to the second guiding means, the residence time can be further shortened). Further, by providing the detection means on the side surface of the variable winning means, there are cases where the vertical and forward / backward widths of the unit can be made more compact than before while the residence time is shortened.

  In the second state, the variable pitching means has a narrow region in which the width in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inclined surface is provided at least in the narrow region, The variable pitching means has a first width at the first position in the narrow width region, and the variable pitching means detects the detection position more than the first position in the longitudinal direction of the variable pitching means. The second position in the narrow area close to the means may have a second width larger than the first width.

  With such a configuration, the area occupied by the variable winning means can be reduced, and an area having necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means can be afforded, and the degree of freedom in design. May be improved. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, by suppressing the clogging of the ball when the variable means is closed, the force applied to the game ball by the inclination and closing of the variable means is changed to the speed of the game ball, thereby eliminating the clogging that occurred in the vicinity of the detection means. You may be able to.

  In the first state, at least a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the lower edge of the opening / closing means.

  With such a configuration, when entering the variable winning means through the opening from the opening / closing means, the ball power is reduced by the step, thereby suppressing the movement in the back direction and the game ball in the shortest path May be guided to the detection means. Further, the game ball guided by the first guiding means and guided to the variable winning means after climbing the inclined surface is moved again onto the opening / closing means by the step, and then the detecting means by the step and the second guiding means. In some cases, the game ball is less likely to drop off from the opening / closing means and the variable winning means while keeping the residence time as long as possible. In particular, as shown in FIG. 173, the positional relationship between the lower edge of the opening and the lower edge of the opening / closing means may be continuously changed by continuously inclining the bottom surface of the variable winning means. In the present embodiment, the bottom of the variable winning means increases as it goes to the right when viewed from the front, and it is difficult to win the variable winning means from the opening / closing means side. Since the difference in the height of the lower edge becomes smaller as it slides to the left from there, it becomes easier to win. In the present embodiment, the difference in height of the lower edge is provided again when it is further to the left, so that the difference in height of the lower edge is minimized at the substantially central position in the left-right direction. The difference in height of the lower edge may be provided over the entire region. In contrast to the present embodiment, by providing the lower edge of the opening / closing means at a position higher than the lower edge of the variable winning means, it may be possible to reliably prevent the game balls in the variable winning means from spilling. .

  Note that the configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. Protective walls (for example, a first dropout prevention wall 290a and a second dropout prevention wall 290b) may be provided. In addition, a plurality of inclined surfaces provided on the bottom surface of the variable winning means may be provided, and the inclination angle may be different for each inclined surface. Moreover, the bottom face between several inclined surfaces may be horizontal.

  The second guiding means is a boundary, and the game ball guided to the second guiding means passes through the shortest distance toward the sensor, crosses the boundary and is guided to the back wall of the variable winning means. If the game ball is configured to pass the second shortest distance toward the sensor, the distance and time for entering the sensor will be different for the two routes, so it may be possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging. is there.

  Further, the first guiding means may be capable of guiding the game ball so that the number of game balls toward the second position is larger than that of the game balls toward the first position. Furthermore, the first guiding means may not be one that guides the game ball toward the first position.

  In addition, the ball entering sensor provided on the side surface of the variable winning means is difficult to see by the opening / closing means (the trace of the molding pin for providing the decorative seal attached to the front of the opening / closing means and the first guiding means). You may comprise. The solenoid for driving the opening / closing means may be provided on the side opposite to the direction in which the sensor is provided, and the longitudinal direction thereof may be provided in accordance with the longitudinal direction of the variable winning means.

  In addition, by providing an attacker with the same shape below the center of the game machine and above the right below the center, there is a difference in the benefits given to the player depending on the type of jackpot (open attacker), while reducing the number of members In some cases, the cost can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may provide a graded inclination in the back surface of a door member. In addition, when the first guiding means and the second guiding means are configured with an inclination, when the door is closed, the outer side is closed faster than the inner side. In some cases, it is possible to induce an over winning without dropping the remaining game balls.

  The gaming machine further comprises variable entry means that can change from one of the first state and the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state to the other. The ball means has an opening through which the game ball can enter, the variable ball entry means has a detection means capable of detecting the entry of the game ball, and the variable ball entry means can open and close the opening. Open / close means, and the open / close means is configured such that, in the first state, the game ball cannot be guided to the opening, and the open / close means is in the second state. The game ball can be guided to the opening, and the detection means can detect the game ball at a third position in the variable ball entry means, and the opening / closing means A plurality of inclined surfaces, and a small number of the plurality of inclined surfaces. Both of the inclined surfaces are first inclined surfaces, at least one of the plurality of inclined surfaces is a second inclined surface, and the shape of the second inclined surface is the first inclined surface. The first inclined surface is different from the shape of one inclined surface, the first inclined surface is easier to guide the game ball to the first position than the second position, the second inclined surface, It is easier to guide the game ball to the second position than the first position, the first position is closer to the first end than the second end, The second position is closer to the second end than the first end, and the third position is closer to the first position than the second position; The first position is a position between the second position and the third position, and the first end is in the longitudinal direction of the opening. The second end portion is an end portion on the opposite side to the first end portion in the longitudinal direction of the opening, and the variable pitching means is: In the second state, the width of the bottom surface in the short direction has a first region smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first region is located from the third position to the first position. Is provided at a position where the distance from the third position to the first region is closer than the distance to the first region, and the first region is located at the first position more than the second position. It is good also as what was provided in the position near.

  With such a configuration, by providing a plurality of inclined surfaces asymmetrically left and right, even if there is a difference in the right and left ratio of the game balls that contact the opening and closing means, it is possible to digest the big hit without causing ball clogging or the like There are cases where you can. In addition, since it is possible to lengthen the time from entering the variable ball entry means to being detected by the detection means for the game balls guided to the first inclined surface, more than the specified number of game balls enter the ball. In some cases, the frequency of over winning can be improved, and the profit given to the player can be increased. The detection means can detect the game ball at the third position (near the first end), and can reduce the dwell time and make the vertical and forward / backward widths of the unit more compact than before. There is a case. In addition, the area occupied by the variable winning means can be reduced, and there is a possibility that the area provided with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means can be afforded, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved. . Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, a ball generated in the vicinity of the detection means is obtained by changing the force applied to the game ball by closing the first region and the opening / closing means to the speed of the game ball while suppressing clogging of the ball when the opening / closing means is closed. In some cases, clogging can be eliminated. In addition, the first area is provided near the third position (position exceeding the first position on the moving path of the game ball), and the width of the bottom surface in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. By passing the ball, the game ball may be smoothly and surely guided toward the ball path 264a of the incoming ball sensor 264 disposed in the vicinity of the left end 274b. Further, the game ball passing through the first region rolls so as to be lifted from the bottom surface of the ball passage 272, so that a different vector force can be applied to the game ball, and the ball clogging that occurs in the vicinity of the detection means is prevented. Sometimes it can be resolved.

  Moreover, the said variable pitching means may have a 2nd area | region where the width | variety of the said transversal direction is larger than the diameter of a game ball in said 2nd state.

  With such a configuration, by varying the shape (width in the short direction) of the first region and the second region, there may be variations in the rolling (speed) of the game ball, and the passage In some cases, it is possible to change the residence time of the game ball in the means. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls toward the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated. In addition, the digestion rate of the remaining spheres when the opening / closing means is closed may be improved, and as a result, the player can be given more profit even during the same time by shortening the digestion time per unit jackpot. There is. In addition, by suppressing the clogging of the ball when the variable means is closed, the force applied to the game ball by the inclination and closing of the variable means is changed to the speed of the game ball, thereby eliminating the clogging that occurred in the vicinity of the detection means. You may be able to.

  Further, the bottom surface of the variable ball entry means may be inclined downward from the second position toward the first position.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the rolling of the game ball from the second position toward the first position, suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging even in the vicinity of the narrow first region, In some cases, the game ball can be reliably guided to the detection means.

  Moreover, the said variable pitching means is good also as a thing by which the protrusion part which protrudes in the front side of this transversal direction was provided in the back side surface of the said transversal direction.

  With such a configuration, a game ball that rolls on the lower surface 274 from the right end 274a toward the left end 274b while being in contact with the lower side surface 262a of the ball passage 272 is guided in the direction of the guide wall 274c. There are cases where it is possible. In some cases, the game ball may collide with the guide convex portion 262a1 and bounce off in the direction away from the side surface 276, which causes variation in the rolling (speed) of the game ball and the game ball in the ball passage 272. In some cases, the residence time can be changed. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls toward the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  In the first state, at least a part of the lower edge of the opening may be positioned higher than the lower edge of the opening / closing means.

  With such a configuration, when entering the variable winning means through the opening from the opening / closing means, the ball power is reduced by the step, thereby suppressing the movement in the back direction and the game ball in the shortest path May be guided to the detection means. Further, the game ball guided by the first guiding means and guided to the variable winning means after climbing the inclined surface is moved again onto the opening / closing means by the step, and then the detecting means by the step and the second guiding means. In some cases, the game ball is less likely to drop off from the opening / closing means and the variable winning means while keeping the residence time as long as possible. In particular, as shown in FIG. 173, the positional relationship between the lower edge of the opening and the lower edge of the opening / closing means may be continuously changed by continuously inclining the bottom surface of the variable winning means. In the present embodiment, the bottom of the variable winning means increases as it goes to the right when viewed from the front, and it is difficult to win the variable winning means from the opening / closing means side. Since the difference in the height of the lower edge becomes smaller as it slides to the left from there, it becomes easier to win. In the present embodiment, the difference in height of the lower edge is provided again when it is further to the left, so that the difference in height of the lower edge is minimized at the substantially central position in the left-right direction. The difference in height of the lower edge may be provided over the entire region. In contrast to the present embodiment, by providing the lower edge of the opening / closing means at a position higher than the lower edge of the variable winning means, it may be possible to reliably prevent the game balls in the variable winning means from spilling. .

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a detection unit that can detect at least the passing means (for example, the ball passage 272) through which the gaming ball can pass and the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means. A game machine comprising means (for example, a ball entry sensor 264) and at least opening / closing means (for example, a door member 234a), wherein the passage means has an opening (for example, an opening facing the side surface 276). Part), and the passing means has at least a first area (for example, a narrow area between the guide convex part 262a1 and the guide wall 274c), and the passing means is a second part. (For example, the region near the tip of the arrow of the third route R3 shown in FIG. 177), and the opening is at least where a game ball can enter. In the first state, the game ball can enter at least the opening, and in the second state, the game ball cannot enter the opening. In the direction, the second region is a region away from the detection unit in the first direction, and the second region is a region away from the detection unit in the first direction, and the first region. The width in the second direction is the first width, the width in the second direction in the second region is the second width, and the first state means that the opening and closing means The second state is a state in which the opening / closing means is at least closed, and the first direction is a longitudinal direction of the passage means. And the second direction is the short side of the passing means The first distance is shorter than the second distance, and the first width is narrower than the second width. It is a stand.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a feature in the passage means. That is, by varying the shape (first width and second width in the second direction) of the first region and the second region through which the game ball passes, the rolling (speed) of the game ball varies. May be given, and the staying time of the game ball in the passing means may be changed. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied by the passage means can be reduced, and there can be a margin in an area provided with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls toward the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  The bottom surface in the first region is a first bottom surface, the bottom surface in the second region is a second bottom surface, and the width in the second direction on the first bottom surface is The first width may be the second width of the second bottom surface in the second direction.

  With such a configuration, since the width of the bottom surface can be narrowed in a part of the passing means, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be varied, and the game ball stays in the passing means. There are cases where changes in time can be given. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied in the width direction of the bottom surface of the passage means can be reduced, and there can be afforded an area with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, thereby improving the degree of freedom of design. There are cases where it is possible. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls toward the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  The first bottom surface may be provided at least at a position lower than the second bottom surface.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily roll the game ball from the second bottom surface toward the first bottom surface, and even in the vicinity of the first bottom surface where the width in the second direction is narrow, Occurrence can be suppressed and the game ball can be reliably guided to the detection means.

  In addition, it comprises a profit granting means (for example, a payout device 152) that can at least give a profit, and the profit granting means can give at least the profit when the detecting means detects a game ball. It may be a thing.

  With such a configuration, the force applied to the game ball by the closing of the opening / closing means is suppressed while the ball close to the detection means is suppressed before the game ball related to the provision of profit is detected by the detection means. By changing to the speed of the game ball, it may be possible to eliminate the ball clogging that has occurred in the vicinity of the detection means.

  Further, the passing means has at least a third region (for example, a region at the tip of the arrow of the first route R1 shown in FIG. 177), and the third region is in the first direction, A third distance away from the detection means; a width in the second direction in the third area is a third width; and the third distance is greater than the second distance. The third width may be narrower than the second width.

  With such a configuration, since the shape of the passing means becomes more complicated, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be further varied, and the residence time of the game ball in the passing means is changed. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. In addition, the area occupied in the width direction of the bottom surface of the passage means can be reduced, and there can be afforded an area with necessary parts such as a solenoid and a link mechanism for driving the opening / closing means, thereby improving the degree of freedom of design. There are cases where it is possible. Further, there may be a case where a large region for releasing heat generated from the solenoid can be provided. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to avoid the concentration of game balls toward the detection means due to variations in the rolling (speed) of the game balls, and this occurs in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, ball clogging can be eliminated.

  Further, the passing means has at least a fourth area (for example, an area closest to the incoming ball sensor 264), and the fourth area extends from the detection means to the fourth area in the first direction. The width in the second direction in the fourth region is a fourth width, and the fourth distance is a distance shorter than the first distance, The fourth width may be wider than the first width. The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  With such a configuration, since the shape of the passing means becomes more complicated, the rolling (speed) of the game ball may be further varied, and the residence time of the game ball in the passing means is changed. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, by changing the residence time, it is difficult for the player to notice even if adjustments that are advantageous to the game store side are made, and the profit of the game store side is reduced while preventing a decrease in the operation of the game table. You may be able to keep. Further, by providing an area that is wider in the second direction than the first area immediately before the detection means, it is possible to eliminate the clogging that has occurred in the vicinity of the detection means while suppressing the clogging in the vicinity of the detection means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the rolling (speed) of the game ball varies, it may be possible to avoid the concentration of the game balls toward the detection means, and the occurrence of the ball near the detection means while suppressing the clogging of the balls near the detection means. In some cases, the blocked ball clogging can be eliminated.

  By providing the turbo button (configuration described in the first embodiment) and the attacker (configuration described in the second to fifth embodiments) on the game stand, the operation burden on the player in the right-handed game is reduced. While reducing, it is possible to improve the winning rate to the attacker and the over winning rate.

In particular, by using a turbo button, it is possible to easily perform swinging (a method of launching a game ball in both the left side area and the right side area) without operating the handle. The above-described swinging requires a large amount of operation of the handle and requires a knack, and is a difficult way for beginners to perform. Further, since there may be a difference in profits given depending on whether or not the above-described swinging can be performed, there is a possibility that a difference may be produced in profits given depending on the skill level of the player. Since the attacker has different shapes for the game balls staying in the attacker depending on the place where the prize is won, for example, the area where the game balls enter the attacker from both the left area and the right area of the board When it is provided (for example, in the center area of the board surface), it is possible to easily generate an overwinning by performing the above-described swinging. Here, by providing the turbo button, it is possible to provide the above-described attacker that can give a high profit without causing a difference depending on the skill level of the player.
<< Sixth Embodiment >>

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 for launching into 200 game areas 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 207) by the player's operation, and a chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 that emits light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives a card unit return instruction to the card unit, and a game A ball lending display unit 144 for displaying a person's balance and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 206 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 205 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is passed, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 208). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process, and the first control process related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls are configured, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game store clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball are configured. A launch board case 176 for housing the launch board 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and being operated when the power is turned on. Accordingly, a power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit. And are arranged.

  FIG. 207 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, and the first symbol display device 210. A special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one special opening 2 is provided directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 are disposed in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  In this embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404 and a display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436. VDP (video) that generates and displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is connected with your display processor) 434, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 209 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 209 (a), 10 types of special figures “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 209 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change or latent probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 209 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 209 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 209 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 209 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating 1 random number value and special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (normal symbol A) or the off symbol (normal symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  On the other hand, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of an incorrect selection, the flag for a normal figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending general figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. Flags such as a probability variation flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on In FIG. I, when the second off-flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the state of each special figure J is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special I) ) And the second off-set symbol (special symbol J).

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, in the case of a game machine of the number cut probability variation type (ST type), if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and the subtraction is performed. When the result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed, the effect is displayed in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the waiting period is set. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, a predetermined probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game (ST type). in the case of).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 priority change is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game, and the special figure 1 hold is a priority figure change that is consumed in preference to the special figure 2 hold. May be. In addition, the priority opening variation which starts the special drawing variable game related to the suspension of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 in the starting opening winning order without giving priority to any of the special drawing 2 floating game and the special drawing 1 floating game. It may be. In the starting entry winning order fluctuation, for example, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and therefore the priority fluctuation that the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the substantial number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are configured with command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the number of the flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, including the values of the 1 small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, etc., the special figure probability Including the value of the fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, include the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. That. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, etc. Set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lost flag, second lost flag, stored in the RAM 308 as command data, Information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag is set.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, the interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, the process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 212A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 212 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 212 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 212 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 213 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 213 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 213 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an operation request notifying unit capable of executing at least an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation (an example of notification of information for prompting operation of the operation unit), and an operation request notification unit. Operating means (an example of means controlled by the second control of the notification control means) capable of executing at least an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification. Hereinafter, each example of the operation request notification requesting the player for a predetermined operation and the operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification will be described. Note that the operation request notification may directly indicate that a predetermined operation is requested, or may not indicate directly. For example, when something (for example, part or all of the effect) changes by performing a predetermined operation in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed, the predetermined notification is included in the operation request notification.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (a), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in FIG. 214 (a) and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is represented by a downward thick arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol and a special symbol hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In this example, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (b), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  FIG. 214 (c) shows an example of the display mode of the hold icon. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 214 (c), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed may be displayed in the hold icon. The mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 includes, for example, a button image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The display of the hold icon including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or another hold icon is “eight”, “price” as shown in the lower part of FIG. 214 (c). ”,“ General ”,“ Military ”4 characters are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle, or a mode that matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani, Bancho, etc.) You may make it change to the various aspects of. The mode may be changed by pressing the chance button 136 may be the hold icon (a hold icon including a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed), or other hold icons other than the hold icon. There may be only the holding icon concerned.

  FIG. 214 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol stop display mode. As shown in FIG. 214 (d), the decorative design may be displayed in a form in which a mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. The mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 includes, for example, the characters “PUSH”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The stop display of the decorative design including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In FIG. 214 (d), the symbol “decoration 2” is illustrated, but any symbol of “decoration 1”, “decoration 3” to “decoration 10” may be used. For example, when the decorative symbol that stops first among the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 214 (d), when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player, Transition. Also, for example, the decorative symbols that stop at the first to third are stopped and displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 214 (d), and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player each time the display is stopped. When success or failure is determined by lottery every time 136 is pressed, if all succeeds, a special SP reach or special mode is entered. Further, for example, if any of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 214 (d), when the chance button 136 is pressed in that state, the execution is performed when the chance button 136 is normally pressed. The action to be performed (for example, the action at the time of pressing the chance button mentioned in the example described above or below) may be executed. Further, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the upper hold icon in FIG. 214 (c) and the decorative symbol in FIG. 215 are displayed at the same time, the button operation is invalid for the hold icon (for example, the reaction Do not perform a predetermined presentation) may be effective (for example, react, perform a predetermined presentation), may be valid for the hold icon, may be invalid for the decoration, It may be invalid for both icons and decorative symbols, or may be valid for both reserved icons and decorative symbols. When the button operation is valid for one side and invalid for the other, the invalid side may be made valid after performing the production of the valid side based on the button operation.

  FIG. 214 (e) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (e), a message “→ Right-handed →” suggesting a right-handed strike is displayed at the top of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed, for example, to suggest how to hit the player during probability change. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a right turn. This message may be displayed again as a warning display, for example, when a winning is made at a general drawing start opening provided on the left side or a special figure 1 starting opening that is awarded only when left-handed.

  FIG. 214 (f) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (f), a message “← left-left ←” suggesting left-handed is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed, for example, when the probability change (electric support) is completed, in order to suggest the player how to hit. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 214 (g) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (g), a message “Return to left-handed” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which suggests returning to left-handed. This message is displayed when, for example, the player has left-handed in the gaming state to be left-handed (for example, the game ball has passed through the normal start opening provided in the right-handed route after shifting to the gaming state to be left-handed) ) Is displayed as a warning. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 214 (h) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 214 (h), a message “↑ Aim for Chance Attacker” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which suggests aiming at the variable winning opening 234. This message is displayed, for example, on a game machine that produces an effect using a ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 in an initial round in a big hit game or a small hit game. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234.

  FIGS. 215 (a) and (b) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (a), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the message “Yoshimune wa ...” (part of the tutorial display). ing. This display indicates to the player that the continuation of the tutorial display is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the continuation of the tutorial display “I am an eight great general” is displayed. The message “Yoshimune is ...” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 215 (c) shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 215 (c), the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” selected is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ( The display of the symbol combination itself may be information indicating the profitability of the jackpot). In the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “˜Big hit” is displayed to notify that the big hit game is being played. The decorative symbol display device 208 also includes numerical values relating to the effects during the jackpot game, such as the current number of rounds of the jackpot game (in this example, “10R”) and the number of enemies defeated during the retreat. Defeated "), the number of prize balls acquired during the retreat (" 28314pt "in this example), etc. are displayed. These displays correspond to an operation request notification for requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234. For example, when one game ball enters the 15 variable prize openings 234, the number of prize balls displayed is “15” as the number of prize balls obtained and the number of prize balls entered into the variable prize opening 234. It may be “14” (= 15−1), which is the difference (net profit) from the lost number of balls “1”, or “15” of the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 215 (d) shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 215 (d), a symbol combination “decoration 2 -decoration 8 -decoration 0” for notifying a deviation is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). It should be noted that the display indicating that it is an empty board does not necessarily have to be clearly indicated by a text message as in this example, and it may be understood that a demonstration is being performed by displaying the background of the screen. Moreover, it is only necessary to know that the symbol is stopped even if it is not known that the demonstration is in progress. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed together with a message “Daitomo is here”. This display suggests to the player that the screen relating to the membership service is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIGS. 215 (e) and (f) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a mark indicating that the chance button 136 has been pressed, together with a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) that “A reach is expected to develop”. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), a line of a samurai character “The chance is up by the appearance of the samurai” is displayed. The display of the princess character's lines and the mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed shown in FIG. 215 (e) corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIGS. 215 (g) and (h) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (g), a message “˜A stage˜” is displayed above the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the present stage is the A stage. Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 has been pressed is displayed together with a message “if you want to change”. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed (for example, immediately after the start of change), and are produced by pressing the chance button 136. This suggests to the player that the stage can be switched from stage A to another stage. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 215 (h), the production stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed at the top of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “˜”. "A stage ~" switches from "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, a message “if you want to change” and a press of the chance button 136 are indicated on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is switched from the B stage to another stage by pressing the chance button 136. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 216 (a) shows a determination button 136a and a selection button 136b that can be provided in the pachinko machine 100 as a push button type switch that can be pressed by the player instead of or in addition to the chance button 136. An example of the configuration of 136c is shown. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the enter button 136a has a circular planar shape. The left selection button 136b for selecting the left (or top) has a planar shape that suggests "left" (for example, an isosceles triangular shape with an apex angle on the left side, a left arrow shape), It is arranged on the left side of the determination button 136a. The right selection button 136c for selecting the right (or lower) has a planar shape (for example, a shape symmetrical to the left selection button 136b) suggesting "right", and is arranged on the right side of the decision button 136a. Yes.

  216 (b) and (c) show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the buttons 136a to 136c shown in FIG. 216 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 216 (b), as in FIG. 215 (g), the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as “˜A stage˜” for notifying that the present stage is the A stage. A message is displayed. Further, a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed is displayed along with a message “A stage” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The message “A stage” and a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed. When the right selection button 136c is pressed, the stage is changed from the A stage. This suggests that the player can switch to the stage. When the right selection button 136c is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), the production stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “ "~ A stage ~" switches to "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, the message “B stage” and the left selection button 136b are pressed to the right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is returned from the B stage to the original A stage by pressing the left selection button 136b. These messages “A stage” and “B stage” and a mark suggesting that the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c is pressed are operations for requesting the player to press the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c. Corresponds to request notification. The operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 216 (b) and (c) are similar to the operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 215 (g) and (h), but the operation request notification before the button press shown in FIG. 215 (g). And the operation request notification after the button press shown in FIG. 215 (h) are in the same mode, the operation request notification before the button press shown in FIG. 216 (b) and the button shown in FIG. 216 (c). The mode is different from the operation request notification after pressing. In addition, a type in which three stages A, B, and C (or four or more stages) can be cyclically shifted, such as A⇔B⇔C⇔A, may be used. In this case, in the operation request notification shown in FIGS. 216 (b) and 216 (c), both a mark that suggests pressing the left selection button 136b and a mark that suggests pressing the right selection button 136c are displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine provided with two chance buttons, a predetermined reaction is shown when the second chance button is pressed while an operation request notification requesting the pressing of the first chance button is made. It may be.

  FIG. 216 (d) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 216 (d), a button image imitating the chance button 136 and a meter moving image representing a meter are displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The meter moving image has, for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is white as a whole at the beginning of the moving image, and the black portion gradually increases from the left end with the passage of time. These button images and meter moving images do not explicitly indicate that the chance button 136 is pressed, but those skilled in the art or a player may recognize that these images are black as a whole. It can be recognized that this implies that the chance button 136 should be pressed before becoming. Therefore, the display of these button images and meter moving images corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. As described above, the operation request notification includes not only notification that explicitly requests a predetermined operation but also all notifications that enable a person skilled in the art or a player to recognize that the predetermined operation is prompted. The notification implying that the chance button 136 should be pressed may include a countdown display such as 3 → 2 → 1 → 0.

  FIG. 216 (e) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 216 (e), a message “Yoshimune mode” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the current effect mode is the Yoshimune mode. The number “3” is displayed in the upper part of the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the number “4” is displayed in the lower part. This display informs that the number of hold of special figure 1 variable game is 3, and the number of hold of special figure 2 variable game is 4. Below the special figure hold number display area 208f, the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations for a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations for the probability change in the ST machine, etc.) related to a state advantageous to the player is displayed (this example). Then, “70 times remaining”). This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  FIGS. 216 (f) and (g) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 216 (f), above the variation icon display area 700 of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a samurai character image and a message “Chance of Yoshimune if the family crest stops” as a samurai character dialogue. It is displayed. These are displayed as effects related to normal fluctuations, and suggest that a predetermined chance time starts when a “family crest” symbol is stopped and displayed in roulette, which will be described later. These samurai character images and messages correspond to operation request notifications for requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  As shown in FIG. 216 (g), with respect to the holding that is won at the time of the normal drawing and at the time of the opening of the electric long, a special animation effect is produced in or around the variable icon display area 700 before and after the holding is digested. Done. For example, when the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 won at the time of the opening of the electric tulong is moved from the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 to the variable icon display area 700 (when the hold is digested), the decorative symbol is displayed. Apart from the variation display, rotation of the roulette in the variation icon display area 700 (the variation display of the effect symbol) is started. When the roulette stops after the elapse of a predetermined time, one of a plurality of types of effect symbols is displayed in the variation icon display area 700. Thereafter, various effects are executed based on the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the variation icon display area 700. In the example shown in FIG. 216 (g), the hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 moves to the variable icon display area 700 and the rotation of the roulette is started. , “Thousand boxes” symbol moves toward the top of the screen. Such an operation of the “thousand box” symbol (in this example, the movement of the display position) is an operation that is executed by digesting the increased holding due to the entrance to the special symbol start opening, so that an operation request notification ( For example, it corresponds to an operation request related operation related to notification for requesting the launch of a game ball. When the “thousand box” symbol moves upward on the screen, the “thousand box” symbol temporarily overlaps the character image. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification (display of the habit character image) due to the operation request related operation (movement of the display position of the “thousand boxes” symbol).

  FIG. 216 (h) shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 216 (h), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 0” for notifying the deviation is displayed. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). This display may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, a message “menu display with button PUSH” is displayed in telop below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This display indicates to the player that a menu screen (for example, a screen related to the membership service) is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the menu screen displayed based on pressing of the chance button 136 may be displayed overlapping with various information displayed on the screen. Such display of the menu screen may correspond to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIGS. 217 (a) and 217 (b) show an example of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body (movable accessory) provided around it. In the example shown in FIGS. 217 (a) and 217 (b), effect movable bodies 800 and 802 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. The effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 operate in a predetermined operation pattern when, for example, a predetermined effect lottery is won. In the following description, “overlapping” and “non-overlapping” are as viewed from the player side.

  The forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 of this example can be rotated by a stepping motor in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The forearm 224b does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where it is at one movable end position (for example, an initial position or a standby position) (see FIG. 217 (a)). Further, the forearm portion 224b overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the other movable end position (for example, the maximum movable end position, the effect position) (see FIG. 217 (b)). ).

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 is located above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where it is at the upper movable end position, and does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 217 (a)). In addition, the effect movable body 800 overlaps with a part of the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the effect movable body 800 is at the lower movable end position (see FIG. 217 (b)). In this example, when the effect movable body 800 is in the lower movable end position, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, the special figure reservation number display area 208f, etc. of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The movable body 800 is shielded and cannot be visually recognized. However, the fourth symbol display area 208e may be always visible regardless of the position of the effect movable body 800.

  The effect movable body 802 has a shape imitating a panda. The effect movable body 802 is movable in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). In this example, a horizontal stage (not shown) having the same height as the lower end of the screen is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stage is provided with an opening that allows the movable movable body 802 to move in the vertical direction. In the state where the production movable body 802 is at the lower movable end position, only a part (in this example, the panda's head) is exposed on the stage, and the other parts (in this example, the panda's trunk, limbs, etc.) It is stored below the stage (see FIG. 217 (a)). Further, in this state, a part of the effect movable body 802 on the stage is overlapped with a part below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Other portions of the effect movable body 802 stored below the stage cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, the production movable body 802 appears almost entirely on the stage in the state of the upper movable end position (see FIG. 217 (b)). In this state, almost the entire effect movable body 802 overlaps with a part of the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 802 is overlapped with the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at any position. For example, in the state where it is at the lower movable end position, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is. It may not be overlapped.

  Here, as shown in part A of FIG. 217 (b), the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the effect movable body 802 at the upper movable end position are not in contact with each other. Yes. Therefore, the effect movable bodies 800 and 802 do not contact each other regardless of the position. On the other hand, as shown in part B of FIG. 217 (b), the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 at the other movable end position are in contact with each other. For this reason, the effect data defining the operation pattern of these effect movable bodies is designed so that the effect movable body 800 and the forearm portion 224b do not reach these positions at the same time.

  When the effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 are moved or rotated to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the screen may not be visible. Therefore, the movement or rotation of the effect movable bodies 224, 800, 802 to the position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208. May correspond to the operation.

  218 (a) to 218 (c) show examples of display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and operation of the shielding device 246. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 218 (a), the shielding device 246 is in a fully opened state, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 218 (b), the shielding device 246 is in a fully closed state, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is only partially visible from the lattice holes of the shielding device 246. This makes it difficult for the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the decorative symbol and the message “please remove the ball”. The shielding device 246 (right door 246b) of this example has an opening at a position corresponding to the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) in the fully closed state. 246c is provided. Thereby, even if the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) are visible.

  When the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different from the normal mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 218 (c), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and / or moved as necessary, so that the decorative symbols can be easily removed from the lattice holes of the shielding device 246 (left door 246a). Visible. When the door has finished moving, the state is as shown in FIG. 218 (b) or (c). However, the decorative symbol, message, etc. may be more difficult to see while the door is moving.

  The closing operation of the shielding device 246 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize.

  Note that the gap (hole) provided in the shielding device 246 of this example is surrounded by a member in the shape of a letter “B”. A notch-shaped gap surrounded by a letter may be provided.

  FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (f) show examples of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect movable body. In the example shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (f), effect movable bodies 800 and 804 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 can take at least a position that does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position that overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect movable body 800 may temporarily shield the fourth symbol display area 208e during the movement, but may not stop at a position where the fourth symbol display area 208e is shielded.

  The effect movable body 804 includes a sub display device using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The effect movable body 804 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. In this example, the sub display device provided in the effect movable body 804 is provided with at least a special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons as the number of hold in FIG. Further, the sub display device can display a message for requesting a predetermined operation from the player.

  In the state shown in FIG. 218 (d), a small part of the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the effect movable body 804, but all the substantial display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. It is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. At the lower left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. On the other hand, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 provided in the effect movable body 804, three hold icons are displayed. Although not shown, another effect movable body 800 is positioned above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state shown in FIG. 218 (e), the effect movable body 804 slightly moves upward, and the message “chance button pressed” is displayed on the sub display device of the moved effect movable body 804. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the message “please remove the ball” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see due to the movement of the effect movable body 804. In other words, in this example, the effect movable body 804 that displays the operation request notification makes it difficult to visually recognize another operation request notification. Note that the same content may be displayed on the sub display device of the effect movable body 804 instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the message “please remove the ball” on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 218 (f) shows a state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the period in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like, and the predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 is displayed. Move down. It should be noted that the effect movable body 800 may always operate when the chance button 136 is pressed within a period in which pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested. In the state shown in FIG. 218 (f), the effect movable body 800 moves downward and overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 800 moved downward by pressing the chance button 136 shields a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the fourth symbol display in the screen. It stops so as not to overlap the area 208e, the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”). The effect movable body 800 that has moved downward may shield the operation request notification of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a message “please remove the ball”) and make the operation request notification difficult to view. It should be noted that there is a display of “Press the chance button” on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the chance button is pressed, the effect movable body 804 moves, and the effect movable body 804 displays “Press the chance button”. May be difficult to view.

  Further, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping with the effect movable body 804 (sub display device), shields the operation request notification (message “chance button pressed”) of the sub display device, and notifies the operation request notification. It may be difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “chance button pressed”) is based on the fact that a predetermined condition including at least pressing of the chance button 136 (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is established. It may be difficult to recognize by the movement operation of the effect movable body 800 executed in this manner.

  The movement of the effect movable bodies 800 and 804 to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the movement of the effect movable body 800 to a position overlapping the screen of the sub display device is performed by the decoration symbol display device 208 or the sub display device. In some cases, at least a part of the operation request notification corresponds to an operation that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 219 shows an example of the configuration of the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106. As shown in FIG. 219, a plurality of (for example, three) light sources 850 that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at one end portion (upper left end portion in this example) of the transparent plate member 118. . For example, an LED or the like is used as the light source 850. The plurality of light sources 850 are arranged at a predetermined arrangement interval that is relatively narrow in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. In addition, a plurality of light sources 852 (for example, the same number as the number of light sources 850) that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at another end portion of the transparent plate member 118 (lower right end portion in this example). It has been. For example, the same LED as the light source 850 is used as the light source 852. The plurality of light sources are arranged at an arrangement interval wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. For example, the light sources 850 and 852 are controlled to emit light by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, and emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  On the front or back surface of the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118, dot patterns (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflect or scatter light from the light source 850 are formed. Light from the light source 850 enters the transparent plate member 118 and guides the inside thereof, and is reflected or scattered by the first region 118a where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Thus, when the light source 850 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 is relatively narrow, it is possible to increase the proportion of light incident on the dot pattern of the first region 118a out of the light from the light source 850. For this reason, the emission intensity of the first region 118a is relatively high.

  On the front or back surface of the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118, a dot pattern (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflects or scatters light from the light source 852 is formed. Light from the light source 852 enters the transparent plate member 118 to guide the inside, and is reflected or scattered by the second region 118b where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Accordingly, when the light source 852 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 852 is wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850, the light from the light sources 852 is easily dispersed in the transparent plate member 118, and the light incident on the dot pattern of the second region 118b out of the light from the light sources 852. The ratio is likely to be low. For this reason, the emission intensity of the second region 118b may be lower than that of the first region 118a.

  When the first region 118a or the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 emits light, a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208 arranged to overlap with the back side of the first region 118a or the second region 118b when viewed from the player Becomes difficult to see. For this reason, the light emission of the first region 118a and the second region 118b by the light emission of the light sources 850 and 852 is an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the operation request notification on the display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208. May fall under.

  220A and 220B show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) saying “A reach is expected for development” and a mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), a line of a samurai character that “the chance is up by the appearance of a samurai” is displayed. Since the line of the samurai character overlaps with the line of the princess character and is displayed on the front layer, it is difficult to visually recognize the line of the princess character. The display of the princess character's lines and the mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed corresponds to the operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the display of the samurai character dialogue shown in FIG. 220 (b) corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (princess character dialogue) is difficult for the player to recognize. In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting pressing of the chance button 136 (the line of the princess character) is executed based on the operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 is pressed). It is difficult for the player to recognize by the display of the character's dialogue.

  FIG. 220 (c) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (c), a mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Below the message, a hero character image is displayed. An effect image representing the aura of the hero character is displayed behind the hero character image. This effect image is arranged behind the main character image and in a layer in front of the message “please remove the ball”. The effect image gradually increases as the player presses the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The effect image in the state shown in FIG. 220 (c) overlaps with the message “please remove the sphere”, making the message difficult to see. The display of the effect image that is gradually increased corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (c), the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is not difficult to visually recognize by the effect image, but may be difficult to visually recognize by the effect image. In this case, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 (a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed) is an operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 has been pressed for a long time). It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the effect image based on the enlarged display size of the effect image. In this example, there is a relation between the size of the effect image and the expectation level of the jackpot. For example, when the expectation level of the jackpot is high, the effect image tends to be large. Further, when the effect image is large, the degree of difficulty in visually confirming the operation request is likely to increase. As a result, when the degree of expectation for jackpot is high, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request is likely to increase.

  FIG. 220 (d) shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (d), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed in front of the message “please remove the ball”, which makes it difficult to view the message. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the display of a mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (a message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  220 (e) and 220 (f) show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and sound output from the speaker 120. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (e), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with a message “PUSH !!”. These messages and marks correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, a voice message “please remove the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a predetermined interval at a medium volume. The output of the voice message corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state and the predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. From the speaker 120, the sound effect “Jakine” is output at a large volume. A voice message “please pull out the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a medium volume, but this voice message is difficult to recognize because the sound effect is output at a high volume. That is, the output of the sound effect “Jakin” at a high volume corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (output of a voice message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 221 shows that the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front of the screen can be moved in the vertical direction and the first display and the second display can be shielded. The example of the relationship with a shielding means is shown. In FIG. 221 and FIGS. 222 to 224 described later, both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation. In FIGS. 221 to 223, the shielding means corresponds to an operation means capable of executing an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The first display is located below the screen, and the second display is located above the first display. FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (h) show in time series how the shielding means moves from below to above.

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (a), the shielding means (not shown in FIG. 221 (a)) is positioned below the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (b), the upper end of the shielding means is positioned above the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is positioned below the first display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (c), the shielding means overlaps the entire first display, but does not overlap the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to view (for example, the entire display is not visible), but the second display is visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (d), the shielding means overlaps the entire first display and also overlaps the lower part of the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, some cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (e), the shielding means overlaps the upper part of the first display and also overlaps the whole of the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, a part cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (f), the shielding means does not overlap the first display, but overlaps the entire second display. In this state, the first display can be visually recognized, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the entire display cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (g), the shielding means does not overlap the first display but overlaps the upper part of the second display. In this state, the first display is visually recognizable, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, some of the images cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 221 (h), the shielding means is located above the second display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the above description, there is an example in which there is one item to be hidden (shielding means) and two items to be hidden (first display and second display). However, there are two or more items to be hidden. One or three or more may be hidden.

  222 and 223 show an example of the relationship between the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means that can move in front of the screen in the vertical direction. . The width of the shielding means in the left-right direction is narrower than the width of the screen. In addition, the shielding means moves up and down in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the screen. The broken lines in the figure represent the movement trajectories of the left end and the right end of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 222 (a), the first display and the second display are both horizontally long, and the width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The vertical heights of the first display and the second display are both lower than the vertical height of the shielding means. In this case, depending on the position of the shielding means, the first display is a non-shielding state that does not overlap with the shielding means (visible state), a partially shielded state that partly overlaps the shielding means (partially difficult to see) ), And a total shielding state where the whole overlaps with the shielding means (a state where the whole is difficult to visually recognize). The second display can take two states, an unshielded state and a partially shielded state, depending on the position of the shielding means. The second display does not take full shielding. For example, when the shielding means moves from the lower movable end toward the upper movable end, the first display is in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → full shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state. The second display changes in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 222 (b), the first display is the same as in FIG. 222 (a), but the second display is vertically long and is arranged at the right end of the screen. The second display is located on the right side of the movement locus at the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take the same three states as described above. The second display is in a non-shielding state regardless of the position of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 222 (c), the first display is the same as FIG. 222 (a), but the second display is arranged immediately above the first display. Both the first display and the second display are located between the left end movement locus and the right end movement locus of the shielding means. The distance from the upper end of the second display to the lower end of the first display is longer than the height in the vertical direction of the shielding means. In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 222 (d), the arrangement of the first display and the second display is switched as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 222 (c). In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223 (a), the horizontal width of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 222 (c). The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states, that is, a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state, whereas the second display does not take a fully shielded state, and the non-shielded state, partly Two states of the shielding state can be taken.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223 (b), the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged on the right side of the first display. The distance from the left end of the first display to the right end of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means. The right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display and the second display are not in a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223 (c), the width of the shielding means is widened to the left as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 223 (b). The distance from the left edge of the first display to the right edge of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means, but the left edge of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left edge of the shielding means. ing. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223 (d), the first display is located at the upper left of the second display. The distance from the upper end of the first display to the lower end of the second display is longer than the vertical width of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  Although the example in which the shielding unit moves in the vertical direction has been described in FIGS. 221 to 223, an example in which the shielding unit moves in another direction (for example, the left-right direction) can be considered in the same manner.

  FIGS. 224A to 224D show examples of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series. Both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation. For example, the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged near the center of the screen.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are still displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG. 224 (d) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification includes a display that continues to be displayed over a plurality of change periods (first display in this example) and a display that is deleted when the next change starts (second display in this example). Display).

  224 (e) to (h) show another example of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, the first display is displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 224 (f) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, a second display is newly displayed in addition to the first display.

  FIG. 224 (g) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG. 224 (h) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the second display is displayed again in addition to the first display.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification is displayed over a plurality of variation periods, but is displayed only during the symbol stop display period and is erased during the symbol variation display period (in this example, There is a second display).

  FIG. 225 shows a specific example 1 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the examples shown in FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (d), it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 225 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In the operation request notification of this example, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is requested, but it may be requested to press the chance button 136 one time or a plurality of times (short press is also possible). On the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” overlaps with a part of the main character, but it does not need to overlap. In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the hero character image and the aura image described later, but is displayed on the layer behind the hero character image and the aura image. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a layer behind one of the main character image and the aura image and before the other.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed (for example, long-pressed) by the player, in this example, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long-press operation of the chance button 136 ends. Even after the chance button 136 is pressed, an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136 may continue to be displayed. Further, the moving image of the confrontation scene is continuously displayed, and when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the effect mode may change depending on the length of time of the long press operation. In this example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed for a predetermined time or longer, an aura image is displayed behind the main character. In the state shown in FIG. 225 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed. The message “please remove the sphere” is difficult to see because the aura image is displayed. The display of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The size of the displayed aura image may gradually increase as the time of the long press operation of the chance button 136 increases. For example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is continued from the state shown in FIG. 225 (b), the display size of the aura image may be enlarged as shown in FIG. 225 (c). By increasing the display size of the aura image, the message “please remove the sphere” becomes more difficult to see. The enlargement of the display size of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is further continued from the state shown in FIG. 225 (c), the aura image may be further enlarged as shown in FIG. 225 (d). The larger the aura image, the higher the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the message “please remove the ball”. In this example, the larger the aura image is, the higher the expectation is. The upper limit of the size of the aura image in the effect is determined in advance by random lottery at the start of the change. When the player stops the long press operation of the chance button 136, the size of the aura image may be maintained at the time when the long press operation is stopped, or the size of the aura image may be maintained. It may be gradually reduced.

  The size of the aura image at the end of the effect display in this example is determined by the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image and the long press operation time of the chance button 136. For example, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the maximum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 225 (d)) is relatively high when the result of the determination of whether or not the change is a big hit, When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively low. In addition, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the minimum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 225 (b)) is relatively low when the result of the determination of whether or not the change is a big hit is relatively low. When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively high.

  On the other hand, even if the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image is the maximum value, if the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is short, the effect display is ended while the size of the aura image remains small. There is a case. In this example, the upper limit of the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is the time from the start to the end of the effect (for example, the change period in the case of an effect executed over one change period or multiple changes). It is. Therefore, when the production period itself is short, the long press operation time tends to be short, and it may be difficult to execute the production with high expectation. On the other hand, when the production period is long, the long press operation time tends to be long, and thus a production with high expectation may be easily executed.

  In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, so it may not become invisible even if the degree of visual difficulty increases. You may make it invisible or you may make it the whole invisible.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “please remove the ball”) is sent to the player by a predetermined action (for example, display of the aura image, enlargement of the display size of the aura image). It becomes difficult to see. Here, in a state in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, only a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, and the whole operation request notification is difficult to see. , Part of the operation request notification is not visible, only part of the operation request notification is not visible, the whole operation request notification is not visible, part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is visible (viewing Easy), part of the operation request notification is not visible and the other part is visible (easy to see), part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is not visible, part of the operation request notification is It is difficult to view, and some of the other parts are not visible, and another part is visible (easy to see).

  FIG. 226 shows a specific example 2 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (d), it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In this example, unlike FIG. 225 (a), the message “please remove the ball” is not displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is still displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 226 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image of this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. In the state shown in FIG. 226 (b), since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image do not overlap, the operation request notification is not difficult to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 226 (c), the display size of the aura image is enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. The enlarged aura image overlaps with a part of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 226 (d), the display size of the aura image is further enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. Compared with FIG. 226 (c), an overlapping portion (for example, an overlapping area) with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136 is increased due to enlargement of the aura image, and the operation request notification is visually recognized. The impossible part is increasing.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a display requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136) is performed by an operation requested by the operation request notification (for example, a long press operation of the chance button 136). An operation (for example, displaying an aura image, enlarging the display size of the aura image) executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition including at least a failure makes it difficult for the player to recognize.

  The layer on which the operation request notification is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is relatively the back side (for example, aura, for example) as shown in FIG. The system side (for example, a request for removing a ball or a request such as “Please call a store clerk”) may be relatively nearer as shown in the example of FIG. 225. In some cases, it may be on the side (for example, nearer than the aura image).

  FIG. 227 shows a specific example 3 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (d), as in FIG. 225, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Yes. Similarly to FIG. 226, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a chance A downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is still displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 227 (b), a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image in this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 227 (b), the aura image overlaps a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132, but what is the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136? There is no overlap. Therefore, although the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is difficult to visually recognize, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is not difficult to visually check.

  In the state shown in FIG. 227 (c), the display size of the aura image is enlarged. Thereby, the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image increases. Therefore, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification is increasing. The aura image also overlaps with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification.

  In the state shown in FIG. 227 (d), the display size of the aura image is further enlarged. Thereby, since the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased. Further, since the overlapping portion between the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased.

  Here, for example, in the change from FIG. 227 (c) to FIG. 227 (d), regarding the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136, In both cases, the overlap with the aura image is increasing. However, since the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may not increase so much even if the overlapping portion increases (difficulty in visual recognition). May not change at all, or the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may decrease). On the other hand, since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in a layer behind the aura image, an increase in the overlapping portion may directly lead to an increase in the degree of difficulty in visual recognition.

  FIG. 228 shows a specific example 4 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 228 (a), a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136, in this example, a moving image in which the facial expression of the main character is enlarged is displayed on the moving image of the confrontation effect and the small screen arranged in the layer in front of various operation request notifications. A cut-in production will be performed. In this example, a plurality of cut-in effects having different degrees of reliability (expectations) are prepared. The reliability of the cut-in effect depends on the facial expression of the main character displayed on the small screen (for example, the higher the reliability is for a facial expression with a spirit), or the vertical height of the small screen (for example, the higher the height is (Or the thicker the upper and lower frames), the higher the reliability).

  FIG. 228 (b) shows an example of a cut-in effect with high reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is high, both the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 are both the small display displayed on the previous layer. The screen is invisible.

  FIG. 228 (c) shows an example of a cut-in effect with low reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is low, the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 does not overlap the small screen at all. Therefore, the entire operation request notification is visible. Further, only part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 overlaps the small screen. Therefore, only a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 228 (b) and (c), in this example, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of various operation request notifications differs depending on the type of cut-in effect. The higher the reliability of the cut-in effect, the higher the degree of difficulty in viewing various operation request notifications.

  The operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be deleted after the cut-in effect small screen is displayed (see FIG. 228 (c)), or the cut-in effect small screen is displayed. And may be erased (see FIG. 228 (d)).

  The gaming machine according to the present example is a gaming machine provided with operating means (for example, chance button 136) and display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228). It is a pachinko machine, the operation means is a means provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays that are expected to be a big hit, the display means , A means capable of displaying a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “first display”, for example, a character display “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 228 (a)), The display means is a means capable of displaying one of the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, a highly reliable cut-in effect shown in FIG. 228 (b)). And the display means includes the plurality of display means. One of the types of display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”, for example, a cut-in effect with low reliability shown in FIG. 228 (c)). The display is a display that can be displayed after the operation means is operated, and the second display that is displayed when the first display is displayed overlaps the first display. The third display displayed in a state where the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the first display, and the third display The symbol variation display in which the second display is performed is easier to be finalized and displayed in the event of the symbol variation display in which the second display is performed than the symbol variation display in which the second display is not performed. A game table characterized by being configured A.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, the second display displayed in the state where the first display is displayed is overlapped with the first display, while the first display is displayed. The third display that is displayed in the state of being displayed is not overlapped with the first display, and the second display is more effective than the symbol variation display in which the third display is performed and the second display is not performed. The symbol variation display that has been displayed is easier to finalize the big-hit symbol mode, so if a “second display” with a higher jackpot reliability is displayed, the player is given a If you can focus only on the “second display”, the situation that might really be a big hit, greatly enhance the fun of the game, and the “third display” with a low reliability of the big hit is displayed In the “first display” and “third display” It is possible to focus on the person, it may be possible to prevent excessive tilt to expect a big hit.

  Further, the light emitting means (for example, an LED lamp disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236) and a transmission part (for example, the light guide plate 812 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236), The transmissive part is a transmissive part located in front of the display means, and the transmissive part is referred to as a partial area of the transmissive part (hereinafter referred to as “first area”) when the light emitting means emits light. ) Is a transmissive part capable of displaying a pattern (for example, a dragon-like face 705 shown in FIG. 237 (f)), and at least a part of the first display is overlapped by at least a part of the first region. It may be done. The pattern may be displayed on the transmission part after the operation means is operated. Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting an operation by the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”, for example, a button image representing the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 228 (a)). In addition, the fourth display may include a display representing an appearance of the operation means. Further, a storage tray capable of storing game balls may be provided, and the first display may be a display prompting to discharge the game balls from the storage tray. Moreover, the movable means (for example, the production movable body 804 shown in FIG. 218 (d) to FIG. 218 (f), etc.) is provided, and the movable means has a first position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 218 (d)). To a second position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 218 (e)), the second position is a position in front of the display means, and the movable means is the second position. When the first display is displayed on the display means in the state of being positioned, at least a part of the display of the first display may be overlapped by the movable means. . The first display may not be overlapped by the movable means located at the first position. The visibility of the first display may be lower when the movable means is located at the second position than when the movable means is located at the first position. The movable means may be a means that can move to the second position even when the first display is displayed. Further, the movable means may be a means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed. The movable means may be a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display.

  FIG. 229 shows a specific example 5 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 229 (a), a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed. The button image of this example is displayed with a larger display size as the reliability of the variation is higher. The button image shown in FIG. 229 (a) is a standard size. The button image is displayed on the layer before the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 229 (b) shows a state in which an enlarged button image is displayed. The enlarged button image overlaps a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible. The degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 increases as the display size of the button image increases. In this example, the operation request notification is not difficult to view when a standard-size button image is displayed, but is difficult to view only when an enlarged-size button image is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 229 (a) (button image is standard size), and when the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 229 (b) (button image is an enlarged size) Then, the performance performed thereafter may or may not be the same. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a predetermined effect movable body operates. The operation request notification may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the effect movable body. Different production movable bodies may be operated depending on the size of the displayed button image, and the operation pattern (eg, movable range) of the production movable body may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image. May be.

  In the state shown in FIG. 229 (a), the entire standard size button image is in an opaque state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the background image of the portion overlapping the button image cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 229 (b), a part (side surface part) of the enlarged button image is in the transmissive state (transmittance 100%). For this reason, a part of the hero character, a part of the enemy character, and a part of the background image, which overlap with the side part of the button image, are visible. Thus, the entire operation request notification (button image) displayed in the standard size is in an opaque state, and a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size is in a transparent state. It may be.

  A part of the standard size button image may be in a transparent state. The operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be entirely opaque. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be 0% to 100%. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) may be gradually increased as time passes.

Note that only the side surface of the button image may be transparent, and the upper surface of the button image (the portion representing the upper surface (pressed surface) of the chance button 136) may be opaque. Further, only the upper surface of the button image may be transparent, and the side surface of the button image may be opaque.

  In the example shown in FIG. 229 (c), a message “change mode with left / right key” is displayed on the layer before the enlarged button image, overlapping the button image. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the selection buttons 136b and 136c (see FIG. 216 (a)). As described above, the operation request notification may be displayed on a layer in front of the button image.

  FIG. 230 shows a specific example 6 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which the big hit effect is started. On the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “Big hit!” Is displayed. In this example, the jackpot round number is 16R, but it is assumed that the player has not been notified of the jackpot round number at this time.

  In the state shown in FIG. 230 (b) after that, the message “big hit !!!!” is deleted, and the winning symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 230 (c), a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 230 (d) after that, a message “16R jackpot is confirmed when the family crest falls!” Is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 230 (e) thereafter, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Press!”, A button image representing the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation is displayed.

  In this example, since the number of rounds of big hit is 16R, when the chance button 136 is pressed, an animation in which the family crest image moves (falls) from above is displayed as shown in FIG. 230 (f). Thus, the player is notified that the number of rounds per jackpot is 16R. Further, since the family crest image is displayed in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 (message “please remove the ball”), a part of the operation request notification is a family crest image. It becomes difficult to see. That is, the display of the animation in which the family crest image moves from above corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 230 (g) thereafter, the family crest image is erased, and the entire operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 becomes visible.

  FIG. 231 shows a specific example 7 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the effect of selecting the SP reach after the reach development is started. In this state, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is horizontally divided into three. The left split area represents A reach with medium expectation (two stars), the middle split area represents B reach with high expectation (three stars), and the right split area represents the highest expectation (five stars) ) X reach. In the center of the screen, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Determine destination with buttons”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and an operation for pressing the chance button 136 are displayed. And a downward arrow image indicating that is displayed. Further, on the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), the thick frame cursor surrounding any one of the three divided areas starts to move between the three divided areas at high speed. The thick frame cursor stops when the chance button 136 is pressed. Then, the reach effect corresponding to the divided area surrounded by the stopped thick frame cursor is selected. Note that which reach effect is selected, that is, in which divided area the thick frame cursor surrounds may be determined in advance.

  For example, when the B cursor is selected in a state where the thick frame cursor surrounds the central divided region and B reach is selected, the central divided region and the thick frame surrounding it are displayed as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that expands the cursor to the entire screen. Thereby, the player is notified that the B reach has been selected. At this time, since the thick frame cursor crosses the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) displayed on the left side of the screen, the operation request notification becomes difficult to visually recognize. Accordingly, the display of the animation in which the central divided region and the thick frame cursor surrounding it are enlarged over the entire screen corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to see.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the notification control means (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit) that can execute at least the first and second controls. 500), a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, etc.), and a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body) that can at least notify information. 804, a sub-display device, a speaker 120, etc.), wherein the notification control means can execute at least the first control when the first control condition is satisfied. The notification control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second control condition is satisfied, and the first control is provided to the notification means. The operation information includes at least control for performing notification, and the operation information includes at least information for prompting operation of one of the plurality of operation units, and the operation information notification , Second control (for example, control for operating the effect movable body, control for moving the shielding means, control for displaying the effect image on the layer in front of the operation information in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light sources 850 and 852. And the second control condition is a state in which the second control condition is one of the plurality of operation means. It is characterized in that at least one of the operating means is operated.

  According to this configuration, the operation information that prompts the operation of the operation means can be made difficult to recognize, and thus the player's attention may be attracted to the operation information. In addition, since the effects can be diversified, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a determination result is established, whether or not the determination is possible can be performed at least by a determination unit (for example, special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231), special figure 2 related. And a lottery process (step S229). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a symbol variation condition is established, at least a symbol variation stop display is executed to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation. It further has possible symbol display means (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when the control state transition condition is satisfied, the first control state and the second control state (for example, the control state having higher advantage than the first control state) Control state transition means (for example, special figure 1 state update process (step S227), special figure 2 state update process (step S225), etc.) It further has these.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, game control including at least main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc.). And the main control means is capable of executing at least control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub control means is capable of executing at least control relating to presentation based on a control command transmitted from the main control means. It is a characteristic.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the operation information (for example, information for prompting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132) is information acquired by the main control means (for example, lower plate full tank error information, main control unit). Based on information included in a command transmitted from 300 to the first sub-control unit 400). The notification control means may include the main control means and the sub control means.

  In the above embodiment, the notification that suggests the operation of the operating means (for example, the chance button 136) to the player includes an effect of the operating means itself (for example, lighting, blinking, vibration, etc. of the chance button 136). Also good.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, a selection button 136b, 136c);

  Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);

  Display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the first control;

  A determination unit (e.g., main control unit 300, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) capable of performing at least a determination on the validity;

  A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;

Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227)) capable of executing at least a plurality of control state transition controls;
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132),

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a button image representing the chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),

  The display control means can execute at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated during execution of the first display,

The first control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means;
The third display is at least displayable in the first period,

  When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed in front of the second display, so that at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first region”). Is less visible after execution than before execution of the first control,

At least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “second region”) is displayed at a position overlapping the first region,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);

Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control according to a command from the first control means;
With

  The second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means according to the command,

  The second operation means is configured such that, when operated, the game ball is discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) capable of storing the game ball.

  The first display includes at least an image showing an appearance of the first operation means,

The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray,
The third display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

Even if the third display is erased when the first period has elapsed in the state where the second display is being performed during the execution of the third display, the second display Can be displayed continuously,
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display,
The second display can be displayed even during execution of the first display.
It is characterized by that.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first control can be executed even during execution of the second display.
The first control can be executed even when the second display is not being executed.
It is characterized by that.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,

  The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display,

The second control includes at least control for erasing the second display displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by that.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,

  The display control means can execute at least the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,

  The third control includes at least control for displaying the first display on the display means,

  The fourth control includes at least a control for displaying the second display on the display means,

The first display can be displayed at least in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136).
It is characterized by that.
(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period started before the start of the first period.
It is characterized by that.
(8) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display includes at least a display for prompting an operation of the first operation means,

The second display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.
(9) The pachinko machine 100,
The transmittance of the second region is not 100%,
It is characterized by that.
(10) The pachinko machine 100,

When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed on the front surface of the second display, so that the first area after the execution of the first control is not visible. Which is
It is characterized by that.
(11) The pachinko machine 100,

The second control means includes at least the display control means.
(12) The pachinko machine 100,
With multiple control boards,

  At least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the main board 156),

  At least one of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160),

  The first control means includes at least the first control board,

The second control means includes at least the second control board.
It is characterized by that.
(13) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, a selection button 136b, 136c);

  Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);

  Display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the first control;

  A determination unit (e.g., main control unit 300, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) capable of performing at least a determination on the validity;

  A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;

Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227)) capable of executing at least a plurality of control state transition controls;
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132),

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a button image representing the chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, an image of a hero character, an image of an enemy character),

  The display control means can execute at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated during execution of the first display,

The first control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means;
The third display is at least displayable in the first period,

  Before the first control is executed, the fourth display is displayed on the back of the second display,

  When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed in front of the second display, so that at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first region”). Is less visible after execution than before execution of the first control,

At least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “second region”) is displayed at a position overlapping the first region,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);

Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control according to a command from the first control means;
With

  The second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means according to the command,

  The second operation means is configured such that, when operated, the game ball is discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) capable of storing the game ball.

  The first display includes at least an image showing an appearance of the first operation means,

The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray,
The third display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.
(14) The pachinko machine 100,

Even if the third display is erased when the first period has elapsed in the state where the second display is being performed during the execution of the third display, the second display Can be displayed continuously,
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.
(15) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display,
The second display can be displayed even during execution of the first display.
It is characterized by that.
(16) The pachinko machine 100,
The first control can be executed even during execution of the second display.
The first control can be executed even when the second display is not being executed.
It is characterized by that.
(17) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,

  The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display,

The second control includes at least control for erasing the second display displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by that.
(18) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,

  The display control means can execute at least the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,

  The third control includes at least control for displaying the first display on the display means,

  The fourth control includes at least a control for displaying the second display on the display means,

The first display can be displayed at least in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136).
It is characterized by that.
(19) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period started before the start of the first period.
It is characterized by that.
(20) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display includes at least a display for prompting an operation of the first operation means,

The second display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.
(21) The pachinko machine 100,
The transmittance of the second region is not 100%,
It is characterized by that.
(22) The pachinko machine 100,

The second control means includes at least the display control means.
(23) The pachinko machine 100,
With multiple control boards,

  At least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the main board 156),

  At least one of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160),

  The first control means includes at least the first control board,

The second control means includes at least the second control board.
It is characterized by that.
(24) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208)
A game machine equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),

  The display means is capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display area,

  The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display area,

The first display includes at least a notification prompting to discharge the game ball,
The second display is at least different from the first display;

At least a part of the second display area overlaps at least a part of the first display area.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the production can be diversified, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored and the interest of the game can be improved.
(25) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is capable of starting display of at least the second display during display of the first display.
It is characterized by that.
(26) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is capable of starting display of at least the second display during non-display of the first display.
It is characterized by that.
(27) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is capable of at least starting display of the first display during display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.
(28) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means can start displaying at least the first display during non-display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.
(29) The pachinko machine 100,

At least a part of the first display can be displayed at least in a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by that.
(30) The pachinko machine 100,

At least a part of the second display can be displayed at least in at least a part of the first display area.
It is characterized by that.
(31) The pachinko machine 100,

At least a part of the second display is capable of being displayed at least so as to overlap with at least a part of the first display.
It is characterized by that.
(32) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display includes at least a plurality of characters (for example, a message “please remove the ball”),
It is characterized by that.
(33) The pachinko machine 100,

At least some of the plurality of characters can be displayed at least so as to overlap at least part of the second display.
It is characterized by that.
(34) The pachinko machine 100,

At least a part of the second display can be displayed at least so as to overlap at least a part of the plurality of characters.
It is characterized by that.
(35) The pachinko machine 100,

At least some of the plurality of characters have at least different visibility before starting the display of the second display and after starting the display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.
(36) The pachinko machine 100,
A storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store game balls is provided,

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
It is characterized by that.
(37) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.
(38) The pachinko machine 100,

Provided with operation means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) that can be operated at least by the player,
It is characterized by that.
(39) The pachinko machine 100,

Movable means (for example, production movable body 224, production movable body 800, production movable body 802, production movable body 804),
The movable means is at least movable to a first position;
The movable means is at least movable to a second position;
It is characterized by that.
(40) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.
<< Seventh Embodiment >>

  Next, a game machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention is described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 232 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (f) show, in this order, specific effects on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an effect movable body 806. The effect movable body 806 is installed below the effect device 206. The effect movable body 806 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means) can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. . The effect movable body 806 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The effect movable body 806 includes a sub display device 808 (second display means) using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The sub display device 808 is fixed to the effect movable body 806 so that the display area is positioned within the horizontally long rectangular frame 806a of the effect movable body 806. For this reason, the sub display device 808 can move integrally with the effect movable body 806. A frame portion 807 outside the frame 806 a is a frame area of the sub display device 808. The frame portion 807 may be decorated with a resin member, an LED lamp, or the like.

  Here, the positional relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is indicated. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. Further, the side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in the effect device 206. From the rear side to the front side of the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in this order. In other words, the sub display device 808 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 in the effect device 206, in order from the rear side, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 810 described later), an effect movable body 224, a transparent plate (for example, described later). A light guide plate 812) is provided. In addition, the arrangement | sequence order of a decoration part, the production | presentation movable body 224, and a transparent board can be changed arbitrarily. Further, the transparent plate may not be provided.

  In addition, on the front side of the sub display device (production movable body 806) in the production device 206, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 814 described later), a transparent plate, and a front stage 244 are installed in this order from the rear side. The transparent plate is provided to prevent the game ball from entering the rear side of the front stage. Therefore, the transparent plate only needs to prevent the ingress of game balls from the front stage 244, and may be installed only below the rendering device 206 (near the front stage 244). It may be installed so as to cover the entire surface of 206. Further, the arrangement order of the decorative portion and the transparent plate may be the order of the transparent plate and the decorative plate from the rear side to the front side. Note that the transparent plate may be omitted.

  232 to 234, the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means), the effect movable body 806, the sub display device 808 (second display means), the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure. 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 display device 214, and special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black.

  A hold icon display area 710 is provided in the vicinity of the left side slightly from the center of the lower long side (horizontal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area 710, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 710, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons, and the special figure variable game related to each hold with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of each hold icon. It is possible to make a prefetch notice of the determination result. The hold icon display area 710 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 710 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  Two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 each having two small square display areas are provided below the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and the following examples, the square display area of the fourth symbol in the special figure variable game is outlined, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at fixed positions during the execution of the special figure variable game regardless of the game state and the type of effect.

  Also, rectangular reserved number display areas 712a and 712b are provided near the center of the right short side (longitudinal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The number-of-holds display area 712a displays the number of holds shown in FIG. 1, and the number-of-holds display area 712b displays the number of holds shown in FIG.

  FIG. 232 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. In the special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure I (first off symbol) indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure I indicating that the determination result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In addition, the 1st to 4th LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are respectively lit, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four. All the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  Since the special figure variation games of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not executed, both of the two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Further, a hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 710, a hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, a hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and a hold icon a4 is displayed in the fourth area. The display mode of the hold icons a1 to a4 is a white circle. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and since the number of hold in the special figure 2 is zero, the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “0”.

  In addition, the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position (first position). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the initial position, the effect movable body 806 and the decorative symbol display device 208 do not overlap each other when viewed from the player. When the effect movable body 806 is waiting at the initial position, the sub display device 808 displays the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, “CR Yoshimune”).

  FIG. 232 (b) continuing from FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (may be referred to as left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c), the decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation display is executed. In the present embodiment, during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212 is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 2 display device 214 is repeatedly turned on and off. Thereby, the player can confirm that each special figure is variably displayed.

  In addition, since one special figure 1 hold has been consumed and the number of special figure 1 holds has become three, the first to third LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are respectively lit, and the hold icon In the display area 710, the hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area, the hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, the hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and “3” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a. ”Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of suspension in FIG. 1 is three.

  FIG. 232 (c) continuing from FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect (reach effect) of the special figure 1 variable game being executed is started. In this example, a character string “Let's support Yoshimune with repeated button strokes!” And a villager c5 who supports Yoshimune are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the sub display device 808, an image imitating the chance button 136 and Tonosama (Yoshimune) c1 are displayed. In addition, the sub display device 808 displays a character string “good” above the image imitating the chance button 136 to notify that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started. In addition, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, which are located at substantially the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, are reduced and moved to the upper right of the display area, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. .

  FIG. 232 (d) continuing from FIG. 232 (c) shows a state in which the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation reception period is started, a character string “continuous hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 808 is white indicating an image imitating the chance button 136. A pull-out arrow is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is executed. The sub display device 808 displays a horizontally long bar-shaped meter image below the image imitating the chance button 136. The meter image includes a rectangular frame image, and indicates the operation reception period of the chance button 136 by the length of the colored portion in the frame image. In addition, the sub-display device 808 displays a character string “support”, and an effect of supporting the grandfather c1 is executed.

  FIG. 232 (e) continuing from FIG. 232 (d) shows a state where the player hits the chance button 136 a plurality of times. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of character strings “do your best!” Corresponding to the number of times the chance button 136 has been pressed (the number of times the chance button sensor 426 has detected the chance button 136 has been detected) is displayed.

  In addition, after the operation reception period starts, the effect movable body 806 starts moving upward in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pachinko machine 100 may start moving the effect movable body 224 according to the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136, or start moving when other conditions are satisfied (for example, the start of the operation reception period, the elapse of a predetermined time). May be. While the effect movable body 806 is moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, all or part of the images and symbols displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlapping the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Becomes invisible. In the state shown in FIG. 232 (e), the entire hold icon a3 is invisible.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 232 (e), the lower plate full tank error is detected based on the fact that the lower plate full sensor detects that the game balls (prize balls) stored in the lower plate 128 are full. Occurs. For example, a prize ball that has not been paid out for any reason during the previous jackpot game is paid out at this time, or a prize ball is paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the general winning slot 226, and is not in a jackpot game. May also cause a bottom full tank error. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 (first display) is displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 703 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (e), the lower plate full tank error display 703 has a band-shaped band image and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed at the approximate center of the band image. At the start of displaying the lower pan full tank error display, the belt-like image is displayed in black and opaque. The character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed in white letters. In addition, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed in a layer before the villager c5 and the character string “do your best!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d. For this reason, a part of the character string of villager c5 and “Do your best!” Is invisible. Further, the display of “0” in the number-of-holds display area 712 b indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 is displayed in front of the lower pan full tank error display 703. Thereby, even when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the player may be able to accurately recognize the number of reserved special figures. Further, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed without overlapping the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2. For this reason, the visibility of the fourth symbol does not deteriorate even when the lower pan full tank error occurs.

  FIG. 232 (f) continuing from FIG. 232 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving upward in the front plane of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the villager c5, and a part of “Do your best!” Are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and are difficult to see (one Part is invisible). Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 changes from the non-transmissive state to the transmissive state. Therefore, the character string “Do your best!” Displayed overlapping the lower plate full tank error display 703 becomes visible. As described above, the belt image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed by alternately changing between the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) and the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The opacity and transmission of the band image may change gradually and continuously or may change stepwise.

  Further, the villager c5 and the character string “Do your best!” Are hidden from the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, and then deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The villager c5 and “Do your best!” May be deleted together with the display of “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 233 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 233 (a) to (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 232 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 has moved in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and stopped almost at the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the chance button 136 is operated a specified number of times within the operation reception period, the effect movable body 806 moves to approximately the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is the movement completion position. Yes. As a result, a part of the belt image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire character string “please remove the ball” are displayed on the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Hidden and invisible. Further, the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed by changing from the transparent state to the black non-transparent state. In addition to the lower plate full tank error display 703, the effect movable body 806 and the sub-display device 808 are used to display decoration symbols, hold icons, effects display (for example, villager c5, notice notice of change, pre-read notice notice), etc. At least a part of the display may be hidden. In addition, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 allow the decoration symbol, the hold icon, and the effect display (for example, Other indications such as villager c5, notice notice of the change, prefetch notice notice) may not be hidden. Further, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, it may be displayed on the sub display device 808 that the lower pan full tank error has occurred. In this case, the lower plate full tank error display 703 may be continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display state of the lower plate full tank error on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 overlaps. A state in which only the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808 displays the lower pan full error display may be included. In addition, when the lower pan full tank error display is displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808, the lower pan full tank error display may not be displayed on the other display device. .

  Further, since the operation acceptance period has ended, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is gradually erased, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 808 is simulated. The displayed image and the meter image indicating the operation reception period are deleted.

  In addition, after the villager c5 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 808 starts to display the shrine c1 who has made a guts pose and the villager c5. The display start timings of the clan c1 and the villager c5 who made a guts pose in the sub display device 808 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  FIG. 233 (b) continuing from FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the clan c 1 and the villager c 5 that have made a guts pose are displayed on the sub display device 808. Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 gradually changes from the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%).

  FIG. 233 (c) continuing from FIG. 233 (b) shows a state in which the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). In addition, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted.

  FIG. 233 (d) continuing from FIG. 233 (c) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of “decoration 7” is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. At the start of the shaking fluctuation display, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to approximately the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is started. Thus, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Since the effect movable body 806 remains stopped at the approximate center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the left and right decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c In addition, all of the central decorative symbols that are swayed and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. As a result, a part of the left and right decorative symbols that are displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are hidden by the lower pan full error display 703 in addition to the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Therefore, the expectation that a special jackpot may be won in the special figure 1 variable game being executed without allowing the player to recognize which decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuation manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. May be available to the player.

  FIG. 233 (e) continuing from FIG. 233 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thereby, compared with the state shown in FIG. 233 (d), the visibility of the decorative symbols that are swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is improved. Further, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 displayed on the sub display device 808 are gradually deleted.

  FIG. 233 (f) continuing from FIG. 233 (e) shows a state after the effect movable body 806 starts moving toward the initial position. Due to the movement of the production movable body 806, the character string “please remove the ball” in the lower plate full tank error display 703 is visible. However, the lower tray full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the player may not be able to recognize the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Moreover, the movement start timing of the production movable body 806 may be after the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start erasure, before the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start to erase, It may be simultaneously with the start of erasure of the villager c5.

  FIG. 234 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 234 (a) to (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 233 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 234 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving toward the initial position. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thus, the player can recognize that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the sub display device 808, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 are deleted, and the display of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed so that the display color gradually becomes darker.

  FIG. 234 (b) shows a state where the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the lower tray full tank error display 703 changes to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). As a result, a part of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is hidden. The sub display device 808 displays “CR Yoshimune”.

  FIG. 234 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative design display apparatus 208. , It is informed that the big hit (15R special big hit) of “Special Figure A” has been won. In addition, the fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in a predetermined color to notify that the special figure 1 variable game has ended. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The lower plate full tank error display 703 continues to be displayed until the lower plate full tank error is canceled (until the lower plate full tank sensor stops detecting the game ball).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a sub display device 808 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 as a first display.

  The sub display device 808 can display at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 has at least low visibility when the sub display device 808 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state where at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 are displayed by the sub display device 808.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be low, and thus the decorative symbol display that is difficult to see is displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, since the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight is easier to see than the lower plate full tank error display 703, and the villager c5. May be able to point to.

  The ball removal notification may be an error display for notifying that the storage tray (for example, the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128) is full.

  The ball removal notification may be hidden when the special figure variable game is finished. In this case, when the next special figure variable game is started, a display for informing the lower pan full tank error may be displayed again.

  The ball removal notification may be hidden when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device. In this case, the display for informing the lower plate full tank error may be displayed again at the start of the big hit game, may not be displayed at the start of the big hit game, and may be displayed again during the round of the big hit game.

  When displaying the ball removal notification once again after being hidden, the mode before being hidden and the mode when it is displayed again may be the same or different.

  Even if the display of the ball removal notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, other display means (for example, an LED lamp, a sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, a speaker) 120), it may be notified that a lower pan full error has occurred.

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the seventh embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 238. FIG. 235 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment 2-2. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a surface closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front surface”, and a surface farther from the player than the “front surface” is referred to as “rear surface”. Is written.

  As shown in FIG. 235, a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decorative portion 814 is disposed on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 235, the decorative portions 810 and 814 are illustrated as a horizontally long flat plate shape. On the front surfaces of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, decorative members, lamps, and the like molded in a predetermined shape with a resin or the like are installed. Further, the decorative portion 810 has an opening 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decoration unit 810 is arranged so that the opening 810 a overlaps the screen of the decoration symbol display device 208. The area of the opening 810a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decoration unit 810. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part that is visually recognized through the opening 810a (a part surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is an area that is visible to the player. Further, the frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. A lens cut having a predetermined pattern is formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812. As a result, the light beam incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp is reflected to the player side by the lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812 and is emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted from the light guide plate 812 in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, blue) to a predetermined pattern (for example, a pattern 705 on the face of the Tono-sama (hereinafter referred to as Tono-sama face 705 as shown in FIG. 235)). As seen by the player. As a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In this example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of Tonosama's face 705, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the pattern of the LED lamp to be lit. Further, the pattern (light emission pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamp is not lit, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the light guide plate 812 such as the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible to the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, may be easily visible, or may be difficult to visually recognize. , It may be invisible.

  A decorative portion 814 is disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 812. The decorative portion 814 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 814a. The decorative portion 814 is disposed so that the opening 814a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. For this reason, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decorative portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is a display region that is visible to the player. For this reason, the outer peripheral part 812a (outside the dotted line in the figure) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is not visible to the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a is not limited to light when the LED lamp emits light. Those arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 812, such as 208, are visible or easily visible to the player.

  The decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. A plurality of effect movable bodies such as effect movable bodies 224 and 800 (see FIG. 217) may be arranged between the decoration unit 810 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. One or more effect movable bodies (for example, the effect movable body 806) may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed on the front side of the effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 as viewed from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 236 (a), a ton-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is visually recognized through the opening 814a of the decorative portion 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 236 (b) shows a state where an effect is actually being executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 236 (c) is a diagram obtained by removing the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 from FIG. 236 (b). An area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 236 (c) shows a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be actually visually recognized by the player through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 236 (c), “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208. Further, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, hold number display areas 712a and 712b are respectively provided. In the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing an effect as shown in FIG. 236 (c), if the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player is informed as shown in FIG. 236 (b). Is visible. Since the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the transparent light guide plate 812 with light emission in a predetermined color, it is displayed so that the rear side is transmitted (the rear side is visible). For this reason, in the image or design displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the visibility of the portion that overlaps the lord's face 705 is relatively low, and the visibility of the portion that does not overlap the lord's face 705 is low. It is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1, b2 and the reserved number display area 712a and almost the entire reserved number display area 712b (the part where the reserved number is displayed in numbers). Is displayed so as not to overlap with Tonosama's face 705. For this reason, even when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player can reduce the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a special figure variable game is executed and the number of special figure holds.

  Positions where the whole or part of the hold number display area 712a (displays the hold number of the special figure 1) and the whole or part of the hold number display area 712b (displays the hold number of the special figure 2) do not overlap with the face 705 May be displayed.

  At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712 a and 712 b may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the face 705 of the lord, and the other may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the face 705 of the lord. In addition, both the hold icon and the hold number display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the Tonosama face 705, or may be arranged at a position where both do not overlap.

  Next, specific effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 237 (a) to 237 (g) show the specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in chronological order.

  In FIGS. 237 to 238, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are not shown. In addition, when the LED lamp disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 emits light and the noble face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the noble face 705 is shown on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 237 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 2 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a special jackpot. Since the special figure 2 variable game is finished and the special figure variable games of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. .

  The gaming state at the time shown in FIG. 237 (a) is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (a probability variation state with electric support). For this reason, “probably changing” is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that it is in a special figure high probability state (probability changing state).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays only the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 in the normal figure high probability state (during electric support). For this reason, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (the first hold), the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold, the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold, The hold icon a14 indicates the fourth hold in the hold order. The display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is a white circle. In addition, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four, so the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “4”. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon indicating hold in FIG. 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during power support.

  FIG. 237 (b) continuing from FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which it is notified that the special big hit is won in the special figure 2 variable game ended in FIG. 237 (a). In the special jackpot (the jackpot of the special figure A), the game state shifts to a probable change state (special chart high probability state) after the big jackpot game. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is not stopped. The hold icon display area 710 also disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a special big win winning notification effect is executed by the character string “probability big hit”.

  FIG. 237 (c) continuing from FIG. 237 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 237 (c), the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of the beach is displayed. The upper right of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It is reported that there is. The top left of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 237 (d) continuing from FIG. 237 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). In the round number display area 717, “6R” is displayed to notify that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 237 (e) following FIG. 237 (d) shows a state in which the Tono-like face 705 (second display) not displayed in FIGS. 237 (a) to 237 (d) is displayed on the light guide plate 812. Is shown. By displaying the Tono-sama's face 705 on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, part of the background image, hold icon, round number display, jackpot type display) is reduced. Since the time point shown in FIG. 237 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is determined as a result of the special figure prefetching processing that the prefetching result for the special figure variable game that is currently held has a big hit (so-called Only when it is determined that there is a reserved villa. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. For example, in the special chart prefetching process executed up to the time point shown in FIG. 237 (a), if there is a big hit in the hold, the Tono-sama's face 705 is displayed to indicate that there is a reserved game in the big hit game. To inform. In the present embodiment, the Tono-sama's face 705 is used as a premier effect (effect of confirming a big hit) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In FIG. 237 (f) continuing from FIG. 237 (e), the winning ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game is paid out to the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 becomes full, It shows the state where the bottom pan full tank error has occurred. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 (first display) is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in the frame. The lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. The lower pan full tank error display 704 has a relatively low visibility when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed until the game ball (prize ball) stored in the lower plate 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by operating the ball discharge lever 132 and the lower plate full tank error is canceled. Continue to be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 is changed from white (indicated by hatching rising to the right in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a <b> 13 to notify that the prefetching result related to the special figure 2 variable game with the hold order of 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color has changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (a big hit determination effect) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. Since the time shown in FIG. 237 (f) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 237 (g) following FIG. 237 (f) shows a state in which the display color of the hold icon a13 is further changed from the time shown in FIG. 237 (f) (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). As described above, in the premier effect executed using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is changed as needed. The change in the display color of the hold icon may be, for example, continuously changing from blue to green or red, or may be changed so that the hold icon is lit. There may be. Since the time point shown in FIG. 237 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 238 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the present embodiment. 238 (a) to 238 (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 237 (g), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 238 (a) shows a state where the change in the display color of the hold icon a13 has been completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in the color when the display color change is completed until the corresponding hold is digested and erased. Note that the display mode of the hold icon during a special game (for example, during a big hit game) is different from the display mode of the hold icon during a normal game (for example, during probability change, short time, special figure low-precision normal figure low-probability state, etc.). You may make it let. Since the time point shown in FIG. 237 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 238 (b) following FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 is turned off and the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. Yes. In this example, the Tonosama's face 705 is erased after the change in the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is completed. It should be noted that the erasure timing of Tonosama's face 705 may be earlier than the change completion timing of the hold icon, may be at the same time, or may be later. In addition, since the Tono-sama's face 705 is deleted, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the round number display, and the big hit type display is improved. Note that the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed across a plurality of rounds.

  Further, the character string “please remove the ball” included in the lower tray full tank error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. The sea portion of the background image displayed on the back of the character string is displayed in dark blue, for example. Since the black character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed so as to overlap the dark blue color, it is difficult to see the character string that is a part of the lower pan full error display 704. Thus, depending on the color of the background image, it may be difficult to see part of the lower pan full error display 704.

  FIG. 238 (c) continuing from FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which the sixth round of the jackpot game has been completed and entered the interval between rounds. The interval between rounds means a period from the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in one round to the opening of the variable winning opening 234 in the next round of the round in the big hit game. In the interval between rounds, the round number display area 717 is erased and the round number is not displayed. In addition, the lower pan full tank error display 704 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds. In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be continuously displayed in the interval between rounds, may not be displayed in the interval between rounds, and may be displayed again after moving to the next round. In addition, the round number display (for example, 6R) of the round that ended during the interval between rounds may be continuously displayed. For example, 7R) may be displayed. In addition, a round number display (for example, 7R) to be started next may be displayed at the same time as or after closing the variable prize opening 234 (for example, the closing of the variable prize opening 234 in the sixth round).

  FIG. 238 (d) continuing from FIG. 238 (c) shows a state in which the seventh round of jackpot game is started. Since the interval between rounds is over and the seventh round is started, a round number display area 717 is provided and “7R” is displayed.

  FIG. 238 (e) continuing from FIG. 238 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error is released. For example, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the prize ball (game ball) stored in the lower plate 128 to the dollar box, so that the lower plate full tank error is canceled. As a result, the lower pan full error display 704 is erased.

  FIG. 238 (f) continuing from FIG. 238 (e) shows a state immediately before the 15th round which is the final round of the jackpot game ends. “15R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the 15th round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 238 (g) continuing from FIG. 238 (f) shows a state where the big hit game is finished. As a result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 2 variable game is successful is a special big hit (special figure A big hit), the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability state (probability changing state) after the big hit game is over. Also, the gaming state at the end of the last special figure 2 variable game is also a special figure high probability state. For this reason, the effect display area 208d expanded over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Continue change probability!” To notify that the gaming state shifts to the special figure high probability state. At the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. Note that the hold icon may be continuously displayed even when the big hit game ends.

  It should be noted that the lower plate full tank error display 704 may be hidden during the round interval. In addition, when a lower pan full tank error occurs, an error notification by voice may be performed together with the lower pan full tank error display 704.

  Further, the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed so as to be repeatedly turned on and off (by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surfaces of the light guide plate 812). Also, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed so as to blink (flashing a plurality of LED lamps). In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may continue to be displayed with a predetermined luminance (a plurality of LED lamps continue to be lit with a predetermined luminance).

  In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed so that the color continuously changes over time, or may be displayed in gradation.

Further, when a serious error (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a game shop clerk) occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be deleted.
Even if a serious error occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be continuously displayed.

  When a serious error occurs, the round number display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display.

  Further, when a serious error occurs, all the displays including the round number display may be hidden, and only a display for notifying that a serious error has occurred may be displayed. Further, even when a serious error occurs, the round number display may be continued.

  In addition, if a power interruption / recovery occurs during a game (during a big hit or during a symbol change) (for example, when an electrical system abnormality such as a power supply voltage drop due to a lightning strike occurs, and then the power is restored), the specified timing The effect display may be hidden until the next round starts during the big hit round, and the next fluctuation starts when the symbols are changing, and a power return display such as “power is being restored” may be displayed. In addition, a message such as “Please launch a ball” may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, it may be displayed that an error has occurred. Further, only serious errors may be displayed. In addition, error display is not performed, and another display means (for example, LED lamp, sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, speaker 120) may be notified that an error has occurred. Good.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as a first display.

  The sub display device 808 can display at least the Tonosama face 705 as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state where at least the Tono-like face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 may be lowered, so that the decorative design display in which an invisible error display is made. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, so that the player's line of sight is more easily visible than the lower plate full tank error display 703. There are cases where it can be directed.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as a first display, a later-described alerting notification effect 722, a right-handed notification effect 724, an attention alert notification effect 750, and an attention alert notification effect. 772 and the first display 790 may be displayed. Further, the sub display device 808 displays, as second displays, pre-read notice notification effects 730 and 740 described later, an electric long long opening effect, an electric long long false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, and a second display 792. It may be displayable.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and slot machine shown in FIG. 205) according to the present embodiment has an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 205) and a first display means (for example, shown in FIG. 218). A game table provided with a decorative symbol display device 208) and movable means (for example, the effect movable body 800 shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to (f)). The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a dish full tank error display ( For example, the message “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 218, the movable means is second display means, and the second display means is in a second position (for example, FIG. 218 ( Production movable body 8 shown in e) Display that prompts the second display means to operate in a state where the second display means is located at the second position (FIG. 218 (e)). (The message “chance button pressed” shown in FIG. 5F) may be displayed, and the second display means is in the second position, the first display In the game stand, when the dish full tank error display is displayed on the means, at least a part of the display of the dish full tank error display is overlapped by the second display means.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the dish full error display displayed on the first display unit is overlapped by the second display unit on which the display for prompting the operation is displayed. Since there is a case, a player who is highly motivated to perform an operation by the operation means is displayed on the first display means by the second display means after paying attention to the display by the second display means. By reducing the visibility of the full dish error display, it is possible to turn the player's line of sight toward the full dish error display and to make it easier to notice the full dish error display.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a state where the display for prompting the operation is displayed on the second display means, a certain effect may be performed. The display for prompting the operation may include a display representing the appearance of the operation means. Moreover, the storage tray (for example, lower tray 128) which can store a game ball is provided, and the said tray full tank error display may be a display which encourages discharging | emitting a game ball from the said storage tray. The second display means is means capable of moving from the first position (for example, the stop position of the effect movable body 800 shown in FIG. 218 (d)) to the second position, and the dish full tank error. The display may not be overlapped by the second display means located at the first position. The first position may be a position in front of the first display means. Further, when the second display means is located at the second position, the dish full error display is more visible than when the second display means is located at the first position. It may be low. The second display means may be a means that can move from the second position to the first position. Further, the second display means may be means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is displayed. Further, the second display means may be a means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full error display is not displayed.

  The movable means may be a means capable of moving from the first position to the third position via the second position. Further, the third position is a position in front of the first display means, and at least a part of the dish full tank error display is displayed by the second display means located at the third position. It may be overlapped. Further, the third position is a position in front of the first display means, and the dish full error display is not overlapped by the second display means located at the third position. May be. The second display means may be a means provided so as to be movable in front of the first display means. Further, the dish full tank error display may be a display corresponding to one of a plurality of types of errors. Further, one display among the plurality of types of displays may be an effect display. Further, the effect display may be a display of a hold icon (for example, hold icons a1 to a4 shown in FIG. 232 (a)) or a background display. Further, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 233, one of the plural types of displays is a display of a certain character, and the second display means displays a display related to the display of the certain character. It may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 232 (e) and 233 (f), the certain character (for example, townsman c5) displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means after movement. The dish full error display displayed and displayed on the first display means may be configured not to be displayed on the second display means after movement.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 238 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
First display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Second display means (for example, the sub display device 808 and the light guide plate 812);
A game machine equipped with

  The first display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704, a warning notification effect 722, a right-hand notification notification 724, a warning notification effect 750, a warning notification. Production 772, first display 790) can be displayed at least,

  The second display means is a second display (for example, production display, Tono-sama c1, villager c5, Tono-sama's face 705, pre-reading notice notification effects 730, 740, electric-chu-long opening effect, electric-chu-long opening false effect 760. , The user level notification effect 775, the second display 792) can be displayed at least,

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be low, the player tries to recognize the notification content by the first display. It may be possible to focus on the means and concentrate the player on the game. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the first display.

The second display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the second display.
The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display.

  All or part of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display unit.

  The first state may be a state in which one or a plurality of displays including the second display are displayed by the second display unit.

  At least a part of the first display may have at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  At least a part of the first display may be in a state where visibility is at least low when the second display means is in the first state.

The first state may be a state where at least the second display is displayed by the second display means.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display relating to the game (for example, lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704),

The second display is an effect display (for example, an effect display, Tonosama c1, Villager c5, Tonosama's face 705).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the display related to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see due to the effect display displayed on the second display means, the effect display displayed on the second display means May be noticed by the player.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display is higher in the second state than in the first state, the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be possible to make it easier for the player to guess that the player is present.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state. .

  Part or all of the first display is more visible than the first state when the second display means is in the second state, and more than one or more states different from the first state. Also, the visibility may be low.

  The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first region is provided at least in a position overlapping at least with the second region in the first state,

  The first area is at least a part of the first display means (for example, an area for displaying a game display, an image display area, a frame area 805),

The second area is at least a part of the second display means (for example, a display area for displaying an effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, and an outer peripheral portion 812a).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display unit may be lowered, so that the player can focus on the first display unit and concentrate on the game. There are cases where it is possible. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first area may be only a partial area or the entire area of the first display means.

  The second area may be only a part or all of the second display means.

  The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only with the second region in the first state.

In the first state, the first region may be one that overlaps with one or more regions including the second region.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is an error display (for example, lower pan full error display 703, 704).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, an effort can be made to make the player recognize the error display so that the player can watch the error display carefully. There are cases where it is possible. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being missed due to the error display being displayed.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, so that the player can easily focus the second display on the player. . In the first state, the first display may be displayed on the rear side of the second display so that the player can carefully watch the first display.
The second display means may be provided in front of the first display means.

  The second display means includes one or a plurality of parts including the first display means (for example, display means, rendering means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate It may be provided in front of the member.

The second display means is provided in front of the first display means and is different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, rendering means, movable means, winning a prize) It may be provided behind the means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays different from the first and second displays.

The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display relating to a game),

The second display means is provided with at least a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying an effect display).
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,

The third display area is provided at least in a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at the overlapping position, so that the player can display the first display displayed in the first display area. Can be made to look carefully. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display displayed in the second display area.
The first display means may be provided with only the first display area.

The first display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the first display area.
The second display means may be provided with only the second display area.

  The second display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the second display area.

The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display.
The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.

The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display.
The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display.
The third display area may be a part or all of the first display area.
The fourth display area may be a part or all of the second display area.

A part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with part or all of the fourth display area in the first state.
(8) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is information more important to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting operation of a store clerk or player of a game store (ball removal notification, error notification, chance button press) Request notification etc.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including information having high importance for the player has a lower visibility due to a part of the effect display (second display). In some cases, the player's line of sight can be easily directed to the display means.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).
(9) The pachinko machine 100,

  An operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate and entertain the player on the effect display by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display.
The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate.

  The first display may include only a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.

  The first display may include one or a plurality of notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with production means (for example, production movable body 806). The production means is at least movable (for example, moved, rotated, vibrated). The production means may be one that performs one or more of movement, rotation, and vibration, or may be capable of performing all of movement, rotation, and vibration. Further, the effect means may be provided with second display means (for example, sub display device 808, light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) does not move. The first display means is fixed.

  At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

At least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. For the second display means, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may not be 0%.
The entire second display means may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means may be 100%.

  Note that at least a part of the first display unit may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display unit.

  It should be noted that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.

  Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display means is changed from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) liquid crystal display device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transmissive.

  Note that both the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.

Only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.
The third display unit may be the same as the second display unit.

Note that the third display means may be installed in a rendering means that is movable (movable, rotatable, vibrated).
The third display unit may execute an effect that can be executed by the second display unit.

  The technical matter applied to the second display means can also be applied to the third display means.

  Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with further display means (for example, display means constituted by a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate).

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (the second display may be transmitted).

Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Note that the entire second display may be transparent.
Only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  A part of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  A part of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display has the low transmittance from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  Thereby, the second display can be easily seen, and it may be difficult for the player to miss the second display.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

Note that part or all of the transmittance of the first display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  A part of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display is the first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing from the low state of the first display to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least difficult to see from the player.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least invisible from the player.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first region corresponds to a part of a so-called center accessory.

  The second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second region corresponds to a decorative portion of the sub display device 808 and the like.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of at least reporting an error.

  The error notification means includes a decorative lamp (notification by light emission), a speaker (notification by sound), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (characters and patterns appear by light emission), a liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like.

There is a first error in which an error is displayed on a display means such as a first display means or a second display means.
There is a second error that does not display an error on the display means.
The error display is the first error.

  The first error may be an error that is not easily noticed by the player if no error is displayed (no error notification is given). For example, the first error is a door opening error, a lower pan full error, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for warning the player of fraud. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification to warn the player of fraud when a predetermined sensor detects an external radio wave, magnetism, vibration, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for notifying an amusement shop clerk of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 performs an error notification for notifying the abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a predetermined sensor detects external radio waves, magnetism, vibration, and the like.

  Note that the second error may be an error that is less likely to be resolved immediately. This second error is, for example, a door opening error or a lower pan full error.

  The second error is an error that is easily noticed by a player without displaying an error (for example, a game ball cannot be fired, an image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize ball is not paid out, or an effect movable body 224. Etc.) may be an error).

  Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error related to an abnormality in the number of game balls to be paid out, a lower pan full tank error (ball removal notification) that is notified when the lower pan is full, an open condition for an attacker or electric chew An abnormal winning error that is notified when a winning of a game ball to an attacker or electric chew is detected when is not established. When fraud is detected by a sensor (for example, magnetism or radio wave), a fraud error is reported as a fraudulent act (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), or vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside. Vibration detection error (vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, (A game state may be left on the display means), a gaming machine failure error for notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error relating to an abnormality of the payout means, an error relating to a poor connection of the board, and a production movable body 224 There are errors related to abnormal stop positions.

  Any of the above errors may be the first error. Any of the above errors may be a second error.

  The above error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or left on the display means in any game state. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store at least a game ball.

  When operated, the operation means is capable of discharging at least the game balls stored in the storage tray.

  The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray is hidden by the effect display, thereby reducing the visibility of the notification, thereby concentrating the player on the effect display. You may be able to entertain.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes first operating means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes second operation means (for example, a chance button 136).

The operation means may be at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means.
Note that the operation means may be a chance button.

  Note that the operation means may be a return button (for example, the return operation button 142).

  The operation means may be a lending button (for example, a ball lending operation button 140).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable display devices that are movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and capable of vibrating). For example, a liquid crystal display device is used as the movable display device.

  The visibility of a part of the first display may be lowered when one of the plurality of movable display devices moves.

  When one of the plurality of movable display devices moves, the overall visibility of the first display may be lowered.

  The visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered by moving the plurality of movable display devices.

By moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered.
One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

  At least a part of the display area of the movable display device is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the movable display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

Further, at least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. For the movable display device, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%.
Note that the entire movable display device may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%.

  Note that at least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  Note that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may be changed in a stepwise manner. This stepwise change means that the transmittance is a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance of the movable display device may be changed from a low state to a high state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are respectively displayed, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  The display related to the game includes, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power-on display (power supply display) Or during power recovery).

  An operation means (launch strength changing operation means) capable of changing at least the launch intensity of the game ball during the 134 operation of the ball launch handle by the player may be provided. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed so as to increase only when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed to become stronger based on the operation of the launch intensity changing operation unit once. In this case, when the firing strength changing operation means is further operated once, the launching strength of the game ball may be restored.

  As an example of the first display, a display capable of notifying that the firing intensity changing operation means is operated, a display prompting the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means, and prompting the release of the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, pressing Display that prompts you to release your hand from the launch intensity changing operation means, and a display that reminds you of the operation of the launch intensity changing operation means (for example, an image that reminds you of the launch intensity changing operation means in the roulette effect of the electric tulong opening effect (for example, In the case of playing a big hit game by right-handed, the notice display of the big hit decision of the special figure variable game being executed is stopped).

  The display relating to the firing strength changing operation means may have different display modes according to a plurality of gaming states (for example, during electric support and during non-electric support). In this case, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one gaming state (during electric support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-electrical state) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “supporting” may not be hidden by the second display. Further, for example, at least a part of the display regarding the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during electric support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-display) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “electric support” may be hidden by the second display.

  The display related to the firing intensity changing operation means may be a display mode different from a right-handed notification (for example, a right-handed notification effect 724 described later), may be a display mode included in the right-handed notification, The display mode may be the same as that for the hit notification.

In addition, the display regarding a right-handed alert | report and a firing intensity change operation means may partially overlap the displayed period. For example, the period of notification that “Please return the handle to the left” at the end of the electric support is the period from the end of the electric support to the end of the 4th special figure variation game. For example, the period in which “Please let go” is informed from the end of the electric support to the end of the first special figure variation game.
<< Eighth Embodiment >>

  Next, a game machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 247. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  First, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 239 (a) and FIG. 239 (b) show display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 239 (a), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 239, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is indicated by a downward thick arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol and a special symbol hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 239 (a), a lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed to notify that a lower pan full tank error has occurred. Further, in this example, the game ball in the ball tank 150 is lost or the ball shortage error occurs when the number of game balls in the ball tank 150 becomes less than the predetermined number, together with the lower plate full tank error. This ball shortage error may occur, for example, when a game ball is clogged in an island facility where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Further, the lower plate full tank error can be canceled by the player operating the ball discharge lever 132, but the ball shortage error is an error that can be canceled only by a game store clerk in a game store. For this reason, a ball shortage error display 706 including a character string “Please call a clerk shortage clerk” is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a ball shortage error has occurred. In addition, the player is informed that an operation by the store clerk of the game store is necessary to cancel the ball shortage error.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 239 (a), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached, and an image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow pointing to the image are displayed below the ball shortage error display 706. Including a chance button operation request display 707 prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. Also, below the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a tutorial display 708 including a character image of a girl (princess Chibi) and a speech balloon image of a girl “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed. Has been. In the tutorial display, explanations of effects executed during the game are given. The tutorial display 708 in this example suggests that if a reach is executed among a plurality of reach effects provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example, the reach effect may be developed later. .

  FIG. 239 (b) shows a state after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed once) by the player from the state shown in FIG. 239 (a). Based on the operation of the chance button 136, a tutorial display 709 including a character image of a spear and a speech balloon image of a spear “The appearance of a spear is a chance up” is displayed. This suggests that an effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed in the special figure variation game being executed. Further, the tutorial display 709 is displayed on a layer in front of the lower dish full error display 704. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the lower pan full error display 704. For this reason, at least a part of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is hidden by the tutorial display 709, and the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is lowered. On the other hand, the tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap with the insufficient sphere error display 706. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the sphere shortage error display 706 does not deteriorate. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure hold number display area 208f. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the fourth symbol and the special figure reservation number display does not decrease.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (c) to 239 (e) will be described. FIG. 239 (c) shows a display example on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 239 (c), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, since a lower plate full tank error has occurred, a lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 239 (e), the background displayed in the back layer of the lower pan full tank error display 704 is white. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively high.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 239 (d), during the execution of the special figure variation game, an effect in which Tono-sama and Panda confront each other in space is started. In the effect display area 208d, an image of Tono-sama holding a sword, an image of a panda wearing boxing gloves, and a background image of the universe as a confrontation place are displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed, for example, on a layer in front of the Tono-sama image. Also, the lower space full error display 704 and the outer space portion of the background image displayed on the back layer of the Tono-sama image are displayed in gray close to black. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively lowered. In addition, the visibility of the decorative symbol and the special figure reservation number display is similarly lowered. On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 239 (d) is started, the outline portion of the fourth symbol displayed in black circles in FIG. 239 (c) is displayed in white. For this reason, even if the effect shown in FIG. 239 (d) is started, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the fourth symbol and to understand that the special figure variable game is being executed. Note that the outline of the fourth symbol may always be displayed in white. That is, the fourth symbol may be easily visible in any state.

  In addition, FIG. 239 (e) shows that after the player notices the lower plate full tank error display 704 shown in FIG. 239 (c) and operates the ball discharge lever to release the lower plate full tank error, This shows a state in which an effect of confronting is started. Since the lower plate full tank error is cancelled, the lower plate full tank error display 704 is erased. Further, when FIG. 239 (d) is compared with FIG. 239 (e), the visibility of the lord-like image is higher in FIG. 239 (e). Thus, the visibility of the effect display (for example, a character image of Tono-sama, etc.) can be made higher when an error (for example, lower pan full error) has not occurred than when the error has occurred.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (f) and 239 (g) will be described. As shown in FIG. 239 (f), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  Further, a tutorial display 708 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The tutorial display 708 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative design. For this reason, at least a part of the decorative design is hidden in the tutorial display 708 and the visibility is lowered.

  FIG. 239 (g) shows a state in which the shielding means 816 is moving upward in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure variable game. . In the drawing, an upward arrow shown at the lower left of the shielding unit 816 indicates the moving direction of the shielding unit 816. The shielding unit 816 can shield the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by moving to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the shielding unit 816, for example, the above-described effect movable bodies 800, 802, 804, 806, and the like can be given.

  In this example, when the shielding means 816 and the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, the variable icon display area 700, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 disappear. , All pending icons are erased. The tutorial display 708 is also deleted. In addition, when the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be deleted. In addition, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 move, for example, to the upper left of the screen. Thereby, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c do not overlap with the shielding means 816 and are not shielded. In this way, the decorative design is not hidden during the performance with the movement of the shielding means 816.

  It should be noted that a hold icon or a variation icon may be displayed at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816. Further, during the movement of the shielding means 816, an effect image or the like may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, at least a part of the effect image may be hidden by the shielding unit 816. Further, at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816, the special figure holding number display area 208f may disappear and the special figure holding number may be deleted, or the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only the fourth symbol. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can at least display, for example, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as the first display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a tutorial display 709 as a second display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a sphere shortage error display 706 as a third display.

  At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state in which at least the tutorial display 709 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

The ball shortage error display 706 is displayed at least at a position where visibility is at least higher than the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state. ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 may be lowered, the decorative symbol display device tries to recognize the notification content of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704. In some cases, the player can be focused on 208 so that the player can concentrate on the game. In addition, since the visibility of the lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be directed to the tutorial display 709. is there. In addition, since the ball shortage error display 706 is easy to check even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to check the ball shortage error display 706 while viewing the tutorial display 709.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 240 to 245. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 capable of executing a plurality of notification effects such as an alerting notification effect, an electric-chu long opening effect (details will be described later), or a prefetch notification effect. . FIG. 240 is a table for explaining an alert notification (first display) that can be displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The alerting notice is a notice that alerts the player about matters that are not directly related to the profit of the game. The game profit includes a prize ball awarded as a profit to the player and information related thereto. Since the contents of the alert notification do not directly affect the profit of the game, there is no effect on the profit of the game even if the player ignores the alert alert or does not follow the alert alert. However, the alert notification includes, for example, physical, mental, or monetary matters that may affect the player's profit other than the game profit.

  Note that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be a medal, for example. Also, it is not always necessary to give a player a real ball, medal, etc., for example, first, a profit is electronically given to the player, and the player uses the electronic profit for a game, It may be converted into a prize ball. Of course, the player may not be provided with the real thing, and the player may be able to exchange electronic profits for prizes.

  Further, the profit related to the game may be defined as that the profit can be used to play the game again on the game machine. In other words, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the profit cannot be used again on the game stand using the profit.

  The table shown in FIG. 240 illustrates nine alerting notifications (notifications that are not at least related to the profit of the game). In FIG. 240, the content of notification and the notification timing are shown together with the name of each alerting notification.

  The alert notification with the name “age restriction” has the notification content “games under 18 years of age and admission to the playground are regulated by law”, and the notification timing is “during demonstration”. . That is, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variable game is inactive and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the "age restriction" alert notification is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that even if the game profit is obtained, the exchange to the prize is not permitted.

  The alert notification with the name “Capture Method” has the notification content “Beware of Vicious Strategy Sales” and the notification timing is “Demo”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alerting notification of the “strategy method” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that may pay money for useless information.

  The alert notification with the name “game time” is the notification content “If you play for a long time, please put a break moderately.”, The notification timing is “During Demonstration / 2 hours after game start Is. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “game time” is not followed, there are physical disadvantages such as a decrease in the player's physical function and fatigue due to a long game.

  The alert notification with the name “Direction” is the notification content “Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Be careful not to pinch your fingers etc. in the stage device. Please enjoy the game with appropriate volume and light intensity. The notification timing is “during demo / volume and light amount adjustment”. Disadvantages for players who fail to follow the cautionary alerts for `` directing '' include physical disadvantages such as decreased hearing due to high volume games and light-sensitive seizures caused by lighting or blinking of high-intensity lamps. is there.

  The alert notification with the name “Secondary use restriction” is the notification content is “Prohibit uploading of photos, videos, etc. to the Internet on this game machine”, and the notification timing is “During Demonstration / During Production Is. Disadvantages of players who fail to comply with the “secondary use restriction” alerts include monetary and social status disadvantages such as fines and imprisonment for violation of laws and regulations.

  The alert notification with the name “investment deterrence” is “Notice of excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a fun game to enjoy moderately”. The predetermined rotation speed has elapsed. A player's disadvantage caused by not following the “investment deterrence” alert notification is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

  The alert notification with the name “prevention of forgetting to pick up” is the notification content “Please be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft.”, And the notification timing is “at the end of jackpot / at the end of power support state”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “prevention of forgetting” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the balance in the prepaid card that has been forgotten.

  In addition, you may perform the alerting alerting | reporting of the said "forgetting prevention" at timings other than the above-mentioned timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurred in the normal gaming state, a “not forgetting” warning alert is notified, and at the end of the big hit in the villa that occurred with the big hit, It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, if the jackpot is less profitable than other jackpots, or if the jackpot is not profitable, a “forget-to-forget” warning alert is reported. It does not have to be done. In the first place, if a player forgets to take a prepaid card, there is a prepaid card in which the player's consciousness is added to the profit when the profit is given with the remaining balance on the prepaid card. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” warning is issued immediately after the player has been given a profit, and the player forgets the presence of the prepaid card. It is desirable to be notified after the benefits are granted. Furthermore, the trigger for the “forget-to-forget” warning alert is most effective when the player quits the game. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” attention alert notification is notified at a timing when a state advantageous to the player ends such as at the end of ST in FIG.

  In addition, a warning notification of “forgetting to miss” may be notified at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change). In addition, "prevent forgetting" at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state in the special figure high probability state (probability change) You may alert | report alerting alerting | reporting. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert.

  The alert alert with the name “Prevention of damage” is the notification content “Don't operate the operation means with a strong force because there is a risk of damage.” The notification timing is “During demonstration / during performance” is there. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the warning notification of “breakage prevention” is not followed, there is a physical disadvantage of being injured due to damage to the operation means.

  The alert notification whose name is “Prevent forgetting to take” is “The user mode is being set. Be careful not to forget to take a 2D barcode at the end of the game.” “User mode is being set (always)”. There is a gaming disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are lost as a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “Preventing forgetting to take” is not followed. However, it is not a game penalty related to money.

  Note that the notification timing of the above alerting notification does not necessarily have to be executed at the above timing. Moreover, it may be performed at timings other than the notification timing described above. In addition, the above alerting notification is merely an example, and other alerting notifications other than those described above may be executed.

  Further, the alerting notification (notification that is not at least related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the illustrated example, and if the player does not follow the notified contents, the player may have a disadvantage different from the game profit. It only has to be generated.

  FIG. 241 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. A display example of a notification effect is shown. Each of FIGS. 241 (a) to (l) and FIGS. 242 to 245 are illustrated from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 207, the decorative symbol display device 208, the universal diagram display device 210, and the special diagram 1 A display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, an ordinary figure hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a variable winning opening 234 (hereinafter referred to as "large board behavior attacker 234") Are extracted). For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to.

  The normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, the ease of entering the normal symbol start port 228, special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232 (open state), variable winning port 234 (open state), etc., falls down the right path. The game ball that is to be played differs from the game ball that is to be dropped on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arrange | positioned on the right path | route. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, the special FIG. 1 starting port 230 is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling down the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. Moreover, you may further provide a usual figure start port in the left side path | route. In addition, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is arranged at the lower center of the game board, and it is easy to enter the special figure 2 starting port 230 with a game ball falling on the right path and a game ball falling on the left path. May be the same.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (a), all the common figure hold lamps 216 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no usual figure hold. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, one LED on the left side is lit and the other three are turned off, and it is informed that there is one holding in the special figure 2. Further, special figure A is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit.

  In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. A change icon display area 711 is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern is displayed. Has been. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711, a special figure holding display area 713 for displaying the holding of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is arranged, and “8”, “dai”, “general”, “military” are displayed in a circular pattern. One hold icon 713a having the same pattern as the variation icon, in which characters are evenly arranged, is displayed, and it is notified that there is one hold in FIG. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (b) following FIG. 241 (a), the big hit game start effect is executed. In the big hit game start effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbols are not stopped, and the variable icon display area 711 and the special figure hold display area 713 are also displayed. It disappears and no change icon or hold icon is displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a jackpot game start effect 715 is displayed with a character string of “big board big hit”. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (c) following FIG. 241 (b), the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. The upper left of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the big hit game in the first round is being executed. Is informed. The top right of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds).

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (d) following FIG. 241 (c), the 15th round of 15R big hit game (15R) is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. In the round number display area 717, “15R” is displayed to notify that the big hit game of the 15th round is being executed. In the jackpot type display area 718, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the jackpot is a 15R special jackpot. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). In addition, two usual figure hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that two usual figure holds are increased during the big hit game. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (e) following FIG. 241 (d), the big hit game end effect is executed. In the big hit game end effect, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the probability change notification effect 720 by the character image including the character string of “probability change entry!” Is displayed. The probability change notification effect 720 notifies that the game state after the big hit game is in a probability change state. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (f) following FIG. 241 (e), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 is ended, and the attention alert notification effect 722 for performing the alert notification of “preventing forgetting to take” is started. In the alert notification effect 722, an animation in which the IC card emerges along the arrow from the IC card insertion slot is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. From the upper right end of the effect display area 208d, “Forget IC card” is displayed. An animation in which the character string “N” appears in sequence toward the left is displayed, and an animation in which the character string “Please note” appears in reverse order from the lower left end of the effect display area 208d is displayed. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (g) following FIG. 241 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 for alerting “forgetting prevention” is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Moreover, the general map display device 210 has started a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (h) following FIG. 241 (g), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (i) following FIG. 241 (h), the “notice to forget” alerting notification effect 722 has ended, and the special figure 2 variable game in FIG. 241 (a) has ended. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed again, and the state immediately before the start of the next special figure 2 variable game is displayed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  A state shown in FIG. 241 (j) following FIG. 241 (i) shows a state immediately after the special figure 2 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 241 (j), the leftmost LED lamp of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is extinguished, and the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the fluctuation display of special figure 2. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the special figure hold display area 713, display of a hold reduction animation for reducing the number of hold icons 713a by 1 is started. In this example, the hold decrease animation moves the hold icon 713a in the special figure hold display area 713 to the left as a whole and moves it to the variable icon display area 711. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that the hold in the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED lamp.

  In addition, since the most recent big hit was a special figure A big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to the electric support state (ordinary high probability state). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the general-purpose starting port 228 and the special-purpose starting port 232 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, when the gaming state is the electric support state, the player hits the game ball with a right hand and plays a game. For this reason, a right-handed notification effect 724 is started at the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d in order to notify the player that the player should make a right-hand shot. In the right-handed notification effect 724, an animation is displayed in which a white character string “⇒Right-handed⇒⇒” moves in the reverse order toward the right from the upper left end of the effect display area 208d to a black belt-like telop. From the lower right end of the area 208d, an animation is displayed in which a black character string “⇒Right type⇒⇒” sequentially moves toward the left on a black belt-like telop. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (k) following FIG. 241 (j), the start state of the special figure 2 variable game is continuously shown, and the hold reduction animation is being executed. The hold icon 713a shows a state where the hold icon 713a has moved further in the direction of the variable icon display area 711 than the state shown in FIG. 241 (j). The right-handed notification effect 724 is continuously executed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (l) following FIG. 241 (k), the state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being continued is shown. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display region 711 on the lower left side in the effect display region 208d to notify that the special figure variation game is currently being executed. It is informed that there is no hold icon in the special figure hold display area 713 on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711 and there is no hold in the special figure 2. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 executes the variable game of the special figure 2. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game. In addition, in the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d, in order to inform the player that a right stroke should be made, a black belt-like telop is displayed in white letters from the left end to the right end as “right”, “hit”, “ The right-handed notification effect 724 is executed with an animation in which the character strings of “C”, “⇒”, or “⇒⇒” are sequentially moved.

  The states shown in FIGS. 241 (e) to 241 (h) are jackpot end intervals that are periods in which the special figure variable game is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is not operated. During the jackpot ending interval, the special figure variable game and the variable prize opening 234 are in the game because the normal figure variable game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the player has passed the normal figure start port 228 can be operated. Since the opening / closing operation is inactive, it can be said that it is a period in which the significance of launching a game ball is less than in other periods.

  FIG. 242 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-2 of the notification effect is shown. Since the states shown in FIGS. 242 (a) to (e) are the same as those in FIGS. 242 (a) to (e), description thereof is omitted.

  Further, the period of FIGS. 242 (f) to 242 (i) is the same as that of FIGS. 241 (f) to (h). In the state shown in FIG. 242 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 similar to that in FIG. 241 (e) ends, and the alert notification for alerting “forgetting prevention” similar to FIG. 241 (f). Production 722 has started. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  FIG. 242 (f) further shows a state in which the effect of the pre-reading notice is started based on the result of pre-determining the stop symbol by pre-reading the hold of special figure 2 in the special figure pre-reading process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is not operating and when the large board behavior attacker 234 is not operating ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the prefetch notice notification effect 730 shown in FIG. 242 (f), an image representing a family crest is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d so as to hide the alert notification effect 722. However, in FIG. 242 (f), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is set to be relatively high, and the player can visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 242 (g), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 gradually decreases, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. Become. By doing so, the player pays attention to the alerting notice effect 722 at first, but gradually pays attention to the prefetch notice notice effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 242 (h), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 becomes 0%, and the player cannot visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. . In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 242, the alert notification for preventing forgetting to remove the IC card is hidden by the prefetch notice notice executed based on the pending prefetch result in FIG. Note that the pre-reading notice notification need not be a big hit confirmation, and visual recognition of the alerting notice may be hindered by executing a false prefetching notice notice.

  In FIG. 242 (i) following FIG. 242 (h), the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is finished, and the “not forgetting prevention” alert notification effect 722 hidden in the prefetch notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. Shows the state. FIG. 242 (j) following FIG. 242 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 242 (k), special figure A is stopped on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game of this time was a 15R special big hit. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. Moreover, all the LEDs of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lit, and it is notified that there are four special figure 2 holds. Also, in the special figure hold display area 713, hold icons 713b, 713c, 713d, and 713e of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern are displayed, respectively. Has been. When the special figure variable game is ended and a big hit is made, the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden. Further, only one of the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden when the big hit.

  In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications. Further, since the alerting notification is not related to the profit of the game (the number of game balls), even if it is hidden by another notification, it does not affect the profit of the game in which the player is most interested in the game.

  FIG. 243 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where neither the special figure variable game nor the big hit game is executed. Example 3-3 of the notification effect is shown. Since FIGS. 243 (a) to (k) are the same as FIGS. 242 (a) to (k) except that the effect of the pre-reading notice is different, description of the same parts is omitted.

  In FIGS. 243 (f) to (h), the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and instead of the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 shown in FIGS. A state is shown in which a prefetch notice notification effect 740 is displayed in which the entire 208d is displayed in black and a white character string is displayed to notify the prefetch notice. The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is inactive and the large board behavior attacker 234 is inactive ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the pre-read notice notification effect 730, the effect display area 208d is painted black, so that even if the alert notification effect 722 is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the alert image. It can be said that the pre-reading notice notification effect 740 is performed instead of the alerting notification effect 722. It should be noted that the effect execution times of the alerting notification effect 722 and the prefetch notice notification effect 740 may be the same or different.

  Thus, the other alerting effects (for example, the prefetch notification effect) may be executed, so that the alerting alert effect need not be executed at all. Moreover, you may switch an alerting alerting | reporting effect to another alerting | reporting aspect by performing another effect. For example, the notification mode of the alerting notification that has been performed by the image display and the voice notification may be switched to only the voice notification, or may be changed to a notification mode that is completely different from the notification mode that should have been originally performed. .

  In FIG. 243 (i) following FIG. 243 (h), the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 ends, and the “forgetting prevention” alerting notification effect 722 hidden in the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. Shows the state. In this way, it may be configured such that a part of the execution period of the alerting notification effect 722 is hidden by the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 and the alerting notification effect 722 can be confirmed during the remaining period.

  FIG. 244 shows various states in which the special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big hit game is executed, or the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-4 of the notification effect is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 244 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use holds. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special game 1 is executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, a variation display of a decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing) in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially moves from top to bottom is executed. . A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 711 to notify that the special figure 1 variation game is currently being executed. In the special figure hold display area 713, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the state shown in FIG. 244 (b) following FIG. 244 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general figure hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two hold of the normal figure. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the result of the variable game of the special figure 1 is out of date. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 6—decoration 1—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of this special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Has been. In the variation icon display area 711, no variation icon is displayed, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is inactive. In the special figure hold display area 7, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figure 2.

  FIG. 244 (c) shows a state during a demonstration performance period in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 244 (b). The demonstration effect including the alerting notice is executed based on the passage of a predetermined time from the stoppage of the special figure. Further, the demonstration effect including the alerting notification is executed even while the usual figure is changing. During the demonstration effect period, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed, and neither the variable icon display area 711 nor the special figure hold display area 713 is displayed. During the demonstration production period, the character string “menu call by chance button” is displayed together with the image of the chance button 136 in the lower stage of the production display area 208d, and it is notified that various menus can be called by the player pressing the chance button 136. Has been. In FIG. 244 (c), an alerting notification effect 750 for alerting the “age restriction” shown in FIG. 240 is executed. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  FIG. 244 (d) subsequent to FIG. 244 (c) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “age restriction” to “strategy” shown in FIG. 240 during the demonstration effect period. ing. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In addition, an electric-chu-long opening effect area is arranged on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. In this example, it is assumed that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful is that the stop symbol is a normal figure B (out of line). During the demonstration period, the execution of the electric Chu long opening effect is not regulated. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a general-purpose variable game during non-temporary time (during non-electric support). It is an effect that tells whether or not to open for a long time (for example, about 5 seconds) and / or open several times (hereinafter sometimes referred to as long opening). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  In this example, there is a deviation in the hit determination of the common figure variable game, but in the lottery process executed by the first sub-control unit 400, the special figure 2 starting port (electric Chu) 232 may be opened long. The electric-chu-long opening false effect 760 is executed in the electric-chu-long opening false effect area. As an electric Chu-long opening false effect 760, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance lottery in progress”. A roaring effect that causes the player to expect that 232 may be released for a long time is being executed.

  The notice condition of the notice change notification (second display) of the result of the ordinary figure floating game by the electric-chu-long opening effect is that the alerting notice effect 750 (first display) is being executed and the special figure change game is not displayed. In addition to being in operation and being not in operation (maintaining the closed state) of the attacker 234, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the stop pattern of the usual figure variable game is shown in FIG. In the case of (missing), it is to win the execution of the electric tulong opening false effect.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (d), a part of the alert notification effect 750 is hidden by the electric tulong opening false effect 760, making it difficult for the player to confirm the part. The alerting notification effect 750 includes a portion that overlaps the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the first display portion and a portion that does not overlap the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the second display portion. For this reason, even if the alerting notification effect 750 and the electric long open false effect 760 are simultaneously executed, at least a part of the alerting notification effect 750 can be recognized by the player. By causing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the alerting notification, the electric tulong opening false effect 760 can attract more attention of the player. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.

  FIG. 244 (e) following FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “strategy” shown in FIG. 240 to “effect” during the demonstration effect period. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 stops the general map B and notifies that the general map variable game is out of play. In addition, in the electric Chulong opening false effect 760, the word “unfortunate” is displayed along with the indication of “help chance drawing” and samurai. Notify

  FIG. 244 (f) following FIG. 244 (e) shows a state in which the contents of the alerting notification effect 750 are changed from “effect” shown in FIG. 240 to “inhibition of investment” during the demonstration effect period. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 244 (f), one of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 is lit on the left side to notify that there is one general-purpose hold. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210.

  FIG. 244 (g) following FIG. 244 (f) executes a user menu effect 770 in which the player presses the chance button 136 to display a menu image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. Note that the general map display device 210 is executing a general map variable game. When the user menu effect 770 is started, the demonstration effect is stopped and the alerting notification effect 750 is also ended. By doing so, it is possible to hide the alert notification made during the demonstration production by an operation by the player. When the display of the user menu is started based on the fact that the player has operated the chance button 136, the demonstration effect that has been executed is canceled, so that the player who thinks that the alerting notification is unnecessary is required to perform the demonstration effect. Can be canceled arbitrarily.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a setting operation unit that can be operated by the player. For example, the setting operation unit is disposed in the vicinity of the chance button 136 of the door 108 with a ball storage tray. The setting operation unit is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button positioned to the right of the confirm button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. . In addition, the setting operation unit includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 207) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  In FIG. 244 (h) following FIG. 244 (g), the player operates the button of the setting operation unit to move the pointer to the “END” icon displayed in the menu image, and the user menu effect 770 is ended. The state which is going to be shown.

  FIG. 244 (i) following FIG. 244 (h) shows a state after the end of the user menu effect 770. The left two of the four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two pending figures. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the display similar to the state shown in FIG. When a predetermined time elapses from the display of the state shown in FIG. 244 (i), the demonstration effect is executed again. The contents of the demonstration effect at this time may be started from the beginning or may be continuously executed from the interrupted position.

  FIG. 245 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-5 of the notification effect is shown.

  FIG. 245 (a) shows a state in which the user menu effect 770 is being executed. In the upper stage of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which the character string “menu” is arranged in the center is displayed. On the left side of the screen, from top to bottom, there are six icons with “member registration”, “password input”, “bar code issuance”, “data clear”, “volume / light quantity adjustment”, and “end”. Are lined up. Of the six icons, “bar code issuance” and “data clear” can be selected after the password is input, and are displayed at low brightness indicating that selection is not possible at this time. On the right side of the six icons, a hand-shaped pointer indicating a selectable icon is arranged. In FIG. 245 (a), the pointer is located on the right side of the “password input” icon. A character image of “画面” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon, and an alert notification effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is given to the player. It is running.

  In FIG. 245 (b) following FIG. 245 (a), the player operates the button on the setting operation unit to position the pointer on the “password input” icon displayed on the menu image and confirm the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing the button, the password input screen is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which a character string “password input” is arranged in the center is displayed. An input area for inputting a 4-digit number is displayed on the left side of the screen. In the input area, “15” is already entered in the upper two digits. “**” indicating no input is displayed in the lower two digits. A numeric keypad is displayed on the right side of the screen, indicating that the pointer is at the position “5”.

  FIG. 245 (c) following FIG. 245 (b) shows that the player places the pointer on the “OK” icon on the numeric keypad and presses the confirm button on the setting operation unit. Is displayed.

  FIG. 245 (d) following FIG. 245 (c) shows a state in which “bar code issuance” and “data clear” become high in brightness and can be selected as a result of accepting the password input. In addition, a character image of “爺” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon. 772 is being executed. Also, a user level notification effect 775 is executed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the player's current arrival level is 250 and the title in the game is “General”. The user level notification effect 775 is also a warning notification that causes the player to confirm the user level and to be aware that the user mode is being set. As shown in FIG. 245 (d), the user level notification effect 775 hides a part of the alert notification effect 772 related to the operation explanation, and the player cannot visually recognize a part of the alert notification effect 772. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.

  FIG. 245 (d) shows a state in which the player is about to end the user menu effect 770 by operating the button on the setting operation unit and moving the pointer to the “end” icon displayed on the menu image. Show.

  In FIG. 245 (e) following FIG. 245 (d), the player operates the button of the setting operation unit, positions the pointer on the “end” icon displayed on the menu image, and confirms the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing, a state transitioned from the user menu image is shown. In the effect display area 208d shown in FIG. 245 (e), a character image of “爺” is displayed together with the user level notification effect 775, and “Be careful not to forget to take a two-dimensional barcode at the end of the game” A character string "" is displayed, and a warning alerting effect 780 regarding the operation explanation is executed for the player. As shown in FIG. 245 (e), the user level notification effect 775 partially hides the alerting notification effect 780 related to the operation explanation. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm a part of the alerting notification effect 780. In this way, while attracting the player's attention by the alerting notification, concealing the alerting notification by other alerts in a state where attention has been gathered, the player can be focused on other alerts. In addition, since the user mode is arbitrarily set by the player, it can be considered that the alerting notification effect 780 itself relating to the operation explanation for the player has been executed arbitrarily by the player. In the present embodiment, the alert notification effect 780 executed arbitrarily by the player is intentionally hidden by the user level notification effect 775.

  FIG. 245 (f) following FIG. 245 (e) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 and a special figure 1 variable game has started. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the effect 780 for notifying the operation explanation is ended and hidden, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are set in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The user level notification effect 775 is also executed during the special figure variable game, and also functions as a warning notification that alerts the player that the user mode is being set. The user level notification effect 775 is always executed while the user mode is set. The user level notification effect 775 allows the player to always receive a warning during the setting of the user mode that the user mode is being set and that the issue of the two-dimensional bar code should not be forgotten. it can.

  Note that it may be possible for the player to set whether or not to execute the alert notification, the execution timing, and the like. For example, the time may be set, and at least a part of the notification executed when an alarm function for notifying the player that the set time has been activated may be hidden by another notification.

  The user mode can be arbitrarily set by the player. During the user mode setting, a player may be given a profit different from the game profit. For example, special points are given, customizing functions are provided, special images and sounds can be selected, special titles are given, mission achievement lists can be viewed, games, etc. There is an advantage that cumulative data can be referred to. While the user mode is being set, the user level notification effect 775 that alerts the user mode to be set and the game data of this time will not be reflected unless a special operation is performed at the end of the user mode. A warning alerting effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is performed.

  Alert notification (for example, alert notification effect 772) regarding data that is very important for one player and not at all important for another player is provided by another alert (for example, user level notification effect 775). By inhibiting, it is possible to give different impressions depending on how the player perceives. Thus, when the other notification is performed, only a specific player can be focused on the other notification.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described with reference to FIG. First, an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (f).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (a), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed at a predetermined interval. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display 790, as shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (a). Thus, by displaying the second display 792 on the front surface of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 792. It may be less visible than the display 792 and the second display 792 may be easier to see than the first display 790. In addition, when the display is switched from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (a) to the state shown on the right side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the first display 790 is stopped while the first display 790 is stopped. It may be easier to see than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (a) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. In addition, when the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (a) to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may gradually move away from the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moved so as to overlap the second display 792, the first display 790 that is moving is less visible than the second display 792 that is stopped. When the display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the moving first display 790 may be easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  In addition, as shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (b), the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, for example, based on pressing of the chance button 136, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be darker as shown on the right side of FIG. 2094 (b). Thereby, when the display color of the second display 792 is changing, the second display 792 whose display color is changing is easier to see than the first display 790 where nothing is changing, After the change of the display color is completed, the second display 792 displayed on the back side of the first display 790 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (b) to the state shown on the left side. Thus, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed so as to be thin while the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped with each other, the second display 792 is superimposed on the front surface. In some cases, the first display 790 can be made easier to see and the second display 792 can be made harder to see.

  In addition, as shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (c), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the interval between the first display 790 and the second display 792 becomes D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (c). Become. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (c) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it easy to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  In addition, when switching from the state shown on the left side to the state shown on the right side in FIG. 246 or from the state shown on the right side to the state shown on the left side, focus attention on the moving display. Of the first display 790 and the second display 792, the display that is moved may be easier to see than the display that is not moved.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (d), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. For example, based on pressing of the chance button 136, as shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (d), the front-rear relationship between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed, The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. In this way, the second display 792 displayed on the back surface of the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the first display 790 so that the second display 792 is easier to see than the first display 790. The first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (d) to the state shown on the left side. By displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back surface of the second display 792 on the front surface of the second display 792, the first display 790 is made easier to see than the second display 792, and the second display 792 is displayed. The display 792 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped. When the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, the first display 790 is displayed on the right side of FIG. 246 (e) based on, for example, pressing the chance button 136. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed, so that the state in which the first display 790 is easier to see than the second display 792 can be maintained. There is a case.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (e) to the state shown on the left side. As described above, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed to make both the first display 790 and the second display 792 bright. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a state that is easier to see than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include a decorative design, a hold icon, a variation icon, a presentation display such as a character image or a background image, an error display, an operation request notification display, a tutorial display, and the like. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, error display and decorative symbol display), or the same type of display (for example, three decorative symbols). Or two of the hold icons). In addition, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a part or only a part of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . Thereby, one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be less visible (easy to see) than the other.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 246 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. It has become. As described above, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink color close to white is relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black. Becomes relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 246 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left side of FIG. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790 displayed in a light ink color close to white is relatively easy to see, and the second display 792 displayed in a gray close to black is relatively It becomes difficult to see. As described above, even when the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may change due to the change of the background color. is there.

  In addition, in FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (f), an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed is shown, but a display that is not related to the change of the visibility (for example, , A third indication) may be present. For example, when display A, display B, and display C are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, display A corresponds to the first display 790 and display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be. In this case, the visibility of the display C may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display A may be maintained while the visibility of display B and display C is changed. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display B may be maintained while changing the visibility of display C and display A.

  In addition, in FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (f), an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed is shown. There may be more than one. For example, display A and display B may correspond to the first display 790, and display C may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and B may correspond to the second display 792. Thereby, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (g), the background color of the hold icon display area 794 displaying the hold icons a1 to a4 is different from the other background colors, and the hold icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes. If the display shown in FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (e) is switched in the hold icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display changes in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, it is possible to keep the area to be held only within the hold icon display area 794.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of two displays changes depending on the brightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247 shows a color chart when the gradation levels of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation value and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example will be described in which the gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed overlapping the circular image are changed. The circular image and the square image are displayed so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the square coincide with each other. Further, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. In addition, the circular image is displayed on a layer in front of the square image. Further, the transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 247, the R value, G value, and B value of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and the R value, G value, and B value of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are made the same, and the gradation values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255. Similarly, the R value, G value, and B value of the square image are made the same, and the gradation values of the respective colors are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255.

  For example, as shown in the first row and first column of FIG. 247, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), since the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, they cannot be recognized separately. In addition, as shown in the eighth row and the eighth column in FIG. 247, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, so that they cannot be distinguished and recognized. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row and first column of FIG. 247, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white, and the square image is displayed in black. In addition, as shown in the first row and the eighth column of FIG. 247, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black, and the square image is displayed in white. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  In this way, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, if the difference in brightness between the two images is the same or small, it becomes difficult to identify the two images and the visibility of the two images is also reduced. be able to. Further, if the brightness difference between the two images is increased, the two images can be easily identified and the visibility of the two images can be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the brightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer of the two images displayed in a superimposed manner It is effective to put on. Further, in order to improve the visibility of the player's display, a hue difference or a saturation difference may be given to the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer. However, even if the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the previous layer are different in hue, the visibility of the two images decreases if the lightness and saturation are substantially the same. . For this reason, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to make a difference in brightness between the two images.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 247 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704, attention alert notification effect 722, right-handed notification effect 724, attention alert notification effect 750, attention alert notification effect 772, first Display 790) at least.

  The display means includes a second display (for example, an effect display, a tutorial display 709, a pre-reading notice notification effect 730, 740, an electric tulong open effect, an electric tulong open false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, a second Display 792) can be displayed at least,

  The display means displays a third display (for example, a ball shortage error display 706, a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the number of special figures held in the special symbol hold number display area 208f). At least displayable,

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,

  The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the display means,

At least a part of the third display has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player is focused on the display means in an attempt to recognize the notification content of the first display, and the player is concentrated on the game. May be possible. In addition, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be able to be directed to the second display. Further, since the third display is easy to confirm even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to confirm the third display while viewing the second display.

  The first display may be displayed at the first display position on the display means.

  The second display may be displayed at the second display position on the display means.

  The third display may be displayed at a third display position on the display means.

  The third display position may be a position with higher visibility than the first display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state.

-A part or all of the third display may be at least higher in visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the display related to the game is difficult to see due to the effect display, the player may be able to pay attention to the effect display. Even if the effect display is displayed, the player can easily confirm the third display, and thus it may be easier to confirm the third display while viewing the effect display.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than that in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be easier for the player to guess that.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible than one or more states including the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  When the display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state and is different from the first state and the second state. The visibility may be lower than the state.

  The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display in the first state, it may be possible to make the second display easy to attract the player. . In the first state, since the first display is displayed behind the second display, the player may be able to carefully watch the first display.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.

The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays other than the first display.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an error display.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, the player is encouraged to recognize the notification content of the error display, and the error display is carefully viewed by the player. There is a case that can be made. Moreover, since the visibility of the second display is higher than the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the second display. Also, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display even when an error is displayed.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display,

The third display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of a part of the first display including information that is highly important for the player is hidden and reduced by a part of the effect display, so that the line of sight of the game is directed to the display means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the third display having high importance for the player can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with peace of mind.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

  The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

  The third display may be a display that includes only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display may be a display that includes only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.

The third display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

  Operating means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the operation of the operation means is hidden by the effect display, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the effect display and play the game. You may be able to entertain. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned “position having at least higher visibility than the first display” means a position where the player can always confirm at least the third display when the second display is displayed. Thus, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. May be difficult to miss.

  The above “information highly important for a player” may include at least information related to payout of a game ball (for example, an error related to ball removal notification or payout means). Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing information related to the profit of the game.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information that is highly important to the player” is information related to the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is changing), the decorative symbol change display, the hold icon, the hitting notification. (Right-handed notification, notification of “turn steering wheel to the left”, etc.) may be included.

  Further, the “information that is highly important for the player” may include at least information related to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (such as an abnormality in the connection of the board and an abnormality in the position detection of the effect movable body).

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information highly important for the player” may include at least information related to fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include second display means (for example, a sub display device 808).

  The “display unit” may be a display unit of at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols. For example, if one winning symbol is won, even if it is non-electric support, the wing member 232a opens so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting port 232, and if the other winning symbol is won, the non-electric support The blade member 232a may be opened to the extent that a game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the case where the other winning symbol is won during non-electric support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the usual figure variable game may be executed in the electric Chu long opening effect.

  The embodiment and various modifications described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

In the present invention, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine, an arrangement ball game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, a smart ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are used in a circulating manner. The present invention may be applied to an enclosed game machine (for example, an enclosed pachinko machine). The applicable pachinko machine of the present invention may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball. And the ball payout may be executed by credit.
The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 2-1)
A first display means;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first display,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-1,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-3)
A game machine according to appendix 2-1 or 2-2,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-3,

The first region is provided at least in a position overlapping at least with the second region in the first state,
The first region is at least a part of the first display means,
The second region is at least a part of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-4,
The first display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-5,

  The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
The first display means is provided with at least a first display area,
The second display means is provided with at least a second display area,
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,

The third display area is provided at least in a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-7,

The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-8,
Comprising at least operating means provided at a position operable by the player;

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 3-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a third display;

  At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,

  The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the display means,

At least a part of the third display has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1 or 3-2,

  At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-3,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-4,
The first display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-5,

  The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display,

The third display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-6,
Comprising at least operating means provided at a position operable by the player;

The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine for giving an electronic prize or a medalless slot machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Moreover, the content described in one or a plurality of configurations among the plurality of configurations described in each of the embodiments of the first to eighth embodiments can be applied to other configurations, or the configurations of the first to eighth embodiments can be applied. By combining a plurality of configurations described in different embodiments, there are cases where the range of games can be further expanded.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 134 Launch handle 140 Ball lending button 142 Return button 144 Switching button 156 Main control board 160 First sub-control board 170 Discharge control board 174 Launch control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative design display device 208d Effect display area 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 224 Status indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp)
230 First Special Figure Start Port 232 Second Special View Start Port 2321 Blade Member 234 Variable Prize Opening Port 2341 Door Member 300 Main Control Unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout controller 708 RAM
804b Launch volume 804d Touch switch 804e Launch stop lever 804f Launch stop switch 804h Turbo switch 804g Turbo button 806 Dial 844 Launching device

Claims (11)

Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The operation means is a means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays for which a big hit is expected,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying one of the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying one of the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The second display is a display that can be displayed after the operation means is operated,
The second display displayed in a state where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the first display,
The third display displayed in a state where the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the first display,
The symbol variation display in which the second display is performed is finally displayed in a determined manner in the symbol variation display in which the second display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third display is performed and the second display is not performed. Configured to be easy,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
Light emitting means;
A transmission part;
With
The transmission part is a transmission part located in front of the display means,
The transmissive portion is a transmissive portion capable of displaying a pattern in a partial region of the transmissive portion (hereinafter referred to as “first region”) when the light emitting means emits light,
At least a portion of the first display may be overlapped by at least a portion of the first region;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The pattern may be displayed on the transmission part after the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3, Comprising:
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting an operation by the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display includes a display representing the appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 4, Comprising:
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The first display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
With movable means,
The movable means is means capable of moving from a first position to a second position;
The second position is a position in front of the display means;
When the first display is displayed on the display means in a state where the movable means is located at the second position, at least a part of the first display is displayed on the movable means. May be overlapped by,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 6,
The first display is not overlapped by the movable means located at the first position;
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 6 or claim 7,
The visibility of the first display is lower when the movable means is located at the second position than when the movable means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 6 thru | or 8, Comprising:
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 6 thru | or 8, Comprising:
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 6 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The movable means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display.
A game stand characterized by that.